Technical Publications: 2000, 2001 and 2002 by General Electric Company, Inc

Technical
Publications
Direction 46–018304
Rev. 11
HSA – Z Series, VX Preferred

General System Service Manual
Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999

2000, 2001 and 2002 by General Electric Company, Inc.
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM
Rev. 11 DIRECTION 46–018304
Notes:
ii
THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

WARNING IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE
SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.
CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

AVERTISSEMENT SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE
AUTRE LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE
LE FAIRE TRADUIRE.
NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À
DES DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN

ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.
WARNUNG
FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE
BENÖTIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE
ÜBERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN.
VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND
VERSTANDEN WURDE.
WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU
VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS
ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE
ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

AVISO SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN
IDIOMA QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE
OFRECER UN SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE
EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE
OTRA NATURALEZA.
iii
ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA

DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.
ATENÇÃO
SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE
TRADUÇÃO.
NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A
SEGURANÇA DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘
CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS, MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.
IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE

SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
AVVERTENZA
SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS
RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È
TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO
DOPO AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE
COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO.
NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO
ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
iv
IMPORTANT X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein
contained should be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment
before you attempt to place this equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical
Systems Group, will be glad to assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful
beam, no practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel
the operator to take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing
themselves or others to radiation.
It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted
with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in
NCRP Reports available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda,
Maryland 20814, and of the International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to
protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its
agents, and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of
the equipment.
Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment
shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit
shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment,
calibrations, and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the
accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In
performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s
electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of
third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on
the equipment.
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation “damage in
shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a
General Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be
reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the
contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for
damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 827–3449 / 8*285–3449 immediately after damage is
found. At this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill
number, item damaged and extent of damage.
Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section “S” of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.
6/17/94
v
NOTES
vi
REVISION HISTORY
REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

0 November 25, 1992 Initial release.
1 March 19, 1993 Addendum (Misc. clarifications)
2 October 13, 1993 Addendum (Misc. clarifications)
3 March 25, 1994 1.2 Software Release
4 March 17, 1995 Vx Preferred Configuration added, Miscellaneous clarifications
5 March, 1996 Miscellaneous clarifications; new Load From Cold procedure
6 June, 1998 ZE Release software features
7 December, 1999 CQA 998211 Corrected boot command in Chap 10, Sect 1–6.
8 August, 2000 CQA 1001234 Added Metric Hardware Cross–Reference;
Added new Brush Asm & Brush Block replacement procedures
9 October, 2001 CQA 1018180 Added Heurikon Power–Up Self–Test
10 September, 2002 Updated Anode and Cathode Inverter procedures.
11 June, 2004 CTCge77201 (corrected ROI CT values in 11-5, p147)
vii
Notes:
viii
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 – CUSTOMER OPERATING AND SERVICE MATERIALS . . . . . . 1
1–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1–2 Customer Catalogs Containing General Class Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1–3 Customer Documentation (General Class) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1–4 Customer Software (Class B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
CHAPTER 2 – CT DIAGNOSTICS AND TOOLS MENU DESCRIPTIONS . . . . 3

2–1 Menu Function Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2–2 Top Level Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2–3 Utilities Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2–4 Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2–5 CT Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2–6 Shell Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2–7 System Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
CHAPTER 3 – CT DIAGNOSTICS AND TOOLS PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . 9

3–1 System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3–2 Access Diagnostic Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3–3 Run Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3–3–1 Reset AP and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3–3–2 DAS Reset and Apf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3–3–3 SRU Host Computer Test (sbc0 Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3–3–4 Sttest0 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3–3–5 Scanning Hardware Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3–3–5–1 Exposure Backup Timer Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3–3–5–2 X–Ray Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3–4 Access the Unix Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3–4–1 Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3–4–2 EzLog Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3–4–3 Access Service Notepad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3–5 Access CT Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3–5–1 Main Tool Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3–5–2 Heat Soak and Seasoning Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3–5–3 Detector Slope Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3–6 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3–6–1 Function Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3–6–2 Process Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3–6–2–1 Scan File Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3–6–2–2 Function Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3–6–2–3 Pre–Processing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3–6–2–4 Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
CHAPTER 4 – TABLE/GANTRY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

4–1 Table/Gantry Hardware Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4–2 Input (PDU) Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4–3 Gantry Display Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4–4 Power Supply Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4–5 Encoder Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4–6 Axial Brake Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ix
4–7 Intercom Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

4–8 Alignment Light Position Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4–8–1 Internal Axial Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4–8–2 External Axial to Internal Axial Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4–8–3 Coronal Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4–8–4 Alignment Light Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4–9 Emergency Stop Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4–10 Table Tape Switch Check (Sys. w/gantry mounted table controls ONLY) 45
4–11 Access CT Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4–12 Mechanical Characterization Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4–12–1 Gantry Tilt Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4–12–2 Table Elevation Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4–12–3 Cradle Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4–12–4 Collimator Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4–12–4–1 Collimator Exerciser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4–12–5 Hardware Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4–12–6 Characterization Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4–12–7 View Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4–12–8 View Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
CHAPTER 5 – HV SUBSYSTEM MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

5–1 Access CT Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5–2 Generator Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5–2–1 kV Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5–2–2 mA Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5–2–3 Set Calseed Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5–2–4 Calibrate HV Tank Feedback Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5–2–4–1 Calibrate Anode and Cathode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5–2–4–2 Measure Total kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5–2–4–3 Verify kV Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5–2–5 Install New Tube Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5–2–6 Auto mA Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5–2–7 KV Rise and Fall Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5–2–8 Verify Internal Scan Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5–2–9 Install HV Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5–2–10 Remove the External HV Divider: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5–3 Tube Usage Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5–4 Change Tube Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
CHAPTER 6 – PDU MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

6–1 G/PDU Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6–2 Major Component Locations in GPDU 2113764 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6–3 Line Transformer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6–4 Major Component Locations in PDU 46–327106G1 (PDU with REM Box) 79
6–5 Ground Bus Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6–6 Line Transformer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
CHAPTER 7 – HOST COMPUTER/CONSOLE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

7–1 Option and Service Key Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7–2 Console and Plasma Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7–3 Plasma Defect Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7–4 Keyboard Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
x
7–5 Serial Port Loopback Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

7–6 Touch Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7–7 Knobs Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7–8 Trackball Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7–9 Plasma Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7–10 Autovoice Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7–11 SRU Host Computer Test (sbc0 Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
CHAPTER 8 – DAS MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

8–1 Verify X–Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
8–2 DDC Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
8–3 Data Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
CHAPTER 9 – SYSTEM ALIGNMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

9–1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
9–2 Plane Of Rotation (POR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
9–3 Beam On Window (BOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
9–4 Image Noise Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
9–5 Radial Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
9–6 Isocenter Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
9–7 Isocenter Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
9–8 Isocenter Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
9–9 Update Configuration Files With New Isovalues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
9–9–1 Update ScanHardware.cfg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
9–9–2 Update INFO File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
9–10 CBF and SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
9–10–1 CBF Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
CHAPTER 10 – ZE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM COLD AND

OC/SBC SYSTEM RECONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
10–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
10–1–1 OC/SBC System Reconfiguration Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
10–2 Tape Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
10–3 Initial Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
10–4 Save System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
10–4–1 Save System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
10–4–2 Save Suite Internet and Ethernet Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
10–4–3 Save Optical Disk Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
10–4–4 Save Magnetic Reel Tape Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
10–4–5 Save Window Width/Level Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
10–4–6 Shutdown the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
10–5 Pre–Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
10–6 Boot the Host Load From Cold (HLFC) Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
10–7 Partition and Label the OC disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
10–8 Load OS and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
10–9 Configure the OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
10–10 On Line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10–11 Select Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10–12 Configure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
10–13 Tip Into SBC (Review) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
10–13–1 Default Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
10–13–2 ‘tip’ Command Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
xi
10–13–3 Login as genesis on OC: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

10–14 Network boot the SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
10–15 Load SunOS and Applications on the SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
10–15–1 Login as root on SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
10–15–2 Load SunOS and CT Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
10–15–3 Exit tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10–16 Load Patch Tape or Perform Workarounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10–17 Start up the HiSpeed Advantage System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10–18 Restore System Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10–18–1 Restore Window Width/Level Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10–18–2 Restore System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10–19 Load Diagnostics (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
10–19–1 Load Proprietary Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
10–19–2 Add–A–Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
10–19–3 Load AP Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
10–19–4 Load OC Non–Proprietary Diagnostics (HNS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
10–19–5 Load SBC Non–Proprietary Diagnostics (HNS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
10–19–6 Load Host Proprietary Diagnostics (HPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
10–20 Network Configuration Information (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
10–20–1 Types of Network Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
10–20–2 Adoption of non–Genesis suites and hosts: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
10–20–3 Run setAdoption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
10–20–4 Adopt MR Signa, PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
10–20–5 Adopt ID/NET II Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
10–20–6 Adopt Genesis Hosts in Other Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
10–21 Configure systems with pre–installed software (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . 132
10–22 LFC on OC only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
10–23 LFC on SBC only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
10–24 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
10–25 Shutdown System Applications and Start Reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
10–26 Run reconfig on the SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
10–27 Select Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
10–27–1 On Line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
10–28 System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
10–28–1 Change the Suite ID (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
10–28–2 Change the Hospital Name (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10–28–3 Reset the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10–28–4 Change the Patient Exam number (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10–28–5 Replace the High Speed Disk on the SBC (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10–29 System Formats & Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10–29–1 Change the Timezone (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10–29–2 Change the Time Format, Date Format, or Date Separator (OC only) . . . 138
10–29–3 Change the Doctor’s Title (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10–29–4 Change the Units for Patient Weight (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10–29–5 Change the Optical Disk or Reel Tape number (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10–30 Hardware Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
10–30–1 Change the Camera Configuration (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
10–30–2 Change the IP Refresh Rate (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
10–30–3 Change the Video Tape Interface (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
10–30–4 Add/Remove a Printer (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
10–30–5 Add New Tube Information (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
10–30–6 Change the E–DAS type (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
10–31 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
xii
10–31–1 Change the Internet Addresses (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

10–31–2 Change the Suite Configuration (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
10–31–3 Change the ACRNEMA Address (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
10–31–4 Change the Primary Archive Node (PAN) (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
10–31–5 Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on the OC (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . 142
10–31–5–1 To add an ethernet board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10–31–5–2 To remove an ethernet board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10–31–6 Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on an IC in the Suite (OC only) . . 143
10–31–6–1 To add an ethernet board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10–31–6–2 To remove an ethernet board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10–32 Change the System Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10–33 Add/Remove Hosts for Image Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
CHAPTER 11 – IMAGE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

11–1 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
11–2 Q–CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
11–3 Crosstalk Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
11–4 Alpha Vector Cal Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
11–5 Phantom Calibration CT# Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11–6 Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
CHAPTER 12 – SWITCHES, LEDS, AND JUMPER SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

12–1 46–264370G1 Cradle Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
12–1–1 Cradle Amplifier Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
12–1–2 Cradle Amplifier Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
12–1–3 Cradle Amplifier Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
12–2 Heurikon CPU Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
12–2–1 Heurikon CPU Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
12–2–1–1 Indicator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
12–2–1–2 User LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
12–2–2 Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
12–2–3 Heurikon CPU Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
12–2–4 Configuration DIP Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
12–2–5 Heurikon Power–Up Self–Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
12–3 46–288170G1 Elevation/Tilt Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
12–3–1 Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
12–3–2 Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
12–3–3 Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
12–4 46–288856G1 Collimator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
12–4–1 Collimator Board Test Points (46–288856G1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
12–4–2 Collimator Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
12–4–3 Collimator Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
12–5 46–321276G1 Collimator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
12–5–1 Collimator Board Test Points (46–321276G1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
12–5–2 Collimator Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
12–6 46–288858G1 CTVRC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
12–6–1 CTVRC Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
12–6–2 CTVRC Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
12–6–3 CTVRC Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
12–7 46–288886G1 mA Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
12–7–1 mA Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
12–7–2 mA Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
xiii
12–8 46–321064G1 KV Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

12–8–1 KV Control Board 46–321064G1 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
12–8–2 KV Control Board 46–321064G1 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
12–8–3 KV Control Board 46–321064G1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
12–9 46–321198G1 KV Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
12–9–1 KV Control Board 46–321198G1 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
12–9–2 KV Control Board 46–321198G1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
12–9–3 KV Control Board 46–321198G1 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
12–9–4 KV Control Board 46–321198G1 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
12–10 46–288512G1 Gentry I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
12–10–1 Gentry I/O Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
12–10–2 Gentry I/O Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
12–10–3 Gentry I/O Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
12–11 46–264806G1Axial Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
12–11–1 Axial Control Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
12–11–2 Axial Control Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
12–11–3 Axial Control Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
12–12 46–297475G1 SCOM Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
12–12–1 SCOM Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
12–12–2 SCOM Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
12–12–3 SCOM Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
12–13 46–288854G1 RCOM Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
12–13–1 RCOM Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
12–13–2 RCOM Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
12–13–3 RCOM Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
12–14 46–288778G1 Rot. Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
12–14–1 Rotating Terminator Board 46–288778G1 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
12–14–2 Rotating Terminator Board 46–288778G1 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
12–14–3 Rotating Terminator Board 46–288778G1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
12–14–4 Rotating Terminator Board 46–288778G1 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
12–15 46–321054G1 Rot. Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
12–15–1 Rotating Terminator Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
12–15–2 Rotating Terminator Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
12–15–3 Rotating Terminator Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
12–15–4 Rotating Terminator Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
12–16 46–288776G1 Rot. Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
12–16–1 Rotating Buffer Board 46–288776G1 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
12–16–2 Rotating Buffer Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
12–16–3 Rotating Buffer Board 46–288776G1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
12–16–4 Rotating Buffer Board 46–288776G1 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
12–17 46–288774G1 Stat. Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
12–17–1 Stationary Terminator Board 46–288774G1 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
12–17–2 Stationary Terminator Board (Old) Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
12–17–3 Stationary Terminator Board (OLD) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
12–17–4 Stationary Terminator Board (OLD) Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
12–18 46–321058G1 Rot. Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
12–18–1 Rotating Buffer Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
12–18–2 Rotating Buffer Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
12–18–3 Rotating Buffer Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
12–18–4 Rotating Buffer Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
12–19 46–321052G1 Stat. Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
12–19–1 Stationary Terminator Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
12–19–2 Stationary Terminator Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
xiv
12–19–3 Stationary Terminator Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

12–19–4 Stationary Terminator Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
12–20 46–288772G1 Stat. Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
12–20–1 Stationary Buffer Board 46–288772G1 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
12–20–2 Stationary Buffer Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
12–20–3 Stationary Buffer Board 46–288772G1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
12–20–4 Stationary Buffer Board 46–288772G1 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
12–21 46–321056G1 Stationary Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
12–21–1 Stationary Buffer Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
12–21–2 Stationary Buffer Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
12–21–3 Stationary Buffer Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
12–21–4 Stationary Buffer Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
12–22 46–264756G1 Console Autovoice Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
12–22–1 Console Autovoice Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
12–22–2 Console Autovoice Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
12–22–3 Console Autovoice Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
12–23 46–264888G1 Relay Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
12–23–1 Relay Control Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
12–23–2 Relay Control Board LEDS and Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
12–23–3 Relay Control Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
12–24 46–264884G1 DCRGS Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
12–24–1 DCRGS Control Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
12–24–2 DCRGS Control Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
12–24–3 DCRGS Control Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
12–25 SCR Firing Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
12–25–1 SCR Firing Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
12–25–2 SCR Firing Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
12–25–3 SCR Firing Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
12–26 46–264368G1 ETC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
12–26–1 ETC Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
12–26–2 ETC Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
12–26–3 ETC Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
12–27 Westamp Servo Amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
12–27–1 Westamp Servo Amp Internal Test Points (Non–Accessible) . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
12–27–2 Westamp Servo Amp LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
12–27–3 Westamp Servo Amp Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12–28 Axial Servo Amp Control Board – Allen Bradley Servo Amp . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12–28–1 Axial Servo Amp Control Board LEDs–Allen Bradley Servo Amp . . . . . . . . 200
12–28–2 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12–28–3 Switches Axial Servo Amp Control Board–AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12–29 Axial Interface Board–AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12–29–1 Axial Interface Board–AB Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12–29–2 Axial Interface Board–AB LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12–29–3 Axial Interface Board–AB Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12–30 Zeus Remote Intercom X Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
12–30–1 Zeus Remote Intercom X Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
12–30–2 Zeus Remote Intercom X Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
12–30–3 Zeus Remote Intercom X Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
12–31 Interface Measurement Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12–31–1 Interface Measurement Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12–31–2 Interface Measurement Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
12–31–3 Interface Measurement Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
12–32 1/2 Mag Tape Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
xv
12–33 LM02 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

12–33–1 LMO2 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
12–33–2 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
12–33–3 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
12–33–4 Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
12–34 FEP Board 46–327036G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
12–34–1 FEP Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
12–34–2 FEP Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
12–34–3 FEP Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
12–34–4 FEP Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
12–35 Ethernet Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
12–35–1 Ethernet Transceiver Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
12–35–2 Ethernet Transceiver LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
12–35–3 Ethernet Transceiver Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
12–36 AP120 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
12–36–1 AP120 Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
12–36–2 AP120 Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
12–36–3 AP120 Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
12–36–4 Internal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
12–36–5 AP120 Board Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
12–36–6 AP120 Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
12–37 BPP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
12–37–1 BPP Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
12–37–2 BPP Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
12–37–3 BPP Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
12–37–4 BPP Board Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
12–37–5 BPP Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
12–38 CLA Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
12–38–1 CLA Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
12–38–2 CLA Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
12–38–3 CLA Board Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
12–39 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
12–39–1 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
12–39–2 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
12–39–4 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
12–39–5 EPROM Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
12–39–6 View and Change EPROM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
12–39–7 SBC MVME167 EPROM Setup Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
12–39–8 View and Change the Self Test Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
12–39–9 MVME167 (SBC Board) Masked Self Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
12–39–10 View and Change the Network I/O Teach (NIOT) Configurations . . . . . . . . 225
12–39–11 NIOT Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
12–39–12 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
12–40 Motorola MVME166 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
12–40–1 Motorola MVME166 Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
12–41 Scan Chassis Backplane Jumpers (Z.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
12–42 RP 1.x Scan Chassis Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
12–42–1 Backplane Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
12–42–2 Backplane LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
12–42–3 Backplane Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
12–42–4 Backplane Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
12–42–5 Backplane Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
xvi
12–43 RP & RP–S Scan Chassis Power Supply Jumpers and Settings . . . . . . . . 232
12–44 3/60 SBC Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
12–45 Check SBC EEPROM Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
12–45–1 Display SBC EEPROM Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
12–46 HSDC Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
12–46–1 HSDC Controller Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
12–46–2 HSDC Controller Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
12–46–3 HSDC Controller Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
12–46–5 HSDC Controller Board Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
12–46–6 HSDC Controller Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
12–47 ST3390 LSD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
12–47–1 ST3390 LSD Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
12–47–2 ST3390 LSD LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
12–47–3 ST3390 LSD Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
12–47–5 ST3390 LSD Drive Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
12–47–6 ST3390 LSD Drive Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
12–48 IPI High Speed Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
12–48–1 High Speed Disk Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
12–48–2 High Speed Disk LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
12–48–3 High Speed Disk Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
12–48–4 High Speed Disk LEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
12–48–6 High Speed Disk Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
12–48–7 High Speed Disk Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
12–48–8 I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
12–48–9 Control Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
12–49 Maxi–HIB Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
12–50 Scan Chassis Power Supply Jumpers and Settings Zx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
12–51 Scan Chassis Power Supply Jumpers and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
12–52 AP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
12–52–1 HCHIOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
12–52–2 DASIOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
12–52–3 IOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
12–53 SRU Sabre 1230 Disk Drive I/O Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
CHAPTER 13 – REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

13–1 Torque Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
13–2 Metric Hardware Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
13–3 Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
13–3–1 46–282067P54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
13–3–2 46–282067P37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
13–3–3 46–307090P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
13–3–4 46–282067P38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
13–3–5 46–282067P54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
13–3–6 46–269601P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
13–3–7 46–307090P24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
13–3–8 46–307636G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
13–3–9 46–328012P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
13–3–10 2101566 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
13–3–11 46–301975P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
xvii
13–3–12 46–269587P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

13–3–13 46–269587P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
13–3–14 46–282067P31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
13–3–15 46–306519P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
13–3–16 46–306519P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
13–3–17 46–307090P12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
13–3–18 46–307090P23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
13–3–19 46–282067P34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
13–3–20 46–307090P29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
13–3–21 46–321280G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
13–3–22 46–307090P17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
13–3–23 46–282067P35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
13–3–24 46–282067P36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
13–3–25 46–307090P29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
13–3–26 46–515270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
13–3–27 CG29–515270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
13–3–28 46–320144G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
13–3–29 46–307575P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
13–3–30 46–307575P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
13–3–31 46–307090P31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
13–3–32 46–307681P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
13–3–33 46–269587P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
13–3–34 46–301976P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
13–3–35 46–296604P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
13–3–36 46–282067P53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
13–3–37 46–307090P30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
13–3–38 46–296604P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
13–3–39 46–301975P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
13–3–40 46–301976P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
13–4 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
13–4–1 46–287766P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
13–4–2 46–287394P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
13–4–3 46–282921P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
13–4–4 46–287429P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
13–4–5 46–282885P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
13–4–6 46–264756G5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
13–4–7 46–271382P6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
13–4–8 46–271382P15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
13–4–9 46–271382P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
13–4–10 46–271382P26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
13–4–11 46–301520P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
13–4–12 46–307619P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
13–4–13 46–287759P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
13–4–14 46–301046P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
13–4–15 46–282986P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
13–4–16 46–264380G7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
13–4–17 46–282884P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
13–4–18 46–317878G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
13–4–19 46–264508G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
13–4–20 46–320682G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
13–4–21 46–282884P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
13–4–22 46–301195G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
13–4–23 46–264510G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
xviii
13–4–24 2119588 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

13–4–25 46–282936P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
13–4–26 46–288872G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
13–5 Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
13–5–1 46–296701P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
13–5–2 46–183027P129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
13–5–3 46–183027P111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
13–5–4 45561210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
13–5–5 45435960 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
13–5–6 46–297703P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
13–5–7 45554264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
13–5–8 46–297875P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
13–5–9 46–264806G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
13–5–10 46–296158P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
13–5–11 46–296320G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
13–5–12 46–296854P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
13–5–13 46–296157P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
13–5–14 46–186462G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
13–5–15 46–264802G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
13–5–16 46–183027P112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
13–5–17 46–183027P94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
13–5–18 46–296564G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
13–5–19 46–296948G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
13–5–20 46–183027P104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
13–5–21 46–296943G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
13–5–22 46–296947G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
13–5–23 46–296942G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
13–5–24 46–296949G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
13–5–25 46–183027P103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
13–5–26 46–266838G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
13–5–27 46–183027P89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
13–5–28 53214P40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
13–5–29 45561211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
13–5–30 45435962 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
13–5–31 46–297703P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
13–5–32 45554264 – 2100553 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
13–5–33 46–296300G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
13–5–34 46–288856G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
13–5–35 46–321276G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
13–5–36 46–321276G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
13–5–37 46–251198P37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
13–5–38 46–296885P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
13–5–39 46–296209P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
13–5–40 46–288858G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
13–5–41 45435961 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
13–5–42 46–136343P12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
13–5–43 46–251198P30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
13–5–44 46–251198P26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
13–5–45 46–297104P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
13–5–46 46–188067P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
13–5–47 46–297301G3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
13–5–48 46–327058G3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
13–5–49 46–297301G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
xix
13–5–50 46–327058G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

13–5–51 46–297301G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
13–5–52 46–327058G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
13–5–53 46–198495P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
13–5–54 46–296058G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
13–5–55 46–136334P23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
13–5–56 46–220234P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
13–5–57 46–220234P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
13–5–58 46–183027P120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
13–5–59 46–183027P128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
13–5–60 46–297335P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
13–5–61 46–297335P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
13–5–62 46–241601G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
13–5–63 46–288938G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
13–5–64 46–297488P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
13–5–65 46–170021P79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
13–5–66 46–170021P52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
13–5–67 46–170021P52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
13–5–68 46–170021P30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
13–5–69 46–170021P52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
13–5–70 46–170021P52 46–170021P74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
13–5–71 46–170021P15, 46–170021P52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
13–5–72 46–170021P15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
13–5–73 46–170021P74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
13–5–74 46–296868G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
13–5–75 46–296938G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
13–5–76 46–296898G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
13–5–77 46–296937G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
13–5–78 46–327207G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
13–5–79 46–327212G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
13–5–80 46–296341G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
13–5–80–1 Remove Gantry Display: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
13–5–80–2 Installation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
13–5–81 46–264958G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
13–5–82 46–264896G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
13–5–83 45435967 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
13–5–84 46–278120P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
13–5–85 46–297428P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
13–5–86 46–296377P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
13–5–87 46–296377P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
13–5–88 46–195120G16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
13–5–89 46–195120G16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
13–5–90 46–288512G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
13–5–91 46–296516G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
13–5–92 46–288766G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
13–5–93 54358P25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
13–5–94 54367P50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
13–5–95 54358P18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
13–5–96 54358P25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
13–5–97 54367P50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
13–5–98 54358P18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
13–5–99 46–321064G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
13–5–100 46–321198G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
xx
13–5–101 46–196464P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

13–5–102 46–327202G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
13–5–103 46–288886G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
13–5–104 46–296263P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
13–5–105 46–296080G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
13–5–106 46–264660G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
13–5–107 46–297603G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
13–5–108 46–296317P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
13–5–109 46–296317P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
13–5–110 46–297837G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
13–5–111 S/A Pwr Brush Asm 2238140–2, High 2257517, Low 2257520 Replacement . . . . . . .
377
13–5–112 46–183027P95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
13–5–113 46–183027P91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
13–5–114 46–288308G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
13–5–115 46–321058G1 46–264698G1 2253794 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
13–5–116 46–321054G1 46–264702G1 2238323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
13–5–117 46–321056G1 46–264696G1 2253794 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
13–5–118 46–321052G1 46–264700G1 2238323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
13–5–119 46–297474G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
13–5–120 46–229342P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
13–5–121 46–288938G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
13–5–122 46–297488P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
13–5–123 46–297445P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
13–5–124 46–327201G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
13–5–125 46–297291G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
13–5–126 2100664 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
13–5–127 46–321246G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
13–5–128 46–327086G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
13–5–129 46–264832P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
13–5–130 46–296993G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
13–5–131 2101967 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
13–5–131–1 Remove Scan Window: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
13–5–131–2 Install Scan Window: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
13–5–132 46–297475G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
13–5–133 46–296869G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
13–5–134 46–297839G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
13–5–135 S/A Signal Brush Block 2238141–2 or Signal Brush Module 2254362 . . . . 390
13–5–136 46–297840G1 46–296001G1 2239006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
13–5–137 Handling and Removal of Slip Ring Brush Debris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
13–5–138 46–241600G806 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
13–5–139 46–241600G6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
13–5–140 46–313423G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
13–5–141 46–297092G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
13–5–142 46–296748G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
13–5–143 46–296664P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
13–5–144 46–136343P12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
13–5–145 46–221880P24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
13–5–146 46–287264P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
13–5–147 46–296145P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
13–5–148 46–296363P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
13–5–149 46–297036G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
13–5–150 46–183027P90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
xxi
13–5–151 46–296936G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

13–5–152 46–220247P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
13–5–153 46–297738P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
13–5–154 46–297797G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
13–5–155 46–296870G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
13–5–156 46–297396P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
13–5–157 46–297460P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
13–5–158 46–309500G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
13–5–158–1 Tube Failure Codes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
13–5–158–2 Remove Old Tube: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
13–5–158–3 Install New Tube: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
13–5–158–4 Shutdown the system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
13–5–158–5 Run Changetube: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
13–5–158–6 ALIGNMENTS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
13–5–158–7 GENERATOR CALIBRATIONS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
13–5–158–8 Exposure Time Accuracy: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
13–5–158–9 Scout Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
13–5–158–10Axial and Helical Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
13–5–158–11CALS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
13–5–158–12Thermal Test: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
13–6 PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
13–6–1 46–170026P14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
13–6–2 46–170026P17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
13–6–3 46–296221P15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
13–6–4 46–170021P85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
13–6–5 46–313346P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
13–6–6 46–170021P44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
13–6–7 46–170021P96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
13–6–8 46–170021P86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
13–6–9 46–170021P84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
13–6–10 45433453 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
13–6–11 46–297910P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
13–6–12 46–288748G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
13–6–13 54261P92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
13–6–14 46–229598P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
13–6–15 53214P33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
13–6–16 46–296409P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
13–6–17 46–221905P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
13–6–18 46–221905P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
13–6–19 46–221905P21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
13–6–20 46–221905P32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
13–6–21 46–221905P32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
13–6–22 46–221905P35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
13–6–23 46–327109G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
13–6–24 46–296206G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
13–6–25 46–170021P29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
13–6–26 46–297069P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
13–6–27 46–296138P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
13–6–28 46–297456P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
13–6–29 45433455 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
13–6–30 45433770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
13–6–31 45433754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
13–6–32 46–296407G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
xxii
13–6–33 46–297803P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

13–6–34 46–203134P5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
13–6–35 46–170021P14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
13–6–36 54367P40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
13–6–37 46–229598P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
13–6–38 46–297479G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
13–6–39 46–297039G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
13–6–40 46–297041G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
13–6–41 46–296127P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
13–6–42 46–327154P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
13–6–43 46–229342P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
13–6–44 46–229342P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
13–6–45 46–297594G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
13–6–46 46–222200P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
13–6–47 45433456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
13–6–48 46–264888G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
13–6–49 46–278446P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
13–6–50 46–186852P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
13–6–51 46–327087P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
13–6–52 46–194361P17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
13–6–53 53396P01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
13–6–54 46–296415P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
13–6–55 46–221454P77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
13–6–56 45433454 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
13–6–57 46–297574G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
13–6–58 46–170021P74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
13–6–59 46–170021P94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
13–6–60 46–296136P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
13–7 SRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
13–7–1 46–313053G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
13–7–2 46–241971P26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
13–7–3 46–241971P72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
13–7–4 46–241971P68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
13–7–5 46–296817P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
13–7–6 46–296816P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
13–7–7 46–297711G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
13–7–8 46–296451G3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
13–7–9 46–296454G5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
13–7–10 46–296862G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
13–7–11 46–237686G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
13–7–12 46–297096G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
13–7–13 46–313027G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
13–7–14 46–296532P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
13–7–15 46–313030G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
13–7–15–1 Remove Scan Chassis Power: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
13–7–15–2 Remove high speed disk drive: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
13–7–16 46–296528G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
13–7–17 46–264834P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
13–7–17–2 Remove Maxi–HIB Board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
13–7–17–3 Install Board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
13–7–18 Maxi–HIB Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
13–7–19 46–264890G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
xxiii
13–7–19–1 Remove Board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

13–7–19–2 Install Board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
13–7–20 46–297673G4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
13–7–21 46–278722G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
13–7–22 46–296841G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
13–7–23 46–296840G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
13–7–24 46–297098G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
13–7–25 46–297097G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
13–7–26 46–297043G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
13–7–27 46–297043G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
13–7–28 46–264832P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
13–7–28–1 Remove Board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
13–7–28–2 Install Board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
13–7–29 SBC Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
13–7–30 46–296799G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
13–7–31 46–297244G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
13–7–32 46–264830G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
13–7–32–2 Remove Backplane: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
13–7–32–3 At the back of the scan chassis: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
13–7–32–4 Install Backplane: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
13–7–33 Scan Chassis Backplane Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
13–7–34 46–229909P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
13–7–34–1 Remove Fan: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
13–7–34–2 Replace Fan: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
13–7–35 46–221328P13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
13–7–36 46–296183P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
13–7–36–2 Remove power supply: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
13–7–36–3 Install new power supply: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
13–7–37 Scan Chassis Power Supply Jumpers and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
13–7–38 46–296186P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
13–7–38–2 Remove power supply: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
13–7–38–3 Install new power supply: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
13–7–39 Scan Chassis Power Supply Jumpers and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
13–7–40 46–297857G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
13–7–40–2 Remove disk drive: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
13–7–40–3 Install new disk drive: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
13–7–41 46–237328P67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
13–7–42 46–237328P69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
13–7–43 46–241971P12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
13–7–44 46–241971P10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
13–7–45 46–241971P21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
13–7–46 46–237328P54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
13–7–47 46–241971P14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
13–7–48 46–237328P53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
13–7–49 46–241971P11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
13–7–50 46–297123G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
13–7–51 46–237328P57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
13–7–52 46–237328P58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
13–7–53 46–237328P62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
xxiv
13–7–54 46–278330P11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

13–7–55 46–278330P9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
13–7–56 AP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
13–7–57 46–237328P55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
13–7–58 SRU Disk Drive I/O Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
13–7–59 46–278330P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
13–7–60 46–278330P7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
13–7–61 46–278330P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
13–7–62 46–278330P6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
13–7–63 46–266700P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
13–7–63–2 Remove disk drive: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
13–7–63–3 Install new disk drive: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
13–7–64 46–297694G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
13–7–64–1 Remove Board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
13–7–64–2 Replace Board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
13–7–65 SRU Disk Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
13–7–66 SRU Disk Drive I/O Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
13–8 Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
13–8–1 46–208718P15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
13–8–2 46–208718P12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
13–8–3 46–208718P5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
13–8–4 46–208718P8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
13–8–5 46–208718P9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
13–8–6 46–208718P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
13–8–7 46–208718P11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
13–8–8 46–297093P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
13–8–9 46–296592P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
13–8–10 46–296561P10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
13–8–11 2100671 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
13–8–12 46–296561P11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
13–8–13 2103043 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
13–8–14 46–296561P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
13–8–15 46–221532P18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
13–8–16 46–170047P7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
13–8–17 46–297332P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
13–8–18 46–297350P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
13–8–19 46–221597P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
13–8–20 46–297253P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
13–8–21 46–297576P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
13–8–22 46–208580P18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
13–8–23 46–208580P19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
13–8–24 46–296232G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
13–8–25 46–297338P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
13–8–26 46–297648P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
13–8–27 46–297722P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
13–8–28 46–297721P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
13–8–29 46–297420G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
13–8–30 46–264370G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
13–8–31 46–296235G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
13–8–32 46–296594P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
13–8–33 46–288226G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
13–8–34 46–220277P11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
xxv
13–8–35 46–220277P15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

13–8–36 46–297432P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
13–8–37 46–288410G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
13–8–38 46–278446P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
13–8–39 46–296633G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
13–8–40 46–288170G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
13–8–41 46–296854P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
13–8–42 46–264368G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
13–8–43 46–296788G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
13–8–44 46–229455P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
13–8–45 46–297664P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
13–8–46 46–297896G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
13–8–47 46–297895G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
13–8–48 46–296129G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
13–8–49 46–296821P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
13–8–50 46–170021P15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
13–8–51 46–296891P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
13–8–52 46–297155G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
13–8–53 46–297155G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
13–8–54 46–218193P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
13–8–55 46–297448P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
13–8–56 46–297088G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
13–8–57 46–296377P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
13–8–58 46–297678P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
13–8–59 46–296233G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
13–8–60 46–136334P23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
13–8–61 46–297687P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
13–8–62 46–136334P57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
13–8–63 46–297805G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
13–8–64 46–297431G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
13–8–65 46–221914P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
13–8–66 46–327096G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
13–8–67 46–296909G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
13–8–68 46–296827P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
13–8–69 46–297698P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
13–8–70 46–170012P67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
13–8–71 46–170012P81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
13–8–72 46–296234G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
13–8–73 46–136334P23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
13–8–74 46–278310P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
13–8–75 46–296991G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
13–8–76 46–278575P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
13–8–77 46–297436P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
13–8–78 46–297552P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
13–8–79 46–297036G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
13–8–80 46–296791G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
13–8–81 46–296433G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
13–8–82 46–297117G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
13–8–83 46–296317P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
13–8–84 46–297430G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
13–8–85 46–170053P11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
13–8–86 46–170053P13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
13–8–87 46–327096G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
xxvi
13–8–88 46–296909G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

13–8–89 46–296827P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
13–8–90 46–297894G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
13–8–91 46–264832P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
13–8–92 46–297059G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
13–8–93 46–170024P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
13–8–94 46–296584P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
13–8–95 46–296578P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
13–8–96 46–296583P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
13–8–97 46–296577P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
13–8–98 46–297118G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
13–8–99 46–296972G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
13–8–100 46–296946P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
13–8–101 46–296771P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
13–8–102 46–170490P20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
13–8–103 46–170490P54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
13–8–104 46–327097G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
13–8–105 46–327097G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
13–8–106 46–296316P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
13–8–107 46–297698P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
13–8–108 46–296770P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
CHAPTER A1 – APPENDIX: INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

A1–1 Install Gantry and Table without steel baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
A1–1–1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
A1–1–2 Floor And Room Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
A1–1–3 Pre–Installation Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
A1–2 Installation Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
A1–3 Required Common Tools and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
A1–4 Detailed Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
A1–4–1 Establish the Room Layout: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
A1–4–2 Drill the First Gantry Anchor Hole: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
A1–4–3 Position the Gantry: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
A1–4–4 Level the Gantry: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
A1–4–5 Position the Table: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
A1–4–6 Level the Table: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
A1–4–7 Tighten the Lock Rings: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
A1–4–8 Drill the Remaining Anchor Holes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
A1–4–9 Use the Redundant Anchor Hole Locations: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
A1–4–10 Install the Anchors: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
A1–4–11 Assemble and Install Gantry Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
A1–4–12 Install Gantry Mounted Table Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
A1–4–13 Install Table Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
A1–5 Install Gantry and Table with steel baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
A1–5–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
A1–5–2 Gantry Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
A1–5–2–1 Floor And Room Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
A1–5–3 Floor And Room Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
A1–5–4 Gantry Stripdown for Restricted Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
A1–5–5 GANTRY REAR SHROUD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
A1–5–6 Install Main Table and Raceway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
A1–6 PDU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
xxvii
A1–6–1 Position Power Distribution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

A1–6–2 Position And Mount REM Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
A1–7 Install Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
A1–7–1 Position Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
A1–7–2 Position Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
A1–8 Position the SRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
A1–9 Position the Nine Track MTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
A1–9–1 Board Setup and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
A1–10 Mount And Level Phantom Holder to the Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
A2–11 System Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
A2–11–1 HiSpeed Advantage Vx Preferred Ground Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
A2–11–2 HiSpeed Advantage Ground Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
A1–12 HSA with Global PDU – Power, Ground, Interconnect Cable Installation 541
A1–12–1 Cable Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
A1–12–2 Cable Color Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
A1–12–3 OC Console and Computer Power and Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . 541
A1–12–4 OC Computer Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
A1–12–5 OC Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
A1–12–6 OC Console I/O Panel and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
A1–12–7 OC Computer Panel and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
A1–12–8 SCU Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
A1–12–9 Gantry Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
A1–12–10 Table and A7 Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
A1–12–11 PM Connections for Global PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
A1–13 System Cable Check Lists for HSA Z.x Configurations w/Global PDU . . . 559
A1–13–1 Contractor/Customer Supplied Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
A1–13–2 System Cables for System Catalog B7998RB (GPDU 2113764–34) . . . . . 560
A1–13–3 System Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
A1–14 HSA w/Original PDU & REM Box – Pwr, Gnd, Cable Installation . . . . . . . . 565
A1–14–1 Cable Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
A1–14–2 Cable Color Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
A1–14–3 OC/IC Console and Computer Power and Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . 565
A1–14–4 OC/IC Computer Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
A1–14–5 OC/IC Console I/O Panel and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
A1–14–6 OC/IC Computer Panel and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
A1–14–7 SRU Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
A1–14–8 Gantry Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
A1–14–9 Table and A7 Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
A1–14–10 PDU Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
A1–14–11 Lasercam Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
A1–14–12 Nine Track I/O Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
A1–15 System Cable Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
A1–15–1 System Cable Check Lists for HSA Z.x Configurations without Global PDU 585
A1–15–2 Contractor Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
A1–15–3 System Cables for 15 Foot Cable Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
A1–15–4 System Cables For 40 foot Cable Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
A1–15–5 System Cables for 80 Foot Cable Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
A1–15–6 HiSpeed Advantage System Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
A1–15–7 System Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
A1–15–8 Option Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
A1–16 Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
A1–16–1 Install Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
A1–16–2 Verify Installed Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
xxviii
CHAPTER B1 – APPENDIX: TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

B1–1 Recommended Torque Wrench Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
B1–2 General Torque Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
B1–3 Torque Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
B1–4 Torque Wrench Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
xxix
This Page Left Intentionally Blank
xxx
CHAPTER 1 – CUSTOMER OPERATING AND SERVICE MATERIALS
1–1 Introduction
This section lists the “Customer Operating and Service Material” which is shipped with the
various CT HiSpeed Advantage catalogs.
1–2 Customer Catalogs Containing General Class Materials

General Class documentation and software are shipped with the catalogs described below.
» B7996A CT HiSpeed Advantage Standard System
» B7998R CT HiSpeed Advantage VX System
» B7996KA CT HiSpeed Advantage Upgrade Kit
» B7996B CT HiSpeed Advantage Preinstallation Kit
» B7998RB CT HiSpeed Advantage VX Preferred System
1–3 Customer Documentation (General Class)

The following is the parts list of General Class documentation. The respective catalogs, with
which the documentation is shipped, are depicted parenthetically. For actual catalog
numbers, refer to section 1–1.
» 46–018300 Operator’s Manual (standard system, VX and kit)

» 46–018301 Preinstallation Manual (preinstallation kit, only)
» 46–018302 Safety Guidelines Manual (standard system, VX and kit)
» 46–018303 Dwgs. & Schem. Manual (standard system, VX and kit)
» 46–018304 System Manual (standard system, VX and kit)
» 46–018307 Isolation Transformer Install Manual (transformer, only)
» 46–018308 Safety Video Tape (standard system, VX and kit)
» 46–018309 Applications Tips and Precautions (standard system & kit)
» 46–018314 Upgrade Manual (kit)
» 46–018315 Service Alerts Manual (standard system, VX and kit)
» 46–018316 FRU Manual (standard system, VX and kit)
» 46–018319 VX Operator’s Manual (VX)
» 46–018320 VX Applications Tips and Precautions Manual (VX)
» 46–002021 Image Monitor Service Manual
» 46–002016 Sun Field Service Manual
» 46–015323 Genesis Console/Computer Schematics
» 46–021650 Network Service Documentation
» 2106475 Complete Installation Template for Baseplate–less Systems (VX Preferred)
» 2126732–100 RP 2.0 and VX Preferred Preinstallation (VX Preferred)
» 2131411–100 Global PDU (GPDU) HSA RP 2.x and VX Preferred Door Diagram (VX
Preferred)
» 2131408–100 HSA RP 2.x and VX Preferred Table Door Diagram (VX Preferred)
» 2131409–100 HSA RP 2.x and VX Preferred Gantry Door Diagram (VX Preferred)
1
» VX Preferred Operators Manual Addendum (VX Preferred)
1–4 Customer Software (Class B)

This section contains the part numbers of class B operating and basic service software
required for operation, calibration, service and maintenance of the CT HiSpeed Advantage
system. The software tapes ship with the catalogs listed in parentheses. Section 1–2
contains a list of the catalog numbers.
» 2145215 HLFC Tape (standard system, VX and kit)

» 46–313368G1 System State Tape (standard system, VX and kit)
» 2145216 HNS Tape (standard system, VX and kit)
2
CHAPTER 2 – CT DIAGNOSTICS AND TOOLS MENU DESCRIPTIONS
2–1 Menu Function Descriptions

This chapter briefly describes the various menus for basic service diagnostics and tools.
Diagnostics and tools procedures are described in chapter 3.
2–2 Top Level Menu

The CT HiSpeed Advantage diagnostics and tools are loaded from tape to the system disc.
These diagnostics and tools are invoked and operated via both the Plasma Touch screen and
at the Unix command line in a shell. The Utilities Main menu is the top level from which to
run diags and tools. The |Utilities| button is on the top level menu shown in Illustration 2–1.
ILLUSTRATION 2–1
TOP LEVEL MENU
Operator Console
Image date – time Diag

Scan Archive Recon Utilities Network Filming
Space Messages Status
2–3 Utilities Main Menu

Use the Utilities Main Menu (Illustration 2–2) to access:
» Installation and Calibration (to set up and align the system)

» System Performance (to troubleshoot system and measure performance)
» Scanning (provides a set of scan options)
» List/Select (lists files and supports all the tools)
» Utilities (provides Unix access)
|Cancel| button exits Utilities.
3
ILLUSTRATION 2–2
UTILITIES MAIN MENU
MESSAGES UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING
UTILITIES MAIN
Diags and Diags CT

Tools Tools
System Shell Service Shutdown

System
Access Notepad
Tools
Cancel
2–4 Diagnostics Menu

Press the |Diags| button, shown in Illustration 2–2 ( page 4) to display the Diagnostics
Menu (Illustration 2–3). Access the following functions from the Diagnostic Menu:
» Reset AP – resets the AP (Array Processor).

» Reset Hardware –resets system scanning hardware (2 minutes). MESSAGE field at top
level menu displays reset status, for example: “Scanning hardware reset in progress”. At
completion, message updates to “Scanning hardware reset successful”.
» DAS Reset – resets the DAS.
» DAS Apf – sends an apf (acknowledge power failure) instruction to DAS.
» SBC0 Test – HNS tape must be loaded to run Sun Diagnostics.
» sttest0 – runs parallel communications tests.
» Scanning Hardware – functionally checks x–ray generation capability.
|Cancel| button exits Utilities. |Utility| button displays the Utility Main Menu.
4
ILLUSTRATION 2–3
DIAGNOSTICS MENU
DIAGNOSTICS
Reset AP Hardware
DAS Reset Apf
SBC0 sttest0 Scanning

Test
Hardware
Cancel Utility
2–5 CT Tools Menu

Press the |CT Tools| button, shown in Illustration 2–2, to display the CT Tools Menu
(Illustration 2–4). Access the following functions from the CT Tools Menu:
» Mechanical Characterization – to build characterization files, which define the the basic
system datum for system setup
» Generator Characterization – to calibrate the x–ray generator for accurate kV and mA
levels
» Tube Align – to position tube, collimator and detector to x–ray alignment specifications
» Heat Soak & Season – Prepares new or existing x–ray tube for extended field life.
» System Perform – Used to identify system level failures.
» Analysis – to examine scan and diagnostic data
» List/Select – to list image, scan and diagnostic data
» DDC– to collect diagnostic data (DD)
» File Manager – to manage DD, diagnostic and patient scan data files.
5
ILLUSTRATION 2–4
TOOLS SELECTION MENU
TOOL SELECTIONS
Install Mechncal Genrator Tube Heat Soak

Calibrate Charact Charact Align & Season
System Analysis Detector

Perform Slope
List Images Patient Diag DD Files CALS

Select Scans Scans
Scanning DDC
Diagnostics
Utility File
Functions Manager
Cancel Utility
2–6 Shell Function

Use the shell to open a tty window, and execute unix commands.
2–7 System Tools Menu

Press the |System Tools| button, shown in Illustration 2–2, to display the System Tools
Menu, shown in Illustration 2–5. Access the following functions from the System Tools Menu:
» Shell – opens a tty window on the plasma, to execute UNIX commands.

» Calculator – opens a tty window calculator for math operations.
» File Editor – opens a tty window to edit ASCII files.
6
ILLUSTRATION 2–5
SYSTEM TOOLS MENU
SYSTEM TOOLS
Unix Shell Calculator File Editor

Tools
Cancel Utility
7
Notes:
8
CHAPTER 3 – CT DIAGNOSTICS AND TOOLS PROCEDURES
3–1 System Shutdown

The Utilities Main Menu (Illustration NO TAG) provides access to diagnostics, tools, a shell in
the unix operating system and system tools.
Press the |Shutdown| button to perform an orderly and systematic shutdown of all Genesis
application processes, then issue a halt command to turn off unix. Software shutdown stops
all processes running on the OC and SBC. When shutdown completes, the boot prompt “>”
appears on the boot terminal. Turn off the power switches in the following order to
completely shutdown the computer subsystem.
» Scan Chassis power switch.

» AP Power switch
» Primary (GENESIS) Computer power switch.
» Console’s power switch.
Press the |Cancel| button to exit Utilities.
UTILITIES MAIN
Diags and Diags CT

Tools Tools
System Shell System Service Shutdown

Access Tools Notepad
Cancel
3–2 Access Diagnostic Programs

Press the |Diags| button on the Utilities Main Menu (Illustration 3–1) and proceed to the next
page.
9
ILLUSTRATION 3–1
DIAGS BUTTON
UTILITIES MAIN
Diags and Diags CT

Tools Tools

Cancel
3–3 Run Diagnostics

Press the |Diags| button, shown in Illustration 3–1 (page 10) to display the Diagnostics
Menu (Illustration 3–2). Subsections 3–3–1 through 3–3–5–2 describe the Diagnostics
functions shown in Illustration 3–2.
3–3–1 Reset AP and Hardware

Press the |AP| button (Illustration 3–2) to reset the AP subsystem.
Press |Hardware| to reset the OBC, STC and ETC. Reset takes about 2 minutes. The
MESSAGE field at top level menu gives status of reset, for example: “Scanning hardware
reset in progress”. At completion, the message display changes to “Scanning hardware reset
successful”.
3–3–2 DAS Reset and Apf

Press the DAS |Reset| button to reset the DAS.
Press DAS |Apf| to send an apf (acknowledge power failure) instruction to the DAS.
10
ILLUSTRATION 3–2
RESET AND DAS FUNCTION BUTTONS
DIAGNOSTICS
Reset AP Hardware
DAS Reset Apf
Test SBC0 sttest0 Scanning

Hardware
Cancel Utility
3–3–3 SRU Host Computer Test (sbc0 Test)

Press |SBC0|, shown in Illustration 3–3, to access the Sun Diagnostic software (if loaded),
and test the SBC. Chapter 7 contains the SBC0 Test procedure, (Host Computer / Console
Maintenance section).
11
ILLUSTRATION 3–3
SBC0 TEST BUTTON
DIAGNOSTICS
Reset AP Hardware
DAS Reset Apf

Hardware
Cancel Utility
3–3–4 Sttest0 Program

Sttest0 automatically checks the data path and parallel link between the AP, Mini–HIB, and
the SBC (Illustration 3–4) when you select |STTEST0| (Illustration 3–5).
ILLUSTRATION 3–4
STTEST DATA PATH
SBC MINI–HIB HCHIOP ST–CT

Sttest tests the communication
path between the AP and SBC.
12
ILLUSTRATION 3–5
SBC0 TEST BUTTON
DIAGNOSTICS
Reset AP Hardware
DAS Reset Apf

Hardware
Cancel Utility Load

Screens
The sttest0 program executes a reset on the AP to bring the AP up. The next series of tests
check the I/O devices for receiving data and checks the autoload to memory and auto dump
to disk. Each test isolates a failure to a specific area. Illustration 3–6 shows an example of
the output of a successful sttest program. Illustration 3–7 shows an example of the output
with a faulty HCHIOP board.
Note: The reset on the AP must have successfully passed to complete the test properly.
13
ILLUSTRATION 3–6
SUCCESSFUL STTEST OUTPUT
Resetting the AP...

Running Echo interrupt test...
Echo interrupt test passed...
Running Auto–main test...
AUTOLOAD/AUTODUMP MAIN TEST PASSED...
Running register file write/read test...
IOP write/read register file test passed...
Running Auto–public test...
AUTOLOAD/AUTODUMP PUBLIC TEST PASSED...
Running IOP interrupt test...
IOP interrupt test passed...
Confidence test successful for device (STA1)
Do you wish to execute the tool again?

ÉÉ
ILLUSTRATION 3–7
FAULTY STTEST OUTPUT
Resetting the AP...

Running Echo interrupt test...
Echo interrupt test passed.
Running IOP internal test...
IOP internal test failure...istat = 802, jstat = 5d0c8005
IOP internal test failure...istat = 800, jstat = 1e0
IOP internal test failure...istat = 800, jstat = 140
Confidence test failure for device (STA1)
Test failing – IOP internal test
Do you wish to execute the tool again?

ÉÉ
3–3–5 Scanning Hardware Program

Press |Scanning Hardware| on the the Diagnostics Menu (Illustration 3–8). Proceed to the
next page.
14
ILLUSTRATION 3–8
SCANNING HARDWARE BUTTON
DIAGNOSTICS
Reset AP Hardware
DAS Reset Apf

Hardware
Cancel Utility Load

Screens
Press the |Scanning Hardware| button, shown in Illustration 3–8, to access the following
functional tests, shown in Illustration 3–9:
» Backup Timer Test: activates the x–ray exposure backup timer. Use this test to verify the
different clock frequencies and the counter operation.
» X–Ray Functional Test: verifies scanning hardware operation and displays HV statistics
on the plasma screen.
Refer to Illustration 3–9: Before you run the Backup Timer Test or X–Ray Functional Test for
the first time, press |Download Diags| to download diagnostic firmware, and disable the
|Download Diags|.
» Solid |Download Diags| box: Must load diagnostic firmware
» Dashed |Download Diags| box: Firmware already downloaded
Press the |Quit| to exit Diagnostics.
15
ILLUSTRATION 3–9
SCANNING HARDWARE DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
Backup X–ray
Timer Test
Download Quit
Diags Diags
3–3–5–1 Exposure Backup Timer Functional Test

Download diagnostic firmware, if necessary. Press the Diagnostics Menu |Backup Timer|
button (Illustration 3–10) to access the Exposure Backup Timer Functional Test. Use this test
to verify backup timer operation (i.e., timer activates, timer counts down to zero, and
de–energizes backup contactor).
The Gentry I/O Board contains the backup timer. The system enables this counter to allow
the backup timer sufficient time to energize before the start of an exposure. The system sets
the backup timer to the prescribed scan time, plus 5%. The timer begins to count down when
the circuit detects an Exposure Command or HVON. If either the Exposure Command or
HVON remains active after the allotted time, the CPU receives a level 1 interrupt, and
disables the backup contactor.
The read and write verification requires the clock circuit to operate. The test repeats, and
uses both clocks (488.28 Hz and 1953 Hz) which also confirms the operation of the clock
select circuit. The test simulates an exposure, and verifies the that the backup timer
generates an interrupt.
16
ILLUSTRATION 3–10
BACKUP TIMER BUTTON
DIAGNOSTICS
Backup X–ray Axial

Timer Test Contactr
DASHED BUTTON INDICATES DIAGNOSTIC

FIRMWARE ALREADY DOWNLOADED
Download Quit
Diags Diags
Illustration 3–11 shows the default Timeout parameter of 3 seconds, which is sufficient to
verify backup timer operation.
Press the |Accept| button, and proceed to the next page.
17
ILLUSTRATION 3–11
FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU
BACKUP TIMER FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU
Functional Test Selection:
Backup
Timer Test
Backup Timer Timeout (sec):
Home Results Accept

Screen
Press |Accept| shown in Illustration 3–11, to display the default parameter set shown in
Illustration 3–12. The default values are sufficient to verify backup timer operation.
Press |Backup| to return to the previous screen.
Press |Run| to start the Backup Timer test. Go to the next page.
18
ILLUSTRATION 3–12
FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU
FUNCTIONAL TEST REVIEW SCREEN

Test: Backup Timer Test
Maximum Errors: Gantry Enable:

30 [Disable] Enabled
Max Error Processing: Gantry Speed

[Log] Do Not Log Stop Test 1 sec. 2 sec. 4 sec. 20 sec.
Output Device: Tube Position

[Console and File] Console Only [0 deg. 90 deg. 180 deg. 270 deg
Minimum Results Update Update Rate: OBC Service Input:

3 [Disabled] Enabled
Backup Run
The test review screen (Illustration 3–13) displays the progress of the test, not the state of
the hardware. Screen information updates one line at a time, as the test completes each
step. When it encounters a failure, the software displays an inverted video error message
after the step that failed. The system displays a message containing the number of errors
detected, if any, along the bottom of the screen. The error log contains more detailed error
information.
19
ILLUSTRATION 3–13
FUNCTIONAL TEST RESULTS SCREEN
3–3–5–2 X–Ray Test

Press |X–Ray Test|, shown in Illustration 3–14, to access the
X–Ray Functional Test.
Refer to Illustration 3–14: Before you run the Backup Timer Test or X–Ray Functional Test
for the first time, press |Download Diags| to download diagnostic firmware, and disable the
|Download Diags|.
» Solid |Download Diags| box: Must load diagnostic firmware
» Dashed |Download Diags| box: Firmware already downloaded
20
ILLUSTRATION 3–14
X–RAY TEST BUTTON
DIAGNOSTICS
Backup X–ray Axial

Timer Test Contactr
DASHED BUTTON INDICATES DIAGNOSTIC

FIRMWARE ALREADY DOWNLOADED
Download Quit
Diags
Illustration 3–15 shows the X–Ray Functional Test screen. Input ranges consist of the
following:
» KV: 60 to 140KV in 1KV steps
» mA: 40 to 400mA in 1mA steps
» Duration: 00.1 to 10 Seconds in 0.1 second steps
» Iterations: 1 to 100
» ISD: 1 to 60 Seconds in 1 second steps
Press |Accept|, shown in Illustration 3–15, and wait for the (Scan Start) button on the
console keypad to illuminate. Press (Scan Start), when lit, to initiate the scan. Go to the next
page.
21
ILLUSTRATION 3–15
X–RAY FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU
High Medium Low
Press |Run|, shown in Illustration 3–16, to start the test. The X–Ray Functional Test Results
screen, shown in Illustration 3–16, displays a collection of HV statistics. After you press
(Scan Start), the software samples the data 77 ms into the exposure, and posts it to the
screen. In the columns of data below, “––” indicates an unknown value.
» Average: the average value taken over the duration of the exposure
» Expected: user prescribed value
» Present: the last value read before updating the screen. The present exposure duration
displays the time, in milliseconds, that elapsed between the start of scan and the data
collection.
Data displayed in the present column shows the last sample of HV statistics taken on or
before 77mSeconds after the start of the exposure.
22
ILLUSTRATION 3–16
X–RAY FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU #1
DATA IN “PRESENT” COLUMN SHOWS LAST SAMPLE OF HV

STATISTICS READ ON OR BEFORE 77 MS AFTER START OF
EXPOSURE BEFORE SCREEN WAS DISPLAYED.
The screen shown in Illustration 3–16 represents a sample taken near the beginning of the
exposure. The screen shown in Illustration 3–17 represents a sample taken at the end of the
exposure, because “Present” exposure duration the “Expected” exposure duration value.
Note: The backup timer determines the actual exposure duration. This timer continues to count
until both the Exposure Command and HV ON status deactivate, so the “Present” value
could exceed the “Expected” value.
23
ILLUSTRATION 3–17
X–RAY FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU #2
COMPARE
3–4 Access the Unix Shell

Press the Utilities Main Menu |Shell| button, shown in Illustration 3–18, and proceed to the
next page.
24
ILLUSTRATION 3–18
SHELL BUTTON
UTILITIES MAIN
Diags and Diags CT

Tools Tools

Cancel
3–4–1 Shell
The shell (Illustration 3–19) is a program that reads and interprets what is typed in or read at
the command line; and provides the interface between the user and the unix operating
system. The shell accepts your command lines, checks the syntax, calls the appropriate unix
commands, and takes control when other commands finish. It is interactive because it
responds to your instruction and reports errors, status and results. The shell also provides an
interpreted command language for creating complex “scripts” that carry out system
maintenance actions. A “script” is a file containing a sequence of commands. By using the
source filename command, i.e., type in the filename as if it were a command, you can tell
the shell to read and perform commands in the file.
Note: Direction 46–015523, SunOS / Genesis Quick Reference Guide, contains a description
of the unix commands you need to maintain the system. The Network Service
Documentation Set (46–021650), shipped with every CT HiSpeed Advantage and
Upgrade Kit, contains Direction 46–015523.
25
ILLUSTRATION 3–19
UNIX SHELL
Shell (to exit, control D)
genesis @ BAY0_OC01:
3–4–2 EzLog Tool

Open a shell (Illustration 3–20), or a tty screen, to access the menu–driven EzLog Tool. This
tool improves error message viewing, and saves time, because you no longer have to log into
the sbc to display the system error log files.
Run EzLog with applications up or down. The EzLog Tool provides an alternative to plasma
tools during system applications failures, and/or remote logins.
1. Open a shell or tty window.

2. Login as genesis.
3. Type ezlog [Return] to display the following menu:
HiSpeed Advantage Z–Series Systems
OC Messages /usr/adm/messages
OC Syslog /usr/spool/log/syslog
OC System Error Log /usr/g/service/log/gesyslog (viewLog)
OC Mxlog HiSpeed Disk usr/g/service/log/mxlog
SBC Messages /usr/adm/messages
SBC Syslog /usr/spool/log/syslog
UPAP Failures
Run Time Stats (viewStats.sbc)
Tube Usage
Tube Display
Look for Core files on system
4. Type a number, and press [Return] to display the corresponding log file.
» Press q to return to the HiSpeed Advantage Z–Series Systems menu.
» Press <Cntrl> c to abort the corresponding EzLog function.
5. If you press the wrong key, the software responds with “Gimme a break. . .”
6. If the SBC is not running, the software displays the following report:
26
HSA1_SBC0
HSA1_SBC0 is down
HAS1_SBC0: COnnection timed out
/usr/adm/messages not found in HSA1_SBC0.
ILLUSTRATION 3–20
EZLOG TOOL
Shell (to exit, control D)
ezlog
3–4–3 Access Service Notepad

1. Display the Utilities Main Menu (Illustration 3–21).
2. Touch |Service Notepad| to open a Service Notepad shell, similar to the one in
Illustration 3–22.
ILLUSTRATION 3–21
SERVICE NOTEPAD SOFTKEY
UTILITIES MAIN
Diags and Diags CT

Tools Tools

Cancel
3. Use the Service Notepad to enter text information directly into the System Message Log.
Remember to let multiple lines of text automatically wrap around to the next available
line. If you press [Return] at the end of a line, the software posts the current
(incomplete) message, and exits the shell.
4. Press [Return] to send the text currently displayed in the shell to the System Message
Log.
27
ILLUSTRATION 3–22
SERVICE NOTEPAD SHELL
SERVICE NOTEPAD
Please enter messages to Log: (to update/exit type <CR>)
3–5 Access CT Tools

Press the Utilities Main Menu |CT Tools| button, shown in Illustration 3–23.
Proceed to the next page.
ILLUSTRATION 3–23
CT TOOLS BUTTON
UTILITIES MAIN
Diags and Diags CT

Tools Tools

Cancel
3–5–1 Main Tool Selections
The Tool Selection Menu, shown in Illustration 3–24, displays the tools used during
installation and calibration:
» Mechanical Characterization – for procedure refer to chapter 4 (Table/Gantry

Maintenance).
» Generator Characterization – for procedure, refer to chapter 5 (HV Subsystem
Maintenance).
» Tube Alignment – for procedure, refer to chapter 9 (System Alignment).
28
» Heat Soak & Season – for procedure, refer to the Tube Change section 13–5–158,
starting on page 404. (Replacement Procedures).
» Detector Slope – for procedure, refer to page 30, in this chapter.
» Analysis – for procedure, refer to chapter 9 (System Alignment).
» DDC – for procedure, refer to chapter 9 (System Alignment).
ILLUSTRATION 3–24
TOOLS SELECTIONS MENU
TOOL SELECTIONS


Perform Slope

Select Scans Scans
Scanning DDC
Diagnostics
Utility File
Functions Manager
Cancel Utility
3–5–2 Heat Soak and Seasoning Tool

After you replace an x–ray tube, select the |Heat Soak & Season| tool to ensure extended
tube life.
Use the |Season| tool when you encounter tube spits, image streaks, or other tube related
scan aborts on a currently installed tube. You may also use the |Season| tool during planned
maintenance.
Note: Refer to Section 13–5–158 of the Tube Replacement procedure for additional |Heat Soak
& Season| information.
29
ILLUSTRATION 3–25
HEAT SOAK & SEASONING MENU
Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning
Heat Soak Season

/Season
Cancel Utility Tools
3–5–3 Detector Slope Test

Use this System Performance tool to test the detector for signs of gain response
degradation. A typical healthy detector should have a status number lower than 19. As the
detector degrades, this number is likely to increase. Eventually a detector failure will be
recorded if it exceeds 19. The software automatically runs the Detector Slope Test on a
monthly basis, immediately after a FastCal. The test adds about 4 minutes to the FastCal
program. The system displays a PASS/FAIL message after it runs the test. Refer to
Illustration 3–26 for an example of the failure message.
Note: If the Detector Slope Test fails, the failure message screen instructs the customer to
contact GE for service. A GE service representative will preform recommended field
procedures (FMI, etc) for system troubleshooting and/or detector replacement.
The UTILITIES menu also displays a |Detector Slope| softkey, which provides manual
access to the tool.
This test fails when the software detects incorrect Collimator
CAUTION Characterization values or insufficient DD File space. When a
failure occurs, review the Error Message Log for additional
information. For optimal clinical image performance, periodically
check all system alignments, and make sure they fall within spec.
To manually access the Detector Slope Test:

1. Display the UTILITIES menu.
» Refer to the Illustration on page 28.
30
2. Select |CT Tools|.

» Refer to the Illustration on page 29.
3. Select |Detector Slope|.
4. Remove any obstructions from the Gantry opening.
5. When prompted, press (Start Scan) to execute the test.
6. Select |Confirm| to exit the Detector Slope Test.
The software displays a message, similar to the following, when the detector gain response
falls outside the specified range of values.
ILLUSTRATION 3–26
FAILURE MESSAGE
Detector Slope Test
Detector Slope test was unable to run to completion.

If you continue to see this screen after FastCal,
please contact Service.
Touch ’Confirm’ to continue.
Confirm
3–6 Analysis
3–6–1 Function Definition

Analysis consists of 5 different major functions.
Scan Analysis Functions :

» View Versus Channels (VVC)
» View Data
» Channel Data
» Means & Standard Deviation (MSD)
» Centroid
The Scan Analysis functions operate on patient or diagnostic scan files.
Tool Processing performs all the Scan Analysis function processing. Scan Analysis submits
requests to Tool Processing through the Tool Queue. Tool Processing creates a DD file for
every Scan Analysis function, except View Versus Channels (VVC). Tool Processing creates
an image with VVC data.
Sections 3–6–2 through 3–6–2–4 describe Scan Analysis options.
3–6–2 Process Selections

Follow these steps during Scan Analysis:
1. Select a scan file to analyze
2. Select the function type
31
3. Select the pre–processing options

4. Select the Output Options
Sections 3–6–2–1 through 3–6–2–4 describe the Scan Analysis steps.
3–6–2–1 Scan File Selection

A scan file can be chosen from a list of patient scans or a list of diagnostic scans. List/Select
screens are used for this. (The individual exam/suite/series/scan fields may be entered
directly if desired.)
Use the List/Select screens to choose a scan file from a list of patient scans or a list of
diagnostic scans. (You may type/enter an individual exam/suite/series/scan selection at this
time, if you know it.)
3–6–2–2 Function Types

Choose one of the five available functions:
1. Views Versus Channels (VVC)
2. View Data
3. Channel Data
4. Means and Standard Deviations
5. Centroid
Views Versus Channels
Views Versus Channels (VVC) creates an image by submitting a queue request to the
toolMain process. Use VVC to identify image artifacts caused by streaks or tube spits, for
example. Use CD Plot to analyze the VVC images, and identify the view number and DAS
channel.
Tool Processing performs the VVC processing in the AP. The software uses the recon
view–loop routines on the scan data, with the exception of DOC (DAS Overrange
Correction), which it does not use during VVC processing. See sections 3–6–2–3
Pre–Processing Options for details.
View Data
The View Data function extracts one view of data from a Scan File and applies selected
processing and output options. If you select the File output option, the software creates a
View type, View oriented DD File.
Channel Data
The Channel Data function extracts the data for one channel from each selected view of a
Scan File, and applies selected processing and output options. If you select the File output
option, the software creates a Channel type, Channel oriented DD File.
Means and Standard Deviation (MSD)
The MSD function calculates the means and standard deviation for each channel, across all
selected views. If you select the File output option, the software creates an MSD type, View
oriented DD File.
Centroid
32
The Centroid function calculates the centroid for each view to create a view orientated vector
of centroid values. The Centroid function provides a number of exclusive processing options.
See section 3–6–2–4 for details.
3–6–2–3 Pre–Processing Options

Select the |Pre–Process| button on the main Scan Analysis screen to display the
Pre–Processing Options screen
You may turn the following pre–processing steps OFF and ON during Scan Analysis:
1. Raw – Raw mode uses the data as it was collected. You may select Raw mode during
diagnostic scans.
2. Offset Correction – Offset correction subtracts the Offset vector from the data. Select
Offset Correction when you plan to use any of the following pre–processing steps (listed
below). You have to disable all succeeding pre–processing steps in order to enable
Offset Correction. If you already offset corrected the scan, you cannot disable this
button.
3. Normalize – Normalization divides the data by the average of the reference channels.
Select Normalize when you plan to use any of the following pre–processing steps (listed
below). If not selected, disable all succeeding steps.
4. Change Ref Chans – to change the number of reference channels used during
normalization. When you select the Change Reference Channel function, the software
displays the reference channel select buttons.
» Default channel selections: 1, 2, 3, 748, 749 and 750
» The user may substitute another channel for all channels, except channel 1.
5. Expand – Expands the data (expands the 2mm channels into two 1 mm channels for
processing). If not selected, disable all succeeding steps.
The expansion of the channel number set:
Channel Set Expansion

686 688
687 689
741 743
748
749
744 750
... ... ...

62 64
63 65
2
3
6
1
4
1
745 688
746 689
689
743
855 743
748
749
858 750
... ... ...

64
121 64
122 65
2
3
6
1
6
4
1
6. Qcal – User can select whether or not to use a Qcal vector from either the scan file or
DD File input.
7. Acal – performs Theta, Crosstalk, and/or Acal corrections. If not selected, disable all
succeeding steps. User can select whether or not to use the Acal vector from either the
scan file or DD File input.
» If the Acal is from the scan file, perform Theta and crosstalk correction.
» If the Acal is from a DD File, do NOT perform Theta nor crosstalk correction.
33
8. Decon – performs Deconvolution.

9. Minus Log (– ln) – performs the natural log (times –1). If not selected, disable all
succeeding steps.
10. Beam Harden – performs beam hardening correction. If not selected, disable all
succeeding steps.
11. Pcal – user can select whether or not to use a Pcal vector from either the scan file or a
DD File input.
3–6–2–4 Output Options

On the Output Options screen, the user can: choose the results analysis format and
destination (device), choose the amount of data for processing (by selecting the set of views
and/or channels), and use the multiplication factor.
Reference channels can be left of the plot data (if chosen). A window range value is used
only for Views Versus Channels. Also, the ability choose between Means or Standard
Deviations can be used for the Means and Standard Deviations function.
During a Views Versus Channels session, the user may enter a window range on the Output
Options screen. The software uses the pixel value range to map the image data. Window
range is an integer value.
Output Device
There are four output device options: Plot, File, Screen, and Print.
The Plot option creates a line graph on the IP, except for Views Versus Channels. (For VVC,
an image is created. VVC can only use the Plot output device.)
The File option saves the data to a DD File. The file output mode prompts the user for a file
name and description. The name is mandatory. The description may be left blank.
The Screen option output displays the data on the plasma in a page format. You may select
next, prior, first and last page, where appropriate. The Screen mode has the following sorting
or format options:
» Sort Ascend
» Sort Descend
» A/D
» Filter
The Print option outputs the data file to the system printer.
Use other functions on the Output Options screen to select subset of the scan file data for
analysis, a first channel/view, a last channel/view, and a channel/view increment.
Centroid
The Centroid function calculates the centroid for each view to create a view orientated vector
of centroid values. The Centroid function provides the following exclusive processing options
on the Output Options screen:
» Centroid Type (Body Filter): Pin, Cbf

» Centroid Mode: Static, Dynamic
» Centroid Options: Centroid, Sine Removed, Derivative
34
» First Channel: Pin, Find First Pin

» Smoothing Filter: None, Boxcar
Plot/Analyze
Before the line graph is plotted on the IP, a transition is made to the Plot/Analyze screen.
The group of functions on the Plot/Analyze screen allow for cursor reporting and/or
positioning, displaying of tick marks, and grids. The user can choose to erase plots previously
displayed on the, or allow the new plot to be displayed with the old plots.
The software displays the Plot/Analyze screen before it plots the line graph on the IP. The
Plot/Analyze screen provides functions to display and/or report cursor position, tick marks,
and grids. The user can erase previously displayed plots, or display the new plot with the old
plots.
Users can also change the X and Y scales, by entering new min/max limits of the data to be
plotted.
35
Notes:
36
CHAPTER 4 – TABLE/GANTRY MAINTENANCE
4–1 Table/Gantry Hardware Checks
THERE ARE ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS IN

WARNING SERVICING THE TABLE AND GANTRY. THEREFORE, BE SURE
THAT YOU HAVE READ DIRECTION 46–018302, CT HISPEED
ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINES MANUAL OR HAVE VIEWED
46–018308 CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY VIDEO PRIOR TO
SERVICING THESE SUBSYSTEMS.
TO PREVENT THE HOIST FROM ROLLING OFF THE BACK END OF

THE HOIST BOOM WHEN INSTALLING THE DAS, TUBE OR
DETECTOR, PLACE THE HAND KNOB, USED TO HOLD THE FRONT
GANTRY SHROUD, INTO THE HOLE ON TOP OF THE GANTRY
HOIST BOOM WHERE IT ATTACHES TO THE GANTRY.
4–2 Input (PDU) Power
CAUTION Verify that all personnel are clear of the system before turning on
the wall power.
IF THE SYSTEM HAS A PDU 2113764, THE “DATA PROCESSING”

POWERS ON WHEN YOU TURN ON MAIN WALL POWER, AND THE
WARNING CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR COMPUTER POWER ARE ON.
Perform the following functions:
» Verify that all three switches on the gantry status display box are OFF.
» Verify that all three power switches in the table are OFF.
» Verify that PDU 550 enable key is set to DISABLE.
» Turn ON main wall power. If the system has an PDU 2113764, the “DATA
PROCESSING” power comes on when main wall power is turned on and the circuit
breakers for the computer power are on.
» Turn ON “DATA PROCESSING” power on the REM box.
4–3 Gantry Display Test

Perform the following functions:
» Turn ON all three of the power switches at the base of the table.
» Turn ON the gantry 120 VAC enable switch on the gantry
status display box.
» Verify that the gantry display goes through power–up self–test. Display will continue to
cycle through its self–test until a hardware reset and download has been completed.
» TURN ON “X–RAY DRIVES” power.
37
OR
» Press the RESET Button on the Gantry Mounted Table Controls to turn on the “X–RAY
and DRIVES’ power.
TABLE 4–1
OBC, STC AND TABLE POWER SUPPLIES
Non–Adjustable Supplies Adjustable Supplies

STC, OBC +24 ETC, STC, OBC, +5, ±15
Table (Display, Emerg Stop) +24 Table (Cradle Drive, Relays) +24
Detector Heater +26 Data Communication +12
Filament Supply +30 Das +5, ±15
+170VDC Table Servo Power Supply Collimator +38.5
(in table base for systems with PDU 2113764)
ILLUSTRATION 4–1
TABLE/GANTRY POWER SUPPLIES
PS1 – Top Table Power Supply

Adjustable 24 volt supply for cradle drive and elevation/tilt drive
Adjustable +5, +15 volt supplies for ETC bd

Non–adjustable 24 volt supply for gantry display and table emergency stop relay coil
and tape switches.
PS2 – Bottom Table Power Supply
Table Power Supplies – Left View
ILLUSTRATION 4–2
OBC, STC AND BOTTOM TABLE “BLUE” POWER SUPPLIES – TOP VIEW
+24 volt output

+24 volt reference
–15 volt output
+15 volt reference
+15 volt output +15 volt adjust
(not used)
(not used)
+5 volt reference 120VAC INPUT

+5 volt output
38
ILLUSTRATION 4–3
46–296317P1/P2 – OBC, STC AND BOTTOM TABLE POWER SUPPLIES – TOP VIEW
+5 volt adjust
+24 volt output
+24 volt reference
–15 volt output
+15 volt reference
–15 volt adjust

24 volt adjust
Power Fail
+5 volt reference
+5 volt output 120VAC INPUT
ILLUSTRATION 4–4
46–296317P3– OBC, STC AND BOTTOM TABLE POWER SUPPLIES – TOP VIEW
–15 volt adjust

+24 volt reference
–15 volt output 24 volt adjust
+15 volt reference
+15 volt output
Power Fail
+5 volt reference
+5 volt output 120VAC INPUT
+5 volt adjust
39
ILLUSTRATION 4–5
GANTRY POWER SUPPLIES
STC POWER SUPPLIES

DAS BOX #1 CAL/AUX CARD
(RIGHT ANALOG)
DAS BOX #2
(LEFT ANALOG)
DATA COMMUNICATION
POWER SUPPLY
PROCESSOR
(On back of gantry) CARD
STC KEY BOARD
ANODE
STATIONARY CATHODE HIGH
CONTROLLER HIGH VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE COLLIMATOR SUPPLY
SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY
( Behind detector
heater power supply)
DAS POWER SUPPLIES
OBC
ON
CTVRC BOARD
FILAMENT CONTROLLER
POWER SUPPLY
CT
VARIABLE OBC POWER SUPPLIES
ROTOR
CONTROLLER
DETECTOR HEATER
POWER SUPPLY
(In front of collimator
power supply)
–15 Volt Das Supply
+15 Volt Das Supply

TUBE
UNIT + 5 Volt Das Supply
DAS POWER SWITCH DAS POWER SUPPLIES

–TOP VIEW–
40
4–4 Power Supply Checks

ETC Power Supplies
Use a DVM to verify the table power supply voltages at the following test points on the ETC
bd:
Test Points Specification

21 WRT 18 + 15vdc (± .25V)
11 WRT 18 – 15vdc (± .25V)
25 WRT 24 + 24vdc (± 2V)
1 WRT 2 + 5vdc (± .25V)
Note: WRT means “With Respect To”
170VDC Servo Power Supply, In Table Base for VX Preferred

TP2 WRT TP1 + 170vdc (± 5V)
STC Power Supplies
1. Verify axial drive enable and 550 enable switches on gantry status display box are OFF.
2. Turn ON gantry 120vac enable switch on the status display box.
3. Turn ON STC power switch on the STC.
4. Using a DVM, verify the STC power supply voltages at the following test points on the
axial bd:

36 WRT 40 + 15vdc (± .25V)
38 WRT 40 – 15vdc (± .25V)
37 WRT 42 + 24vdc (± 2V)
39 WRT 41 + 5vdc (± .25V)
OBC Power Supplies
1. Turn ON OBC power switch on the OBC.

2. Using a DVM, verify the OBC power supply voltages at the following test points on the
I/O bd:

6 WRT 5 + 15vdc (± .25V)
7 WRT 5 – 15vdc (± .25V)
11 WRT 17 + 24vdc (± 2V)
3 WRT 4 + 5vdc (± .25V)
DAS Power Supplies
Turn on DAS power switch on das power supply assembly. Use a DVM to verify the DAS power
supply voltages at the following test points on the DAS cal/aux bd:
41

+15 WRT GND +15vdc (± .05V)
–15 WRT GND –15vdc (± .05V)
+5 WRT GND +5vdc (± .05V)
Data Communication Power Supply
Push back rear gantry shroud. Using a DVM, verify the data communications power supply
voltage at the following location:

Communications power supply +11.75vdc to +12.25vdc
CN2 connector
Red wire WRT to Black wire
Note: Before checking the following three power supplies:

» Turn off gantry 120vac enable switch.
» Remove rotor controller cover.
CAUTION 120vac is exposed on the rotor controller and the following power
supplies. Turn on gantry 120vac enable switch.
Detector Heater Power Supply
Use a DVM to verify the detector heater power supply voltage at the following location:

Across cap on detector heater +25vdc to +30vdc
power supply
Filament Power Supply
Use a DVM to verify the filament power supply voltage at the following location:

Across cap on filament power +28vdc to +37vdc
supply
Collimator Power Supply
Use a DVM to verify the collimator power supply voltage at the following location:

Collimator power supply +38.0vdc to 39.0vdc
+out WRT –out
Note: Turn off gantry 120vac enable switch. Install rotor controller cover.Turn on gantry 120vac
enable switch.
42
4–5 Encoder Check

Turn the Gantry by hand and go through the home flag. Verify that:
» DS270(CHA) and DS271(CHB) AX bd LEDs toggle.

» DS320(CHC) toggles on and off once while DS321(home flag) is high.
4–6 Axial Brake Check

Toggle the axial drive enable switch on the status display box. The brake should be heard as
it energizes and de–energizes.
Note: The brake may not be toggled if a hardware reset has been done since the last time
gantry AC power was turned on. If the brake isn’t toggling, turn gantry 120vac power off,
then on, using the 120vac enable switch on the gantry status display box. Then toggle
the axial drive enable switch on the status display box. The brake should be heard as it
energizes and de–energizes.
Verify:
» When the axial drive enable switch is off, the switch pilot light is off and the brake is
released. (Gantry can be easily rotated by hand.)
» When the axial drive enable switch is on, the switch pilot light is on and the brake is
energized.
Turn on all three switches on the gantry status display box.
4–7 Intercom Check

Verify that the talk and listen functions of the intercom are working. If you get feedback, or if
the intercom is working but does not seem to be loud enough even when the console
intercom controls are set to maximum, perform the following:
1. Close clamshells.
2. Set console intercom controls to maximum.
3. Turn autovoice board pot R178 clockwise(CW) until feedback is heard at the console
speaker.
4. Then turn R178 counterclockwise (CCW) until the feedback stops.
5. While holding down the talk button, turn autovoice board pot R147 CW until feedback is
heard at the table speaker. Then turn R147 (CCW) until the feedback stops.
6. Verify that the talk and listen functions of the intercom are now working.
4–8 Alignment Light Position Check

Verify all personnel are clear. Gantry will rotate to 180 degrees.
CAUTION
Procedure:
1. Press the alignment light button on the table control to position the gantry.
2. Press the alignment light button on the table control again to turn the lights off.
3. Verify the axial drive enable and 550 enable switches on the gantry status display box
are in the OFF position.
4. Manually turn on the alignment lights using the switch on the gantry control assembly.
43
Note: The gantry control assembly is located near the collimator. The switch can be reached
through the opening in the center of the gantry between the front and back shrouds.
WHEN OPERATING ALIGNMENT LIGHTS, DO NOT AT ANY TIME

STARE DIRECTLY INTO THE LASER BEAMS. STARING INTO THE
WARNING BEAMS CAN CAUSE PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE
4–8–1 Internal Axial Lights

Place a sheet of plain white paper over the output port of each light and verify that the two
lines line up on each other.
Note: The internal axial lasers on the high speed advantage system are not designed to shine
“down’ on the collimator; do not adjust them to do so. The tomographic plane tests use
the QA phantom to verify the internal axial lasers are correctly aligned with the collimator.
4–8–2 External Axial to Internal Axial Distance

Raise the table to its highest elevation. Extend the cradle enough so that both the internal and
external laser lights are visible on the cradle. Place a metric rule on the right edge of the cradle
and measure the distance from the internal axial laser line to the external axial line generated by
each laser. Verify this distance equals 310.0mm ±1.0mm. Place the rule on the left edge of the
cradle and measure again.
Leaving cradle extended enough so that both internal and external laser lines are visible on it,
lower table to the lowest elevation possible. Verify the 310.0 mm ±.0mm distance between
the internal and external lights on both edges of the cradle, as above.
4–8–3 Coronal Lights

Place a sheet of plain white paper at the left side of the patient opening in front of the coronal
laser light. Verify that the two coronal lines coincide with each other. Check the right side in
the same way.
Place the paper in the center of the Gantry opening and verify that the coronal lines are
horizontal, using a level.
4–8–4 Alignment Light Visualization

H.H.S. requirements state that if a light is used to define the tomographic plane, it must be visible
under ambient light conditions up to 500 lux. Proceed as follows:
1. Turn on the scan room lights to their brightest normal level. Do not add localized spot
lights to increase the brightness level.
2. Raise the table to its highest position, advance the cradle into the gantry, and turn on the
alignment lights.
3. Use the back of your hand centered over the cradle and held normal to the alignment light
as a viewing surface to visualize the external axial alignment lights. It is only necessary to
see the axial lights, not the sagital or coronal lights.
4. Repeat using the back of your hand to visualize the internal axial lights.
If the external or internal axial lights cannot be visualized under the above conditions, obtain
a DIGAPHOT model #3300 or 3303 light meter and measure the ambient light intensity at the
cradle surface for the external and internal alignment light locations.
44
Note: Footcandles x 10.76=lux.
If the light reading(s) are greater than 500 lux reduce the room lighting to that level and
repeat steps 3 and 4. If the light meter readings are 500 lux or less, replace the laser light(s)
and/or their power supplies.
4–9 Emergency Stop Check
1. Use the table control pushbuttons to advance the cradle about 2 feet from the home
position.
2. Press one of the emergency stop switches on the table or on the gantry mounted table
controls if so equipped.
3. Depress one of the tilt buttons, and verify it disables tilt.
4. Depress one of the table elevation buttons, and verify table elevation remains disabled.
5. Depress one of the cradle drive buttons, and verify the cradle drive remains disabled.
6. Verify that the cradle clutch is released by manually moving the cradle to the home
position.
7. Verify that cradle is latched securely in the home position.
8. Turn X–RAY DRIVES POWER back on by: Press the X–RAY DRIVES POWER button
on the REM box, or, press the RESET button on the gantry mounted table controls if so
equipped.
9. Verify that tilt, elevation, and cradle drive now work.
10. Repeat all of the above with the other table and gantry mounted control emergency stop
switches.
11. Repeat all of the above with the console emergency stop switch.
12. Repeat all of the above with the four table tape switches. (This step applies to systems
that have only table mounted, table controls).
4–10 Table Tape Switch Check (Sys. w/gantry mounted table

controls ONLY)
1. Raise the table and advance the cradle about 2 feet (1.5 meter) from the home position.
2. Press one of the table tape switches.
3. Depress one of the tilt buttons. Verify that tilt is disabled.
4. Depress one of the table elevation buttons. Verify that table elevation is disabled.
5. Depress one of the cradle drive buttons. Verify that cradle drive is disabled.
6. Verify that the cradle clutch is released by manually moving the cradle to the home
position.
7. Verify that cradle is latched securely in the home position.
8. Re–enable the table and tilt drive power by pressing the RESET button on the gantry
mounted table controls.
9. Verify that tilt, elevation, and cradle drive now work.
10. Repeat all of the above with the remaining three table tape switches.
45

Touch the |CT Tools| button at the Utilities Main Menu (Illustration 4–6) and go to the next
page.
ILLUSTRATION 4–6
CT TOOLS BUTTON
Messages UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING
UTILITIES MAIN
Diags and Diags CT

Tools Tools

Cancel
4–12 Mechanical Characterization Procedure
Illustration 4–7 shows the Tool Selection Menu where we can access he Mechanical
Characterization Program. This section describes the user interface to the characterization tool .
This tool is needed to set up the characterization tables for the system firmware. The system
firmware tracks various mechanical characteristics of the machine by reading feedback devices.
The system firmware must be told how the values of these feedback devices relate to the actual
machine characteristics. The Characterization tool allows a service person to define a reference
value to each of these feedback devices. The characterization data is stored in a series of
characterization and configuration files.
The characterization tool leads the user through the process of building the characterization
files in a step by step fashion. The tool directs the operator to what needs to be set up.
When the user responds, the tool reads the appropriate feedback device and stores the value
in the appropriate characterization file. The tool also provides a mechanism to download the
files to the firmware and to view the files.
46
ILLUSTRATION 4–7
SELECT MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION
TOOL SELECTIONS


Perform Slope

Select Scans Scans
Scanning DDC
Diagnostics
Utility File
Functions Manager
Cancel Utility
Select the |Mechncal Charact| button (Illustration 4–7), to display the screen in Illustration
4–8. The tool can characterize the following functions:
» Gantry Tilt Position

» Table Elevation
» Table Cradle
» Collimator
47
ILLUSTRATION 4–8
MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION MENU
MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION
Types Of: Tilt Table Cradle All

Elev
Actions: Characte Hardware

rize Reset
Data View Collima– Charact View View

tor Data Limits Values Log
4–12–1 Gantry Tilt Position

Touch |Tilt| and |Characterize| in sequence, then follow the Tilt Characterization instructions
displayed on the plasma screen. (See Illustration 4–6.)
48
ILLUSTRATION 4–9
GANTRY TILT CHARACTERIZATION

Elev
Actions: Characterize Hardware

Reset

4–12–2 Table Elevation Characterization

Measure the distance from the top of the weldment plate to the rear leg upper pivot pin on
the table, to accurately position the elevation.
Note: Do not use elevation heights or measurement positions depicted on the plasma display.
Instead, use elevation heights and measurement positions described below.
Procedure:
1. Remove upper right and lower right table covers.
2. Move measurement plate at right rear of table to “out’ position. Move measurement plate
on right side of table to “out’ position. Tighten mounting screws for both plates.
3. Touch |Table Elevation| and |Characterize| in sequence, then follow the
Characterization instructions displayed on the plasma screen.
(See Illustration 4–10)
49
ILLUSTRATION 4–10
TABLE ELEVATION CHARACTERIZATION

Elev

Reset

Note: When measuring elevation distance, measure as vertically as possible. Measure

between the bottom surface of the appropriate measurement block (same plane as the
top of the weldment plate) and the center of the rear leg upper pivot pin, per Illustration
4–11. This measurement is critical. Elevation characterization will fail if this
measurement is incorrect.
50
ILLUSTRATION 4–11
ELEVATION DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
Rear leg upper pivot pin GANTRY
ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
Measure This
Distance
Measurement from bot-

ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀ
etc board
Top of
Weldment
tom of plate Weldment Plate Plate
for lower position mea-
surement LOWER POSITION DISTANCE = 14.7 INCHES(373.4MM)
CT38885A
Rear leg upper pivot pin
Measure GANTRY
This
ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
Distance
ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀ
etc board
Top of
Weldment
Measurement from
Weldment Plate Plate
bottom of plate
for upper position
UPPER POSITION DISTANCE = 36.44 INCHES(925.6MM)
CT38886A
measurement
4–12–3 Cradle Characterization

Touch |Cradle| and |Characterize| in sequence, then follow the Characterization instructions
displayed on the plasma screen. (See Illustration 4–12.)
51
ILLUSTRATION 4–12
CRADLE CHARACTERIZATION

Elev

Reset

4–12–4 Collimator Characterization

The characterization tool provides a means for the user to view and update the current
collimator characterization data. Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the |Collimator Data| softkey shown in Illustration 4–13.

2. Enter the characterization values that are listed on the collimator characterization label.
3. Touch |Update Table| to display a message on the plasma which says that the CRC
value is incorrect. To get the correct CRC value, hold down L1 and B keys
simultaneously. Note the CRC value displayed on the screen. (The decimal value, not the
hexa–decimal value.) Hold down L1 and B keys simultaneously again to get back to the
characterization menu. Enter the CRC value on the characterization screen. Press return
key on keyboard.
4. Touch |Update Table| to display a message that characterization completed successfully.
4–12–4–1 Collimator Exerciser

1. Touch |Utility|.
2. Touch |Diags| softkey.
3. Touch |Scanning Hardware| softkey.
4. Touch |Download Diags|. (Note: The system requires approximately 2 minutes to
download diagnostics.)
5. Touch |Gantry| softkey.
6. Touch |Collimator| softkey.
7. Touch |1mm| softkey.
8. Touch |Air| softkey.
52
9. Touch |Accept| softkey.

10. Touch |180 Degree| to set Tube Position.
11. Touch |Run|.
Verify plasma messages:
Current mode = at position
All power supplies are OK
Visually verify that 1mm aperture is visible and centered by looking into the collimator.
12. Touch |Backup| softkey.
13. Touch |1mm| to deselect the 1mm aperture setting.
14. Touch the |3mm| softkey.
15. Touch the |Accept| softkey.
16. Touch |Run|
Verify plasma messages:
Current mode = at position
All power supplies are OK
Visually verify that 3mm aperture is visible and centered by looking into the collimator.
17. Repeat above procedure for 5,7, 10mm and closed positions.
ILLUSTRATION 4–13
COLLIMATOR CHARACTERIZATION

Elev

Reset

53
ILLUSTRATION 4–14
COLLIMATOR DATA
Collimator CHARACTERIZATION
Closed: 0
1mm: 286 Update
3mm: Table
5mm:
7mm:
10mm:
CRC: 49017:
Cancel Utility Tools Backup
4–12–5 Hardware Reset

Touch the |Hardware Reset| softkey (Illustration 4–15) to reset the firmware, including a
download of the firmware to the controllers and a download of the
characterization/configuration files.
54
ILLUSTRATION 4–15
HARDWARE RESET BUTTON

Elev

Reset

4–12–6 Characterization Limits

Touch the |Charact Limits| softkey (Illustration 4–16) to display the limit values for for each
of the characterized functions in storage in a disk resident configuration file. The limit values:
» GANTRY TILT: Minimum = –30 / Maximum= 30

» TABLE CRADLE: Minimum = 0 inches / Maximum= 67.3 inches (171 cm.)
» TABLE ELEVATION: Minimum = 1.0 inch (2.54 cm.) / Maximum = 22.7 inches (57.66
cm.)
Note: Measure table elevation limit distances from iso center.
55
ILLUSTRATION 4–16
CHARACTERIZATION LIMITS SOFTKEY

Elev

Reset

4–12–7 View Values
The system stores all characterization values in disk files. Touch the |View Values| softkey,
shown in Illustration 4–17, to display the current disk resident table containing the
characterization values for each of the functions (e.g., table elevation, gantry tilt, etc.). In
addition to the characterization values for gantry tilt, table elevation and table cradle position,
the table displays the max/min limits for encoder counts (elevation and cradle) and the limits
for the cradle and tilt pot outputs (in counts). The data shows the last change for the
respective function.
56
ILLUSTRATION 4–17
VIEW VALUES BUTTON

Elev

Reset

4–12–8 View Log

Touch the |View Log| softkey (Illustration 4–18) to display the characterization log. The
characterization tool builds a log as it executes to provide a characterization program history.
The following events result in a log entry:
» Characterization program entry and exit

» Characterization file modified
» Characterization file downloaded
The View Log feature displays the event messages and the time associated with the
respective event.
57
ILLUSTRATION 4–18
VIEW LOG SOFTKEY

Elev

Reset

58
CHAPTER 5 – HV SUBSYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Touch the |CT Tools| softkey at the Utilities Main Men, Illustration 5–1, and go to the next
page.
ILLUSTRATION 5–1
CT TOOLS SOFTKEY
UTILITIES MAIN
Diags and Diags CT

Tools Tools

Cancel
5–2 Generator Characterization

Illustration 5–2 shows the Tool Selections Menu containing the Generator Characterization
Program used to set up and calibrate the generator hardware to accurately generate x–rays
at the given kV/mA.
Use the Generator Characterization Program to update the “small spot” and “large spot”
characterization files to provide a starting point for the closed loop mode of the generator.
This is an iterative process which takes several scans at a different KV/MA/spot size,
calculates corrections, repeats the scan until the results are within tolerance and then
updates the characterization file.
59
ILLUSTRATION 5–2
SELECT GENERATOR CHARACTERIZATION
Touch the |Genrator Charact| softkey, shown in Illustration 5–2, to display the Generator
Characterization Menu (Illustration 5–3). The dashed boxes indicate the |Manual HVPS| and
|Auto HVPS Cal| softkeys are inactive.
TOOL SELECTIONS


Perform Slope

Select Scans Scans
Scanning DDC
Diagnostics
Utility File
Functions Manager
Cancel Utility
60
ILLUSTRATION 5–3
GENERATOR CHARACTERIZATION MENU
GENERATOR CHARACTERIZATION
Calibration Install New Manual Manual mA

Tube HVPS Cal Cal
Read Auto HVPS Auto mA

Metering Cal Cal
INACTIVE
Data View Cal View Cal
Viewing Data Log
Cancel Utility Tools Monitor

Enable
5–2–1 kV Meter Verification

Touch the |Read Metering| softkey (Illustration 5–4). This section describes the calibration
check of the systems internal kV metering circuits.
61
ILLUSTRATION 5–4
GENERATOR CHARACTERIZATION MENU
GENERATOR CHARACTERIZATION
Calibration Install New Manual Manual mA

Tube HVPS Cal Cal
Read Auto HVPS Auto mA

Metering Cal Cal
Data View Cal View Cal

Viewing Data Log
Cancel Utility Tools Monitor

Enable
Touch the |Run| softkey (Illustration 5–5) to start the test. During the test, the firmware reads
the metering circuits in the OFF state, then reads the metering circuits in the ON state and
finally reports the readings to the plasma display.
Illustration 5–5 shows the displayed Anode kV, Cathode kV and Total kV values for “Circuit
OFF” and “Circuit ON”. Compare the data in the “Delta” column on the Read Meter screen
(Illustration 5–5) to the data in the “Limit” column.
Note: “Delta” = DVM – A/D.
TABLE 5–1
GENERATOR CHARACTERIZATION TEST SPECIFICATIONS
Circuit OFF Circuit ON

Anode kV = 0 ±0.5 Anode kV = 50 ±7.5
Cathode kV = 0 ±0.5 Cathode kV = 50 ±7.5
Total kV = 0 ±0.5 Total kV = 100 ± 15.0
62
ILLUSTRATION 5–5
READ METER SCREEN
READ METERING
OFF ON
DVM A/D Delta Limit DVM A/D Delta Limi
Anode KV: _____ xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x _____ xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x
Cathode KV: _____ xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x _____ xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x
Total KV: _____ xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x _____ xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x
Anode MA: _____ xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x _____ xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x
Cathode MA: _____ xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x _____ xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x
Current Readings Anode KV Cathode KV Total KV Anode mA Cathode mA

Off: xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x
On: xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x
Run
Enter Time Delay in Seconds: 5
Cancel Utility Tools Gen Cal
5–2–2 mA Meter Verification

This section describes the calibration check of the systems internal mA metering circuits.
DANGER
NEVER PUT ANY BODY PART INTO THE GANTRY WITHOUT
DISABLING THE AXIAL DRIVE AND VERIFYING THAT IT IS
DISABLED. BOTH OF THE AXIAL DRIVE STATUS LEDS (ILL. 5–6)
MUST BE OUT. DO NOT SERVICE THE GANTRY IF EITHER LED IS ON.
FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
HARM, HARM TO OTHERS OR DEATH. BE SURE THAT YOU HAVE
READ DIRECTION 46–018302, CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY
GUIDELINE MANUAL OR HAVE VIEWED 46–018308 SAFETY VIDEO
TAPE PRIOR TO SERVICING THE GANTRY
63
ILLUSTRATION 5–6
AXIAL DRIVE STATUS AND CONTROL
AXIAL DRIVE
STATUS LEDS
AXIAL LOOP 550 BACKUP GANTRY 120VAC GANTRY STATUS

CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR DISPLAY PANEL
CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED
AXIAL DRIVE
ENABLE SWITCH AXIAL DRIVE 550VDC GANTRY 120VAC
ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE
ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF
CAUTION: DISABLES TUBE COOLING

CT3529A
Inside the Gantry:
» Switch off the 550v enable (Illustration 5–6)

» Switch off the axial drive.
» Rotate the Anode tank to the 2 o’clock position.
» Pin the Gantry.
Touch the |Read Metering| softkey on the Generator Characterization Menu. (Illustration
5–3)
Note: On the plasma enter a time delay in seconds, this delay is the time required for you to
walk from the console to the DVM and record the reading. The test will not begin until
this time delay has expired. Once the test begins the meter circuit will be enabled for
only 4 seconds.
Use a DVM as an mA meter; connect it to the hardware on the anode side:

» Connect its black lead to TP8 (ACAL1) on the mA board.
» Connect its red lead to TP11 (ACAL2) on the mA board.
Locate the Anode HV Tank Measurement board (Figure 5–7). If a wire from the harness is
present on TP5, the following test lead is not required. If no wire is present, install a test lead
as follows:
» Use a jumper with a 68 ohm 5 watt resistor in series.
» Connect one end to TP11 (ACAL 2) on the mA board.
» Connect the other end to TP5 on the Anode Tank Measurement board (Illustration 5–7).
On the Plasma, touch the |Run| softkey. Record the displayed and measured Anode mA
values in for “Circuit OFF” and “Circuit ON”.
Note: If your system has the test wire to TP5 included in the harness, the Cathode side should
read approximately 19mA during “Circuit On”.
» Disconnect the test equipment from the Anode side if used.
64
Note: When you exit Utilities, this test generates “kV board tube spit counter = x” error messages.
ILLUSTRATION 5–7
ANODE TANK MEASUREMENT BOARD & OBC CARD CAGE
Measurement Board OBC Board Slot Assignments
J5 Collimator
J1
CTVRC
J
6 MA Control
J
2 C14
KV Control
TP5
Gentry I/O
RCOM
Heurikon (CPU)
Repeat for the Cathode side.
Use a DVM as an mA meter:

» Connect its black lead to TP9 (CCAL1) on the mA board.
» Connect its red lead to TP14 (CCAL2) on the mA board.
Locate the Cathode HV Tank Measurement board (Figure 5–7). If a wire from the harness is
present on TP5, the following test lead is not required. If no wire is present, install a test lead
as follows:
» Use a jumper with a 68 ohm 5 watt resistor in series.
» Connect one end to TP14 (CCAL 2) on the mA board.
» Connect the other end to TP5 on the Cathode Tank Measurement board (Illustration
5–7).
On the Plasma, touch the |Run| softkey. Record the displayed and measured Anode mA
values for “Circuit OFF” and “Circuit ON”.
Note: If your system has the test wire to TP5 included in the harness, the Anode side should
read approximately 20mA during “Circuit On”.
» Disconnect the test equipment from the Cathode side if used.
Note: When you exit Utilities, this test generates “kV board tube spit counter = x” error messages.
65
5–2–3 Set Calseed Values

Use the following sequence to run a partial Install New Tube. Use this procedure to set the
calseed values on a new system. At the Generator Characterization Menu, touch the |Install
New Tube| softkey. The system prompts you if the tube type is correct.
Verify the number corresponds to your tube type, answer y (yes) or n (no):
TABLE 5–2
TUBE TYPE TABLE
SOFTWARE TOKEN HOUSING # INSERT #
1–RSN_2001 ST2000 RS2001
2–RSN_2000 ST2000 RS2000
5–MX_135CT 46–274800G1 46–274600G1
6–MX_165CT 46–309500G2 46–309300G1
7–MX_165CT_I 46–309500G2 46–309300G2
Press Start Scan when illuminated, the program will now run automatically:
– seed filament current shift scans –
Note: ABORT the program after the seed filament current shift scans and before the ductility
warm–up.
Note: The daily warmup program automatically updates the Calseed Values.
5–2–4 Calibrate HV Tank Feedback Resistors

Install HV Divider (Refer to Section 5–2–9).
5–2–4–1 Calibrate Anode and Cathode
Note: Verify which type of kV board is installed in the OBC. Names of components on the
46–321064G1 kV board are shown without brackets. Names of components on the
46–321198G1 kV board are shown in [brackets].
Perform the following, steps using an oscilloscope with 10X probes. (If possible, plug the scope
into the 120 VAC outlet on the PDU. Use an extension cord if necessary. Plugging the scope into
this outlet reduces noise seen on the wave forms.)
» Connect channel one to the anode output of the divider. Scope ground to bleeder ground.
» Connect channel two to the cathode output of the divider. Scope ground to bleeder
ground.
» Trigger channel one, positive, DC couple, trigger mode normal.
» Channel one and two, 10v/div, time base 200ms.
» Invert Channel two.
Display the Generator Characterization menu (Illustration 5–3) and toggle the |Monitor
Enable| softkey to ON to display the kV and mA readings in the message log.
Cathode Calibration
In DDC, take a 1 second, static, 0mm, exposure at 100kV/50mA. Use the large focal spot.
Note: The computer displayed reading spec for the Cathode kV and Anode kV is 50 0.5 kV.
66
Compare the scope reading for the average Cathode kV and the displayed Cathode kV in the
message log.
Note: Use the scope cursors to window the trace. Position the Left Vertical Cursor to the Right
of the Rising Edge of the waveform and position the Right Vertical Cursor to the Left of
the Falling Edge of the Waveform.
Adjust the Cathode pot on the kV Board until the scope reading for the Cathode kV and the
displayed reading for the Cathode kV in the message log are 0.5kV of each other.
Note: The pot labeled CA [CAKV, R316] on the kV board adjusts the scope reading:
» CCW decreases the scope kV.
» CW increases the scope kV.
» 1/2 turn is approximately 0.5 kV..
Record the scope reading for the Cathode kV, and the displayed reading for the Cathode kV
(message log).
Anode Calibration
In DDC, take a 1 second, static, 0mm, exposure at 100kV/50mA. Use the large focal spot.
Compare the scope reading for the average Anode kV and the displayed Anode kV, in the
message log.
Note: Use the scope cursors to window the trace. Position the Left Vertical Cursor to the Right
of the Rising Edge of the waveform and position the Right Vertical Cursor to the Left of
the Falling Edge of the Waveform.
Adjust the Anode pot on the kV board until the scope reading for the Anode kV and the
displayed reading for the Anode kV in the message log are within ±0.5kV of each other.
Note: The pot labeled AN [ANKV, R318] on the kV board adjusts the scope reading:
» CCW decreases the scope kV.
» CW increases the scope kV.
» 1/2 turn is approximately 0.5 kV.
Record the scope reading for the Anode kV and the displayed reading for the Anode kV
(message log).
5–2–4–2 Measure Total kV

To measure the total kV, first change the oscilloscope to add ch.1 and ch.2 (to read total kV
from the HV divider) and set channel one and two for 20v/div, time base 200ms, trigger ch.1,
positive Then, proceed as follows:
» In DDC, take a 1 second, static, 0mm, exposure at 100kV/50mA. Use large focal spot.
» Record the scope reading and Avg. kV as displayed in the message log.
» Display the Generator Characterization menu and toggle the Monitor Enable softkey
OFF, to no longer display the kV and mA readings in the message log. Failure to turn the
Monitor Enable OFF results in the system message log filling with exposure information.
67
5–2–4–3 Verify kV Meter

1. Display the Generator Characterization menu (illustration 5–4) and touch |Read
Metering|, then touch |Run| (illustration 5–5).
2. Record the displayed Anode kV, Cathode kV, and Total kV values.
3. Remove the external HV Divider (reference Section 5–2–10).
5–2–5 Install New Tube Program

Use this program to complete Auto mA Cal on a new tube. Run this program only on a
new tube. Display the Generator Characterization Menu and touch the |Install New Tube|
softkey.
Note: The system automatically warms up the tube.
The system prompts you with the tube type. Verify the number corresponds to your tube
type, answer y or n.
TABLE 5–3
TUBE TYPE TABLE
SOFTWARE TOKEN HOUSING # INSERT #

1–RSN_2001 ST2000 RS2001
2–RSN_2000 ST2000 RS2000
5–MX_135CT 46–274800G1 46–274600G1
6–MX_165CT 46–309500G2 46–309300G1
7–MX_165CT_I 46–309500G2 46–309300G2
Press Start Scan when it illuminates. The system automatically runs the program and
updates the display:
» Seed filament current shift scans
» Ductility warm–up
» Auto mA Cal
The system records the final filament currents on the plasma.
5–2–6 Auto mA Calibration

Run this program for replacement tubes or re–calibration. Display the Generator
Characterization Menu; touch the |Auto mA Cal| softkey.
Note: The system automatically warms up the tube.
Press Start Scan when it illuminates. The system automatically runs the program and
updates the display:
» Ductility warm–up
» Auto mA Cal
The system records the final filament currents on the plasma.
68
5–2–7 KV Rise and Fall Times
Note: Names of components on the 46–321198G1 kV board are shown on this page in
[brackets].
In the OBC connect a scope to the KV board as follows:
» Channel 1, Exposure Command (EXCM, TP22). Scope ground to (LGND, TP6) [TP3].
2v/div
» Channel 2, Total kV (KVTB, TP30) [TP11]. Scope ground to (AGND, TP39) [SIG, TP12].
1v/div
» Set the Scope Time base to 200usec. Positive or Negative trigger as required.
Use DDC to acquire a Stationary, 1.0 sec scan, 0mm aperture, Large Focal Spot scan at the
techniques listed in Table 5–4.
Record the delay between rise/fall of the EXCM signal and the 75% threshold crossing of the
selected kV. Do not include overshoot of the waveform.
Note: The 75% point for:

80kV is 60kV
100kV is 75kV
120kV is 90kV
140kV is 105kV
TABLE 5–4
KV RISE AND FALL TIME RECORD TABLE
Technic Rise Fall

kV mA Record Delay ms Limit Record Delay ms Limit
80 40 0 +1.9ms –0 +2ms
400 0 +1.9ms –0 +0.5ms
100 40 0 +1.9ms –0 +2ms
400 0 +1.9ms –0 +0.5ms
120 40 0 +1.9ms –0 +2ms
400 0 +1.9ms –0 +0.5ms
140 40 0 +1.9ms –0 +2ms
340 0 +1.9ms –0 +0.5ms
Note: See Illustration 5–8 for clarification of measurement.
69
ILLUSTRATION 5–8
RISE AND FALL TIME MEASUREMENT
RISE TIME
EXAMPLE
80kV/40mA
Ch.1
TP 22
EXCM
[TP5]
Names
of
compon RISE
ents on
the TIME
75% OF
46–3211
98G1 kV SE-
board LECTED
Ch.2 TECHNIC
are
TP 30
KVTB shown 0% X–RAY
[TP11] on this
page in
[bracket
s].
FALL TIME
EXAMPLE
80kV/40mA
Ch.1
TP 22
EXCM
[TP5]
100% X–RAY
Names
of
compone
nts on
the 75% OF
46–3211
98G1 kV FALL SE-
board LECTED
Ch.2 TIME TECHNIC
TP 30 are
KVTB shown
[TP11] on this
page in
[brackets
].
70
5–2–8 Verify Internal Scan Timer

Display the Generator Characterization menu (illustration 5–3). Toggle the softkey |Monitor
Enable| to ON, to display the scan time in the message log.
In the OBC, connect a scope to the KV board as follows:
» Channel 1, Exposure Command (EXCM, TP22). Scope ground to (LGND, TP6) [TP3].
2v/div
» Channel 2, Total kV (KVTB, TP30) [TP11]. Scope ground to (AGND, TP39) [SIG, TP12].
1v/div
» Set the Scope Time base to 200msec, positive trigger.
Use DDC to acquire a stationary, 1.0 sec, 0mm, 100kV, 40mA, Large Focal Spot scan.
» Record the measured scan time from the oscilloscope, and the displayed scan time from
the message log. Spec limits are as follows:
Note: Scope Exposure Duration = 0.96 to 1.04 s.
Note: Displayed Exposure Duration = 0.99 to 1.02 s.
Display the Generator Characterization menu (illustration 5–3) and toggle the Monitor Enable
softkey OFF, to no longer display the kV and mA readings in the message log. Failure to turn
the Monitor Enable OFF results in the system message log filling with exposure information.
Disconnect the scope from the kV board and replace the OBC cover.
5–2–9 Install HV Divider

Inside the gantry (refer to illustration 5–6):
» Switch off the 550v enable.

» Switch off the axial drive enable.
» Rotate the Tube to the 3 o’clock position
» Pin the Gantry.
» Switch off the 120 vac Gantry power.
» Install HV Divider between Tube and Tanks (Illustration 5–9).
» Add ground wire (minimum size of AWG 12) from Tube ground to Bleeder ground
(Illustration 5–9).
WARNING: USE A MILD DETERGENT AND WATER TO CLEAN UP ANY SPILLED

INSULATING OIL FROM THE FLOOR OR EQUIPMENT!
Note: A table or a tube hoist for the HV Divider will be necessary to make the cables reach.
» Switch on the 120vac Gantry power.

» Switch on the 550v enable.
71
ILLUSTRATION 5–9
HV DIVIDER INSTALLATION
GROUND WIRE
CATHODE
GRN CABLE TO
GANTRY
CATHODE
C C C
10” H.V. G Oscilloscope

CABLES
A A Connection
A
ANODE
C1515A
DIVIDER
ANODE
CABLE TO
GANTRY
TUBE
WARNING: USE A MILD DETERGENT AND WATER TO CLEAN UP ANY SPILLED

INSULATING OIL FROM THE FLOOR OR EQUIPMENT!
5–2–10 Remove the External HV Divider:

» Press the “Emergency OFF button on the Gantry Mounted Table controls, or press
“X–Ray and Drives OFF” on the REM box, to switch off “X–Ray and Drives” power.
Inside the gantry (refer to illustration 5–6):
» Switch off the 550v enable.
» Switch off the 120vac gantry power.
» Remove the HV Divider between the Tube and Tanks (Illustration 5–9).
» Reconnect the HV cables for normal operation.
» Re–apply paper toweling around tube locking ring to absorb excess oil.
» Un–pin the gantry.
» Switch on the 120vac gantry power.
» Switch on the the 550v enable.
» Switch “ON” the Axial Drive enable.
» Press the “Reset” button on the Gantry Mounted Table controls, or press the “X–Ray
and Drives ON” on the REM box, to switch on “X–Ray and Drives” power.
» Reset the hardware from the plasma.
5–3 Tube Usage Statistics

The display tool, tubeUsage, displays a list of currently viewable tube usage files. The
system stores these files when you save the mechanical characterization.
Open a shell to use this tool. Touch the |Shell| softkey at the Utilities Main Menu (Illustration
5–10) to open and display a unix shell. Type tubeUsage in the shell.
72
ILLUSTRATION 5–10
SHELL BUTTON
UTILITIES MAIN
Diags and Diags CT

Tools Tools
System Shell Service Shutdown

System
Access Notepad
Tools
Cancel
The shell window displays a tube list, with the corresponding installation dates.
root @ RPXX2_OC0 2: tubeUsage

Tube Date Installed
Tube Date Installed

–––– ––––––––––––––
1 Wed Oct 5 20:06:11 1994
2 Fri Jul 29 22:00:55 1994
3 Tue Jun 28 20:42:02 1994
c Cumulative Statistics
q Quit
Choose the tube to display the following:
tube to view:1
Hospital: Name Address
Suite: RPXX2
Installed: Wed Oct 5 20:06:11 CDT 1994
Removed:
Last Scan: Thu Jan 5 08:29:17 CST 1995
Housing Model #: 46–309500G2
Housing Serial #: 89851EC0
Insert Model #: 46–309300G2
Insert Serial #: 316778TU0
Failure Code:
73
Mode: Patient Scans

Number Slices: 52805 (total gantry rotations with X–ray on)
Number KW Slices: 89761 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for
>24kW scans)
KW Hours: 495.66 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour)
Scan Seconds: 69785.19 (total number of seconds of scanning) (1)
Mode: Non–Patient Scans

>24kW scans)
Scan Seconds: 11302.74 (total number of seconds of scanning)
After the first tube change with an RP1.4 software (or later
release), the tube usage screen displays the following information:
Mode: Patient Scans

>24kW scans)
Mode: Non–Patient Scans

>24kW scans)
Mode: Patient Scans – Smart mA

>24kW scans)
Mode: Non–Patient Scans – Smart mA

>24kW scans)
The Smart mA information duplicates the non Smart mA information, except the kW Hours
indicates any reduction in power due to SmartScan use.
5–4 Change Tube Program

Run this program when you change the tube.
74
Note: Words in bold type followed by <ENTER> means to type that word and then press the
ENTER key, e.g. su <ENTER>, means to type the word su and then press the ENTER
key.
<angles> –– This type indicates that a value is DIFFERENT THAN INDICATED IN THIS
DOCUMENT, BUT WITHIN THE CONTEXT OF THE PROMPT. Also represents a
function key e.g. <ENTER> means you must press the ENTER key.
Open a shell, and enter the following unix commands:
genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0: sd –i <ENTER> (Shuts down to unix level).

genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0: su <ENTER>
password: genesis <ENTER>
root @ <suiteID>_OC0: changeTube <ENTER>
Procedure:
» Enter failure code for removed tube.
» From the menu on the screen, enter the number which corresponds to your tube type.
» Enter tube casing serial number.
» Enter tube insert serial number.
From OC0 root prompt, Control D, to exit back to genesis.
Start applications:
root @ <suiteID>_OC0: st <ENTER>
75
Notes:
76
CHAPTER 6 – PDU MAINTENANCE
6–1 G/PDU Safety
EXERCISE EXTREME CARE WHEN SERVICING THE

DANGER PDU. MORE THAN 100 KILOWATTS OF POWER IS
PRESENT IN THE PDU FOR SHORT PERIODS OF TIME.
THEREFORE, CONSIDER ALL POINTS WITHIN THE PDU
TO BE ELECTRICALLY HAZARDOUS. DO NOT WORK IN
THE PDU UNLESS IT IS DE–ENERGIZED. FAILURE TO
HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY OR DEATH.
IN ADDITION, DO NOT WORK ON THE PDU UNTIL YOU

HAVE EITHER READ DIRECTION 46–018302, CT
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINES MANUAL
OR HAVE VIEWED THE CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE
SAFETY VIDEO. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
CAUTION Depending upon date of manufacture, HiSpeed Advantage Systems

have either a Power Distribution Unit (PDU model number
46–327106G1), or a Global Power Distribution Unit (GPDU model
number 2113764). Make sure your reference material corresponds
to the G/PDU on which you’re working
Sections 6–2 to 6–3 contains information for the Global PDU or GPDU
ATTENTION (model number 2113764). The GPDU does not have a REM box. The
GPDU contains an extra set of windings in the isolation transformer to
supply power to the DCRGS assembly, and replaces many of the
individual wire terminations with connectorized cables.
Section 6–4 contains information for the original PDU configuration, with
model number 46–327106G1.
6–2 Major Component Locations in GPDU 2113764
CAUTION Component Area designators for the GPDU are different than for
the original PDU with REM box. Even though some components
within the PDUs are the same, many are different. Refer to the door
diagrams and the Renewal Parts documents for correct part
identification.
77
Illustration 6–1 shows the GPDU component area designators. This manual uses the
component designators as abbreviations for the various components. For example, it refers
to the Circuit Breaker Panel as the “A3” panel.
ILLUSTRATION 6–1
GPDU 2113764 COMPONENT AREA DESIGNATORS
GPDU
DCRGS*
Control Bd
Detail A
A2 Panel
A6 Panel
Servo Amplifier Assy.
Detail B
A1 Panel
Fuses
A5 Panel
Power Distribution Power Input
A3 Panel
A4 Panel
I/O
* DCRGS= Direct Current ReGulated Supply.
6–3 Line Transformer Settings

Use this section to verify or to change transformer settings.
TURN OFF, TAG AND LOCK MAIN WALL POWER BEFORE

CHANGING TAPS. FAILURE TO DISCONNECT POWER AT MAIN
WARNING
INPUT MAY RESULT IN ELECTROCUTION.
Do not touch meter or leads when wall power is on

CAUTION
78
Measure line–to–line voltages at A3F1, A3F2, and A3F3, using a 0–750 AC voltmeter of %
accuracy. Verify that the highest line–to–line voltage does not exceed 1.02 times the lowest
voltage. For example, if the lowest voltage is 474, the highest voltage allowed would be 474 x
1.02 = 483.5 volts.
Refer to Table 6–1 and Illustration 6–2. Locate the nearest nominal line, and verify the
correct tap connections. Verify the corresponding No Load Line to Line Voltage falls within
the minimum and maximum values listed in Table 6–1.
TABLE 6–1
LINE TAP CONNECTION TABLE FOR PDU 2113764
NO LOAD TAP
LINE TO LINE CONNECTIONS
VOLTAGES
NOMINAL MAXIMUM PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C
VOLTAGE RANGE CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS
(± 8%)
480VAC 442 to 518 4–6 4–6 4–6
460VAC 423 to 497 3–5 3–5 3–5
440VAC 405 to 475 3–6 3–6 3–6
420VAC 386 to 454 2–6 2–6 2–6
400VAC 368 to 432 3–7 3–7 3–7
380VAC 350 to 410 2–7 2–7 2–7
360VAC 331 to 389 2–8 2–8 2–8
ILLUSTRATION 6–2
480V TAP SELECTION EXAMPLE GPDU
8 7 2 3 6 5 4 8 7 2 3 6 5 4 8 7 2 3 6 5 4
PHASE PHASE PHASE

6–4 Major Component Locations in PDU 46–327106G1 (PDU
with REM Box)
Component Area designators for the PDU with REM Box are
CAUTION different than for the GPDU. Even though some components within
the PDUs are the same, many are different. Refer to the door
diagrams and the Renewal Parts documents for correct part
identification.
Illustration 6–3 shows the component area designators for the PDU with REM box. This
manual uses the component designators as abbreviations for the various components. For
example, it refers to the Circuit Breaker Panel as the “A3” panel.
79
ILLUSTRATION 6–3
PDU AREA DESIGNATORS
A1 Panel
PDU
DCRGS
Regulator
Direct Current Control
Rotational Gantry Board
Supply.
A2 Panel
Circuit Breaker Panel
Axial Servo Amp

A4 Panel
(Behind A3 Panel)
A3 Panel
Note: Relay Control board on back of A3 panel
Fuse Panel
A5 Panel
6–5 Ground Bus Continuity

If problems arise which point to a possible system grounding problem, follow this ground
continuity check:
a. Remove front cover from PDU A3 (circuit breaker) panel (Ill. 6–3)
b. Remove ribbon cable connector from DCRGS.
c. Verify less than 1 ohm of resistance between the following ground connections:
» Wall ground connection and PDU cabinet
» PDU A2 chassis to the PDU cabinet
» PDU A3–TS5 busbar to the PDU cabinet
d. Reconnect DCRGS ribbon cable connector
80
e. Leave PDU A3 cover (circuit breaker) panel off for now.
6–6 Line Transformer Settings

Use this section to verify or to change transformer settings.
TURN OFF, TAG AND LOCK MAIN WALL POWER BEFORE

CHANGING TAPS. FAILURE TO DISCONNECT POWER AT MAIN
WARNING INPUT MAY RESULT IN ELECTROCUTION.
Do not touch meter or leads when wall power is on

CAUTION
Measure line–to–line voltages at A5–PT4, PT5, and PT6, using a 0–750 AC voltmeter with
% accuracy. Verify that the highest line–to–line voltage does not exceed 1.02 times the
lowest voltage. For example, if the lowest voltage is 474, the highest voltage allowed would
be 474 x 1.02 = 483.5 volts.
Refer to Table 6–2. Locate the nearest nominal line and verify the correct tap connections.
Verify the corresponding No Load Line to Line Voltage falls within the minimum and
maximum values listed in Table 6–2.
Note: For HSA systems with the original PDU and REM box: If input power does not equal 480
38 volts, install a B7997T System Isolation Transformer in line with the 480 volt input power to
the DCRGS. Direction 46–018307 describes the isolation transformer installation and setup.
TABLE 6–2
LINE TAP CONNECTION TABLE FOR PDU 46–327106G1
NO LOAD TAP
LINE TO LINE CONNECTIONS
VOLTAGES (All 3 phases must be same configuration)
PREFERRED MAXIMUM PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C

NOMINAL RANGE RANGE CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION
(5%) (8%)
500V 475 to 525 460 to 540 1–6 1–6 1–6
480V 456 to 504 442 to 518 1–5 1–5 1–5
460V 437 to 483 424 to 496 2–6 2–6 2–6
440V 418 to 462 405 to 475 2–5 2–5 2–5
420V 399 to 441 387 to 453 3–6 3–6 3–6
400V 380 to 420 368 to 432 3–5 3–5 3–5
380V 361 to 399 350 to 410 4–6 4–6 4–6
360V 342 to 378 332 to 388 4–5 4–5 4–5
81
Notes:
82
CHAPTER 7 – HOST COMPUTER/CONSOLE MAINTENANCE
7–1 Option and Service Key Installation

Illustration 7–1 shows the location of services and option keys on the security key circuit
board, located in the right leg of the Genesis console. Install the service keys so the angled
section on the top of the key faces the floor.
ILLUSTRATION 7–1
SERVICE AND OPTION KEY POSITIONS
Key
Not Used Options
In–Site and/or
GE Services
In–House Service
Security Board
7–2 Console and Plasma Diagnostics

Resident in the Genesis console is a set of standalone diagnostic programs to check basic
operations of console functions. To access these diagnostics the console must be powered
up. No other peripherals are required.
To access these diagnostics depress the keyboard <L1> and <C> keys on the keyboard
simultaneously. The Setup screen appears. Proceed as follows:
7–3 Plasma Defect Test

a. Touch the plasma |Invoke| softkey on the plasma to display the Scanning Bar. Verify no
artifacts exist in the plasma display (i.e., lines, dots, etc.)
b. Press any key on the keyboard to exit this test and return to Setup display.
Press and hold the <Ctrl> key while you type DIAG, to access the Diagnostics Menu and the
keyboard and trackball tests.
83
Note: If you entered this diagnostic from the Application menu, the message appears stating
“Entering diagnostics will abort any scan. Do you wish to continue”. Type/enter the letter
“Y” (yes) to the question.
1. Touch the corresponding |Invoke| softkey to execute the following tests.

2. Touch |Stop|, or press the designated key on the keyboard to halt and exit any of the
tests described in this chapter.
7–4 Keyboard Test

1. Touch the |Invoke| softkey for Keyboard Test
2. Verify that the screen displays the correct character when you press the corresponding
key on the keyboard.
3. Touch the |Stop| softkey to exit test.
7–5 Serial Port Loopback Tests

1. Touch |Invoke| softkey for Serial Port Loopback.
2. Select local mode, and use the |Select Ports| softkey, to select and invoke tests on all
ports.
» If ports 0–9 pass all the port tests, continue to the next diagnostic.
Note: If you invoke tests on ports 0–9 separately, serial port 3 will not indicate a pass/fail result.
Do not interpret this as a failure.
3. Verify that all ports pass with no errors.

4. Touch the |Stop| softkey to exit test.
7–6 Touch Tests

1. Touch the |Invoke| softkey (touch test).
2. Touch a minimum of 20 plasma screen locations, and verify that the system recognizes
and highlights all the locations.
3. Touch any key on the keyboard to exit test.
7–7 Knobs Tests

You can run three tests Knobs Test Menu, the window width control test, window level control
test and cursor rotate control test.
1. Touch the |Invoke| softkey to access the Knobs Test menu.
––– Window Width Control Test –––

a. Touch the |Invoke| softkey for Window Width test.
b. Verify crosshair moves using left knob.
––– Window Level Tests –––

a. Touch the |Invoke| softkey for Window Level test.
b. Verify crosshair moves using middle knob.
c. Touch any key to exit test.
––– Cursor Rotate Test –––

a. Touch the |Invoke| softkey for Cursor Rotate). Verify crosshair moves using right knob.
84
b. Touch any key to exit test.
2. Touch |Exit| in the knobs test selection window.
7–8 Trackball Test

1. Touch the |Invoke| softkey Trackball test.
2. Verify crosshair moves with trackball.
3. Touch any key to exit test.
7–9 Plasma Calibration

1. Touch the |Invoke| softkey for Calibrate Plasma
2. Touch crosshairs at top left and bottom right of plasma display as indicated.
3. Touch any key to exit test.
7–10 Autovoice Test

You can run three tests from the Autovoice Test Menu, playback message test, short
diagnostic, and long diagnostic.
1. Touch the |Invoke| softkey for the Autovoice test menu.
––– Playback Message Test –––

a. Touch the |Invoke| softkey (playback message).
b. Verify that you hear a tone at the console speaker and the plasma displays the “Playback
Acknowledged” message upon completion of the diagnostic.
––– Short Diagnostic –––

a. Touch the |Invoke| softkey (Short Diag).
b. Verify the plasma displays the “Test Passed” message upon completion of the diagnostic.
To exit the console and plasma diagnostics and transition back to Applications:
2. Touch the |Exit| softkey to exit test.

3. Touch the |Backup| softkey to exit test.
4. At the Setup Screen, touch the |Backup| softkey. Blank screen appears.
5. Simultaneously press the <L1> and <B> keys to toggle to
the Applications Screen.
7–11 SRU Host Computer Test (sbc0 Test)

The SBC0 Test runs Sun Diagnostics (SunDiag) on the SBC.
SBC0 Test checks the CPU, memory and the disks associated with the SBC.
SBC0 Test, run in a tty terminal interface, probes the system kernel to determine the system
hardware configuration, then automatically displays the devices it found with selected tests
for each device on the status screen.
85
Note: The HNS tape contains the SBC0 Test. If the HNS tape has not been loaded on the
system, place the HNS tape in the tape drive, and press the |SBC0| softkey (Illustration
7–2). A tty window, containing the top menu. opens on the left. Type/enter “quit” to exit.
Remove the HNS tape from the tape drive.
Touch the |SBC0| softkey (Illustration 7–2) and go to the next page.
ILLUSTRATION 7–2
SBC0 TEST SOFTKEY
DIAGNOSTICS
Reset AP Hardware
DAS Reset Apf

Hardware
DOES NOT FUNCTION
Cancel Utility Load

Screens
If you previously loaded the HNS tape: Touch the |SBC0| softkey (Illustration 7–2) to
open the tty window you use to run SBC diagnostics (Illustration 7–3).
If you have to load the HNS tape: The system automatically opens the same tty window
when the tape load finishes.
86
ILLUSTRATION 7–3
TTY WINDOW FOR SBC DIAGS
SBC0 SUN DIAGS
SUNDIAG: STARTING PROBING ROUTINE, PLEASE WAIT....
Illustration 7–4 shows the SBC Diagnostic Top Menu. You can enter any of the commands
shown in brackets at the top of the display on the “Command” line at the bottom of the
display. Either type/enter the entire command in upper or lower case, or use the single letter
that corresponds to each command. .
At the SBC Diagnostic Top Menu (Illustration 7–4), type the word “options” (or the letter “o”) in
the command line at the bottom of the tty window and press <enter> to display the Options menu.
87
ILLUSTRATION 7–4
SBC DIAGNOSTIC TOP MENU
SUNDIAG 1.0_5.10 CPU:SUN–3/60 SYSTEM STATUS: IDLE
[START] [OPTIONS] [STATUS] [SCHEDULE] [OPTFILES] [STOP] [QUIT]

[RESET] [SUSPEND] [RESUME] [ EEPROM ] [LOGFILES] [HELP] [NEXT]
[INTERVENTION]: DISABLE [TESTS]: DEFAULT [NONE/ALL]
MEMORY DEVICES
(MEM) PHYSICAL [OPTION]
ENTER LETTER “O” HERE (KMEM) VIRTUAL [OPTION]
DISK DEVICES
(SD0) SCSI DISK #0 [OPTION]
CPU DEVICES
(68881) FLOATING POINT [OPTION]
(IE0) ETHERNET [OPTION]
(ZS0) SERIAL PORTS [OPTION]
USER TESTS
(USER0) SECURITY, GCP, ATV, GAI [OPTION]
COMMAND:
MESSAGE:
At the Options Menu (Illustration 7–5):
1. Type quicktest <enter> (or q <enter>) to enable Quicktest.

2. Type/enter done (or the letter d) to return to the top menu.
3. Proceed to the next page.
88
ILLUSTRATION 7–5
OPTIONS MENU
<< SYSTEM OPTION MENU >>
[DEFAULT] [DONE] [HELP]
[COREFILE]: DISABLE
[SINGLEPASS]: DISABLE
ENTER LETTER “Q” HERE. [QUICKTEST]: DISABLE
NEXT, ENTER LETTER “D”. [VERBOSE]: DISABLE
[AUTOSTART]: DISABLE
[RUNERROR]: DISABLE
[MAXERRORS]: 1
[CONCURRENT]: 2
[PRINTER]: LP
COMMAND:
MESSAGE:
At the top menu (Illustration 7–6), type/enter start (or the letters)to start test.
Note: When testing starts, the System Status field at the top right corner of the window
(Illustration 7–6) changes from “idle” to “testing”.
Type status <enter> (or type/enter a)to check test progress. Go to next page.
89
ILLUSTRATION 7–6
START THE TEST
SYSTEM STATUS INDICATOR
SUNDIAG 1.0_5.10 CPU:SUN–3/60 SYSTEM STATUS: TESTING

[INTERVENTION]: DISABLE [TESTS]: DEFAULT [NONE/ALL]
MEMORY DEVICES
ENTER LETTER “S” HERE. (KMEM) VIRTUAL [OPTION]
NEXT, ENTER LETTER “A”. DISK DEVICES
CPU DEVICES
USER TESTS
COMMAND:
MESSAGE:
This section describes the status screen shown in Illustration 7–7. The status screen shows
the device name and the test name for each device under test, along with a running total of
test passes and errors. The tests are grouped by device type, and an actively running test is
marked with an asterisk.
When 20 error free system passes have been completed, type/enter done (or the letter d) to exit
status window and transition back to the top menu. Go to next page.
90
ILLUSTRATION 7–7
STATUS SCREEN
SUNDIAG 1.0_5.10 CPU:SUN–3/60 SYSTEM STATUS: TESTING
[NEXT] [DONE] [HELP]

SYSTEM PASSES: 9 TOTAL ERRORS: 0 ELAPSED TIME: 00:00:00
MEMORY DEVICE TESTS:

*(MEM) PMEM PASSES: 15 ERRORS: 0
(KMEM) VIRTUAL PASSES: 0 ERRORS: 0
DISK DEVICE TESTS:
ENTER LETTER “D” HERE (SD0) DEVTEST RO PASSES: 39 ERRORS: 0
*(SD0) DISK RW PASSES: 39 ERRORS: 0
CPU DEVICE TESTS:
*(68881) MC68881 PASSES: 59 ERRORS: 0
*(IE0) NETTEST PASSES: 8 ERRORS: 0
COMMAND:
MESSAGE:
At the top menu (Illustration 7–8):
4. Type/enter stop (or the letter T) in the command line, to stop Quicktest. System status
changes to “idle” to indicate the test has terminated.
5. Next type/enter quit (or the letter Q) to exit SBC Diagnostics,
and close the window
91
ILLUSTRATION 7–8
STOP TEST
SYSTEM STATUS INDICATOR

ENTER LETTER
“T” HERE. [INTERVENTION]: DISABLE [TESTS]: DEFAULT [NONE/ALL]
NEXT, ENTER
LETTER “Q”. MEMORY DEVICES
(KMEM) VIRTUAL [OPTION]
DISK DEVICES
CPU DEVICES
USER TESTS
COMMAND:
MESSAGE:
92
CHAPTER 8 – DAS MAINTENANCE
8–1 Verify X–Ray

This section tests for opens, lows and shorts using X–Ray.
System configuration:
» Flex cables ON
» All covers ON
» Nothing in detector FOV
8–2 DDC Scanning

1. Touch |Utilities| display the Utilities Main menu.
2. Touch |CT Tools| to display the Tool Selection menu:
3. Touch the |DDC| softkey (Diagnostic Data Collection) on the plasma display.
4. Touch the |Real Time Stats| softkey.
5. Touch the |Static X–Ray On| softkey.
6. Press <return>on the keyboard until the Scan Time field highlights. Type/enter 4 second
scan time.
7. Use default technique values of 40 mA and 80 kV.
8. Touch |Air| filter softkey.
9. Touch |5| mm. aperture softkey.
10. Touch the |Small| spot softkey.
11. Type/enter a Run Description name (arbitrary).
12. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey and wait for the Start Scan LED on the keyboard to
illuminate.
13. Press the the (Start Scan) key to initiate the scan.
14. After the scan, the plasma displays the DD filename. Record the filename.
15. Touch the |Backup| softkey.
16. Touch the |Tools| softkey, to return to the Tool Selection menu.
8–3 Data Plot

1. If necessary, touch |Utilities| display the Utilities Main menu.
2. If necessary, touch |CT Tools| to display the Tool Selection menu.
3. Touch the |Analysis| softkey.
4. Touch the |DD| softkey to automatically select the most recent scan.
5. The |Type/Print or Plot| softkey is already illuminated.
6. Touch the |Continue| softkey.
7. Touch the |Plot| softkey for the corresponding output device.
Note: Verify that the first channel is 1 and the total channels is 764.
8. Touch the |Means| softkey.
93
9. Touch the |Continue| softkey.

10. Touch the |Line| softkey.
11. Touch the |Plot| softkey.
Use the report cursor functions to analyze the display data. Stop, and fix channels exhibiting
zero, very low or overrange values.
Typical values:
Ch. 1: 56,000 – 60,000 counts.
Chs. 6–64 and 689–747: 66,000 – 81,000 counts.
Chs. 65–688: 35,000 – 44,000 counts.
These values do not constitute a specification and should only be used for troubleshooting
purposes.
94
CHAPTER 9 – SYSTEM ALIGNMENTS
9–1 Overview
This section describes the x–ray alignment procedures used to optimize the physical
relationships between the tube unit, collimator, and the detector. This chapter contains the
following procedures:
» Plane of Rotation – Adjust tube into or out of the gantry (Z–axis).

Adjust collimator rotation.
» Beam on Window – Adjust detector into or out of the gantry (Z–axis).
» Tube Output and Detector Channel Check – A limit check, no adjustments.
» Radial Alignment – Adjust detector CW or CCW.
» Isocenter Alignment – Adjust tube up/down (Y–axis).
» Center Body Filter and System Sag – Adjust collimator and filter up/down (Y–axis).
Calculate Sag parameters. (no adjustments).
Note: The ISO alignment uses both large and small focal spots; all other alignments use only
the large focal spot.
9–2 Plane Of Rotation (POR)

This procedure checks and adjusts the plane of rotation of the x–ray fan beam to make it
perpendicular to the axis of gantry rotation within 0.010 (0.25mm) across the largest
reconstruction circle (48cm). This procedure offsets the fan beam to account for the slight
shift that occurs with heating of the x–ray tube.
Verify that the tube unit is cold. If you have executed any low
CAUTION technique scans prior to beginning plane of rotation (POR), you
must wait at least 5 minutes before attempting this alignment
procedure. If you have previously executed image scanning and
would like to re–check POR, you must wait at least 90 minutes to
allow the tube unit to cool, e.g., if the tube unit has had greater
than 25 Kilojoules exposure KV x mA x Sec /1000 within the last 30
min. Failure to heed this caution may result in inaccurate POR
alignment
POR Procedure:
1. Place the phantom holder and 48cm phantom on the cradle.
2. Tape a type 52 film at the 3:00 o’clock position on the outside edge of the 48cm phantom,
so that the film projects into the gantry as shown in Illustration 9–1. The side of the film
marked “This side toward lens” should be towards isocenter. When exposed and
developed, the film will show the alignment of the two beams with the table at the left as
viewed from the x–ray tube at the 3:00 o’clock position.
3. Turn on the alignment lights, advance the cradle and position the film for an exposure
near the image center mark on the film pack.
4. Within CT Tools perform an axial scan with x–rays on:
» Touch the |DDC| softkey.
95
» Touch the |View Compressed| softkey.

» Touch the |Axial X–Ray On| softkey.
» Type/enter POR in the Run Description field.
» Type/enter 4 (seconds) for Scan Time.
» Type/enter 0 (degrees) for X–Ray ON Position.
» Type/enter 40 in the mA data field.
» Type/enter 80 in the kV data field.
» Touch the |10|(mm) Aperture softkey.
» Touch the |Bowtie| Filter softkey.
» Touch |Large| Spot Size softkey.
» Touch |Accept Rx| softkey.
» Press the Start Scan key on the console, when it illuminates, to initiate the scan.
» Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC.
5. Remove and develop the film. Mark a “T” on the film to identify the table side as in
Illustration 9–1. Verify that the narrow exposure lays within the wider x–ray exposure.
Note: Examine the edges of the two exposures in the Z direction. Both edges of each beam
should be equally well defined with the edges of the narrow beam much sharper than the
wide beam. If there is a difference in edge definition, check for gross Z misalignment
where the slit in the tube collimator adapter is defining the fuzzy edge. Both edges of the
beam should be defined only by the exit slit of the collimator.
6. Measure the 10 mm exposure to determine the plane of rotation. Use a Pocket

Comparator with reticule or vernier caliper to measure the two widths of the wide beam
not covered by the narrow beam. As shown in Illustration 9–1, these dimensions are
designated as XF(front) and XR(rear). Therefore, the difference in center lines of the two
beams is [XF–XR]/2.
7. To meet the “cold” tube conditions and maintain the perpendicularity specification of the
fan beam, [XF–XR]/2 must fall in the range of 0.0 to –0.010 (0.0 to –0.25mm),i.e., XF
must be slightly less than XR.
If the 10mm beam XF and XR measurements do not meet the specification in step 7., shift
the Z position of the x–ray tube toward the wider of the two beams. By gantry geometry, the
tube shift should be 0.26 times the difference between XF and (XR –0.02 ). In other words,
the x–ray tube needs to be shifted by the formula:
Tube Shift = 0.26 [XF–XR + 0.02 ] = 0.26 [XF–XR + 0.5mm]
96
ILLUSTRATION 9–1
POR SETUP
XR XR
XF 0.07" XF
0.23" 0.14"
0.15"
48Ccm PE
PHANTOM
TAPE
GANTRY FILM
HERE
T T
NARROW BEAM
TUBE AT
270 THEA
WIDE BEAM
TABLE TUBE AT GANTRY
DIRECTION 90 THEA DIRECTION
TABLE
CT2721A
Note: A positive tube shift moves the tube toward the table, a negative shift towards the gantry.
In the example of Illustration 9–2, the x–ray tube should be moved toward the table to shift
the wide beam to be better centered over the narrow beam. The x–ray tube should be shifted
0.26(0.23–0.07 + 0.02)= 0.047 inches.
Wait 5 minutes and perform the following for the 1.0mm aperture:
1. Repeat the previous steps for the 1.0mm aperture.

2. Remove and develop the film pack.
3. Since it is difficult to measure beam centering on the 1.0mm aperture plane of rotation,
only perform a visual inspection and note the observed findings. Examine the 1.0 mm
exposure and check that the edges of the wide beam can be seen on either side of the
narrow beam.
4. Attach the exposed film to your site log.
When the Plane of Rotation is within specification, tighten the four tube mounting bolts to a
torque of 30 +3.0 ft–lbs. (360 +36 in.–lbs.).
Note: Hand tighten the circular knurled nut to prevent the Z adjust lever from rattling loose.
97
9–3 Beam On Window (BOW)

This procedure checks and adjusts the position of the detector window so that it intercepts
the entire width of the x–ray fan beam under worst case conditions. This procedure offsets
the beam to account for the fan beam shift toward the table that occurs with heating of the
x–ray tube.

ACCESSING THE GANTRY. BE SURE THAT BOTH THE LOOP
WARNING
CONTACTOR AND GANTRY 550 ENABLE SWITCH ARE OFF PRIOR
TO ACCESSING THE GANTRY. ALSO, BE SURE THAT YOU HAVE
GUIDELINES MANUAL OR HAVE VIEWED 46–018308 CT HISPEED
ADVANTAGE SAFETY VIDEO PRIOR TO SERVICING THESE
SUBSYSTEMS.
CAUTION technique scans prior to beginning beam on window (BOW), you
would like to re–check BOW, you must wait at least 30 minutes to
min. Failure to heed this caution may result in inaccurate BOW
alignment.
Proceed as follows:
1. Display the Tools Selection Menu and use the DDC function to move the tube to 0
azimuth position:
» Touch the |DDC| softkey on the plasma.
» Touch the POSITION TUBE softkey.
» Enter 0 in the tube position entry field and press carriage return.
» Message appears saying “Is gantry clear?”. If gantry is clear, select “yes”.
2. Turn off the gantry loop contactor switch and the Gantry 550v enable switch. The X–Ray
tube should remain in the gantry 12 o’clock position, (0 tube position).
3. With the detector at the six o’clock position, place three pieces of Polaroid film on the
detector as shown in Illustration 9–2. Orient the film with the side marked “This side
toward lens” toward the detector.
98
ILLUSTRATION 9–2
BEAM ON WINDOW FILM POSITIONING
4. Butt the metal strip on the film up tightly against the rotating base of the gantry.
5. Make a small pencil mark on both sides of the film at the edge of the detector window
closest to the table.
99
6. Note the position of each film and remove all three pieces of film. Press heavily on the
film and draw a line on the film between the marks you made previously. This line must
show on the film after it is developed.
7. Place the films back in their positions on the detector. Verify that the pencil marks of step
6 align with the detector window. Secure with masking tape.
8. With the film properly positioned on the detector, place both the loop contactor switch
and the Gantry 550 enable switch in the gantry to the ON position.
9. Within CT Tools perform a stationary scan as follows:
» Touch the |Position Tube| softkey.
» Type/enter 0 (degrees) in the X–Ray On Position data field.
» Message appears: “Is gantry clear?”. If gantry is clear, select “yes”.
» Touch the |Data Collection| softkey.
» Touch the |Real Time Stat| softkey.
» Touch the |Static X–Ray On| softkey.
» Type/enter BOW in the Run Description data field.
» Type/enter 2 in Scan Time data field.
» Type/enter the 40 in mA data field.
» Type/enter 80 in kV data field.
» Touch the |1| (mm) Aperture softkey.
» Touch the |Air| Filter softkey.
» Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey.
» Touch the |Start Scan| softkey when prompted.
10. Refer to Illustration 9–2. Make two lines on the exposed films: One line
exactly 1/16 inch (1.6mm) from the first line toward the gantry, another line exactly 1.24
(31.5mm) from the second line.
11. The center of the X–Ray beam must be toward the gantry on the detector window. The
x–ray beam center (CL EXPOSURE) must be within 0.00472 inches to 0.03465 inches
(0.12 to 0.88 mm) of the detector window center but displaced toward the Gantry, as
shown in Illustration 9–2.
12. After the scan completes, remove and develop the films. Be sure to mark them to
remember their relative positions.
Use a vernier caliper or pocket comparator with mm or inch scale reticle to measure the
difference between these centerlines. Measure the two edges between the exposure and the
window. If these dimensions are XF(front) and XR(rear) the centerline difference equals:
XF – XR
2
To meet specification, use the following formula:
XF – XR = 0.04 0.015 inches or XF – XR = 1.0 0.4 mm
If adjustment is required, proceed as follows Refer to illustration 9–5:
a. Loosen all three of the detector mounting nuts, even if only one or two need adjustment.
100
b. Loosen only the adjustment locking nuts on the mounts which require adjustment.
c. Turn the mounting studs the specified number of flats (1 flat = 0.00727 inches or 0.182
millimeters) to bring the detector into alignment, using the locking nut as a reference for
the number of flats.
Note: Adjust the detector hardware CW to move the detector toward the gantry.
d. Hold the adjustment stud with a wrench while you tighten the adjustment locking nut.
e. Tighten the detector mounting nuts.
9–4 Image Noise Check

Use this check to verify the integrity of the tube output, as well as normal channel output. The
procedure involves scanning the water section of the Quality Assurance and Performance
(QA) Phantom (46–241709G1) and measuring the image noise (i.e., standard deviation of
the ROI). Proceed as follows:
Image Noise Check procedure:

a. Perform 4 axial scan slices of the 20 cm section (water) of the QA phantom against the
small cal at a technique of:
––– 20 cm/S/120 kV/170 mA/10 mm/2 s –––

b. Place a 51 x 51 pixel ROI box at coordinates 255, 255 for each of the 4 slices.
c. Record the mean CT number and the standard deviation for each slice.
d. Calculate the 4 slice average of the mean CT number and the standard deviation.
Specifications:
a. Four slice average for the mean CT number should be 0.0 3.0.
b. If tube has less than 5000 scans, 4 slice average for the standard deviation range should
be 3.00 to 3.60.
c. If tube has more than 5000 scans, 4 slice average for the standard deviation range
should be 3.00 to 3.80.
Replace the tube if the test results exceeds the specifications depicted above.
9–5 Radial Alignment

Radial alignment is performed only if you have installed a new detector. Otherwise, skip this
section and go directly to Isocenter Alignment (section 9–6). Radial alignment need only be
done for detector installations or if the detector has been removed from the gantry for any
reason.
101

ACCESSING THE GANTRY. BE SURE THAT BOTH THE LOOP
WARNING CONTACTOR AND GANTRY 550 ENABLE SWITCH ARE OFF PRIOR
TO ACCESSING THE GANTRY. ALSO, BE SURE THAT YOU HAVE
GUIDELINES MANUAL OR HAVE VIEWED 46–018308 CT HISPEED
ADVANTAGE SAFETY VIDEO PRIOR TO SERVICING THESE
SUBSYSTEMS.
CAUTION technique scans prior to beginning radial alignment, you must wait
at least 5 minutes before attempting this alignment procedure. If
you have previously executed image scanning and would like to
re–check radial alignment, you must wait at least 90 minutes to
min. Failure to heed this caution may result in inaccurate radial
alignment.
Note: A rough ISO center adjustment must be made prior to radial alignment. Use the
Isocenter Alignment procedure (section 9–6) and move the tube so that it is within .005 (
0.10 channels) of the correct position. Don’t bother trying to tweak it in perfectly at this
point. When ISO is roughly set, start with step 1 below.
Requirement:The initial starting position of the cam must be in the center

of its range of motion.
1. Touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection screen. Use the DDC function to move
the tube to the 0 azimuth position:
» Touch the |DDC| softkey on the plasma.
» Touch the |Position Tube| softkey.
» Type/enter |180| (degrees) in the tube position entry field.
» Tube moves to the bottom of the gantry.
2. Turn off the gantry loop contactor switch and the Gantry 550 enable switch. The gantry
is now oriented such that the x–ray tube unit is positioned at the 6 o’clock position, (180
tube position).
3. With the detector at the 12 o’clock position, install the rotational alignment tools on the
detector. The pin must project into the X–Ray beam (Illustration 9–3). First, place the tool
which contains the pin on the detector but do not tighten the holding screw. Then locate
the other tool over the pin and in the locating holes, on the detector, and finger tighten
the holding screws. Removal is the reverse of installation.
4. Turn ON both the loop contactor switch and 550v enable switch in the gantry.
102
ILLUSTRATION 9–3
INSTALL ROTATIONAL ALIGNMENT TOOL
NOTE: Some detectors may be
slightly warped as evidenced by
space between the adjoining legs of
the rotational alignment tool. If this
occurs, switch the legs of the tool.
5. Display the Utilities Main Menu and touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection
Menu. Prepare for a stationary scan with DDC:
» Touch |Stat X–Ray On| softkey.
» Type/enter RAD ALIGN in Run Description field.
» Type/enter 2 (seconds) in the Scan Time data field.
» Type/enter 0 (degrees) in the X–Ray ON Position data field.
» Type/enter 40 in the mA data field.
» Type/enter 80 in the kV data field.
» Touch the |Large| Spot Size softkey.
» Touch the Start Scan key on the keyboard, when it illuminates, to initiate the scan.
» Touch |Tools| to exit DDC.
» Touch |Tools| (or |CT Tools|) to display the Tools Selection Menu.
» Touch the |Analysis| softkey.
» Touch the |Scan| softkey.
103
» Touch the |Centroid| softkey and type/enter the suite ID, exam, series, and scan
information recorded in step 5.
» Touch the |Continue| softkey.
6. Now, edit the Centroid menu to reflect the following:
» Calfile name is the same as the Isocal file used above.
» Static.
» Pin for the body file.
» Pin for first channel to search for.
» Number of channels on either side to include 10.
» Touch |Continue| when all information is entered correctly.
» When all information is correct on the Plot Parameters screen,
touch |Plot|.
» Touch |Info| to see the centroid information.
The radial adjustment limits equals 376.4 ±2 channels.
If your system is within the limit, no adjustment is necessary. Continue with isocenter center
alignment (section 9–6). If outside of the limits, the detector will have to be rotated. At this
point, calculate the motion required to reach the channel you are aiming for.
Note: Rotate the detector CW to move the pin to a lower channel number.
Rotate the detector CCW to move the pin to a higher channel.
Example: Assume that the average centroid of the pin scan equals 374.700. To determine
the amount of detector rotation to properly position the detector:
Motion = |376.4 – 374.700| X .0226 = .038
To move the pin projection to a higher channel, move the detector adjustment cam so the
detector moves 0.038 ” CCW. (End of example.)
Install a dial indicator on the side of the detector with the rotational adjustment hardware. Set
it to 0.000 . See Illustration 9–5.
1. Loosen all three sets of the large detector mounting nuts slightly, so that they are finger
tight. See Illustration 9–5.
2. Loosen the allen head rotational adjustment locking screws.
See Illustration 9–4.
3. Move the detector by the calculated amount.
4. Tighten the allen head rotational adjustment locking screws.
5. Torque the inside detector mounting nuts to 25 ft–lbs. While holding the inside nut to
keep it from turning, torque the outside nuts to 25 ft–lbs. If you don’t have a torque
wrench, tighten the nuts until finger tight, then tighten 1⁄2 flat with a wrench.
6. Repeat the Radial Alignment procedure to verify the adjustment.
104
ILLUSTRATION 9–4
ROTATIONAL HARDWARE
ROTATIONAL
ADJUSTMENT
LOCKING
SCREW
ROTATIONAL
ADJUSTMENT
DETECTOR HEX
MOUNTING
NUT
ROTATIONAL
ADJUSTMENT
LOCKING
DIAL SCREW
INDICATOR
ct2830
ILLUSTRATION 9–5
DETAIL OF MOUNTING/ADJUSTMENT HARDWARE
BOW ADJUSTMENT
LOCK NUT
ALLEN HEAD
ROTATIONAL ROTATIONAL
ADJUSTMENT LOCKING
BOW DETECTOR CAM SCREW
ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING
NUTS
ALLEN HEAD
ROTATIONAL
ADJUSTMENT
ALLEN HEAD ALLEN HEAD SCREW
ROTATIONAL
ÍÍÍ
ÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍ
ROTATIONAL
ADJUSTMENT LOCKING
SCREW
ÈÈÈÈ
ÍÍÍ
ÍÍ ÈÈÈÈ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
SCREW
DETECTOR
MOUNTING
ROTATIONAL
ÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ NUTS
ADJUSTMENT
CAM
ALLEN HEAD
ROTATIONAL
LOCKING
SCREW
ct
9–6 Isocenter Alignment

This procedure aligns the tube focal spot with the detector center.
105
CAUTION technique scans prior to beginning isocenter alignment (ISO), you
would like to re–check ISO, you must wait at least 90 minutes to
min. Failure to heed this caution may result in inaccurate ISO
alignment.
9–7 Isocenter Calculation

1. With nothing in the gantry scan plane, acquire an air scan using the Large focal spot:
» Touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu.
» Type/enter AIR LARGE in the Run Description data field.
» Scan Time = 4 s
» Scan Speed = 4 s
» Number of Scans = 1
» Interscan Delay = 2 s
» X–ray On Position = 0
» mA= 40
» kV = 80
» Touch |Normal| (Normalize) softkey for data mode.
» Touch the (Start Scan) key on the keyboard, when it lights, to initiate the scan.
» Record the DD file name.
2. Next, acquire an air scan using the Small focal spot:
» Type/enter AIR SMALL in the Run Description data field.
» Scan Time = 4 s
» Scan Speed = 4 s
106
» mA= 40
» kV = 80
» Touch the |Small| Spot Size softkey.
» Touch |Normal| (Normalize) softkey for data mode.
» Record the DD file name.
» Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC
After you acquire the two air files (one Large focal spot and one Small focal spot), attach a
small metal pin (i.e., Craftsman #0 Phillips screwdriver) to the end of the table nearest the
gantry or phantom holder. Secure the screwdriver with masking tape so that it remains
perpendicular to the scan plane. Position the gantry to 0 tilt. Move the table forward to
position the metal pin 1.4 up and 1.4 right of isocenter, as determined by the laser
alignment lights.
Note: Always use a 1/8 (0.125 inch) diameter metal shaft. The detector alignment program is
sensitive to a larger shade caused by a larger diameter screwdriver. Never position the
metal pin at isocenter. The metal pin should remain level with the untilted gantry (0 tilt).
3. Position the pin in the scan plane, and acquire a pin scan with the Large focal spot:
» Touch the |Reserve Scan| softkey.
» Type/enter PIN LARGE in the Run Description data field.
» Scan Time = 4 s
» Scan Speed = 4 s
» mA= 40
» kV = 80
» Touch the |Large| FOV softkey.
» Touch the |4:1| softkey (Compression Factor)
» Cal Vector = None (No selections)
107
» Record the exam/series/scan# file name.

4. Acquire a pin scan with the small focal spot:
» Touch the |Reserve Scan| softkey.
» Type/enter PIN SMALL in the Run Description data field.
» Scan Time = 4 s
» Scan Speed = 4 s
» mA= 40
» kV = 80
» Touch the |Small| FOV softkey.
» Cal Vector = None (No selections)
» Record the exam/series/scan# file name.
5. Touch the |Tube Align| softkey shown in Illustration 9–6.
108
ILLUSTRATION 9–6
SELECT TUBE ALIGNMENT
TOOL SELECTIONS


Perform Slope

Select Scans Scans
Scanning DDC
Diagnostics
Utility File
Functions Manager
Cancel Utility
6. Touch the |Manual Calc| softkey shown in Illustration 9–7.

ILLUSTRATION 9–7
SELECT MANUAL CALCULATIONS
TUBE ALIGNMENT
Manual
Calc
7. Touch the |Iso Align| softkey shown in Illustration 9–8.
109
ILLUSTRATION 9–8
SELECT ISOCENTER PROGRAM
MANUAL CALCULATIONS
Iso CBF and

Align SAG
Cancel Utility Tools Tube

Align
ILLUSTRATION 9–9
MANUAL CALCULATIONS SCREEN
MANUAL CALCULATIONS
Iso CBF and

Calculate
Align SAG
Adjustments
List/Sel
Air scan files:
DD Files
List/Sel Exam: Suite ID:

Diag Scan
Series: Scan:
Store DD file No Yes

in database?
Cancel Utility Tools Tube Accept

Align
8. Illustration 9–9 shows the Manual Calculations screen. Proceed as follows:

9. Enter the DD file (air scan)created in step 1 (large iso air scan).
10. Enter exam #, series # and scan # for the scan file created in step 3 (large iso pin scan).
Enter suite ID.
110
11. Touch the |Accept| softkey. Large spot isocenter will be calculated and recommendation
for tube movement displayed if isocenter is outside its limits. Record the displayed data,
then touch the |Tools| softkey to exit the alignment program.
12. Touch the |Tube Align| softkey (see Illustration 9–9) to return to the Manual Calculations
screen shown in Illustration 9–8. Touch the |Iso Align| softkey.
13. Enter the DD file created in step 2 (the small iso air scan).
14. Enter exam #, series # and scan # for the scan file created in step 4
(the small iso pin scan).
15. Touch the |Accept| softkey. Small spot isocenter will be calculated and recommendation
for tube movement displayed if isocenter is outside its limits. Record the displayed data,
then touch the |Tools| softkey to exit the alignment program.
16. First, calculate the average isocenter value by averaging the isovalue for the small spot
with the isovalue for the large spot:
Mean = (isoSmall + isoLarge) / 2.
Note: The specification for proper isocenter alignment equals 373.75 ±0.02 channels (i.e., the
average of the 2 iso values in step 16). If the isovalue is in spec, then do not shift the
tube. If the isovalue is out of spec, calculate the required tube shift during the next step.
17. Calculate distance to move tube in millimeters or inches:

» Tube shift_in_mm = (mean – 373.75) * 1.36468
OR
» Tube shift_in_inches = “(mean – 373.75) * 0.053728”.
Note: If the resulting tube shift value is a negative number, move the tube down. If the value is
positive, then the tube should be moved up.
Adjust the tube, as described in section 9–8, and repeat steps 1 through 16 to verify whether
isocenter is in spec. Continue iteration until the spec is met.
9–8 Isocenter Adjustment

If the calculated ISOCENTER value falls outside the specification, adjust the tube unit by the
amount as displayed on the CRT with the following procedure:
Select the Starrett #25–141 gauge (0.001 inch to 0.250 inch) which is attached to the
nonmagnetic holding fixture and bolt the gauge and its holding fixture to the special tube
mounting bracket. Zero out gauge before you loosen the mounting bolts. Loosen the four
mounting bolts (9/16 ) holding the tube unit to the gantry mounting plate and the top 0.750
inch nut on the vertical adjustment screw.
Move the tube in the direction and prescribed amount called out on the previous CRT display
as measured on the ISOCENTER gauge.
Note: A clockwise turn on the vertical adjustment screw will move the tube up. A counter
clockwise adjustment will move the tube down.
Bolt down the tube mounting bolts to a torque of 30 +3.0 ft. lbs..
Repeat ISO Scans until the ISOCENTER specification is satisfied (i.e., 373.75 +0.02
channels).
111
Note: If the ISO projects outside 373.75 +0.1 channels, you do not have to wait between tube
adjustment and the test scan.
If the ISO projects between +0.02 and +0.1 Channels, then wait 5 minutes after tube
adjustment before scanning.
If the ISO projects to be within 373.75 + 0.02 channels, wait 5 minutes then repeat scan to
verify that the results remain within spec.
Recheck POR at 10mm aperture to verify that plane on rotation has

CAUTION not changed. Remember to wait 5 minutes after last ISO Scan
before executing the plane of rotation recheck scan. If the plane of
rotation appears to have changed, DO NOT make any adjustments
in tube positioning, wait 30 minutes and repeat the plane of rotation
check again. If after the second check the plane of rotation appears
to have changed, make the necessary tube positioning adjustments
in order to be in specification and redo X–Ray beam to Detector
Window and ISO Center Alignments to ensure that they have not
changed.
DO NOT RECHECK RADIAL ALIGNMENT. If a rough ISO was done per procedure before
the radial alignment, the final ISO shouldn’t affect the radial adversely. ISO must be the last
tube adjustment.
9–9 Update Configuration Files With New Isovalues

Once the tube isocenter alignment is in spec, edit the ScanHardware.cfg file and the INFO
file as described below. The text and symbols used to denote unix commands, function keys,
etc. are defined as follows:
bold print – Words in bold type followed by <ENTER> means to type that word and then
press the ENTER key, e.g. root <ENTER>, means to type the word “root” and then press
the ENTER key.
<angles> – This type indicates that a value is DIFFERENT THAN INDICATED IN THIS
DOCUMENT, BUT WITHIN THE CONTEXT OF THE PROMPT. It also represents a function
key e.g. <suiteID> means to type in the actual suite ID.
This section presumes that the user knows how to use the “vi text
CAUTION editor”. Misuse of vi can seriously corrupt configuration files which
causes severe system problems. Commands for using vi are found
in direction 46–015523, SunOS / Genesis Quick Reference Guide.
9–9–1 Update ScanHardware.cfg

The ScanHardware.cfg file on both the OC and SBC must be updated with the new iso
values using the vi text editor. Proceed as follows:
112
genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 : cd /w/config <ENTER>

genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 : vi ScanHardware.cfg <ENTER>
You are now in the ScanHardware.cfg text file on the OC. Use the “/” command to search
and find the variable with the iso value that must be changed . For example:
» Type the character /. It is echoed at the bottom line on the screen.

» Type isoSmallSpot behind the / character followed by a carriage return.
» vi places the cursor at the text string isoSmallSpot.
» Edit the small spot isocenter with the new value displayed by the system back in step 15.
of section 9–7.
» The large spot variable, called isoLargeSpot is just below the isoSmallSpot variable. Edit
the large spot isocenter with the new value displayed by the system back in step 11. of
section 9–7.
Next, edit the same 2 variables in the ScanHardware.cfg file on the SBC. Proceed as follows:
genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 : rlogin <suiteID>_SBC0 <ENTER>

genesis @ <suiteID>_SBC0 : cd /w/config <ENTER>
genesis @ <suiteID>_SBC0 : vi ScanHardware.cfg <ENTER>
Edit the values for the variables isoSmallSpot and isoLargeSpot as you did for the OC
9–9–2 Update INFO File
The INFO file on the OC must be updated with the new iso value. Proceed as follows:
genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 : cd /usr/local/bin <ENTER>

genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 : vi INFO <ENTER>
Search on the same two variable names as described in the previous section (9–9–1). Edit
the small and large spot isovalues.
9–10 CBF and SAG

This procedure aligns the center of the body filter coincidence with isocenter alignment and
measures the change in alignment during a rotating scan. It reports the peak amplitude
difference in channel numbers as well as the hysteresis or difference in channel numbers
between first and last views of a scan.
CAUTION technique scans prior to beginning CBF alignment, you must wait
at least 5 minutes before attempting this alignment procedure. If
you have previously executed image scanning and would like to
re–check CBF and SAG, you must wait at least 90 minutes to allow
the tube unit to cool, e.g., if the tube unit has had greater than 25
Kilojoules exposure KV x mA x Sec /1000 within the last 30 min.
Failure to heed this caution may result in inaccurate CBF and SAG
alignment
9–10–1 CBF Calculation

1. Acquire a CBF scan:
Touch the |DDC| softkey.
113

» Touch the |Rotating X–Ray On| softkey.
» Type/enter CBF in the Run Description data field.
» Scan Time = 4 s
» mA= 40
» kV = 80
» Touch the |Bowtie| Filter softkey.
» Touch the Start Scan key, when it lights, to initiate the scan.
» Record the exam/series/scan# file name displayed on the plasma.
» Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC and return to the Tool Selection (CT Tools)
screen.
2. In CT Tools, touch the |Tube Alignment| softkey.

3. Touch the |Manual Calc| softkey.
4. Touch the CBF and SAG softkey.
5. Enter the DD file (air scan) from section 9–7, Step 1.(large spot iso air scan).
6. Enter the exam#, series# and scan# for the CBF scan file created in step 1. Enter the
suite ID.
7. Enter the isocenter value for the large spot recorded back in
section 9–7, step 11.
8. Enter exam #, series # and scan # for the scan file created in section 9–7, step 3. (large
iso pin scan). Enter suite ID.
9. Touch the |Accept| softkey.
The program will calculate CBF and display it along with recommendations for moving
the collimator if CBF is outside specifications. The program calculates and displays the
maximum channel difference, the azimuthal location of the channel difference, and the
difference between first and last views in channels. Record the information and then
press TOOLS button to exit the Tube Alignment program.
If the calculated CBF value is not in specification (373.75 +.2), the collimator will have to
be adjusted by the amount displayed on the CRT via the following steps:
a. Wait 5 minutes between exposures.
b. Mount the gauge and its nonmagnetic holding fixture to the special mounting bracket of
the collimator.
c. Zero out the gauge and loosen the four mounting bolts of the collimator which are located
at the four slotted holes of the collimator.
d. Adjust the 3/4 inch bolt (located at the end of the collimator) to move the collimator right
or left the required amount. Plasma displays CBF adjustments in up and down direction.
UP=Collimator movement to the right, and DOWN=collimator movement to the left.
e. Bolt down the collimator. The torque requirement on the four lock bolts is 10 +1.0 ft. lbs.
(120 +12 in. lbs.).
114
f. Repeat CBF scans and this adjustment until the CBF specification is satisfied.
g. Remove gauge and holding fixture from Gantry.
h. Record the CBF and SAG values.
115
CHAPTER 10 – ZE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM COLD and

OC/SBC SYSTEM RECONFIGURATION
10–1 Introduction
ZE Load From Cold: Use sections 10–1 through 10–20–6 to load the Unix operating
system and ZE application software on the HiSpeed Advantage System. Follow this
document sequence to install the operating system. You will cause problems if you skip
steps or perform them out of sequence. The following procedure describes the CT OC and
SBC software installation procedure. This procedure uses the YP Master as its example,
because the YP Master is always the first machine installed in a Suite.
Note: You can supplement this procedure with the more detailed Installation User’s Manual,
Genesis Release 4.1 document.
Use the Load From Cold procedure to:
» Load software after a system installation or upgrade.

» Load software upgrades
» Change Hosttype
» Change Disk Partitions
» Add second disk drive to the OC (Requires a LFC because disk partitions change on
both drives)
Certain repairs and upgrades require a software LFC on either the OC or SBC.
» LFC on OC only: Section 10–22.

» LFC on SBC only: Section 10–23
Configure systems with pre–installed software: Sometimes the system is shipped with
all software loaded. If this is the case, run reconfig to reset the databases on both the OC
and SBC.
Note: Refer to IP Bulk memory documentation for the IP Bulk memory configuration procedure.
10–1–1 OC/SBC System Reconfiguration Introduction

Reconfigure systems with existing software: Sections 10–25 through 10–31 describe the
procedure to reconfigure the existing software of a HiSpeed Advantage system. You can
change most of the parameters you entered during a software Load From Cold, without
returning to the LFC procedure.
The OC/SBC System Reconfiguration contains the procedures which require the reconfig
program. Section 10–32 and 10–33 contain stand–alone scripts, used to Change system time
and Image Transfer hosts.
Use rconfig software to change the following parameters:
» SuiteID: Section 10–28–1

» Hospital Name: Section 10–28–2
» Reset the Database: Section 10–28–3
116
» Patient Exam number: Section 10–28–4

» Replace HSD on SBC: Section 10–28–5
» Time Zone: Section 10–29–1, on page 137
» Time Format, Date Format and Date Separator: Section 10–29–2, on page 138
» Doctor’s Title: Section 10–29–3, on page 138
» Patient Weight unit: Section 10–29–4, on page 138
» Optical Disk or Reel Tape number: Section 10–29–5, on page 138
» Camera Configuration: Section 10–30–1, on page 139
» IP Refresh Rate: Section 10–30–2, on page 139
» Video Tape Interface: Section 10–30–3, on page 140
» Add/Remove Printer: Section 10–30–4, on page 140
» Tube information: Section 10–30–5, on page 140
» E–DAS Type: Section 10–30–6, on page 140
» Internet Address: Section 10–31–1, on page 142
» Suite Configuration: Section 10–31–2, on page 142
» ACRNEMA Address: Section 10–31–3, on page 142
» Primary Archive Node (PAN): Section 10–31–4, on page 142
» Add/Remove 2nd Ethernet board on OC: Section 10–31–5, on page 142
» Add/Remove 2nd Ethernet board on IC: Section 10–31–6, on page 143
Additional stand–alone procedures:
» Change the System Time: Section 10–32, on page 143

» Add or Remove Image Transfer Hosts: Section 10–33, on page 143
Run reconfig on OC only, to:
» Change the Hospital Name

» Change the Time Format, Date Format, or Date Separator
» Change the Doctor’s Title
» Change the Units for Patient Weight
» Change the Patient Exam number
» Change the Optical Disk or Reel Tape number
» Change the Camera Configuration
» Change the IP Refresh Rate
» Change the Video Tape Interface
» Add/Remove a Printer
» Change the ACRNEMA Address
» Change the Primary Archive Node (PAN)
» Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on the OC
» Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on an IC in the Suite
Run reconfig on OC and SBC, to:
» Change the Suite ID

» Change the Timezone
117
» Change the Daylight Savings Time value

» Add New Tube Information
» Change the E–DAS type
» Change the Internet Addresses
» Change the Suite Configuration
10–2 Tape Set

Use the OS and applications a tape to install the system:
HLFC (SunOS, CSE Applications, CT OC, & SBC Applications)
Note: Use a blank DAT Tape (46–317751P1) to save existing system generated parameters and
information prior to the start of a Load From Cold.
The following list contains the names optional proprietary and non–proprietary diagnostic
tapes:
a. Advanced Services Diagnostics Tape (CT DIAG)

b. HNS (OC and SBC)
c. HPS (OC and SBC)
d. SunDiag Exec
e. InSite Product Tape
Note: Type the text shown in boldface, and press the <enter> key on the keyboard.
(Type/enter bold = Type bold <enter>.) System Text output is shown in system font:
genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0:
10–3 Initial Installations

Initial Software Installation: Gather the following information before you install software on
the system for the first time:
a. Internet (IP) addresses – If the system connects to a network, ask your system
administrator for the list of IP addresses of all the computers in the suite. Obtain an IP
address for each gateway (second) ethernet board in any OC or IC. Use the default
internet numbers on stand–alone systems (not connected to any network).
b. Ethernet number of SBC – number located inside the SRU door. Write it down here.
Note: First–time software installations, proceed directly to section 10–5.
10–4 Save System Parameters

Previously installed systems contain sets of parameters and files, unique to each system.
Save existing system information on a blank DAT before the start of a Load From Cold
(LFC), and reload it after you complete the LFC. If you forget to save system parameters,
you will have to “manually” characterize and calibrate the system.
10–4–1 Save System State

1. Display the Utilities Main menu and, select |CT Tools|.
2. Select |File Manager|.
3. Select |Save / Restore|.
118
4. Select |All| to save system cals, characterization, scan protocols,

and INFO file.
5. Insert a blank DAT tape in the drive.
6. Select |Save|, and wait until the save to tape finishes (about 5–20 minutes depending on
the number of cals and scan protocols).
When the save to tape completes, the system displays a successful Save message
along the bottom of the screen, and the removes the |Quit| softkey.
7. Remove the tape, and use it to restore the data after you complete the installation.
(Section 10–18, on page 127)
10–4–2 Save Suite Internet and Ethernet Numbers

Find and record the internet numbers of the OC and SBC, and the ethernet number of the
SBC, if the system resides on a network.
1. Display the Utilities Main Menu.

2. Touch |Shell| to open a shell tool on the plasma.
3. Type the following command at the prompt, and inspect the response to find the
<suiteID>:
genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0: ypcat hosts | grep <suiteID>
4. Write down the corresponding IP (Internet) addresses:

<suiteID>_OC0 ______.______.______.______
<suiteID>_SBC0 _________.________.________._________
5. Systems with Ethernet: Type the following command at the prompt, to display the IP
ethernet addresses
genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0: ypcat ethers | grep <suiteID>
6. Write down the corresponding IP ethernet addresses:
<suiteID>_SBC0 _________.________.________._________
10–4–3 Save Optical Disk Number

1. Place the current optical disk platter into the drive.
2. Touch the |Archive|softkey to display the Archive Main Menu.
3. Touch the |Optical Disk| softkey.
4. Touch the |Media Contents| softkey, to attach the disk and display the screen called
“List/Select Exams by Patient – Media Content.”
5. Record the Disk# displayed in the upper left quadrant of the screen:______.
6. During LFC, increment the current disk number by one, and enter that value in the
Optical Disk# field.
10–4–4 Save Magnetic Reel Tape Number

1. Insert the current reel tape into the mag tape drive and place the drive on line.
2. Touch the |Archive| softkey to display the Archive Main Menu.
3. Touch the |Reel Tape| softkey.
4. Touch the |Media Contents| softkey, to attach the tape and display the screen called
“List/Select Exams by Patient – Media Content.”
119
5. Record the Tape# displayed in the upper left quadrant of the screen:______.
6. During the load from cold, increment the current tape number by one, and enter the
corresponding value in the Reel Tape# field.
10–4–5 Save Window Width/Level Data

1. Touch the |Display Modes| softkey.
2. Touch the |Prog W/L Keys| softkey.
3. Record the window width/level information for reentry into the system upon completion of
the software load:
Head Mediast. Spine
W= W= W=
L= L= L=
Abdomen Lung Vertebra
W= W= W=
L= L= L=
10–4–6 Shutdown the system

1. Display the Utilities Main Menu.
2. Touch the |Shutdown| softkey, or type sd from the boot terminal, to shutdown the
system.
Note: If this system belongs to a network, bring every IC in the suite to the boot prompt level.
10–5 Pre–Installation
Verify the following setup on the Plasma, before you start the LFC:
1. Press |L1| and |C| to display the plasma configuration screen.

2. Make sure |New Line| is OFF (is not highlighted).
3. Make sure |Wrap Around| is ON (is highlighted).
4. Select |Backup| to return to the boot terminal.
Note: Clean the tape drive heads with a DAT tape cleaning cartridge.
10–6 Boot the Host Load From Cold (HLFC) Tape

1. If your system belongs to a network, Shutdown all IC systems in the suite.
2. Shutdown your system to the monitor prompt ‘> ’ level.
3. Insert the HLFC tape into the local cartridge/DAT tape drive.
120
4. Load the bootstrap: (Bootstrap load lasts about 4 minutes.)

> b st( ) <enter> (Motorola Board)
Boot: st(0,0,0)
Boot:
10–7 Partition and Label the OC disk

The program to format, label, or partition the disk starts automatically:
Beginning System Installation

probing system for disks ...
Choose your option for Auto Partition and label
1. Label sd0 – Then continue loading the system

2. Do not relabel the disk, just continue loading the system
3. Exit to single user shell
Type/enter choice: 1 (Label sd0)
Labeling ‘sd0’ with partition table ‘CT/OC sd0 single 94181–15’
10–8 Load OS and Applications

After the system labels and partitions the hard disk, it automatically starts to load the
software. (Takes about 20 minutes)
10–9 Configure the OC

Upon completion of the Load From Cold, the system automatically reboots, and enters the
OC configuration:
[ . . . boot messages . . . ]
Do you want to restore the INFO file from the previous installation
(yY|nN)?
Re–installing software?
1. Remove the HLFC tape

2. Insert the DAT with previously saved system parameters (Step 10–4)
3. Type/enter “y”
121
New installation? Type/enter “n”

10–10 On Line Help
Touch any of the parameter lines to display the corresponding “HELP” window. Touch the
“Help” window to close it.
10–11 Select Configuration Parameters

Illustrations 10–3 through 10–5 contain examples of each type of Configuration screen. Your
screens will appear similar but not necessarily identical to the examples.
ILLUSTRATION 10–1
SYSTEM PARAMETERS SCREEN
System Parameters
Suite ID
Hospital name
OC IC
Host Type
Unique System Number (USN)
Host name OC0

GECARES System ID
Master Slave
YP type
Continue
122
ILLUSTRATION 10–2
SYSTEM FORMATS AND DEFAULTS SCREEN
System Formats & Defaults

MIL_HH_MM_SS MIL_HH_MM HH_MM_SS_XM HH_MM_XM
Time Format
Date Separator
/ . –
Starting Patient Exam #
Starting Diagnostic Exam # 50001

MM_DD_YY DD_MM_YY YY_MM_DD Starting Optical Disk # 1
Date Format
Timezone
US/Central Central time zone USA Doctor’s Title Radiologist
US/Mountain Mountain time zone USA lb kg

Units for Patient Weight
US/Pacific Pacific time zone USA
US/Pacific – New Pacific time zone USA
US/Alaska Alaska time zone USA
US/East Indiana Eastern time zone USA
Backup Continue
123
ILLUSTRATION 10–3
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION SCREEN
Hardware Configuration
60 Hz 50 Hz Camera Configuration
IP refresh rate
3M MI10
camera camera
rs170 ccir Use 99 for default
Video Tape
Smooth Interpolation factor (0–15) 10
Sharp Interpolation factor (0–15) 13
Yes No Camera Partition Size (MB) (4–24) 8
Printer in Suite Camera Cycle Time (0–99) 30
Is this a queueing Camera (y/n)? y
Type Y to enable autofilming; type N to disable autofilming.
Housing # 46–309500G2 46–266845 G4 46–266845 G3

CT Tube Type Insert # 46–309300G2 E–DAS Type Reduced Gain Full Gain
Tube Housing Serial #
Tube Insert Serial #

Collimator Type: G1, G2 or G3 G4 Collimator G5
Collimator Collimator
Tube Failure Code
Backup Continue
ILLUSTRATION 10–4
NETWORK CONFIGURATION – NO ACTIVE GATEWAY
Network Configuration
OC0 SBC0 IC0 IC1 IC2

Hosts in Suite
Yes No
Active Gateway:
OC0 Internet address:
SBC0 Internet address:
SBC0 Ethernet number:

ACRNEMA address:
Suite ID of PAN host:
Hostname of PAN: OC0

Subnet network
Backup Accept
124
ILLUSTRATION 10–5
NETWORK CONFIGURATION WITH ACTIVE GATEWAY

Hosts in Suite
Yes No
Active Gateway:

Gateway IP address
ACRNEMA address
Suite ID of PAN host
Hostname of PAN OC0

Subnet network
Gateway netmask
Backup Accept
10–12 Configure System
Finish the configuration parameters selection, then touch |Accept| on the Network
Configuration screen to automatically start the configuration of the OC. Configuration takes
about 10 minutes. When the system displays the <suiteID> console login, proceed to
the next step, Tip into the SBC.
10–13 Tip Into SBC (Review)
10–13–1 Default Passwords

The LFC procedure loaded default passwords onto the system. Use the following default
passwords to finish the software load:
» root: #bigguy
» genesis: 4$apps
» insite: 2getin
» service: 4rhelp
10–13–2 ‘tip’ Command Notes

Use the tip command to communicate with the SBC over a serial line. Use the following
keystrokes after you enter tip:
<enter>~. to exit tip

<enter>~# to send a break
Press |L1| and |A| to send a break to the SBC, and display the ‘> ’ prompt.
125
Note: If you type too fast while in tip, you may garble the output. If this happens, delete the
bad characters and start over.
10–13–3 Login as genesis on OC:

<suiteID>_OC0 @ login: genesis
password: <default password>
genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 3: tip sbc <enter>
connected
<enter>
>
(If the prompt ‘ > ’ never displays, type/enter halt)
10–14 Network boot the SBC

> b le() <enter>
Note: You may ignore the following two messages, if they appear:
ifconfig: ioclt(SIOCGIFFLAGS) : no such interface
–and–
/etc/rc: /usr/lib/expreserve: not found
10–15 Load SunOS and Applications on the SBC
10–15–1 Login as root on SBC

<suiteID>_SB0 @ login: root
10–15–2 Load SunOS and CT Applications

1. Insert the HLFC tape into the OC drive
2. Load software (takes about 30 minutes, including configuration)
<suiteID>_SB0# ctloadSBC <enter>
Choose your option for Auto partition and label:
1. Label sd0 – Then continue loading the system.

2. Do not relabel the disk, just continue loading the system.
3. Exit to single user shell
Type/enter choice: 1 (Label sd0)
Note: If the system asks you to insert the HLFC tape when the HLFC tape is already in the
tape drive, return to the OC, halt the system, cycle power and return to step 10–13, Tip
into the SBC.
126
10–15–3 Exit tip

After it completes loading, the SBC automatically reboots and begins configuration. When it
completes the configuration, the SBC reboots once more. You have finished installation of
application software. Now use <enter>~ to exit tip.
Note: The following message appears twice, due to a temporary inconsistency during
configuration. You may ignore the messages: yp: server not responding for
domain “dska”; still trying
10–16 Load Patch Tape or Perform Workarounds

If the software includes a patch tape, consult the HLFC addendum and instructions provided
with this HLFC documentation to determine when to load the patch tape or workarounds.
10–17 Start up the HiSpeed Advantage System

Login as genesis (If not already logged in):
<hostAlias> @ login: genesis <enter>
password: <default genesis password>
Start Genesis Processes:

<hostAlias> @ genesis : st <enter>
Press |L1| and |B| to toggle between the boot terminal and the plasma applications screen.
Note: Re–adopt any previously adopted hosts or suites after you finish the LFC.
10–18 Restore System Configuration Data

After the system comes up, the message, “Processes are initializing . . .” disappear from the
bottom of the Application Screen.
10–18–1 Restore Window Width/Level Data

1. Touch the |Display Modes| softkey
2. Touch the |Prog W/L Keys| softkey
3. Type/enter the window width/level information you recorded during step 10–4–5 on page
120.
Recommended: Change the labels on the window softkeys to match the positions of the
hardkeys on the console.
10–18–2 Restore System State

1. Display the Utilities menu, and select |CT Tools|.
2. Select |File Manager|
3. Select |Save / Restore|.
4. Deselect |INFO| and select |All|, to restore the system parameters you saved during step
10–4–1 on page 118.
5. Insert the DAT with previously saved system parameters (Step 10–4) into the drive on
the OC.
6. Select |Restore|.
127
7. Wait about 5 to 10 minutes. Time increases with the number of cals and scan protocols
you saved. When the tape restore completes, the system displays a successful
completion message along the bottom of the screen, and removes the |Quit| softkey.
8. The system prompts you to reset the hardware. Press |Yes| to reset system hardware
Bring the system down* and restart it.**
...THE SYSTEM IS READY TO USE
» * If you need to load diagnostics, proceed to step 10–19 before you shutdown the
system.
» ** If you need to adopt other suites or hosts, proceed to step 10–20 before you bring
up the system.
10–19 Load Diagnostics (Optional)
10–19–1 Load Proprietary Screens

1. Touch |Utilities| to display the Utilities menu.
» If you see the |Add–A–Tool| softkey, proceed to 10–19–3.
» |Add–A–Tool| softkey Not present on Utilities menu, proceed to step 2.
2. Touch |Diags| on the Utilities menu.
3. Insert Advanced Services Diagnostics Tape into OC tape drive.
4. Touch/highlight |Load Screens| on the Utilities menu.
5. When the tape load finishes, the system removes the highlight from the |Load Screens|
softkey, shuts down the Utilities menu, and restarts the system.
10–19–2 Add–A–Tool
Note: Load the proprietary screens, step 10–19–1, to display the |Add–A–Tool| softkey to the
Utilities main menu.
Use |Add–A–Tool| to load optional software. Make sure the corresponding security key(s)
have been installed, before trying to load the software option.
10–19–3 Load AP Diagnostics

3. If necessary, insert Advanced Services Diagnostics Tape into OC tape drive.
4. Touch/highlight |AP Test| on the Utilities menu.
5. When the tape load finishes, the system removes the highlight from the |AP Test|
softkey, shuts down the Utilities menu, and opens a shell that lists the AP Diagnostic
main menu selections.
6. Type/enter “0” to close the shell.
10–19–4 Load OC Non–Proprietary Diagnostics (HNS)

2. Touch |Shell| on the Utilities menu, to open a shell tool.
3. Insert HNS tape into OC tape drive.
4. Touch the interior of the shell window to enable keyboard input.
5. Type/enter the following commands into the shell window:
128
genesis @ <hostAlias>: su <enter>

Password: <default root password>
root @ <hostAlias>: installDiags hns <enter>
root @ <hostAlias>: rehash <enter>
6. After the tape load finishes, press |Cntrl| and |D| two times, to exit from the shell tool.
7. Remove the HNS tape from the tape drive.
10–19–5 Load SBC Non–Proprietary Diagnostics (HNS)

1. Touch |Utilities| to display the Utilities menu on the CT OC.
3. Insert HNS tape into OC tape drive.
4. Touch |SBC0| softkey.
5. When the tape load finishes, the system removes the highlight from the |SBC0| softkey, and
opens a shell that lists the SBC Diagnostic main menu selections.
6. Type/enter “quit” to close the shell.
7. Remove the HNS tape from the tape drive.
10–19–6 Load Host Proprietary Diagnostics (HPS)
Note: You may load HPS diagnostics instead of HNS diagnostics.
1. Touch |Utilities| to display the Utilities menu on the CT OC.

2. Touch |Shell| on the Utilities menu. to open a shell tool.
3. Insert HPS tape into OC tape drive.
4. Touch the interior of the shell window to enable keyboard input.
5. Type/enter the following commands into the shell window:
genesis @ <hostAlias>: su <enter>
Password: <default root password>
root @ <hostAlias>: installDiags hps <enter>
root @ <hostAlias>: rehash <enter>
6. After the tape load finishes, press |Cntrl| and |D| two times, to exit from the shell tool.
7. Remove the HPS tape from the tape drive.
10–20 Network Configuration Information (Optional)

Run setAdoption when the OC or IC contains a gateway card, and the OC should transmit
and/or receive images to/from non–genesis hosts on the backbone network.
Section 10–20–1 describes the three network transfer types. A host may be able to Receive,
Transmit, or both Receive and Transmit Genesis Images. You designate each host’s transfer
type when you adopt it.
10–20–1 Types of Network Transfer

Three types of network transfer:
» RECEIVE – Designated host receives Genesis Images
129
» TRANSMIT – Designated host sends Genesis images. Adopted DG Signas

(non–Genesis host/s) ‘TRANSMIT’ only.
» BOTH – Designated host receives and transmits Genesis Images.
When you adopt an Advantage Windows workstation, the software selects the ‘RECEIVE’
option, even though AW can both send and receive Genesis images. Because the
Advantage Windows workstation uses a non–genesis database, the genesis host cannot
display AW lists (exam/series/image). Advantage Windows are also adopted as PCs.
10–20–2 Adoption of non–Genesis suites and hosts:

If the host on which you are running setAdoption is both the YP Master and the Suite
Master, you may adopt non–Genesis suites and hosts.
If the host on which you are running setAdoption is the YP Master but not the Suite Master,
you may adopt non–Genesis or ID/NET II hosts.
If the host on which you are running setAdoption is the Suite Master but not the YP Master,
you may adopt non–Genesis suites.
10–20–3 Run setAdoption

Take down all applications before running setAdoption. Use sdservice.
<SuiteID> @ login: genesis <enter>
Password: <default genesis password>
genesis @ <SuiteID>: sdservice
Run setAdoption in root (su):

genesis @ <SuiteID>: su <enter>
Password: <root password>
root @ <SuiteID>: setAdoption
If you already adopted hosts or suites, the setAdoption software asks if you want to
un–adopt any previously adopted hosts or suites, before you adopt a new host. When you
run setAdoption for the first time on this host, the software displays the following questions:
Which non–Genesis Host(s)/Suite(s) do you wish to adopt?
1 = MR Signa(s), PC(s)
2 = ID/NET II host(s)
3 = Genesis host(s) in other networks {separated by routers}
Enter selection (1, 2, 3), or press <enter> when done adopting:
» For selection 1, proceed to section 10–20–4.

10–20–4 Adopt MR Signa, PC

1. When you select “1”, the software prompts:
Do you want to adopt a non–Genesis host in your suite (yY|nN)[n] ?
2. Type/enter “y” to update the screen with the next series of questions
Type the hostName for non–Genesis host and/or press <enter>.
130
Valid names: SGx, PCx, where x = 0–9

Enter Unix hostname (used by Yellow Pages) for non–Genesis host:
Enter the Internet address (IP) of non–Genesis host:
Enter type of network transfer for non–Genesis host
(b=BOTH, r=RECEIVE, t=TRANSMIT):
3. The software displays the following prompt if the host is the suiteMaster (gateway):
Do you want to adopt a suite (yY|nN)[n]?
4. Type/enter “y” to update the screen with the next series of questions for each
non–Genesis suite:
Enter the suiteID of the adopted suite or press <enter> when done.
Valid Genesis suiteID names are 4 chars and/or digits:
Enter hostName for host in adopted suite.
Valid name are SGx, PCx, where x = 0–9:
Enter Unix hostname (used by Yellow Pages) for non–Genesis host:
Enter the Internet address (IP) of non–Genesis host :
Enter type of network transfer for non–Genesis host
(b=BOTH, r=RECEIVE, t=TRANSMIT):
10–20–5 Adopt ID/NET II Hosts

Do you want to adopt (add) a non–Genesis ID/NET suite (yY|nN)[n]?
Enter the suiteID of the ID/NET suite or press <enter> when done.
Valid IDnet suiteID names are 4 chars and/or digits:
3. The the software displays the following set of questions for each hostName within the
suite:
Enter hostName for ID/NET host or press <enter> when done.
Valid host names are 4 chars and/or digits:
Enter ACRNEMA address ( 1–16 chars/digits ) for ID/NET host.
The suggested format is <area>_<sub–area>_<local>.
<area> is a 6 chars/digits string, abbreviation of your hospital
name.
<sub–area> is a 4 chars/digits string, for example suiteID.
<local> is a 4 chars/digits string, for example Host Name.
Enter your selection:
Enter ID/NET host’s IP (Internet address) address :
10–20–6 Adopt Genesis Hosts in Other Networks

Do you want to adopt a suite (yY|nN)[n] ?
Enter the suiteID of the adopted suite or press <enter> when done.
Valid Genesis suiteID names are 4 chars and/or digits:
131
3. The the software displays the following set of questions for each host name:
Enter hostName for host in adopted suite.
Valid names are ICx or OC0, where x = 0–2 :
Enter the Internet(IP) address of Genesis host:
4. When you complete the final question, the software displays the
following message:
Although application config files have been updated for <suiteID>, you MAY have to add
routing information to this host before network communications can be established. To
do this you will have to know the internet address of the ROUTER that connects
<suiteID> to this host’s network. For the purpose of example assume your routers
address is 111.111.111.111 and that <suiteID> is on the network cable JUST ON THE
OTHER SIDE OF the router ... (that means it’s 1 HOP away). Then you would probably
have to add a route command to the file /etc/rc.local that looks like this: route add
<Internet(IP) address> 111.111.111.111 1
Note: <Internet(IP) address> might need to be replaced with something less specific (like the
SUBNET address), in the event this host communicates with multiple hosts. Also, it may
require more HOPs. PLEASE consult with the network administrator.
10–21 Configure systems with pre–installed software (OC and

SBC)
Sometimes the system is shipped with all software loaded. If this is the case, run reconfig to
reset the OC and SBC databases.
1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 133.)

2. Select Regen Database |Yes| to reset the Database.
3. Touch |Continue| to proceed to the System Formats & Defaults screen, shown in
illustration 10–7.
4. Type/enter a new number in the Starting Patient Exam # field
5. Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen, then touch |Accept| to
reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.
6. Type st <enter> to bring up the system.
10–22 LFC on OC only

This procedure describes how to LFC on the just the OC. Use this procedure after you
correct an OC disk failure, and/or you have to partition OC disk. The OC LFC takes less
time than a complete LFC, and it preserves the Calibration and Characterization data stored
in the SBC database.
1. Follow the OC load section of the LFC procedure, from section 10–2 to section 10–12.
STOP before the ‘tip sbc’ section
2. Login as genesis
(If the prompt ‘ > ’ never displays, type/enter halt)

3. Type st <enter>to start up the system.
132
4. Touch |Utilities| to display the Utilities main menu

5. Touch |File Manager|
6. Restore ONLY the Scan Protocols.
10–23 LFC on SBC only

This procedure describes how to LFC on the just the SBC. Use this procedure after you
correct an SBC disk failure, and/or you have to partition SBC disk. The SBC LFC takes less
time than a complete LFC, and it preserves the Image data stored on the OC.
1. Insert the HiSpeed Advantage LFC tape into the OC drive.

2. Login as genesis
3. Login as root:
<suiteID>_SB0 @ login: root <enter>
4. Type/enter loadSBC:
<suiteID>_SB0# loadSBC <enter>
5. Start SBC LFC procedure at ‘tip sbc’ command, section 10–13.
6. Login as genesis, and type/enter st to start the system
7. Touch |Utilities| to display the Utilities main menu
8. Touch |File Manager|
9. Restore ONLY Cals and Characterization.
10. Shutdown the system, and restart it.
10–24 Introduction
Sections 10–25 through 10–31 describe the procedure to change the software configuration
of a HiSpeed Advantage system. With the HiSpeed Advantage reconfiguration software, you
can change most of the parameters you entered during a software Load From Cold, without
returning to the LFC procedure.
Page 116 contains a list of the procedures that require the reconfig program, and two
stand–alone procedures
Execute a reconfig on the OC, to change configuration screen parameters. Some sections
require reconfiguration on both the OC and SBC. The OC and/or SBC requirements appear
in parenthesis, next to the title of the corresponding reconfig procedure.
Note: Type the text shown in boldface, and press the <enter> key on the keyboard.
(Type/enter bold = Type bold <enter>.) System Text output is shown in system font:
genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0:
10–25 Shutdown System Applications and Start

Reconfiguration
1. If necessary, press |L1| and |B| to toggle between the boot terminal and the plasma
applications screen, and display the genesis prompt:
133
login: genesis <enter>

password: xxxxxxx <enter>
genesis @ <suite>_OC0:
2. Shutdown all system applications to unix level by typing sdservice at the genesis prompt
on the system console:
genesis @ <suite>_OC0: sdservice <enter>
3. Change to root user:
genesis @ <suite>_OC0: su <enter>
password: xxxxxx <enter>
4. Start reconfiguration software.
root @ <suite>_OC0: reconfig <enter>
5. The software displays the first configuration screen, Illustration 10–6 shown on page
135. (Detailed parameter descriptions start on page 136.)
» Change the parameters on the first screen, and/or touch |Continue| to display
subsequent screens.
» Use |Continue| and |Backup| to move between screens.
6. Display the Network Configuration screen, and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system
with the currently selected parameters.
–or–
Touch |Exit without Changes| to exit reconfiguration without implementing changes.
Note: Do NOT try to stop the reconfig software after you |Accept| the new parameters. Wait
for the reconfiguration to finish, then return to reconfig, correct the parameters, and
|Accept| the new parameters.
10–26 Run reconfig on the SBC

Page NO TAG contains a list of parameter changes that require you to reconfigure both the
OC and SBC. After you reconfigure the OC, reboot it, and use rsh or tip to login to the SBC.
1. Reboot the OC.

2. Use rsh or tip to login to the SBC.
genesis @ <suite>_OC0: rsh <suite>_SBC0 <enter>
[ . . . some info . . . ]
genesis @ <suite>_SBC0: su <enter>
password: xxxxx <enter>
root @ <suite>_SBC0:
–or–
genesis @ <suite>_OC0: tip sbc <enter>
<suite>_SBC0 login: root <enter>
[ . . . some info . . . ]
root @ <suite>_SBC0:
3. Execute reconfig:
root @ <suite>_SBC0: reconfig
4. If the OC or SBC configuration changes the OC internet number, the system prompts
you to type/enter the new number(s)
134
Enter internet number for SBC0: <internet number of SBC>

Enter internet number for OC0: <internet number of OC0>
Note: The SBC reconfiguration software uses information entered during the most recent OC
reconfiguration. If you selected |Yes| to Reset the Database during the OC
reconfiguration, the system automatically resets the Scan Database when you
reconfigure the SBC.
10–27 Select Configuration Parameters

Illustrations 10–6 through 10–10 contain examples of each type of Configuration screen.
Your screens will appear similar but not necessarily identical to the examples. With the
exception of the System Parameters screen, all other configuration screens are identical to
the ones encountered during LFC.
10–27–1 On Line Help

Touch any of the parameter lines to display the corresponding “HELP” window. Touch the
“Help” window to close it.
10–28 System Parameters

ILLUSTRATION 10–6
SYSTEM PARAMETERS RECONFIGURATION SCREEN
System Parameters
Suite ID
Hospital name
OC IC
Host Type
Unique System Number (USN)
Host name OC0
Master Slave GECARES System ID

YP type
Yes No
Regen Database
Exit without Continue

Changes
10–28–1 Change the Suite ID (OC and SBC)

2. Highlight the suite ID data field, and type/enter new ID
3. Touch |Continue| to proceed to the next screen.
135
5. Run reconfig on the SBC. (Procedure described on page 10–26.)
10–28–2 Change the Hospital Name (OC only)

Change the hospital name which appears on the images.

2. Change the hospital name field on the System Parameters screen
3. Highlight the hospital name data field, and type/enter a new name
10–28–3 Reset the Database

You can use reconfig to reset the system’s image and scan databases.
» The Regen Database parameter automatically defaults to |No| when the software first
displays the System Parameter screen. (Illustration 10–6, above, shows the default
mode.)
» Touch Regen Database |Yes| to reset the image database.
Note: The Regen Database function destroys all the images residing on the system disk. Make
sure you archive all images before you reset the image database.
The following procedures require a database reset:
» Change Patient Exam number, section 10–28–4

» Replace High Speed Disk on the SBC, section 10–28–5
10–28–4 Change the Patient Exam number (OC only)
Note: This procedure requires a Regen Database function, which destroys all the images
residing on the system disk. Make sure you archive all images before you reset the
image database.
Use this procedure to type/enter the exam number scanRx uses during the next exam
prescription.

3. Touch |Continue| to proceed to the System Formats & Defaults screen, shown in
illustration 10–7.
4. Type/enter a new number in the Starting Patient Exam # field
5. Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen, then touch |Accept| to
10–28–5 Replace the High Speed Disk on the SBC (OC and SBC)
Note: This procedure requires a Regen Database function, which destroys all the images
residing on the system disk. Make sure you archive all images before you reset the
image database.
Use this procedure when you replace the High Speed disk on the SBC.
136
1. Save system state via Utilities/File Manager (if possible) Save system state description,
section 10–4–1, begins on page 118.
7. Bring the system up and restore calibration data via Utilities/File Manager. Description
begins on page 127.
10–29 System Formats & Defaults

ILLUSTRATION 10–7
SYSTEM FORMATS AND DEFAULTS SCREEN
System Formats & Defaults

MIL_HH_MM_SS MIL_HH_MM HH_MM_SS_XM HH_MM_XM
Time Format
Date Separator
/ . –
Starting Patient Exam #
Starting Diagnostic Exam # 50001

MM_DD_YY DD_MM_YY YY_MM_DD Starting Optical Disk # 1
Date Format
Timezone
US/Central Central time zone USA Doctor’s Title Radiologist
US/Mountain Mountain time zone USA lb kg

Units for Patient Weight
US/Pacific Pacific time zone USA
US/Pacific – New Pacific time zone USA
US/Alaska Alaska time zone USA
US/East Indiana Eastern time zone USA
Backup Continue
10–29–1 Change the Timezone (OC and SBC)

Use this procedure to change the system timezone.
Note: The unix ‘date’ command does NOT change the timezone.

2. Touch |Continue| to display the System Formats & Defaults screen.
3. Highlight the new Timezone parameter.
4. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens.
137
10–29–2 Change the Time Format, Date Format, or Date Separator (OC only)
These values determine the time and date format on the Messages box.

3. Touch the softkey to select the corresponding Time Format, Date Format, and/or Date
Separator.
Note: Check the help window for additional values.
10–29–3 Change the Doctor’s Title (OC only)
Change the label of the Doctor’s Title data field on the Patient Data screen, for use by
scanRx and display.

3. Type/enter the string for Doctor’s Title in the corresponding data field. You may
type/enter ‘D’ for Diagnostician, ‘R’ for Radiologist, or you may type any other appropriate
title, and press <enter>.
10–29–4 Change the Units for Patient Weight (OC only)

Change unit value for the patient weight data field on the Patient Data screen, for use by
scanRx and display

3. Touch the corresponding softkey to elect to enter patient weight in pounds or kilograms.
10–29–5 Change the Optical Disk or Reel Tape number (OC only)
Use this procedure to type/enter the value the system uses to number the next Optical Disk
or Reel Tape. The data entry field labels Option availability determines actual data entry field
label(s).

3. Highlight and change the Starting Optical Disk # and/or Starting Reel Tape # data field,
and press <enter>.
138

10–30 Hardware Configuration Parameters

ILLUSTRATION 10–8
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION SCREEN
Hardware Configuration
60 Hz 50 Hz Camera Configuration
IP refresh rate
3M MI10
camera camera
rs170 ccir
Video Tape
Yes No
Printer in Suite
Housing # 46–309500G2 46–266845 G4 46–266845 G3

CT Tube Type Insert # 46–309300G2 E–DAS Type Reduced Gain Full Gain
Tube Housing Serial # Tube Insert Serial #
Tube Failure Code

Backup Continue
10–30–1 Change the Camera Configuration (OC only)

This procedure allows changes to the parameters available under Camera Configuration.
This only requires a reconfig on the OC.

2. Touch |Continue| to display the Hardware Configuration screen.
3. Touch the corresponding softkey to select the Camera Configuration.
10–30–2 Change the IP Refresh Rate (OC only)

3. Touch the corresponding softkey to select the IP refresh rate.
139
10–30–3 Change the Video Tape Interface (OC only)

This procedure only requires a reconfig on the OC

3. Touch the corresponding softkey to select the Video Tape Interface.
10–30–4 Add/Remove a Printer (OC only)

This procedure only requires a reconfig on the OC

3. Touch the corresponding softkey add or remove the Printer from the Suite.
10–30–5 Add New Tube Information (OC and SBC)

Use this procedure after installing a new X–Ray tube.

3. Type/enter the new Tube Housing Serial #, Tube Insert Serial #, and Tube Failure Code
information.
10–30–6 Change the E–DAS type (OC and SBC)

3. Touch the corresponding softkey to select the correct type of E–DAS.
140
10–31 Network Configuration

ILLUSTRATION 10–9
NETWORK CONFIGURATION – NO ACTIVE GATEWAY

Hosts in Suite
Yes No
Active Gateway:

ACRNEMA address:
Suite ID of PAN host:
Hostname of PAN: OC0

Subnet network
Backup Accept
ILLUSTRATION 10–10
NETWORK CONFIGURATION WITH ACTIVE GATEWAY

Hosts in Suite
Yes No
Active Gateway:

Gateway IP address
ACRNEMA address
Suite ID of PAN host
Hostname of PAN OC0

Subnet network
Gateway netmask
Backup Accept
141
10–31–1 Change the Internet Addresses (OC and SBC)

Use this procedure to change the internet numbers of hosts in the Suite. Run reconfig on
the OC and the SBC. Run ctload on any IC in the suite.

2. Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen.
3. Change the corresponding internet numbers.
4. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens, or touch |Accept| to
5. Run reconfig on the SBC. (Procedure described on page 10–26.) Type/enter the new
internet numbers for OC and SC when prompted.
6. Run ctload on any IC in the suite.
10–31–2 Change the Suite Configuration (OC and SBC)

Use this procedure to add or remove an IC from the suite. Run reconfig on the OC, the
SBC, and the IC, if adding an IC to the system.

3. Select/deselect the hosts in the suite.
4. If adding an IC, type/enter its internet number.
7. Run reconfig on any IC in the Suite.
10–31–3 Change the ACRNEMA Address (OC only)

3. Change the ACRNEMA Address in the data field.
10–31–4 Change the Primary Archive Node (PAN) (OC only)

3. Change the Suite ID of PAN Host and Hostname of the PAN Host fields.
10–31–5 Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on the OC (OC

only)
Use this procedure when you add or remove the second ethernet board to or from the
scanner.

142
10–31–5–1 To add an ethernet board:

a. Refer to Illustration 10–9: Select |Yes| for the Active Gateway.
b. Refer to illustration 10–10: Type/enter the gateway internet address into the Gateway IP
address field.
c. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens, or touch |Accept| to
10–31–5–2 To remove an ethernet board:

a. Refer to Illustration 10–9: Select |No| for the Active Gateway.
b. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens, or touch |Accept| to
10–31–6 Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on an IC in the Suite (OC only)

Use this procedure when you add or remove the second ethernet board to or from an IC in
the Suite. Run reconfig on the OC and run ctload on the IC.

10–31–6–1 To add an ethernet board:

a. Refer to Illustration 10–9: Select |Yes| for the Active Gateway.
b. Refer to illustration 10–10: Type/enter the gateway internet address into the Gateway IP
address field.
c. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens, or touch |Accept| to
10–31–6–2 To remove an ethernet board:

a. Refer to Illustration 10–9: Select |No| for the Active Gateway.
b. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens, or touch |Accept| to
3. Run ctload on the IC.
10–32 Change the System Time
Note: This procedure does NOT change the timezone of the system.
This procedure changes the actual time reported by the system.
1. Use sdservice to shutdown application on the OC

2. Type su <enter>
3. Type date YYMMDDhhmm <enter>
YY = year, MM=month, DD=day hh=hour, mm=minutes
Example: date 9701061436 sets the date to January 6, 1998 2:36pm
10–33 Add/Remove Hosts for Image Transfer

Use this procedure to inform the OC of hosts available for image transfer over the Network.
1. Use sdservice to shutdown applications on the OC

2. Type su <enter>
143
3. Type setAdoption <enter>
Note: Refer the Product Software Load Procedure for setAdoption instructions.
144
CHAPTER 11 – IMAGE PERFORMANCE
11–1 Calibration
This section describes the procedure for evaluating image performance on the HiSpeed
Advantage System. Please note the following requirements:
a. All functional checks and service adjustments must be performed on the system prior to
image performance verification.
b. The system must be warmed up prior to scanning (minimum 2 hours)
c. All phantom CALs, except Q–Cal, used to create a CAL file must be completed within a
75 hour period of time.
d. Make sure the tube is warm by using the Tube Warm Up soft key, available from top level
plasma.
Note: You must execute the GENCAL scans that come after the warm up scans for the tube to
be sufficiently warm. DO NOT cancel after warm-up scans.
e. Verify that the vertical surface of the phantom is parallel to the gantry plane of rotation
within 0.5 in both the x and y axis. Scout scans, both 0o and 90o, must be used to
measure phantom position.
f. All phantoms must be centered axially to 0.12mm for phantom calibrations.
g. All phantoms must be centered axially to 1.00mm for phantom scans.
11–2 Q–CAL
Run the Q–Cal procedure before you start phantom calibration and scanning. Q–Cal
calculates a correction factor to compensate for tube temperature changes and X–Ray beam
movement across detector in the Z–axis. Run Q–Cal with a cold and hot tube, in order to
gather the full range of data needed to calculate the correction factor
Performing a Q–Cal destroys all old phantom CALS. In addition,

CAUTION turn ON the DAS power for at least 2 hours before you start
calibration.
Start with a very cold tube. Wait at least 90 minutes after the most recent scan before you
start Q–Cal. (This also means no tube warm–up.) You can run tests that do not interfere
with tube cooling during this wait.
Verify the mylar window is centered relative to the patient alignment lights. An improperly
centered mylar window could place one of the mylar window assembly’s metal bands in the
scan beam. The band could shade the detector, and cause Q–Cal to fail.
Begin at the top level plasma; to initialize tube cooling:

» Touch the |Cal| softkey.
» Touch the |Q–Cal| softkey.
» Touch the |Accept| softkey.
If an abort occurs during the “HOT” portion of the Q–Cal data collection phase:
» Exit the program and fix the problem.
145
» Wait for at least one and one half hours before you start a new Q–Cal series.
If an abort occurs during the “COLD” portion of the Q–Cal data collection phase:
» Stop.
» Re–enter the program
» Continue with new series
Upon completion of Q–Cal, ZCHK calculation and comparison to applicable spec limits will
occur automatically. To examine the results of ZCHK initiate the following sequence of soft
keys from the top level plasma.
» Touch |Cal Functions|.

» Touch |Cal Tools|.
» Touch |Q–Cal Status|.
» Touch |Sort by kV|.
Verify that all Q–Cal vectors are valid.
11–3 Crosstalk Calibration

To begin crosstalk calibration execute the following sequence of soft keys beginning from the
top level plasma.
» Touch |Cal|.
» Touch |Crosstalk|.
» Touch |Accept|.
» Push Scan Enable when lit. This will initiate and complete four air scans
» When prompted, center the crosstalk phantom using the alignment lights. Then, raise
the table 180mm from the centered position.
Note: It is very important that the table is raised the full 180mm from the centered position.
» Touch |Accept|, to continue (Push Scan Enable when lit)

This will initiate the remaining scans required for crosstalk calibration. Complete the
scan, then use following sequence of softkeys to check the results of crosstalk
calibration.
» (From the top level plasma.) Touch |Cal|.
» Touch |Cal Status|.
» Touch |XTalk Status|.
» Touch |View XTalk|.
Verify that crosstalk passes all applicable specifications. If not, address problems rerun
crosstalk.
11–4 Alpha Vector Cal Generation

Requires a valid Q–Cal and Crosstalk calibration.
» Touch |Utilities| softkey.

» Touch |1, 2, 3|.
» Touch |Shell| softkey.
146
Rev. 11 DIRECTION 46- 018304
» In the opened shell, type av–cal <enter>.

» Touch |AutoCal|.
» Enter 4- digit detector number.
» Verify that nothing is in the scan field- of- view.
» Touch |Ok|.
» Press (Start Scan) to initiate each two- scan sequence.
Verify the system displays the following messages along the bottom of the plasma screen:
» resource manager: calculating cal vectors - xx% complete

» writing vectors to the SBC
» installing cal vectors on the SBC
» Touch |View Vector| softkey.

» Touch |Graph| softkey.
Verify that the graph results do not exceed the upper graph limits.
11–5 Phantom Calibration CT# Adjust

TO ENSURE CT# ACCURACY, EXECUTE THE CT#
ADJUST/PHANTOM EDIT PROCEDURE AFTER YOU COMPLETE
WA R NI NG
PHANTOM CALIBRATION. FAILURE TO PROPERLY CALIBRATE
THE CT SYSTEM MAY RESULT IN MISDIAGNOSIS.
Initiate the following sequence from the Top Level Plasma:
» Touch |Cal|.
» Touch |Phantom Edit|.
» Update the ROI CT# values, as outlined in the Phantom Calibration procedure.
Small, Medium and Large: 80kV, 100kV, 120kV and 140kV.
» Touch |Accept|.
11–6 Calibration Procedure

Illustration 11- 1, contains a flow chart that shows the applicable sequence of softkeys and
keyboard inputs required to perform calibrations. Create cal files that reflect the scanning
techniques used by the customer.
Direction 46- 018300- 100, and 46- 018319- 100 CT HiSpeed Advantage Operator's Manual,
describes axial and scout scanning procedures.
147
ILLUSTRATION 11–1
CALIBRATION PROTOCOL
Start
Cal Function
CALIBRATE
– or – Choose one.
CAL CHECK
USER SELECT
EDIT SCANS
THE SOFTWARE POSTS THE CAL SCAN SELECTION

CHOOSE CAL(S)
LIST ON THE RIGHT SIDE OF DISPLAY.
YOU MAY SELECT MORE THAN ONE CALIBRATION, WHICH

Next CREATES A LIST OF CALIBRATIONS AWAITING EXECUTION.
Accept Lower right of display
Accept
Yes
Phantom Centering CENTER
required? PHANTOM
No
Accept
WHEN CAL(S) COMPLETE, YOU MAY CONTINUE CALS BY

TOUCHING |CAL SELECT|. THE SEQUENCE REPEATS THE
End PROCESS FROM THE TOUCH |USER SELECT| POINT IN THE
FLOWCHART
148
Index – Switches, LED’s and Jumpers

C
Computer
1/2 Magtape Controller Board, 206
Ethernet Transceiver, 210
LMO2 Board, 206
Motorola MVME 166 Board, 225
Jumper Settings, 225
Console, Console Autovoice Board, 189
G
Gantry
HV, Interface Measurement Board, 204
OBC
Collimator Board (46–288856G1), 156
Collimator Board (46–321276G1), 157
CTVRC Board, 159
Gantry I/O Board, 169
Heurikon CPU Board, 152
kV Control (46–321198G1), 167
kV Control Board (46–321064G1), 163
mA Board, 161
Slipring
Rotating Buffer (46–288776G1), 183
Rotating Buffer (46–321058G1), 185
Rotating Terminator (46–288788G1), 182
Stationary Buffer (46–288772G1), 187
Stationary Buffer (46–321056G1), 188
Stationary Terminator (46–288774G1), 184
Stationary Terminator (46–321052G1), 186
STC
Axial Control Board, 170
RCOM Board, 178
SCOM Board, 174
ZEUS Remote Intercom X Board, 203
GPDU
Allen Bradley Servo Amplifier
Axial Interface Board, 202
Axial Servo Amp Control Board, 198
DCRGS
DCRGS Control Board, 192
SCR Firing Board, 194
P
PDU
Axial Interface Board, 202
Axial Servo Amp Control Board, 198
149
DCRGS
DCRGS Control Board, 192
SCR Firing Board, 194
Relay Control Board (46–264888G1), 190
Westamp Servo Amplifier, 197
R
Rotating Terminator Board (46–321054G1), 182
S
SCU
Ethernet Transceiver, 210
RP 2.x Scan Chassis, Motorola MVME 166 Board, 225
RP Scan Chassis
AP120 Board, 211
BPP Board, 213
CLA Board, 216
FEP Board (46–327036G1), 208
Motorola MVME 167 Board
EPROM Setup Table, 220
Jumper Settings, 224
Masked Self Tests, 223
Network I/O Teach (NIOT) Configurations, 223
Network I/O Teach (NIOT) Settings, 223
Viewing and Changing Self Test Mask, 222
Motorola MVME167 Board, 217
Scan Chassis
3/60 CPU
EEPROM Settings, 233
Jumpers, 232
Backplane, 228
HSDC Control Board, 234
RP Scan Chassis Power Supply, Jumpers & Settings, 230
SCSI Disk Mounting, 238
ST3390 Local Speed SCSI Disk (LSD), 238
ST5660N Local SCSI Disk (LSD), 240
SRU
AP
DASIOP, 249– 253
HCHIOP, 249– 253
IOC, 249– 253
Sabre 1230 Disk Drive, 251
Scan Chassis
Backplane Jumpers, 226
IPI High Speed Disk, 241
Maxi–HIB, 247
Power Supply, 248, 249
T
Table
Cradle Amplifier, 151
Elevation Tilt Amplifier, 155
ETC Board, 196
150
151
CHAPTER 12 – SWITCHES, LEDs, AND JUMPER SETTINGS
12–1 46–264370G1 Cradle Amplifier
12–1–1 Cradle Amplifier Board Test Points

» TP1 ISO3: High side of the isolation supply for the lower FETs.
(Above 14V)
» TP2 GND: Low side of the amplifier bridge. High power return.
» TP3 AGND: Analog ground.
» TP4 +24V: Supplied from the ETC board.
» TP5 ISO1: High side of the isolation supply for the flowing gate drive of FET Q55.
Measured with respect to TP8.
» TP6 CRADLE PULSE–IL*1: Goes low when the amplifier bridge current is at or above
6A nominal
» TP7: Output of the push–pull driver of the isolation transformer for the DC–DC converter.
» TP8 RTN1: Low side of the isolation supply for Q55 FET drive.
» TP9 PGND: 24V return.
» TP10 HV: Positive side of the amplifier bridge. This is nominally +24V.
» TP12 VMTR: The scaled, filtered and buffered cradle motor voltage.
» TP13 ISO2: Positive side of the isolation supply for Q130 FET drive, measured with
respect to TP8.
12–1–2 Cradle Amplifier Board LEDs

LEDs are provided to give a “feel” of the state the circuitry on the amplifier board. The
following LEDs receive pulses at various duty cycles (with the exception of DS PS) so they
vary in intensity from a fully on LED.
» DS67: On when the lower FET is commanded off. This LED indicates the presence of
logic drive to the isolated FET drive circuitry, not the state of the Q14’s gate direction.
» DS68: On when +24V is present on the amplifier board. If +24V is not present, the DC–
DC converter will not work, the relay cannot operate and there isn’t any drive voltage
present at the bridge.
logic drive to the isolated FET drive circuitry, not the state of the Q155’s gate directly.
» DS124: On when DCCLK pulses are present at the amplifier. These pulses are needed
for the DC–DC converter to operate.
12–1–3 Cradle Amplifier Board Switch Settings

None
152
ILLUSTRATION 12–1
46–264370G1, CRADLE AMPLIFIER
12–2 Heurikon CPU Board Test Points

No serviceable test points.
12–2–1 Heurikon CPU Board LEDs
12–2–1–1 Indicator LEDs

» S = Slave
» M = Master
» F = Fail
12–2–1–2 User LEDs

» 1 = User LED1 – MSB
» 2 = User LED2
» 3 = User LED3
» 4 = User LED4 – LSB
Additional node specific troubleshooting information on the User LEDs is available in the
Heurikon CPU self test section.
12–2–2 Status LEDs

» B = Bus: Another VMEBus master has control of the bus.
» H = Halt: The MPU has halted.
153
» D = DMAC: The DMAC has control of the local bus.

» U = User: The MPU is in the user state.
» S = Super: The MPU is in the supervisor state.
12–2–3 Heurikon CPU Board Switch Settings

Reset Switch – Resets the CPU board and initiates the self test.
12–2–4 Configuration DIP Switch

Used to configure the CPU board to a specific node. The correct setting of this DIP switch
can be found by selecting the Board Layout button below.
Additional information is available in the Heurikon CPU self test section.
ILLUSTRATION 12–2
46–296377G1 HEURIKON CPU ETC
154
ILLUSTRATION 12–3
46–296377G1 HEURIKON CPU STC
ILLUSTRATION 12–4
46–296377G1 HEURIKON CPU OBC
155
12–2–5 Heurikon Power–Up Self–Test

The CPU BOard will undergo a Power–Up Self–Test, which lasts approximately 30 seconds.
After the proper setting of the EPROMs, DIP switches and board jumpers, the CPU board will
be placed into a VME chassis. No other boards need be present.
Upon power up, the self–test begins, the LED display is at the value “E” and the test will
perform the Instruction Set and EPROM Checksum Test. When the test is done, the LED
value will proceed to the next descending value, “D”, and will perform the RAM Verification
Test. In the same manner, when this test is done, the LED value will proceed to “C”, then “B”,
then “A”, and finally to “9”. After the test at “9”, the self–test is done.
When the test is completed, the LED values displayed will indicate the tests that have failed.
It is noted that the LED values “B”, “A”, “9” will always be displayed after the test, because
the specific CT ZEUS hardware for these tests are not present. This is OK.
However, if the LED values “E”, “D” or “C” are displayed after the test, then there is an error,
and the board did not pass the self test. At this point, the EPROM’s DIP switch settings and
the board jumpers should be rechecked to ensure proper setup. Then the self–test should be
rerun. The board must pass this test before shipment.
LED # LED LED Assignment Self Test Duration

1234 HEX
E Instruction Set and EPROM Checksum Test 1 second
D RAM Verification Test 26 seconds
C CIO Unit Test 0.3 seconds
B CT ZEUS HARDWARE TEST 1 second
A CT ZEUS HARDWARE TEST 1 second
9 CT ZEUS HARDWARE TEST 1 second
LEGEND: = LED ON, = LED OFF, 1 = LED MSB, 4 = LED LSB
156
12–3 46–288170G1 Elevation/Tilt Amplifier
12–3–1 Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board Test Points

» TP1 ISO3: Positive side of the isolation supply for the lower FETs of the “H–Bridge”
Q20 and Q150.
» TP2 GND: Low side of the amplifier bridge. It also acts as ISO3 RTN, This is the high
voltage supply return.
» TP3 AGND: Analog ground.
» TP4 +24v: 24 volts for the relays and the DC–DC converter.
respect to TP9.
» TP6 P–IL: Elev/Tilt Pulse–IL*1– Goes low when the amplifier bridge is at or above 6A
nominal.
» TP7 SCKT: Short Circuit signal. This goes low when the bridge current above 12A.
» TP8: This test point is the output of the push–pull driver of the DC–DC converters’
isolation transformer primaries.
» TP10 PGND: This is the +24V return.
» TP11 HV: This is the high side of the amplifier bridge.
This is at about +170V.
respect to TP12.
» TP14 VMTR: The scaled, filtered and buffered E/T motor voltage.
12–3–2 Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board LEDs

LEDs exist to give a “feel” for the state of the circuitry on the amplifier board. All of the
following LEDs are pulsed at various duty cycles (with the exception of DS PS) so they vary
in intensity from a fully on LED.
» DS76: On when +24V is present on the amplifier board. If +24V is not present, the DC–
DC converter will not work, the relay cannot operate and there isn’t any drive voltage
present of the bridge.
» DS77: ON when DCCLK pulses are present at the amplifier. These pulses are needed
for the DC–DC converter to operate.
12–3–3 Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board Switch Settings

None
157
ILLUSTRATION 12–5
46–288170G1 ELEVATION/TILT AMPLIFIER
12–4 46–288856G1 Collimator Board
12–4–1 Collimator Board Test Points (46–288856G1)

» TP1 APDIR: Aperture direction
» TP2 AP_A: Aperture A–pulse
» TP3 APSTEP: Aperture stepper motor drive signal
» TP4 FIL_B: Filter B–pulse
» TP5 FIL_A: Filter A–pulse
» TP6 AP_DIS: Aperture disable
» TP7 DIAG_FILDIR: Diagnostic filter direction
» TP8 DIAG_FIL EN: Diagnostic filter enable
» TP9 DIAG_FILSTP: Diagnostic filter stepper drive signal
» TP10: Power signal for 38V high/low interrupt circuit
» TP11 FIL ENCPWR: Power signal for filter encoder high/low interrupt circuit
» TP12: LGND
» TP13 AP_B: Aperture B–pulse
» TP14: VCC
» TP15: +15V
» TP16: –15V
158
» TP17: AGND
» TP18: 10V_REF
» TP19 AP_ENCPWR: Power signal for aperture encoder high/low interrupt
» TP20: +24V
» TP21: PGND
» TP22: Spare
» TP23: Spare
» TP26: Power signal for 38 V high/low interrupt circuit
12–4–2 Collimator Board LEDs

» DS1 FIL_Z: Filter Z–pulse active
» DS2 FIL_HM_SW: Indicates filter home
» DS3 AP_Z: Aperture Z–pulse active
12–4–3 Collimator Board Switch Settings

None
ILLUSTRATION 12–6
46–288856G1 COLLIMATOR BOARD
12–5 46–321276G1 Collimator Board
12–5–1 Collimator Board Test Points (46–321276G1)

» TP1 APDIR: Aperture direction
» TP2 AP_A: Aperture A–pulse
159
» TP3 APSTEP: Aperture stepper motor drive signal

» TP4 FIL_B: Filter B–pulse
» TP5 FIL_A: Filter A–pulse
» TP6 AP_DIS: Aperture disable
» TP7 DIAG_FILDIR: Diagnostic filter direction
» TP8 DIAG_FIL EN: Diagnostic filter enable
» TP9 DIAG_FILSTP: Diagnostic filter stepper drive signal
» TP10: Power signal for 38V high/low interrupt circuit
» TP12: LGND
» TP13 AP_B: Aperture B–pulse
» TP14: VCC
» TP15: +15V
» TP16: –15V
» TP17: AGND
» TP18: 10V_REF
» TP20: +24V
» TP21: PGND
» TP22: Spare
» TP23: Spare
» TP24 AP_ENCPWR: Power signal for aperture encoder high/low interrupt circuit
» TP26: Power signal for 38 V high/low interrupt circuit
Collimator Board LEDs

» DS1 FIL_Z: Filter Z–pulse active
» DS2 FIL_HM_SW: Indicates filter home
» DS3 AP_Z: Aperture Z–pulse active
12–5–2 Collimator Board Switch Settings

None
160
ILLUSTRATION 12–7
46–321276G1 COLLIMATOR BOARD
12–6 46–288858G1 CTVRC Board
12–6–1 CTVRC Board Test Points

» TP1: +5V
» TP2: FA
» TP3: LP
» TP4: FB
» TP5: RPW
» TP6: LGND
» TP7: LGARD
» TP8: SGARD
» TP9: CUR
» TP10: PWR
» TP11: +10V
» TP12: DVC
» TP13: DCH1
» TP14: DCL0
» TP15: LAC
» TP16: LCUR
» TP17: RAC
161
» TP18: RCUR
» TP19: WCUR
» TP20: STMP
» TP21: CLR
» TP22: +15V
» TP23: SGND
» TP24: –15V
» TP500: MUX
» TP501: SGND
12–6–2 CTVRC Board LEDs

» DS1: TEST
» DS2: REV
» DS3: ON
» DS4: LOI
» DS5: LOV
» DS6: HIV
» DS7: HUV
» DS8: LSTU
» DS9: LSHT
» DS10: RSTU
» DS11: RSHT
» DS12: OVRT
12–6–3 CTVRC Board Switch Settings

» S1 BOOST: manual mode parameters: run power level 40% boost power level 60%
» S2: FORWARD/REVERSE
» S3: AUTO/MANUAL
» S4: ASCII code for board version (Insite Switch)
» S5: Reset
162
ILLUSTRATION 12–8
46–288858G1 CTVRC BOARD
12–7 46–288886G1 mA Board
12–7–1 mA Board Test Points

» TP1: +5 REF TP22: FCMD
» TP2: SGND TP23: FCUR
» TP3: FERR TP24: +15V
» TP4: CAMA TP25: FIL UC
» TP5: FSIG TP26: +30F
» TP6: LGND TP27: FIL CT
» TP7: –10REF TP28: PD
» TP8: ACAL1 TP29: FIL2
» TP9: CCAL1 TP30: PS
» TP10: ANMA TP31: FGND
» TP11: ACAL2 TP32: FIL1
» TP12: FSHG TP33: FSH
» TP13: MAFB TP34: IPUL
» TP14: CCAL2 TP35: +5LED
» TP15: MADMD TP36: CLOOP
» TP16: +24V TP37: –15V
163
» TP17: OFIL TP38: +15AV

» TP18: IFL1 TP39: FD
» TP19: EILOC TP40: FDMD
» TP20: FILSH TP41: MAMUX
» TP21: +30V TP42: FGND
mA Board LEDs
» DS1: CLOOP
» DS2: INVEN
» DS3: ANC
» DS4: MA BAL
» DS5: CAO
» DS6: FIL FLT
» DS7: INV FLT
» DS8: FIL UC
» DS9: OFIL
» DS10: SH FIL
» DS11: FIL OC
» DS12: SMS
» DS13: 1FIL
» DS14: INV ON
12–7–2 mA Board Switch Settings

» S1 Reset
» S2 Board Rev in ASCII (Insite Switch)
164
ILLUSTRATION 12–9
46–288886G1 MA BOARD
12–8 46–321064G1 KV Control Board
12–8–1 KV Control Board 46–321064G1 Test Points

» TP1 LGND
» TP2 SPIT: (TTL 400uS duration); This signal indicates a tube spit, measure for 400uS
duration (LOW = Spit). i.e. rapid decay of the kV.
» TP3 AGND: (Analog 0 Volts); Analog ground.
» TP5 PWMA: (TTL 39KHz to 66KHz during scan); This signal is the pulse width
modulation for the anode, measure for 39KHz to 66KHz during a scan.
» TP6 LGND: (TTL 0 Volts); Logic ground.
» TP7 VPHA: (Analog) This signal is the voltage for an approximate pre–scan kV value
for the phase control of the anode. The approximate pre–scan values for kV are:
80kV = 2.81 VDC
100kV = 1.97 VDC
120kV = 1.20 VDC
140kV = 0.521 VDC
» TP9 VCAN: (Analog) This signal is the anode voltage control error signal.
» TP10 KVCM: (Analog 0 Volts to 10 Volts); This signal is the kV command voltage from
the CPU. The approximate values for kV are:
165
80kV = – 5.32 VDC

100kV = – 6.65 VDC
120kV = – 7.99 VDC
140kV = – 9.32 VDC
» TP11 PWMC: (TTL 39KHz to 66KHz) This signal is the pulse width modulation for the
cathode, measure for 39KHz to 66KHz during a scan.
» TP12 VDRV: (Analog) This signal is input voltage for the voltage controlled oscillator.
The approximate pre–scan values for kV are:
80kV = 3.50 VDC
100kV = 2.76 VDC
120kV = 2.00 VDC
140kV = 1.25 VDC
» TP13 VREF: (Analog 10 Volts); This is the voltage reference for the board.
» TP14 VCO: (TTL) This signal is the voltage controlled oscillator.
» TP15 VCNT: (Analog) This voltage control signal is sent to the Voltage Controlled
Oscillator with the approximate pre–scan value. The pre–scan values are:
80kV = – 5.32 VDC
100kV = – 4.16 VDC
120kV = – 3.03 VDC
140kV = – 1.97 VDC
» TP16 VPHC: (Analog); This signal is the cathode phase control voltage. The
approximate pre–scan values for kV are:
80kV = 3.80 VDC
100kV = 2.65 VDC
120kV = 1.51 VDC
140kV = 0.380 VDC
» TP17: N/A
» TP18 SAW: (Analog 39KHz to 66KHz during scan) This signal is the sawtooth and is
39KHz to 66KHz during a scan.
» TP19 VER: (Analog) This signal is the cathode kV voltage error.
» TP20 INVEN: (TTL) This signal is the inverter enable signal from the CPU to enable
the inverter.
» TP21 LU: (TTL) Use the Left Upper test point to check the fiber optic cables on the kV
board by grounding TP–21.
» TP23, TP42, TP36, TP34, TP–28: One at a time, make sure the LEDs light in the proper
sequence on the inverter gate driver board.
» TP22 EXCM: (TTL) Exposure Command from the Gentry I/O board.
» TP23 LL: (TTL) Use the Left Lower test point to check the fiber optic cables on the kV
board by grounding TP–21,
» TP23, TP42, TP36, TP34 and TP–28: One at a time. Make sure the LEDs light in the
proper sequence on the inverter gate driver board.
» TP24 ASPIT: (Anode Spit – Analog) When the fall time of the anode kV is fast enough,
a large signal will pass thru the cap.
» TP25 CSPIT: (Cathode Spit – Analog) When the fall time of the cathode is fast enough,
a large signal will pass thru the cap.
» TP26 kVMUX: (Analog) This is a MUX’ed signal for:
166
Anode, Cathode kV
Anode,Cathode current
Total kV
+10V Reference
VDrive (TP 12)
» TP27 EXEN: (Exposure Enable – TTL) This is a signal from the rotor to indicate that
the rotor is up to speed.
» TP28 ARL: (TTL). Use the Anode Right Lower test point to check the fiber optic cables
on the kV board by grounding TP–21, TP23, TP42, TP36, TP34 and TP–28 one at a
time. Make sure the LEDs light in the proper sequence on the inverter gate driver board.
» TP29 LEFT: (Left IBGTs – TTL) This is the control signal for the left IGBTs on the
inverter.
» TP30 KVTB: (kV Total – Analog) This is the signal of the anode and cathode total kV.
» TP31 TRIG: (Trigger – TTL) Use this signal as a convenient way to trigger a scope to
the start of a scan. Performing this action is the same as inverter on.
» TP32 HVON (High Voltage ON – TTL) This signal indicates when the anode or cathode
kV exceeds 75% of requested kV.
» TP33 CART: (Cathode Right IGBT – TTL) This signal controls the right IGBT of the
cathode inverter.
» TP34 ARU: (TTL) Use the Anode Right Upper test point to check the fiber optic cables
on the kV board by grounding TP–21, TP23, TP42, TP36, TP34 and TP–28 one at a
time. Make sure the LEDs light in the proper sequence on the inverter gate driver board.
» TP35 ANRT: (Anode Right IGBT – TTL) This signal controls the right IGBTs of the
anode inverter.
» TP36 CRL: (TTL) Use the Cathode Right Lower test point to check the fiber optic
cables on the kV board by grounding TP–21, TP23, TP42, TP36, TP34 and TP–28 one
at a time. Make sure the LEDs light in the proper sequence on the inverter gate driver
board.
» TP37 CAKV: (Analog1 Volt = 10kV Cathode kV) Use this test point to measure the
specified cathode kV signal to the cathode inverter.
» TP38 LGND: Logic ground.
» TP40 VERR: Analog Voltage Error.
» TP41 ANKV: (Analog 1 Volt = 10kV Anode kV) Use this test point to measure the
specified anode kV signal to the anode inverter.
» TP42 CRU: (TTL) Use the Cathode Right Upper test point to check the fiber optic
cables on the kV board by grounding TP–21, TP23, TP42, TP36, TP34 and TP–28 one
at a time. Make sure the LEDs light in the proper sequence on the inverter gate driver
board.
» TP43 LGND: Logic ground.
» TP44 CAOC: (Analog 1 Volt = 10A Cathode Overcurrent) Use this test point to
measure the specified current thru the cathode tank.
» TP45 ANOC: (Analog 1 Volt = 10A Anode Overcurrent) Use this test point to measure
the specified current thru the anode tank.
» TP46 CAST: (Analog) Cathode Shoot–Thru.
» TP47 ANST: (Analog) Anode Shoot–Thru.
» TP48 FLT: (TTL Faults) The following errors are OR’ed at this node:
167
Anode, Cathode Overcurrent

Anode, Cathode Shoot–Thru
Anode, Cathode Overvoltage
» TP49: +15–A
» TP50 FLTS: (TTL Faults) The following errors are OR’ed at the node:
Anode, Cathode Overcurrent
Anode, Cathode Shoot–Thru
Anode, Cathode Overvoltage
Inverter wiring interlock
Fault reset
Spit (TP2)
Spit 32
» TP51: +5V
» TP52: –15–A
12–8–2 KV Control Board 46–321064G1 Switch Settings

» S1: Reset
12–8–3 KV Control Board 46–321064G1 LEDs

» DS365: INVON
» DS366: HVON
» DS367: CAOV
» DS368: PNOV
» DS421: CAOC
» DS422: CAST
» DS423: ANOC
» DS424: ANST
» DS425: INTLK
168
46–321064G1 KV CONTROL BOARD
12–9 46–321198G1 KV Control Board
12–9–1 KV Control Board 46–321198G1 Test Points

» TP1 HVON: A “1” indicates the kV feedback equals or exceeds 75% of command.
» TP2 +5v: +5V (VCC) logic power
» TP3 LGND: Logic ground
» TP4 TRIG: A “1” indicates the selected inverter(s) is (are) turned on.
» TP5 EXCM: A “1” indicates an exposure command is being received from the RCOMM
board.
» TP6 EXEN: A “1” indicates exposures are not disabled by the CTVRC, I/O or mA
boards.
» TP7 SPIT: A “1” indicates a spit has been detected and recovery is in process.
» TP8 KVCM: kV command. Scale: 15kV/V
» TP9 ANKV: Anode kV feedback. Scale: 10 kV/V
» TP10 CAKV: Cathode kV feedback. Scale 10kV/V
» TP11 KVTB: Total kV feedback. Scale 20 kV/V
» TP12 SGND: Signal ground
» TP13 MUX: Analog MUX output as selected by firmware
» TP14 +10V: +10V reference
» TP15 –15V: –15V supply voltage
169
» TP16 +15V: +15V supply voltage

» TP17 KVERR: Integrated kV error signal
» TP18 PCNT: Average inverter duty cycle. Scale: 12%/V – 10%
» TP19 SGND: Signal ground
» TP20 ANOC: Anode inverter current. Scale: 25 A/V
» TP21 CAOC: Cathode inverter current. Scale: 25 A/V
» TP22 APH: Anode inverter duty cycle. Scale: 20% /V – 100%
» TP23 CPH: Cathode inverter duty cycle. Scale: 200% – 20%/V
» TP24 VCNT: Frequency control voltage. Scale: 19.5 kHz + 2.2kHz/V
» TP25 LGND: Logic ground
» TP26 SAW: Sawtooth (5 to 10V) at double the inverter frequency, nominally 39 to 61
kHz
» TP27 FREQ: 5V squarewave at double the inverter frequency.
» TP28 APLSA: “1” indicates an “ON” pulse of the anode inverter
» TP29 CPLSA: “1” indicates an “ON” pulse of the cathode inverter
12–9–2 KV Control Board 46–321198G1 LEDs

» DS1 SPRT: Indicates the maximum spit rate has been exceeded.
» DS2 GFLT: Indicates a “GO” fault has occurred.
» DS3 ANST: Indicates an anode shoot–through has occurred.
» DS4 CAST: Indicates a cathode shoot–through has occurred.
» DS5 ANOC: Indicates an anode overcurrent has occurred.
» DS6 CAOC: Indicates a cathode overcurrent has occurred.
» DS7 ANOV: Indicates an anode overvoltage has occurred.
» DS8 CAOV: Indicates a cathode overvoltage has occurred.
» DS9 AINT: Indicates the anode inverter interlock is open.
» DS10 CINT: Indicates the cathode inverter interlock is open.
» DS11 OVRV: Indicates the kV feedback has exceeded the upper limit of the load regulator.
May be ignored if on after power up or hardware reset.
» DS12 HVND: Indicates anode and/or cathode kV feedback signals exceed 10 kV.
» DS13 INON: Indicates the selected inverter(s) is (are) turned on.
12–9–3 KV Control Board 46–321198G1 Switch Settings

» S1: Insite System readable 8P dip switch set for the ASCII equivalent of the board
assembly version letter.
12–9–4 KV Control Board 46–321198G1 Adjustments

» R316 CAKV: Adjusts the gain of the cathode kV feedback. Factory adjusted for unity
gain. Field adjusted during HV PS cal procedure. Range: approximately ±20%.
» R318 ANKV: Adjusts the gain of the anode kV feedback. Factory adjusted for unity
gain. Field adjusted during HV PS cal procedure. Range: approximately ±20%.
» R323 (FREQ): Factory adjusted for minimum frequency of 39.0 kHz ±1.0 kHz at TP27
(FREQ) with TP24 (VCNT) set to 0V. Should not require field adjustment.
170
46–321198G1 KV CONTROL BOARD
12–10 46–288512G1 Gentry I/O Board
12–10–1 Gentry I/O Board Test Points

» TP3: +5V
» TP4: LGND
» TP5: SGND
» TP6: +15V
» TP7: –15V
» TP8: +12V
» TP9: –12V
» TP10: +10V
» TP11: +24V
» TP12: A/DIN
» TP13: SOUT
» TP14: –SIN
» TP15: SRTN
» TP16: +SIN
» TP17: PGND
171
12–10–2 Gentry I/O Board LEDs

» DS45: ECMD INTR
» DS46: BCTR INTR
» DS47: DTHTR INTR
» DS48: BCTR CLS
» DS75: AXLTS ON
» DS76: ADC CMPLT
» DS77: BTMR EXP
» DS110: TPRLY ON
» DS111: INTR CLS
12–10–3 Gentry I/O Board Switch Settings

» S1: Reset
46–288512G1 GENTRY I/O BOARD
12–11 46–264806G1Axial Control Board
12–11–1 Axial Control Board Test Points

» TP1 RD*: Read Strobe
» TP2 6MHZ: 6 megahertz board clock
» TP3 DTACK*: Data Transfer Acknowledgement
» TP4 AXBE*: Axial board enable
172
» TP5 WR*: Write strobe

» TP6 HOME: Home flag
» TP7 CHC: Axial encoder channel C
» TP8 CHB: Axial encoder channel B
» TP9 CHA: Axial encoder channel A
» TP10 DEMO: From U127
» TP11: VCOSIGIN
» TP12: VCOCOMIN
» TP13 PCP: From U127
» TP14: VCO–CLK
» TP15 RSTSTB: 250 ms Reset strobe
» TP16 DOGEN: Watchdog enable status
» TP17: DELAYINT
» TP18: TRIGON
» TP19: STARTINT
» TP20 ZEROTRIG: Zero trigger (end of scan)
» TP21 XRAYCOMM: X–Ray exposure command
» TP22 DAS–TRIG: DAS triggers
» TP23 CLOCKON: DAS trigger control
» TP24: 10VRF
» TP25: +2VRF
» TP26 AXCMD: Axial drive current command
» TP27: SPARE
» TP28: –10RF
» TP29 AMUX: Analog mux output
» TP30: +24V for XRLE LED
» TP31: +24V for BUPC LED
» TP32: +24V for LOPC LED
» TP33: AX AMP ENABLE RTN
» TP34: AX AMP RESET RTN
» TP35: AX BRAKE for BRAKE LED
» TP36: +15V voltage supply
» TP37: +24V voltage supply
» TP38 –15V: –15V voltage supply
» TP39 +5V: +5V voltage supply
» TP40 AGND: Analog power supply ground
» TP41 LGND: Logic power supply ground
» TP42 PGND: Unregulated +24V power ground
» TP43 QDIR: Quadrature direction
» TP44 AOUT: Xilinx internal channel A
» TP45 SCLK: Xilinx internal sync clock (2MHz)
173
» TP46 BOUT: Xilinx internal channel B

» TP47 HOMEOUT: Xilinx internal channel C
» TP48 HOMEINT*: Xilinx home interrupt
» TP49 OF: Xilinx 32 bit counter overflow bit
12–11–2 Axial Control Board LEDs

» DS270: CHA
» DS271: CHB
» DS320: CHC
» DS321: HOME
» DS322: LPC
» DS323: VAC
» DS324: 55OV
» DS390: XRLE
» DS391: BUPC
» DS392: LOPC
» DS393: AMEN
» DS394: BRAK
» DS395: AMST
12–11–3 Axial Control Board Switch Settings

» S55: RESET SWITCH
174
46–264806G1 AXIAL CONTROL BOARD
175
12–12 46–297475G1 SCOM Board
12–12–1 SCOM Board Test Points

» TP1 + 5V: (TTL 0 Volts) Use this test point to monitor the+ 5 VDC power supply
voltage.
» TP2 – 5V: (TTL 0 Volts) Use this test point to monitor the – 5 VDC power supply
voltage.
» TP3 LGND: (TTL 0 Volts) Use TP3 as logic ground for TP1 and TP2 when you
measure the power supply voltages.
» TP4 GND: (TTL Ground) N/A GE manufacturing uses this test point to test the board
with an external clock signal during gantry assembly. It has no purpose for scanner
applications.
» TP5 ECEN: (TTL) N/A GE manufacturing uses the External Clock Enable test point to
test the board with an external clock signal during gantry assembly. It has no purpose for
scanner applications.
» TP6 ECLK: (TTL) N/A GE manufacturing uses the External Clock test point to test the
board with an external clock signal during gantry assembly. It has no purpose for
12–12–2 SCOM Board Switch Settings

A four position toggle DIP switch is located just under the Diagnostic Communication LEDs
and is labeled SW3..SW0 for “switch bit 3 .. switch bit 0”. This is a general purpose DIP
switch and can be accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Status Register. When a
switch is in the OFF position, the CPU will read a logic “0”.
12–12–3 SCOM Board LEDs

» DS1 ALV: (Alive Mode LED) This is the only green LED on SCOM and is labeled ALV
for “alive.” If this green LED is not lit, either the board power is off or the board is being
held in reset. In either case, SCOM will not operate if the green LED is not lit.
» DS2 BC7: (Board Command bit 7) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the
CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for
176
» DS10 TX: (Transmit Status) This amber LED flickers as data is transmitted out of
SCOM. The intensity of the LED increases as the data transmit rate increases.
» DS11 RX: (Receive Status) This amber LED will flicker as data is received into SCOM.
The intensity of the LED increases as the data rate increases.
» DS12 VLT: (Link Violation Status) This amber LED extinguishes when the TAXI
Receiver is properly locked onto the incoming serial data stream. If the LED is on or
flickering, then either the transmitter in the OBC has been turned off or a problem exists
somewhere in the slip ring communication channel. This LED is an excellent and quick
indication of the overall health of the subsystem.
» DS13 EC: (Exposure Command) This amber LED lights when the command to set
Exposure Command on RCOM has been transmitted across the slip ring (there is no
guarantee, however, that it has been received on the rotating gantry). If the LED is not
lit, then the command to reset Exposure Command on RCOM was transmitted or the
SCOM board was reset.
» DS14 PA: (Parity Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that
indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA),
the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit
(marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM
in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad
components or cables.
» DS15 CK: (Synchronous Clock Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the
board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit
(labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous
clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on
RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad
» DS16 SY: (Synchronization Control Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom
of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity
bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the
synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs
also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to
isolate bad components or cables.
» DS17 D15: (DAS Data Bit 15) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the
177
» DS23 D9: (DAS Data Bit 9) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board
that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled
PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit
178
46–297475G1 SCOM BOARD
179
12–13 46–288854G1 RCOM Board
12–13–1 RCOM Board Test Points

» TP1 – 5V: (TTL 0 Volts) Use this test point to monitor the – 5 VDC power supply
voltage.
» TP2 + 5V: (TTL 0 Volts) Use this test point to monitor the + 5 VDC power supply
voltage.
» TP3 LGND: (TTL 0 Volts) Use TP3 as logic ground for TP1 and TP2 when you
measure the power supply voltages.
» TP4 ECLK: (TTL) N/A GE manufacturing uses the External Clock test point to test the
board with an external clock signal during gantry assembly. It has no purpose for
» TP5 GND: (TTL Ground) N/A GE manufacturing uses this test point to test the board
with an external clock signal during gantry assembly. It has no purpose for scanner
applications.
» TP6 ECEN: (TTL) N/A GE manufacturing uses the External Clock Enable test point to
test the board with an external clock signal during gantry assembly. It has no purpose for
12–13–2 RCOM Board Switch Settings

» S1: Reset
» S2: A four position toggle DIP switch is located beneath the LEDs and is labeled
SW3..SW0 for “switch bit 3 .. switch bit 0”. This is a general purpose DIP switch and can
be accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Status Register. When a switch is in
the OFF position, the CPU will read a logic “0”.
12–13–3 RCOM Board LEDs

» DS1 ALV: (Alive Mode LED) This is the only green LED on SCOM and is labeled ALV
for “alive.” If this green LED is not lit, either the board power is off or the board is being
held in reset. In either case, SCOM will not operate if the green LED is not lit.
CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for
180
» DS10 TX: (Transmit Status) This amber LED flickers as data is transmitted out of
RCOM. The intensity of the LED increases as the data transmit rate increases.
» DS11 RX: (Receive Status) This amber LED will flicker as data is received into RCOM.
The intensity of the LED increases as the data rate increases.
» DS12 VLT: (Link Violation Status) This amber LED extinguishes when the TAXI
Receiver is properly locked onto the incoming serial data stream. If the LED is on or
flickering, then either the transmitter in the OBC has been turned off or a problem exists
somewhere in the slip ring communication channel. This LED is an excellent and quick
indication of the overall health of the subsystem.
» DS13 EC: (Exposure Command) This amber LED lights when the command to set
Exposure Command on RCOM has been transmitted across the slip ring (there is no
guarantee, however, that it has been received on the rotating gantry). If the LED is not
lit, then the command to reset Exposure Command on RCOM was transmitted or the
SCOM board was reset.
» DS14 PA: (Parity Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that
indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA),
the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit
» DS15 CK: (Synchronous Clock Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the
» DS16 SY: (Synchronization Control Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom
of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity
bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the
synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs
also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to
isolate bad components or cables.
181
182
46–288854G1 RCOM BOARD
183
12–14 46–288778G1 Rot. Terminator Bd
12–14–1 Rotating Terminator Board 46–288778G1 Test Points

This board does not have any Test Points.
12–14–2 Rotating Terminator Board 46–288778G1 Connectors

» J6: Power ground to board
OUTBOUND_GND from Rotating Buffer board
» J5: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels, high current)
OUTBOUND_SIGNAL from Rotating Buffer board
» J4: Power input to board
+10.6V_OUTBOUND from Rotating Buffer board
INBOUND_GND from Stationary Buffer board
INBOUND_SIGNAL from Stationary Buffer board
+12V_INBOUND from Stationary Buffer board
12–14–3 Rotating Terminator Board 46–288778G1 LEDs

There are no LEDs on this board.
12–14–4 Rotating Terminator Board 46–288778G1 Switch

Settings
None
46–288778G1 ROT. TERMINATOR BD
ROTATING TERMINATOR BOARD

46–288778G1–A
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6
CHASSIS
GROUND
12–15 46–321054G1 Rot. Terminator Bd
12–15–1 Rotating Terminator Board Test Points

184
12–15–2 Rotating Terminator Board Connectors

OUTBOUND_GND from Rotating Buffer bd.
12–15–3 Rotating Terminator Board LEDs

12–15–4 Rotating Terminator Board Switch Settings

None
46–321054G1 ROT. TERMINATOR BD
12–16 46–288776G1 Rot. Buffer Bd
12–16–1 Rotating Buffer Board 46–288776G1 Test Points

12–16–2 Rotating Buffer Board Connectors

» J1: Center Conductor LOGIC C–AC (CMOS levels, AC coupled) RX_OUTPUT to the
OBC. Shield Ground RX_OUT_GND to the OBC.
» J2: Center Conductor LOGIC C–AC (CMOS levels, AC coupled) TX_INPUT from the
STC. Shield Ground TX_IN_GND from the STC.
185

OUTBOUND_GND to Stationary Buffer board
OUTBOUND_SIGNAL to Stationary Buffer board
+10.6V_OUTBOUND to Stationary Buffer board
12–16–3 Rotating Buffer Board 46–288776G1 LEDs

12–16–4 Rotating Buffer Board 46–288776G1 Switch Settings
None
46–288776G1 ROT. BUFFER BD
12–17 46–288774G1 Stat. Terminator Bd
12–17–1 Stationary Terminator Board 46–288774G1 Test Points

12–17–2 Stationary Terminator Board (Old) Connectors

186

12–17–3 Stationary Terminator Board (OLD) LEDs

12–17–4 Stationary Terminator Board (OLD) Switch Settings

None
46–288774G1 STAT. TERMINATOR BD
12–18 46–321058G1 Rot. Buffer Bd
12–18–1 Rotating Buffer Board Test Points

12–18–2 Rotating Buffer Board Connectors

» J1: Center Conductor, LOGIC C–AC (CMOS levels, AC coupled) RX_OUTPUT to the
OBC. Shield, Ground RX_OUT_GND to the OBC.
» J2: Center Conductor, LOGIC C–AC (CMOS levels, AC coupled) TX_INPUT from the
STC. Shield, Ground TX_IN_GND from the STC.
» J3: Power ground to board, OUTBOUND_GND to Stationary Buffer board
OUTBOUND_SIGNAL to Stationary Buffer board
» J5: Power input to board,
+10.6V_OUTBOUND to Stationary Buffer board
» J6: Power ground to board, INBOUND_GND from Stationary Buffer board
» J7: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels, high current),
» J8: Power input to board, +12V_INBOUND from Stationary Buffer board
187
12–18–3 Rotating Buffer Board LEDs

12–18–4 Rotating Buffer Board Switch Settings

None
46–321058G1 ROT. BUFFER BD
12–19 46–321052G1 Stat. Terminator Bd
12–19–1 Stationary Terminator Board Test Points

12–19–2 Stationary Terminator Board Connectors

12–19–3 Stationary Terminator Board LEDs

12–19–4 Stationary Terminator Board Switch Settings

None
188
46–321052G1 STAT. TERMINATOR BD
12–20 46–288772G1 Stat. Buffer Bd
12–20–1 Stationary Buffer Board 46–288772G1 Test Points

12–20–2 Stationary Buffer Board Connectors

» J3 Pin 1: Power input to board
+12V_INBOUND from +12V Power Supply
» J3 Pin 2: Power ground to board
INBOUND_GND from +12V Power Supply
» J3 Pin 3: Shield connection CHASSIS GND from +12V Power Supply
INBOUND_GND to Rotating Buffer board
INBOUND_SIGNAL to Rotating Buffer board
+12V_INBOUND to Rotating Buffer board
12–20–3 Stationary Buffer Board 46–288772G1 LEDs

12–20–4 Stationary Buffer Board 46–288772G1 Switch Settings
None
189
46–288772G1 STAT. BUFFER BD
J4 CHASSIS
CHASSIS GROUND
J1 J5
GROUND
J6
J7
J8
J2 J9
J3
STATIONARY BUFFER BOARD

46–288772G1–A
12–21 46–321056G1 Stationary Buffer Bd
12–21–1 Stationary Buffer Board Test Points

12–21–2 Stationary Buffer Board Connectors

» J3 Pin 1: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND from +12V Power Supply
» J3 Pin 2: Power ground to board
INBOUND_GND from +12V Power Supply
» J3 Pin 3: Shield connection CHASSIS GND from +12V Power Supply
INBOUND_GND to Rotating Buffer board
INBOUND_SIGNAL to Rotating Buffer board
+12V_INBOUND to Rotating Buffer board
12–21–3 Stationary Buffer Board LEDs

12–21–4 Stationary Buffer Board Switch Settings
None
190
46–321056G1 STATIONARY BUFFER BD
12–22 46–264756G1 Console Autovoice Bd
12–22–1 Console Autovoice Board Test Points

» TP1: Console speaker signal prior to volume reduction
» TP2: Remote intercom microphone signal
» TP3: Signal ground
» TP4: Remote speaker signal prior to volume reduction
» TP5: Console microphone signal
» TP6: Record input signal
» TP7: Play output signal
» TP8: +6V
» TP9: Logic ground
12–22–2 Console Autovoice Board LEDs

» DS86 RUN: Autovoice microcontroller active
12–22–3 Console Autovoice Board Switch Settings

» S253: Reset
191
46–264756G1 CONSOLE AUTOVOICE BD
12–23 46–264888G1 Relay Control Board
12–23–1 Relay Control Board Test Points

» TP1 Analog 120/110 VAC Will be 120/110 VAC when the axial is enabled. Will be
at 0 VAC if the servo over current relay opens to disable the servo.
» TP2 Analog 120/110 VAC Coil Power at 120/110 VAC for the servo enable
contactor K2. At 120/110VAC for the servo to be able to drive gantry axial rotation.
» TP3 Analog 120/110 VAC 120/110 VAC coil power for circuit breaker K1 (Table
vertical drive and Gantry tilt) and K2 (Table horizontal drive). Present when drives are
’ON’ at the REM box.
» TP4 Analog 120/110 VAC Power to turn on the SRU and the Operator console
contactors. 120/110 VAC when ’Data Processing power’ is on at the REM box.
» TP5 Analog 120/110 VAC Power for DCRGS contactor K1. Should be at 120/110
VAC if Gantry I/O, 550 enable switch in gantry and REM box drives are ’ON’.
» TP6 Analog 120/110 VAC Power for DCRGS contactor K1. Requires power at
TP5, key switch closure and activation of circuit breaker assembly contactors K2, K1,
and K4.
» TP7 Analog 120/110 VAC Same function as TP6 if relay control board K33 is
functioning properly.
» TP8 Analog 120/110 VAC Input for 120/110 contactor coil power from 32KVA
transformer.
» TP9 Analog 120/110 VAC Coil Power at the RCB. 120 VAC for 60 Hz. and 110
VAC for 50Hz.
» TP10 Analog 208 VAC 208 VAC line to line on these points when circuit breaker
contactor K1 is on to produce 160 VDC power for table vertical drive and gantry tilt. ’0’
VAC when drives are OFF.
192
» TP13 Analog +24VDC +/– 4 +24 VDC (18 – 28 DVC).
» TP14 Analog +24VDC Loop On status, +24 when the servo is enabled.
» TP15 Analog +24VDC OK to turn on Gantry Servo Output. Should be at +24
VDC for Gantry Axial Rotation to be enabled.
» TP16 Analog +24VDC Hospital ’X–Ray ON’ control power. At +24 VDC when
the external hospital light should be ON.
» TP17 Analog +24VDC Drives On, should be at +24 when the REM box
’X–Ray/Drives On’ is activated.
» TP18 Analog +24VDC At +24 VDC when ’X–Ray Drives On’ is activated at the
REM box. At 0 VDC when drives are Off. This is the pilot function for Drives On.
» TP19 Analog +24VDC At +24 VDC when Data Processing Power is activated at
the REM box. At 0 VDC when Off. This is the pilot function for PDU On.
» TP20 Analog +24VDC Read back for 550 enabled. At +24 VDC when DCRGS
contactor K1 is on and 550 VDC is enabled.
» TP21 Analog +24VDC Table and Console E–Stop operates properly at +24
VDC except when table or console E–Stop is engaged.
» TP22 Analog +24VDC +24 VDC power supply output. At +24 VDC at all times.
» TP23 Analog +160 VDC At 160 when drives are on.
» TP24 Analog Neutral Ground
» TP27 Analog +24VDC Part of X–Ray Interlock circuit. At +24 nominally unless
the axial control board detects a fault.
12–23–2 Relay Control Board LEDS and Lamps

» DS29 NEON LAMP120 VAC neon lamp is on when the power from the 32KVA
transformer is present on the relay control board to supply 120/110 VAC.
» DS79 NEON LAMP External 120 VAC at J12 is on when relay K59 is energized. This
neon lamp indicates that the 120/110 VAC is present for the hospital light.
12–23–3 Relay Control Board Switch Settings

» S65 MANUAL 550 VDC
193
46–264888G1 RELAY CONTROL BOARD
12–24 46–264884G1 DCRGS Control Board
12–24–1 DCRGS Control Board Test Points

» TP1 CBV: CAPACITOR BALANCE VOLTAGE 50V/V
» TP2 DUTV: OUTPUT VOLTAGE 200V/V
» TP3 OUTCUR: OUTPUT CURRENT 10 AMPS/VOLT
» TP4: GND
» TP5 UVRST: UNDER VOLTAGE RESET
» TP6: PH–LOSS
» TP7 I2*: A low signal on this line prevents gating of the SCRs. When this signal is
taken from a low to a high state the gate firing board limits the rate of delay angle
change. The actual firing angle changes from 120 degrees to the final value over a
specified period of time. VIL = 1.0V, Max VIH 10.0V min.
» TP8 DLYCMD: DELAY ANODE COMMAND, 33 DEG/V 120 DEG = 5.0V
» TP9: VR2.5
» TP10: VR7.5
» TP11 INPV: PEAK RECT. LINE VOLTAGE 200V/V
» TP12: 12R
» TP13: AGND
» TP14: AGND
» TP15: AGND
194
» TP16 +30V: +30V ±2V

» TP17 +12V: +12V ±0.5V
» TP18 +5V: +5V ±0.05V
» TP19 +22V: +22.2V ±1V with respect to TP13
12–24–2 DCRGS Control Board LEDs

Condition/state of LEDs with backup contactor OFF when 120 VAC power is initially applied
to SCR Regulator board.
» DS190 LINE VOLTAGE LOW: yellow off

» DS191 22V POWER ON: green on
» DS192 INTLK OPEN: yellow off
» DS193 CAP UNBALANCE: yellow off (on most units)
» DS194 OVER CURRENT: yellow on (on most units)
» DS195 UNDER VOLT: yellow on (on most units)
» DS196 PHASE LOSS: yellow on
12–24–3 DCRGS Control Board Switch Settings

» S96 550V/HVTEST: Normal switch position 550V
46–264884G1 DCRGS CONTROL BOARD
195
12–25 SCR Firing Board
12–25–1 SCR Firing Board Test Points

None
12–25–2 SCR Firing Board LEDs

Condition/state of LEDs with backup contactor OFF when 120 VAC power is initially applied
to SCR Regulator board.
» PD1 PHASE LOSS yellow on

» PD2 INHIBIT yellow on
» PD3 12V POWER OK green on
12–25–3 SCR Firing Board Switch Settings

» J10 50/60Hz Jumper
Conditions:
1. Turn on 550 VDC supply back up contactor. Yellow, PHASE LOSS LED on SCR Firing
Board to be “OFF” (If ON then input fuse may be open or phase sensing leads at J 7B on
the SCR Firing Board may be faulty). A large number of 2M ohm resistors in phase
sensing leads to J7B on the SCR Firing Board have failed open.
All yellow LEDs must now be off.
Once back up contactor de–energized, all yellow LEDs on the regulator board must be
OFF except for the PHASE LOSS LED.
Note: The CAP UNBALANCE (DS 193), OVER CURRENT (DS 194), and UNDER VOLT (DS
195) are latched faults that are reset by back up contactor energizing.
Note: Refer to figure 12–27 TP2 and TP3 DCRGS Control Board for the time to reach 435 volts
after Phase Loss lamp turned off.
2. At TP3 during the no load condition there shall be no missing pulses and peak to peak
voltages to be 1000 ±200mV, refer to No load current at TP3. There are sets of six
pulses per full cycle and each may have two pulses that are higher or lower than the
other two. This trace will detect SCRs that may have opened.
196
SCR FIRING BOARD
197
12–26 46–264368G1 ETC Board
12–26–1 ETC Board Test Points

» TP1 +5V: (Digital +5 volts) Power Supply Test Point
» TP2 LGND: (Digital LGND) Power Supply Test Point
» TP3: (Digital ±12 volts) RS232 Table XMIT
» TP4: (Digital ±12 volts) RS232 Table REC
» TP5: (Digital +5 volts) Spare
» TP6: (Digital 0 – 5 volts) Long Encoder CH C
» TP7 AGND: (Analog) AGND Power Supply Test Point
» TP8: (Analog ±15 volts) Cradle Tach (relatively noisy signal)
Gain = 75 mm/sec = 6.3 volts at TP
» TP9: (Digital 0 – 5 volts) Long Encoder CH B
» TP10: (Digital 0 – 5 volts) Long Encoder CH A
» TP11 –15v: (Analog –15 volts) Power Supply Test Point
» TP12: (Analog 0 – 10 volts) Elev/Tilt Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Control (controls
AR689 pulse width) Gain =5 uSec pulse Width / volt command
» TP13: (Analog +10 volts) +10 Reference
» TP14: (Analog 0 – 15 volts) Cradle Current Integrator (averages out pulses from
AR653) Wider pulses = more amp current = higher signal
» TP15 –15V: (Analog 0 – 15 volts) Elev/Tilt Current Integrator (averages out pulses
from AR563) Wider pulses = more amp current = higher signal.
» TP16: (Analog 0 – 10 volts) Cradle Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Control (controls
AR669 pulse width) Gain = 5 uSec pulse Width / volt command Analog Signal
» TP17: (Digital 0 – 15 volts) Cradle Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) sets output (v) of
power amp. Volts out = Pulse width (uSec) * 24 / 56
» TP18 AGND: (Analog Ground) Power Supply Test Point
» TP19: (Analog ±15 volts) Elev/Tilt Motor Voltage Feedback (Filtered map pulse width
modulation signal, fc = 39 cps, gain TP19/amp voltage =.05v/v
» TP20: (Digital 0 – 15 volts) Trigger SYNCH Signal PWM trigger for power amps (17.72
KHz)
» TP21 +15V: (Analog +15 volts) Power Supply Test Point
» TP22: (Digital 0 – 5 volts) Elev/Tilt Command Direction
(+5V = Up/Forward)
» TP23: (Digital 0 – 15 volts) Elev/Tilt PWM (sets output (v) of power amp. volts out = pw
(uSec) * 160 /56
» TP24 PGND: (Analog Physical Ground) Power Supply Test Point
» TP25 +24V: (Analog +24 volts) Power Supply Test Point
» TP26: (Analog ±15 volts) Cradle motor voltage Feedback (filtered amp pwm signal), FC
= 64 CPS Gain (TP26/amp voltage) = .41v/v
12–26–2 ETC Board LEDs

» DS263 CR–A: Cradle Encoder A–pulse active
» DS264 CR–B: Cradle Encoder B–pulse active
» DS265 CR–C: Cradle Encoder C–pulse active
» DS266 EL–C: Elevation Encoder C–pulse active
198
» DS310 CSTALL: Cradle stalled when on

» DS311 ETFAULT: Elevation/Tilt Amp fault elevation or tilt drive shorted when on
» DS312 ETSTALL: Elevation/Tilt Amp stall or tilt drive stalled when on
12–26–3 ETC Board Switch Settings

» S162: Reset
46–264368G1 ETC BOARD
12–27 Westamp Servo Amp
12–27–1 Westamp Servo Amp Internal Test Points

(Non–Accessible)
» TP1: Tachometer input
» TP2: Signal input
» TP3: Output of velocity control amplifier
» TP4: Output of current error amplifier
» TP5: Base drive oscillator
» TP6: Base drive oscillator
12–27–2 Westamp Servo Amp LEDs

» CR35: NO FAULT
199
» CR36 REM LIM:

J1–8, remote enable/disable (non–latching)
J1–6, A limit switch (non–latching)
J1–7, B limit switch (non–latching).
» CR37 TEMP: Indicates excessive ambient temperature.
» CR38 OV VOLT: Bus over–voltage.
» CR39 RMS: Indicates excessive current draw.
» CR40 LOGIC: Indicates ±12 VDC logic supply.
» CR41 GND FAULT: Indicates output short to ground.
» CR42 SURGE: Indicates excessive transistor current or shorted outputs.
» CR43: PWR ON
» CR44 BUS: Indicates DC bus power, even with logic power off.
12–27–3 Westamp Servo Amp Switch Settings

None
WESTAMP SERVO AMP
12–28 Axial Servo Amp Control Board – Allen Bradley Servo

Amp
12–28–1 Axial Servo Amp Control Board LEDs–Allen Bradley Servo Amp
» CURRENT FOLDBACK, The red current foldback LED illuminates when the current
foldback circuitry is operating. Indicates that the time vs. current overload rating of the
power transistors has been exceeded. The intensity of the LED varies in proportion to
the amount of overload.
Current Foldback LED is illuminated
200
1. The logic supply (±12 VDC, +5V) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown, etc.) or the AC
input at A3TB1–9,10,11 is incorrectly wired.
2. The output current is exceeding its time–current rating.
a. The acceleration/deceleration command to the servo is requiring peak current for an
excessive amount of time.
b. The gain pot is set too high, causing excessive peak currents.
c. The machine friction, inertial load and/or viscous loading is excessive.
d. A short circuit exists across the servo output terminals.
e. The current ripple is excessive, caused by load inductance being below minimum.
ENABLE (EN)
The application of an Enable signal by the system will cause the Green enable LED to
illuminate.
Enable LED is NOT illuminated

1. The system has not enabled the servo.
2. The enable wiring to the servo is open.
3. The axial interface board enable relay has malfunctioned.
4. The system has detected a system malfunction that will not allow the servo to be
enabled.
5. Power has not been applied to the servo.
6. The logic supply (±12 VDC, +5 VDC) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown, etc.) or the
AC input at A3TB 1–9,10,11 is incorrectly wired.
Enable LED is illuminated, but servo does not enable

1. A servo malfunction has occurred but is not annunciated by the LED indicators. Check
the status of the fault contact output.
2. A component malfunction exists in the enable circuit.
3. The servo circuit breaker (CB1) is tripped.
4. Servo fan/contactor fuse has blown. Verify that the fan is operational with power applied.
5. The line/DB contactor has malfunctioned inside the servo.
6. The servo logic supplies are not operational
a. The logic supply fuses are blown.
b. Logic supply AC voltage is missing
7. UV LED is illuminated.
» Enable signal is present prior to power being applied to the power transformer (wait at
least 1 second after the 120 VAC, three–phase power is applied before enabling the
servo). Also wait at least 1 second after a servo reset cycle before enabling the servo.
MOTOR OVERLOAD (MOD)
201
The red motor overload LED illuminates when the motor overload detection circuit trip point
has been exceeded. IMPORTANT: This overload indication may take several minutes to
reset. If cycling the power does not cause a reset, remove power from the controller for
about 3 minutes, then retry.
Motor Overload LED is illuminated

1. The logic supply (±12 VDC, +5VDC) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown, etc) or the
AC input at A3TB1–9,10,11 is incorrectly wired.
2. The continuous rating of the servomotor is being exceeded.
a. The programmed duty cycle requires an RMS torque exceeding the motor rating.
b. The machine frictional force or alignment is improperly set.
c. A mechanical limit or stop on the machine is causing the motor to develop excessive
torque.
d. The servo peak current pot is set higher than the motor rating.
e. The motor is partially demagnetized causing excessive current draw.
OVER TEMPERATURE (OT)
When illuminated, the red LED indicates that the heat sink over temperature device inside the
servo has tripped.
Over temperature LED is illuminated

2. The heat sink thermal overload has tripped. One or more of the following may have
occurred (if the surface temperature of the exposed heat sink adjacent to the ground stud
measures greater than 90 degrees Celsius)”.
a. The cabinet ambient temperature is too high.
b. The machine duty cycle requires an RMS current exceeding the continuous rating of the
servo.
c. The integral fan is not functioning.
d. The airflow access to the servo is limited or blocked.
e. The input line voltage exceeds the maximum controller input voltage.
OVERVOLTAGE (OV)
The DC power bus is continuously monitored. If it exceeds 265VDC a fault is sensed and the
red LED is illuminated.
Overvoltage LED is illuminated

2. Check shunt regulator resistors fuse on the servo panel.
3. Motor armature is shorted to ground.
4. The power bus voltage has exceeded 265VDC
202
a. The logic or shunt regulator board is malfunctioning and incorrectly sensing the bus
voltage.
b. The input line voltage exceeds the maximum controller input voltage.
c. Shunt regulator board or transistor has malfunctioned.
TRANSISTOR OVERCURRENT (TOC)
This red LED illuminates when the peak current rating of the power transistor(s) has been
exceeded.
Transistor overcurrent LED is illuminated

1. The logic control board has malfunctioned.
2. The transistor base driver board is inoperative.
3. The logic control board common is not properly grounded.
4. The logic supply (±12VDC, +5VDC) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown, etc) or the
5. The peak rating of the power transistors has been exceeded.
a. Servo output or servomotor has been short circuited or grounded.
b. A power transistor module has malfunctioned.
UNDERVOLTAGE (UV)
If the DC power bus drops below 75 VDC (+/– 20%) and the servo is enabled or the logic
supplies have dropped 10% below their nominal value, this red LED is illuminated.
Undervoltage LED is illuminated

1. The power bus voltage has dropped below 75 VDC.
a. The line/DB contactor has not energized or has dropped out (inside the servo).
b. The line/DB contactor fuse is blown.
c. The input line voltage is low.
d. The power bus capacitor has malfunctioned.
e. The servo circuit breaker (CB1) has tripped.
f. The three–phase input line is open.
g. The transformer is providing the incorrect line voltage or has malfunctioned.
2. The logic supplies have dropped 10% below their nominal value.
a. The input line voltage is low.
b. The transformer auxiliary logic supply winding is open.
c. The logic supply (±12 VDC, +5VDC) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown, etc.) or the
3. The enable LED is also illuminated.
a. The enable signal is present prior to the power being applied to the transformer (wait at
least 1 second after the 120 VAC, three–phase power is applied before enabling the
controller). Also wait at least 1 second after a servo reset cycle before enabling the
servo.
203
b. The controller circuit breaker is open.
12–28–2 Test Points

None
12–28–3 Switches Axial Servo Amp Control Board–AB

None
12–29 Axial Interface Board–AB
12–29–1 Axial Interface Board–AB Test Points

» TP1 AGND: Analog Ground and Neutral of transformer input
» TP2: +12VOutput of +12 volt regulator
» TP3: –12VOutput of –12 volt regulator
» TP4 ENABLE: Collector of Enable Opto–Isolator. When the opto–isolator is off, the voltage
at the +12 volt (not enabled) should be greater than supply test point (TP1) minus 50
millivolts. When the opto–isolator is on (enabled), the voltage at this test point should be less
than the voltage at the +12 volt supply test point (TP1) minus 7 volts.
» TP5 I_RTN: Amplifier current output readback return
» TP6 I_OUT: Amplifier current output readback
» TP7 +15V: Output of +15 volt regulator
» TP8 –15V: Output of –15 volt regulator
» TP9 RESET: Collector of Reset Opto–Isolator. When the opto–isolator is off, the
voltage at the +12 volt (not reset) should be greater than supply test point (TP1) minus
50 millivolts. When the opto–isolator is on (reset), the voltage at this test point should be
less than the voltage at the +12 volt supply test point (TP1) minus 7 volts.
12–29–2 Axial Interface Board–AB LEDs

None
12–29–3 Axial Interface Board–AB Switch Settings

None
204
AXIAL INTERFACE BOARD–AB
12–30 Zeus Remote Intercom X Board
12–30–1 Zeus Remote Intercom X Board Test Points

» TP1: Noise Cancel circuit output
» TP2: Level Control amp output
» TP3: Line Driver circuit input
» TP4: Line Driver circuit output
» TP5: Automatic Gain Control (AGC) for Level Control amp
» TP6: Regulator circuit output
12–30–2 Zeus Remote Intercom X Board LEDs

None
12–30–3 Zeus Remote Intercom X Board Switch Settings

None
205
ZEUS REMOTE INTERCOM X BOARD
12–31 Interface Measurement Board
12–31–1 Interface Measurement Board Test Points

» TP1 KV: Sensed kV signal – Scale 10 kV / V
» TP2 KV: kV signal to OBC
» TP3 KV GND: kV return signal to OBC
» TP4
» TP5 MA: Sensed kV signal – Scale 100 kV / V
» TP6 MA GND: mA return signal to OBC
» TP7 PS1: Pressure Switch 1
» TP8 PS2: Pressure Switch 2
» TP9 TH1: Thermistor 1 (not used)
» TP10 TH2: Thermistor 2 (not used)
» TP11 XS2: Small Filament 2
» TP12 XSC: Small Filament Common
» TP13 XS1: Small Filament 1
» TP14 XL2: Large Filament 2
» TP15 XLC: Large Filament Common
» TP16 XL1: Large Filament 1
» TP17 MAout: mA signal to OBC
206
» TP18 GND: Tank ground

» TP19 kV: Sensed kV signal – Scale 10 kV / V
» TP20 GND: Tank ground
12–31–2 Interface Measurement Board LEDs

None
12–31–3 Interface Measurement Board Switch Settings
None
INTERFACE MEASUREMENT BOARD
207
12–32 1/2 Mag Tape Controller Board

1/2 MAG TAPE CONTROLLER BOARD
12–33 LM02 Board
12–33–1 LMO2 Test Points

None
12–33–2 LEDs
None
12–33–3 Switches
None
12–33–4 Jumper Settings

These jumpers should have been previously installed at the factory, however make certain to
verify the correct jumpers have been set prior to inserting the board into the card cage.
» X1: 1 Jumper IN
» X2: All Jumpers IN
» X3: 3 Jumpers In – HSA
4 Jumpers OUT (See Illustration 12–34)
» X3: 2 Jumpers IN – HSA–RP
4 Jumpers OUT (See Illustration 12–35)
208
HLA XE, HSA ZC (Releases based on 3.5G2 Gos)
MOTHERBOARD
DAUGHTERBOARD (Underneath)
X2
P1
X1
BOTH JUMPERS IN
XJ1
JUMPER IN
XJ2 X3
P2
X3
4 JUMPERS OUT
3 JUMPERS IN
LABEL
P3
209
HLA XF, HSA ZD (Releases based on 4.1G3 Gos)
MOTHERBOARD
DAUGHTERBOARD (Underneath)
X2
P1
X1
BOTH JUMPERS IN
XJ1
JUMPER IN
XJ2
X3
P2
X3
5 JUMPERS OUT
2 JUMPERS IN
LABEL
P3
12–34 FEP Board 46–327036G1
12–34–1 FEP Board Test Points

» TP2 VCC +5V Logic Supply
» TP3 –5V –5V ECL Logic Supply
» TP4 +12V +12V Backplane Voltage
» TP5 –12V –12V Backplane Voltage
» TP6 LGND Logic Ground
12–34–2 FEP Board LEDs

» DS1 Green D0 Diagnostic/status LED #0, mapped to
the Internal Command Register Bit 24
and controlled by DSP0.
» DS2 Green D1 Diagnostic/status LED #1, to the
Internal Command Register Bit 25 and
controlled by DSP0.
210

the Internal Command Register and set
by DSPs
by DSPs
by DSPs
by DSPs
by DSPs
by DSPs
» DS9 Green EDDF DAS Data FIFO is empty
» DS10 Green FDDF DAS Data FIFO is full
» DS11 Green EIDF VME Input Data FIFO is empty
» DS12 Green FIDF VME Input Data FIFO is full
» DS1 Green EODF VME Output Data FIFO is empty
» DS14 Green FODF VME Output Data FIFO is full
» DS15 Green ACC0 DSP #0 is accessing local SRAM
» DS16 Green ACC1 DSP #1 is accessing local SRAM
» DS17 Green ABT Abort line is open (scanning is not
enabled) Command Register and set
by DSPs
12–34–3 FEP Board Switch Settings

There is one switch on the FEP. Switch S1 is used to power–up reset the FEP.
12–34–4 FEP Board Jumpers

» JP1 TBS: Test bus select. Selects whether the JTAG test bus source is the
74ACT8990 test bus controller or the XDS510 test bus interface.
Jumper removed (Normal Operation Position): 74ACT8990 is the test bus source
Jumper installed (Engineering Test Only Position): XDS510 is the test bus source
211
FEP BOARD
12–35 Ethernet Transceiver
12–35–1 Ethernet Transceiver Test Points

None.
12–35–2 Ethernet Transceiver LEDs

» Lanview LEDs
» Power Light
» Transmit Light
» Receive Light
» Collision Light
Troubleshooting Ethernet Light Problems:
A. No Lanview LEDs ON.
1. Check power ON at host
2. Check proper connection via transceiver cable
3. Check power pair of transceiver cable
B. Power LED ON, transmit LED OFF, receive LED ON steady, collision LED ON steady.
» Transceiver tap not making contact with center conductor on coax.
C. Power LED ON, transmit LED OFF, receive LED OFF, collision LED ON.
» TDR 5000 on network with E–button depressed.
D. Power LED ON, transmit, receive, collision LEDs flashing simultaneously

» Open in coax.
212
E. Power LED ON, Transmit LED flashing, receive LED ON or OFF, collision LED OFF.
1. Coax cable shorted.
2. Transceiver tap shorted.
12–35–3 Ethernet Transceiver Switch Settings

» SQE Switch
To configure the heartbeat (SQE) switch, slide the SQE switch to the left to enable the
heartbeat (SQE) test and to the right to disable the heartbeat (SQE) test. This switch should
be set in the disabled position, switched to the right.
» SQE OFF Jumper

When the transceiver is received from stock the jumper will more than likely be set up
incorrectly. If the jumper is in the wrong position the SQE LED on the transceiver will be
illuminated. What this is indicating is that the heartbeat test is enabled. There is a chance
that if the heartbeat test is enabled the system ethernet circuitry may not function correctly.
Set the jumper inside the ethernet to jumper between slots 4 and 5. This is the SQE OFF
setting.
ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER
12–36 AP120 Board
12–36–1 AP120 Board Test Points

None
12–36–2 AP120 Board LEDs

» Status
A bi–color status indicator LED is just below the reset button. When the board first
powers–up, the indicator is off. The LED turns yellow when all four onboard DSPs have
successfully begun diagnostic tests, and green upon completion.
213
If the indicator remains off after power on, this indicates that at least one of the DSPs on the
board has a major failure and is unable to complete its initialization routine. If it remains
yellow, this indicates a diagnostic routine error.
» Bus Activity
The AP120 front panel has two green LED indicators just below the status indicator. The top
indicator reflects activity on the HSB and the lower indicator reflects activity on the VME bus.
Each indicator is illuminated when its bus is actively transmitting or receiving data. The LED
intensity is proportional to the duty cycle of the active to non–active state.
12–36–3 AP120 Board Switch Settings

» Reset
The AP120 has a manual reset switch on the front panel. This switch is useful in returning
the board to a known state after a system problem. During troubleshooting, use the reset
switch to reset the AP120 and start self tests.
12–36–4 Internal Cable Connections

The AP120 board has a front panel connector for the diagnostic processor; however, this is
not implemented and has no function as a diagnostic tool.
12–36–5 AP120 Board Configuration

» Setting Up the VMEbus Address
The front panel provides access to four rotary hexadecimal switches for programming the
VMEbus address of the board. These switches are preset at the factory to address
0xD0000000 and then sealed with plugs in the front panel. The service technician has no
access to these switches.
The AP120 always responds as an A32 slave. The APp120 responds as an A24 slave if the
A24 Decode Enable jumper is installed at location J3_1. If the jumper is removed, the
AP120Ap120 does not respond as an A24 slave. The board maps to a 4–Mbyte contiguous
region of the VME address space selected by the rotary switches. The J3_1 jumper and
rotary switches are on the component side of the board, see board layout.
» Setting Up High Speed Bus Jumpers

The HSB has nine header strips to configure the bus and clock connections. The headers
are all located together in an area represented by the shaded box near P2 on the board
layout diagram.
12–36–6 AP120 Board Jumper Settings

» AP120 MCS Header (J39_1, J39_2)
The AP120 MCS jumpers (J39_1 and J39_2) are installed if the AP120 being configured is
the MCS for the system. These headers have two rows of three pins. (Pin 1 is the topmost
pin on the right of the header.
Since the AP120 being configured is not the MCS for the system, remove the jumpers from
the J39_1 and J39_2 headers.
» Clock/Sync Receive Header (J41_1, J41_2)

The Clock/Sync Headers (J41_1 and J41_2) isolate the onboard clock circuitry from the
connector P2 row C. These headers have two rows of three pins. (Pin 1 is the topmost pin
on the right of the header.)
214
Since the AP120 uses the high speed bus and receives clock 0, place the jumpers for the
clock/sync headers in the position shown in the board layout diagram.
» Use HSB/No HSB (J41_3)

The J41_3 header, three rows of three pins, uses 1x2 jumpers, which are placed in one of
the positions shown in the board layout diagram. Since the AP120 in the RPRp subsystem
uses the HSB, place jumpers in the pin 3 position.
» Bus Isolation Header (J51_1, J51_2, J50_3, J50_4)

The four large headers (J50_1, J50_2, J50_3, and J50_4) isolate the onboard HSB circuitry
from the connector P2 rows A & C. Each header has 18 rows. When a jumper must be
installed, use a 16–row shorting block installed over the center 16 rows.
The AP120 in the RPp uses the HSB, so place all four jumpers as shown in the board layout
diagram.
AP120 BOARD
12–37 BPP Board
12–37–1 BPP Board Test Points

None
12–37–2 BPP Board LEDs

» Status
215
A bi–color status indicator LED is just below the reset button. When the board first
powers–up, the indicator is off. The LED turns yellow when all four onboard DSPs have
successfully begun diagnostic tests, and green upon completion.
If the indicator remains off after power on, this indicates that at least one of the DSPs on the
board has a major failure and is unable to complete its initialization routine. If it remains
yellow, this indicates a diagnostic routine error.
» Bus Activity
The BPP front panel has two green LED indicators just below the status indicator. The top
indicator reflects activity on the HSB and the lower indicator reflects activity on the VME bus.
Each indicator is illuminated when its bus is actively transmitting or receiving data. The LED
intensity is proportional to the duty cycle of the active to non–active state.
12–37–3 BPP Board Switch Settings

Reset
The BPP has a manual reset switch on the front panel. This switch is useful in returning the
board to a known state after a system problem. During troubleshooting, use the reset switch
to reset the BPP and start self tests.
12–37–4 BPP Board Configuration

The front panel provides access to three rotary hexadecimal switches for programming the
VMEbus address of the board. These switches are preset at the factory to address
0xE0000000 and then sealed with plugs in the front panel. The service technician has no
access to these switches.
The BPP responds as an A32 slave. The board maps to an 8–Mbyte Contiguous region of
the VME address space selected by the rotary switches. The rotary switches are on the
component side of the board.
12–37–5 BPP Board Jumper Settings

None.
216
BPP BOARD
217
12–38 CLA Board
12–38–1 CLA Board Test Points

–– NONE ––
12–38–2 CLA Board LEDs

» SYSFAIL: Red until UNIX boots and successfully attaches to device, then turns green.
» VME: VME Access – Pulses when active
» RX: Receive Packets – Pulses when active.
» TX: Transmit Packets – Pulses when active.
» INT: VME Interrupt – Pulses when active.
12–38–3 CLA Board Switches

» (H7) 4, 6, 7, 8 On
1, 2, 3, 5 Off
» (H11) 1, 6 On
7, 8 Off
» (H12) 4, 6, 7 On
1, 2, 3, 5, 8 Off
218
CLA BOARD
NOTE: THE 6U HAWK ETHERNET IS MOUNTED ON A 9U ADAPTOR. LEDS NOT VISIBLE FROM 9U FRONT PANEL.
JA11
9U ADAPTOR 6U CIRCUIT
BOARD BOARD
JA4
JA16
P1
JA8 JA9 JA10
VME
RX
TX
INT
JA12
STATUS
ON
SW1
OFF
ON
TX2 SW2
OFF
TX1
ON
SW3
Ribbon Cable OFF
to 9U Panel JA7
Connector J1
P2
JA13
JA1
12–39 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC)
12–39–1 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) LEDs

» FAIL (Board Failure)
The red FAIL LED lights when the active BRDFAIL signal line indicates a failure.
» STAT (Status)
219
The yellow STAT LED is driven by the decoded MC68040 status lines. This LED lights
when it receives a halt condition from the MC68040 processor.
» SCON (System Controller)
The green SCON LED indicates whether the SBC is the system controller. When the
VMEchip2 in the MVME167 is the VMEbus system controller, the SCON LED lights.
» VME (VMEbus Activity)
The green VME LED lights when the SBC is using the VMEbus and when the VMEbus
accesses the SBC (VMEchip2 is local bus master).
» RUN (Local Bus Active)
The green RUN LED lights when one of the local bus masters is executing a local bus
cycle.
» LAN and SCSI (Local Bus Master)
The green SCSI LED lights when the SCSI chip is local bus master. The green LAN LED
lights when the LAN chip is local bus master.
» +12V (LAN Power)
The SBC supplies +12V power to the Ethernet transceiver interface through a fuse. The
green +12V LED lights when power is available to the transceiver interface.
12–39–2 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Switch Settings

The SBC has a manual reset switch and an abort switch on the front panel. The reset and
abort switches, which are useful in returning the board to a known state after a system
problem, are enabled by software. These switches are used in the following ways.
» Reset Switch
Pressing and releasing the front panel reset switch initiates a system reset. Cold and
warm reset modes are available. By default, 167Bug is in cold mode. During cold reset,
a total system initialization takes place, as if the SBC had just been powered up. All
static variables (including disk device and controller parameters) are restored to their
default states. The breakpoint table and offset registers are cleared. The target
registers are invalidated. Input and output character queues are cleared. Onboard
devices (timer, serial ports, etc...) are reset, and the first two serial ports are reconfigured
to their default state.
During warm reset, the 167Bug variables and tables are preserved, as well as the target
state registers and breakpoints.
Reset must be used if the processor ever halts, or if the 167Bug environment is ever lost
(vector table is destroyed, stack corrupted, etc...).
» Abort Switch
Abort is invoked by pressing and releasing the abort switch on the SBC front panel.
Whenever abort is invoked when executing a user program (running target code) a
“snapshot” of the processor state is captured and stored in the target registers. For this
reason, abort is most appropriate when terminating a user program that is being
debugged. Abort should be used to regain control if the program gets caught in a loop,
etc... The target PC, register contents, etc..., help to pinpoint the malfunction.
Pressing and releasing the abort switch generates a local board condition, which may
interrupt the processor if enabled. The target registers, reflecting the machine state at
the time the abort switch was pressed, are displayed on the screen. Any breakpoints
installed in your code are removed and the breakpoint table remains intact. Control is
returned to the debugger.
220

The SBC board has no front panel connectors. The SBC has two 96–position DIN
connectors (P1 and P2). P1 rows A, B, and C and P2 row B are the VMEbus
interconnection.
P2 rows A and C provide connection to the serial ports 1 and 2, SCSI interface, and Ethernet
for the Operator’s Console.
12–39–4 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Configuration

The Motorola MVME167 has a board information block, which is stored in the Non–Volatile
(NVRAM) beginning at address 0xFFFC1EF8. To display this information, execute the cnfg
command. The following is the board information displayed.
Board (PWA) Serial Number: The board’s Serial Number. For example, 1216794.
Board Identifier: For the MVME167, value=mvme167.
Artwork (PWA) IdentifierThe SBC’s printed wire assembly number (PWA). Consists of the
prefix 01–W followed by a part number, and the final character designating the revision level
of the board. For the RPRp subsystem, the PWA number is 01–w3826b34a.
MPU Clock Speed: The board’s speed in MHz. First 2 bytes are the whole number of MHz; last 2
bytes are fractions of MHz. For the MVME167, the value is 3300.
Ethernet Address: 8 bytes, hexadecimal format. Last 2 bytes are not used.
For the RP subsystem, the value is system dependent.
Local SCSI ID: For the RP subsystem , the value is 07.
Optional Board 1 Artwork (PWA): The SBC’s PWA number for Identifier of the first option
board. The final character designates the revision level of the board. For the RP subsystem,
the number is 3800b04a.
Optional Board 1 (PWA): Serial Number12 bytes, ASCII format store the board’s serial
number. For example, 1212163.
12–39–5 EPROM Setup

Be sure that four EPROMs are installed in the proper sockets on the SBC module and that
the physical chip orientation is correct, with the flattened corner of each EPROM aligned with
the corresponding portion of the EPROM socket.
Two 128K x 16 167Bug EPROMs are installed. The odd label EPROM (such as B01) is
installed in socket XU1, and even label EPROM (such as B02) is installed in XU2.
Two 128K x 16 Stealth boot PROMs are installed. The U3 EPROM is installed in socket
XU3, and the U4 EPROM is installed in XU4.
12–39–6 View and Change EPROM Parameters

When power is applied to the SBC, 167Bug executes some self–checks and automatically
boots UNIX. To display the 167–diag prompt, you must do one of the following:
» If the UNIX prompt is displayed, Press the Break key before self tests start to execute.
» If running TIP, press the tilde and pound sign (~#) keys before the self tests execute.
» If the 167Bug prompt is displayed, enter the sd command.
221
To set up the operational parameters stored in the SBC’s Battery Backed Up RAM (BBRAM)
to the default configuration, execute the following 167Bug command at the 167–diag prompt.
» ENV ;D
The SBC EPROM Setup table shows the setup of EPROM for a system that includes an
SBC, LSD, HSDC, and HSD. Parameters that differ from the Motorola default values are
printed in boldface type.
Note: In the unlikely event that these parameters require change, execute the following
command:
» ENV
You must execute the ENV command once without error to load the parameters into NVRAM.
After modifying these parameters, be sure to reset the system to activate any changes.
12–39–7 SBC MVME167 EPROM Setup Table

TABLE 12–1
MVME167 (SBC BOARD) EEPROM SETUP VALUES
PARAMETER VALUE
Bug or System Environment [B/S] S
Field Service Menu Enable [Y/N] N
Remote Start Method Switch [G/M/B/N] N
Probe System for Supported I/O Controllers [Y/N] Y
Negate VMEbus SYSFAIL* Always [Y/N] N
Local SCSI Bus Reset on Debugger Startup [Y/N] Y
Local SCSI Bus Negotiations Type [A/S/N] N
Ignore CFGA Block on a Hard Disk Boot [Y/N] Y
Auto Boot Enable [Y/N] N
Auto Boot at Power–up Only [Y/N] N
Auto Boot Controller LUN 00
Auto Boot Device LUN 00
Auto Boot Abort Delay 0
Auto Boot Default String [Y (NULL String)/(String)] null
ROM Boot Enable [Y/N] Y
ROM Boot at Power–up Only [Y/N] N
ROM Boot Enable Search of VMEbus [Y/N] N
ROM Boot Abort Delay 0
ROM Boot Direct Starting Address FFA00000
ROM Boot Direct Ending Address FFBFFFFC
Network Auto Boot Enable [Y/N] N
Network Auto Boot at POwer–up Only [Y/N] N
Network Auto Boot Controller LUN 00
Network Auto Boot Device LUN 00
Network Auto Boot Abort Delay 0
222
PARAMETER VALUE
Network Auto Boot Configuration Parameters Pointer (NVRAM) FFFC0818
Memory Search Starting Address FFE00000
Memory Search Ending Address FFE10000
Memory Search Increment Size 00010000
Memory Search Delay Enable [Y/N] N
Memory Search Delay Address FFFFCE0F
Memory Size Enable [Y/N] Y
Memory Size Starting Address 00000000
Memory Size Ending Address 02000000
Base Address of Local Memory 00000000
PARAMETER VALUE
Size of Local Memory Board #0 02000000
Size of Local Memory Board #1 00000000
Slave Enable #1 [Y/N] N
Slave Starting Address #1 00000000
Slave Ending Address #1 00000000
Slave Address Translation Address #1 00000000
Slave Address Translation Select #1 00000000
Slave Control #1 03FF
Slave Enable #2 [Y/N] N
Slave Starting Address #2 00000000
Slave Ending Address #2 01FFFFFF
Slave Address Translation Address #2 00000000
Slave Address Translation Select #2 00000000
Slave Control #2 03EF
Master Enable #1 [Y/N] N
Master Starting Address #1 02000000
Master Ending Address #1 EFFFFFFF
Master Control #1 0D
Master Ending Address #2 00000000
Master Control #2 00
223
PARAMETER VALUE
Master Address Translation Address #4 00000000
Master Address Translation Select #4 00000000
Short I/O (VMEbus A16) Enable [Y/N] N
Short I/O (VMEbus A16) Control 01
F–Page (VMEbus A24) Enable [Y/N] N
PARAMETER VALUE
F–Page (VMEbus A24) Control 02
ROM Speed Bank A Code 04
ROM Speed Bank B Code 04
Static RAM Speed Code 00
PCC2 Vector Base 05
VMEC2 Vector Base #1 06
VMEC2 Vector Base #2 07
VMEC2 GCSR Group Base Address CC
VMEC2 GCSR Board Base Address 00
VMEbus Global Time Out Code 01
Local Bus Time Out Code 00
VMEbus Access Time Out Code 02
12–39–8 View and Change the Self Test Mask

The SBC is already configured with a mask that blocks the execution of certain self tests at
power–up. To see which tests are currently masked, enter the following 167Bug command at
the 167–diag prompt:
» MASK
This mask is stored in the SBC’s Battery Backed Up RAM (BBRAM). The SBC Masked Self
Tests table shows the tests that are normally masked.
Note: In the unlikely event that these parameters require change, execute the following
command:
MASK testname for each test that you plan to mask.
224
12–39–9 MVME167 (SBC Board) Masked Self Tests

TABLE 12–2
MASKED SELF–TEST NAMES
RAM QUIK SRAM REF PCC2 PRNTD

RAM ALTS SRAM PATS PCC2 PRNTE
RAM CODE SRAM ADR MCECC CBIT
RAM REF SRAM PERM MCECC SBE
RAM PATS SRAM RNDM MMU INVPAGE
RAM ADR SRAM BTOG MMU WPPAGE
RAM PERM PCC2 TMR1C VME2 REGB
RAM RNDM PCC2 TMR2C VME2 TMRK
RAM BTOG PCC2 ADJ ST2401 POLL
SRAM QUIK PCC2 PRNTA ST2401 INTR
SRAM ALTS PCC2 PRNTB ST2401 DMA
SRAM CODE PCC2 PRNTC ST2401 BAUD
12–39–10 View and Change the Network I/O Teach (NIOT) Configurations
The SBC debugger has already been set up with controller and device descriptor tables for
network configuration, and this information is stored in the SBC’s Battery Backed Up RAM
(BBRAM). These tables (one for each controller/device LUN combination) are used by
.NETxxx system calls. The service technician who is installing the system must modify two
system–dependent parameters (Client IP Address and Server IP Address) in the descriptor
tables at the time of installation. These parameters do not require modification at any time
other than installation. To modify these parameters, enter the following 167Bug command at
the 167–diag prompt:
» NIOT
167Bug presents a series of prompts asking for values for the NIOT parameters. Most of
these parameters are already set correctly. At the prompt for Client IP Address, enter the
SBC IP address. At the prompt for Server IP Address, enter the OC IP address. The SBC
NIOT Settings table lists the correct SBC NIOT settings for the RP subsystem.
12–39–11 NIOT Settings

TABLE 12–3
NIOT SETTINGS
PARAMETER VALUE
Controller LUN 00
Device LUN 00
Node Control Memory Address 00000000
*Client IP Address 0.0.0.0*
*Server IP Address 0.0.0.0*
Subnet IP Address Mask 255.255.255.0
Broadcast IP Address 255.255.255.255
Gateway IP Address 0.0.0.0
Boot File Name NULL
225
Argument File Name NULL

Boot File Load Address 10000
Boot File Execution Address 10000
Boot File Execution Delay 00000000
Boot File Length 00000000
Boot File Byte Offset 00000000
BOOT/RARP Request Retry 00
TFTP/ARP Request Retry 00
Trace Character Buffer Address 00000000
BOOT/RARP Request Control W
BOOT/RARP Reply Update Control Y
12–39–12 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Jumper Settings

» General Purpose Readable Jumpers (J1)
The SBC can be configured with readable jumpers that can read as a register (at
0xFFF40088) in the VMEchip2 LCSR. MVME167Bug uses these bits. The bit values are
read as a 1 when the jumper is off, and a 0 when the jumper is on.
» System Controller Jumper (J2)

The SBC is the system controller. The system controller function is enabled and disabled by
jumpers on header J2. When the SBC is the system controller, the SCON LED is lighted.
The VMEchip2 is configured as system controller.
» Serial Port 4 Clock Configuration Select (J6 and J7)

Serial port 4 can be configured to use clock signals from the RTXC4 and TRXC4 signal lines.
Headers J6 and J7 configure serial port 4 to drive or receive RTXC4 and TRXC4. The
correct configuration is with port4 set to receive both signals.
226
MOTOROLA MVME167 BOARD (SBC)
12–40 Motorola MVME166 Board
12–40–1 Motorola MVME166 Board Jumper Settings

» Processor Module
(IN) J2= SCSI Termination Power
(1–2 OUT, else IN) J3= General Purpose IO
(IN) J6= VME System Controller
(3–5, 4–6 IN) J7= SRAM Power Control
(Don’t Care) J10= VSBchip2 Arbitration
Select
F1= +12 Volt Power Fuse
F2= SCSI Termination Power
F3= –12 Volt Power Fuse
F4= +5 Volt Power Fuse
» Transition Module
(IN) J6= Keyboard/Mouse Select
227
(2–3 IN) J12= Serial
(2–3 IN) J13= Port
(2–3 IN) J14= Module
(2–3 IN) J15= Select
MOTOROLA MVME166 BOARD
12–41 Scan Chassis Backplane Jumpers (Z.x)

Illustration 12–43 shows the slot assignments for the SCU scan chassis and the location of
the backplane jumpers. The configuration and description for these jumpers are shown in
Illustration 12–45.
228
SCAN CHASSIS BACKPLANE
VME Backplane SLOT ASSIGNMENTS

(front view)
A1 – SUN 3/60 SBC
A2 – MAXI–HIB
A3 – SPARE SLOT
A4 – XYLOGICS 754 DISK CONTROLLER
SLOT A1 A2 A3 A4 Note: Shaded connectors indicate

occupancy by the assigned board.
J7
J8
J9
J10
J11
SRU VME BACKPLANE

(rear view)
Illustration 12–44 shows the configuration of the bus grant and IACK jumpers for empty slot
A3 of the scan chassis. 3. On the backplane, insert the backplane jumpers to bypass BG0 to
BG3 (Bus Grant 3) and IACK (Interrupt Acknowledge) for slot A3.
229
SCAN CHASSIS BACKPLANE JUMPER DESCRIPTIONS Z.X
J7
VME BACKPLANE SLOT A3 BUS GRANT 0 BYPASS JUMPER
BG0 IN
Jumper here to bypass BG0 for slot A3
BG0 OUT
J8
BG1 IN
BG1 OUT
J9
BG2 IN
BG2 OUT
J10
BG3 IN
BG3 OUT
J11
VME BACKPLANE SLOT A3 IACK BYPASS JUMPER
IACK IN
Jumper here to bypass IACK for slot A3
IACK OUT
12–42 RP 1.x Scan Chassis Backplane
12–42–1 Backplane Test Points

None
12–42–2 Backplane LEDs

None
12–42–3 Backplane Switches

None
12–42–4 Backplane Configuration

Configuring the backplane consists of jumpering the bus grant and IACK headers and
mounting the SCSI active/passive voltage source jumper. The jumpers are installed at the
factory and no additional configuration is necessary. The appropriate settings for the RP
subsystem are given in this section for troubleshooting purposes.
230
12–42–5 Backplane Jumper Settings

» Bus Grant and IACK Jumpers
The bus grant and IACK headers are jumpered for slots 4, 5, and 9. These jumpers are not
installed for any other slots. The board layout diagram shows a partial view of the backplane
with the correct jumper settings.
» SCSI Active/Passive Voltage Source

The SCSI Active/Passive Voltage Source header determines the type of SCSI termination
used between the backplane and the local SCSI drive. The board layout diagram shows the
correct jumper setting to select active termination.
BACKPLANE, RP 1.X
SLOTS 4, 5, AND 9 JUMPERS
BG0
SLOT 9 SLOT 5 SLOT 4

JUMPERS JUMPERS JUMPERS
BG1 S9 S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
CBA CBA CBA CBA CBA CBA CBA CBA CBA
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BG0 BG0 BG0 BG0 BG0 BG0 BG0 BG0
BG2 BG1 BG1 BG1 BG1 BG1 BG1 BG1 BG1

BG3 BG3 BG3 BG3 P1 BG3 BG3 BG3 BG3
BG3
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
IACK SCSI ACTIVE

PASSIVE VOLTAGE
SOURCE
SCSI ACTIVE/PASSIVE
VOLTAGE SOURCE JUMPER
VME Backplane Jumper Configuration — Original RP Subsystem
231
BACKPLANE RP 1.X
SLOTS 3, 4, AND 5 JUMPERS
BG0
SLOT 5 SLOT 4 SLOT 3

JUMPERS JUMPERS JUMPERS
BG1 S10 S9 S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
CBA CBA CBA CBA CBA CBA CBA CBA CBA
1 1 1 1 1 1
BG2 BG1 BG1 BG1 BG1 BG1 BG1 BG1 BG1

BG3 BG3 BG3 BG3 P1 BG3 BG3 BG3 BG3
BG3
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
32 32 32 32 32 32
IACK SCSI ACTIVE

PASSIVE VOLTAGE
SOURCE
SCSI ACTIVE/PASSIVE
VOLTAGE SOURCE JUMPER
VME Backplane Jumper Configuration — RP-S Subsystem
12–43 RP & RP–S Scan Chassis Power Supply Jumpers and

Settings
Illustration 12–47 and Illustration 12–48 show jumpers and adjustments for the SCU scan
chassis power supply.
232
RP SCAN CHASSIS POWER SUPPLIES
5 VDC OUTPUT
TERMINALS
V1
RTN
+ V1
V1
–
TB1
VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT
V2
+V2 POTENTIOMETERS
TERMINAL
BLOCK 2 V3
–V2
+V3
LINE TB2 –V3
+V4
REC
LINE J1
(LABELED NEUT) –V4
GROUND
1/0 (ON/OFF SWITCH)
Power Supply Assembly DC and AC Terminals — 1000-Watt Power Supply
233
RP–S SCAN CHASSIS POWER SUPPLIES
5 VDC OUTPUT
TERMINALS
V1
RTN
V1
TERMINAL
BLOCK 2
+
GROUND TB2
–
LINE
(LABELED NEUT) V1 +V2 VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT
V2 POTENTIOMETERS
LINE
–V2 +V3 –V3 +V4 –V4
V3
V4
REC
TB1
J1
1/0 (ON/OFF SWITCH)
Power Supply Assembly DC and AC Terminals — 500-Watt Power Supply
12–44 3/60 SBC Jumper Settings

Illustration 12–49 shows jumper and settings for the Sun 3/60 SBC.
234
3/60 SBC JUMPER LOCATIONS AND SETTINGS
Keyboard
Diagnostic LEDs
J800
Memory Jumpers
Norm/Diag switch
Ethernet/Thin Ethernet Jumper

Ethernet High Resolution Jumper
Serial Port B
Serial Port A
Memory Module Inserts

SCSI
Mono SUN 3/60 SBC
J800
MEMORY, ETHERNET, AND RESOLUTION JUMPERS
SUN 3/60 SBC
4MB – Jumper here for 4MB or above memory size

24MB – Jumper here for 24MB memory size
EXTXUR – Jumper in/out for Ethernet/Thin Ethernet respectively
HIGHRES – Jumper here for high resolution
12–45 Check SBC EEPROM Settings
1. Open a shell tool.

2. Tip into SBC:
> tip sbc <enter>
3. Shutdown the SBC:
235
> halt <enter>
4. Display value of EEPROM location 0x000014: (See Table 12–4)

> q14 <enter>
5. Press <enter> to display the value of the next available EEPROM location.
–or–
6. Type/enter “q” and the two rightmost characters in the corresponding Location column,
below. (Ex: q1A <enter> displays the corresponding “Path definition, Boot device, 2nd
character” value of “64”)
7. Type the period and press <enter> key, to exit EEPROM setting check:
> . <enter>
12–45–1 Display SBC EEPROM Settings

TABLE 12–4
SBC EEPROM SETTINGS
Location Description Value

0x000014 MBytes of installed memory 10 (16Mb)
0x000015 MBytes to test memory during self–test 10 (16Mb)
0x000018 Polling the default device 00
0x000019 Path definition, Boot device, 1st character 73
0x00001A Path definition, Boot device, 2nd character 64
0X00001B Path definition, Controller number in hex 00
0X00001C Path definition, Unit number in hex 00
0X00001D Path definition, Partition number in hex 00
0x00001f Set the Primary Terminal 10
12–46 HSDC Controller Board
12–46–1 HSDC Controller Board Test Points

None
12–46–2 HSDC Controller Board LEDs

» Busy
The green LED lights when the HSDC is active.
» Error
The yellow Error LED lights during power–up, and then goes off. If the LED remains on, or
lights during operation, this denotes a fatal error.
In self test loop mode, the Error LED lights for approximately 8 seconds and then goes
off for approximately one–half second with every pass of the self test. If an error occurs
during the self test, this LED remains constantly amber without flashing. Self test loop
mode is disabled for the RP subsystem as described under the heading Self Test Disable
(JST).
236
12–46–3 HSDC Controller Board Switch Settings

The HSDC has no front panel switches or buttons.

The HSDC board has one 50–pin shielded front panel connector (channel 0). It also has two
96–position DIN connectors (P1 and P2). These pins carry the VMEbus interface signals.
12–46–5 HSDC Controller Board Configuration

Configuring the high speed disk controller consists of circuit board jumper configuration. The
appropriate settings for the RP subsystem are given in this section.
» Board Labels/Revision Control

The Xylogics SV–6800 HSDC has a revision control label. The revision label is important
when discussing configuration issues.
12–46–6 HSDC Controller Board Jumper Settings

» Base Address Selection (JB2)
Jumper block JB2 controls the base address. Inserting a jumper makes the HSDC
respond to zero on that address line: removing a jumper makes the HSDC respond to a
one. Connect the jumper between similar pin numbers on each block. The HSDC uses
bits 1 through 3 to determine which register is being accessed. The HSDC is an A16
slave, and responds to address modifier 0x2D, and optionally to 0x29.
» Bus Request and Bus Grant Lines (JB3, JB4, JB5)
The HSDC used the Bus Request and Bus Grant Lines to become bus master. In
VMEbus arbitration, there are four Bus Request/Grant levels –– 0 through 3. The HSDC
drives one Bus Request line, according to the jumper scheme you choose. The arbiter
responds by driving the associated Bus Grant In Line (i.e. BG0IN responds to BR0). If
the HSDC receives a Bus Grant on any of the Bus Grant In Lines (BG0IN through
BG3IN), and is not requesting the bus on that line, it passes the grant to the appropriate
Bus Grant Out Line (BG0OUT through BG3OUT).
Select a request level by jumpering one bus request (BR0 through BR3), one Bus Grant
In, and one Bus Grant Out line to match the selected request level. Jumper the
remaining Bus Grant In/Out lines so that the incoming signal phases through the board
(for example, jumper BGxIN to BGxOUT, where x represents the remaining grant levels).
» Parallel Arbitration (JB4, JB5)
If you are using the HSDC in parallel arbitration, and the Bus Grant Out lines must be
isolated from the next slot’s Bus Grant lines, remove all jumpers between JB4 and JB5.
The RP subsystem does not use parallel arbitration.
» Self Test Disable (JST)
When jumper JST is installed, the HSDC operates in normal mode. On power–up, the
controller executes one pass of the self test diagnostic and then enters normal mode.
When the jumper is out, the controller operates in a self test loop mode. Check to
ensure that the jumper is in.
» AC–Fail Enable (JAC)
When jumper JAC is installed, the HSDC supports the ACFail* line as defined in the
VMEbus specification. If the ACFail* line is asserted, the HSDC halts disk activity, sets
the Fatal Error bit in the CSR, and reports an 0xF6 error code in the Fatal Error Register.
The factory configuration is out.
237
HSDC CONTROLLER BOARD
238
XYLOGICS DISK CONTROLLER SWITCH AND JUMPER SETTINGS
Jumper Block JA
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4
l Selects base address of EE40
Jumper Blocks JB, JC & JD

Bus Request Bus Grant/Out Bus Grant/In level
1 5 1 5 1 5 0
2 6 2 6 2 6 1
3 7 3 7 3 7 2
4 8 4 8 4 8 3
JB JC JD
l Selects Bus Request level 3

l Selects NO Parallel Arbitration
Jumper Block JE
2 4
1 3
l Selects unrestricted use of Maintenance Mode

l Selects to execute 754 self–test on power–up
239
SCSI Disk Drive Assembly in RP-S Subsystem
SCSI I/O AND DC POWER HANG THESE

CONNECTORS ON BACK OPENINGS OVER
OF DRIVES BOLTS
FRONT OF SCSI
HSD DRIVE
FRONT OF LSD
DRIVE
DISK DRIVE
PLATE
DISK DRIVE
MOUNTING
BRACKET
THUMB SCREWS
SCSI Disk Drive Assembly in RP-S Subsystem
12–47 ST3390 LSD Drive
12–47–1 ST3390 LSD Test Points

None
12–47–2 ST3390 LSD LEDs

None
12–47–3 ST3390 LSD Switch Settings

None

The Local SCSI disk has two connectors, which are visible only when the disk mounting plate
has been pulled from the RP Subsystem chassis.
Connector Type Description
» J3 4–pin DC power connector. Connects LSD to power supply.

» J4 50–pin I/O connector. Connects disk to SBC.
240
12–47–5 ST3390 LSD Drive Configuration

The Seagate ST3390N LSD has a product label affixed to the bottom of the disk and two bar
code labels affixed to the side of the disk. These labels are important when discussing
configuration issues.
The product label shows the model number Seagate ST3390N.
The top bar code label is the serial number of the disk; for example, CV3398745.
The lower bar code label is the configuration part number for the local SCSI disk. For the RP
subsystem, this number is 917004–001.
12–47–6 ST3390 LSD Drive Jumper Settings

» Parity Enable Option (J12)
When a jumper is installed on pins 1 and 2 of the options jumper block (J12), the parity
block is used. Check to ensure that a jumper is installed here.
» Start/Stop Option (J12)
When a jumper is installed on pins 3 and 4 of the options jumper block(J12), the drive
waits for a start/atop unit command from the host before starting or stopping the spindle
motor. Check to ensure that this jumper is not installed.
» SCSI Address (J5)
Each device on the SCSI must have a unique SCSI ID. Because the SBC controls only
one SCSI drive, use SCSI ID0 (no jumper installed). When selecting the SCSI ID, you
can install jumpers on either (not both) the SCSI ID jumper block (J5) or the user
configuration jumper block (J8) pins 1 through 6. However, since the SCSI ID for the
LSD is 0, neither of these jumper blocks has jumpers installed.
» Terminator Power Source (J6)
To select the terminator power source, install jumpers on the terminator power source
jumper block. The RP subsystem provides terminator power to the SCSI connector and
the drive terminator packs. Check to ensure that jumpers are installed on pins 1 and 2
and pins 3 and 4 of J6 for this configuration.
» Active/Passive Termination (J9)
Installing a jumper on pins 1 and 2 of the active/passive termination jumper block selects
active termination. The terminating resistor packs must also be present. Check to
ensure that both the jumper and the three resistor packs are present.
241
LSD (3390) DRIVE SWITCHES AND JUMPERS
ST5660N Local SCSI Disk Jumpers and Connectors
242
PRODUCT LABEL BAR CODE LABEL

(ON TOP OF DISK) (ON SIDE OF DISK)
J8
(SEE FRONT VIEW)
J5
AUXILIARY SELECTION
FOR SCSI ID
(DO NOT USE)
SCSI
I/O CONNECTOR
(PIN 1)
DC POWER
CONNECTOR
BOTTOM/BACK VIEW BAR CODE LABEL
J8 PIN LABEL
(JUMPERS ON PINS 28 AND 30

AND PINS 32 AND 34 ARE
J8 (PIN 1)
SPARES)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33
FRONT VIEW
ST5660N Local SCSI Disk Jumpers and Connectors
12–48 IPI High Speed Disk
12–48–1 High Speed Disk Test Points

None
12–48–2 High Speed Disk LEDs

The high speed disk controller has one activity LED (not visible when the cabinet front panel
is in place). The activity indicator LED is green. It flashes during power–up, then lights when
the disk is accessed.
12–48–3 High Speed Disk Switch Settings

None
243
12–48–4 High Speed Disk LEDS

The High speed disk controller has one activity LED (not visible when the cabinet front panel
is in place). The activity indicator LED is green. It flashes during power–up; then lights when
the disk is accessed.

The High Speed disk has three connectors, which are visible only when the disk mounting
plate has been pulled from the RP Subsystem chassis.
Connector Type Description
» J15 4–pin DC power connector. Connects HSD to power supply.

» J31 50–pin Port A I/O connector. Not used.
» J32 50–pin Port B I/O connector. Connects disk to HSDC.
12–48–6 High Speed Disk Configuration

Configuring the high speed disk consists of circuit board jumper configuration. The
appropriate settings for the RP subsystem are given in this section.
Disk Label/Revision Control
The Seagate ST41800–K high speed disk has a revision control label affixed to the side of
the disk drive. The revision level is important when discussing configuration issues.
The label includes the following information:
Serial Number is different for each disk.

Model Number for the RP subsystem is ST41800–K.
Download Code Revision Number.
Part Number for the RP subsystem is 990005–001.
Lot Number. For example, M–01–9351–6.
12–48–7 High Speed Disk Jumper Settings
CAUTION Do NOT remove circuit boards to set jumpers.
12–48–8 I/O Board Jumpers

» Master/Slave Jumper
Placing a plug in the master/slave jumper establishes the drive as a master. Removing
the plug establishes the drive as a slave. Be sure that this plug is installed.
» Local/Remote Jumper
Removing the plug from the local/remote jumper establishes the drive as a local drive
and disk spin up starts (after a delay) when power is applied. Placing a plug in the
jumper establishes the drive as a remote. Be sure that this plug is removed.
» Disable Read/Write Diagnostics Jumper
244
Removing the plug from the disable read/write diagnostics jumper enables the internal
diagnostic program to perform read and write operations. Placing a plug in the jumper
prevents the internal diagnostic program from doing so. Be sure that this jumper is
removed.
» Microcode ID Jumpers
The microcode ID jumpers assign a unique device configuration code. The setting shown
is for 1,986 Mbyte drives.
12–48–9 Control Board Jumpers

» Enable Sweep Only On Seeks Jumpers (J12)
When a plug is installed on the Enable Sweep Only on Seeks Jumper, each sweep
segment is part of a controller–driven direct seek. This is the factory setting, do not
change this setting.
» Sweep Cycle Enable Jumper (J4B)
Placing a jumper on J4B enables sweep cycles at the drive level. If the jumper is
removed, sweep cycles are disabled and the system must use sweep cycles enabled at
the system or subsystem level. Be sure that this jumper is installed.
» Write Protect, Disable Ports, and Unit Selectors Jumpers (J4A)
Normally, the Write Protect jumper is removed. Installing the jumper prevents writing to
the drive. Be sure that the jumper is removed.
The Disable Port Jumpers are not installed at the factory. Installing a jumper in Disable
Port A or Disable Port B disables the port. Check to ensure that neither jumper is
installed.
» The Select Unit ID jumpers designate the ID of the system drive.
This is a 3–bit binary number representing an integer value of 0 through 7. Be sure the
unit ID is set to 0 (no jumpers installed).
245
IPI HIGH SPEED DISK
IPI HIGH SPEED DISK CONTROL BOARD JUMPERS
246
IPI HIGH SPEED DISK I/O BOARD JUMPERS
IPI–2 HIGH SPEED DRIVE SWITCHES
247
IPI-2 High Speed Disk I/O Board Jumpers (WYDX-2)
MASTER/ LOCAL/ DISABLE R/W
SLAVE REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS
MICROCODE ID
23 22 21 20
MASTER/ LOCAL/ DISABLE R/W
SLAVE REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS
MICROCODE ID
23 22 21 20
248
IPI–2 CONTROL BOARD JUMPERS
IPI-2 High Speed Disk Control Board Jumpers (UYDX-2)
J12 — ENABLE SWEEP CYCLE

DISABLE PORT B
DISABLE PORT A
WRITE PROTECT
SELECTORS
UNIT
ID0 ID1 ID2
J4A
IPI-2 High Speed Disk Control Board Jumpers (UYDX-2)
12–49 Maxi–HIB Board Jumper Settings
249
MAXIHIB BOARD
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
VME Reset
P7 P6 Switch LEDs
ÉÉ
AP XRAY DS1 – VME FIFO ACTIVE
DS2 – VME SRAM ACTIVE
ÉÉ
DS3 – VME BUSMASTER ACTIVE
DS4 – XRAY ABORT ON
Maxi–Hib VME SYSTEM RESET
1
É SBX
J6
ÉÉ VME Bus GRANT IN/OUT
ÉÉ
AP XFER MODE
VME Bus REQ.
P4
ÉÉ VME SRAM ADDR.
É VME BUS SYS. CONTROLLER
ÉÉ
1 1
VME INTER. ACK. ADDR.
J3 J4
ÉÉ
VME FIFO ADDR.
1 1
ÉÉ
1
J2 J1 J5 1
J7
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
P3 P2 P1
12–50 Scan Chassis Power Supply Jumpers and Settings Zx
250
SCAN CHASSIS POWER SUPPLY
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
SRU +5V, +24V, +12V, –12V POWER SUPPLY
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
AC(L)
AC line voltage Factory set current lim- Auxiliary output voltage +5V output voltage
select jumper iting adjustment POT gain adjustment POT gain adjustment POT
(shown in the (Do Not Tamper) (+24V 12V)
112VAC position)
12–51 Scan Chassis Power Supply Jumpers and Settings

Illustration 12–65 shows jumper and settings for the SRU scan
chassis power supply.
SRU –5V POWER SUPPLY
AC(L) GND –5V output voltage

gain adjustment POT
12–52 AP Switch Settings
12–52–1 HCHIOP
Illustrations 12–66 shows switch settings for the AP resident HCHIOP.
12–52–2 DASIOP
Illustration 12–66 shows switch settings for the AP resident DASIOP.
251
HCHIOP AND DASIOP SWITCH SETTINGS
HCHIOP DIP SWITCHES

1 Configure as CHIOP (Low speed MM I/F)
2 Configure parity errors as fatal
3 (Engineering use)
o 4 Set host interface odd parity
n
5 Lock track buffer on
6 Enable non–interlock mode
7 Pause on sequence error
8 Pass CPR to IOP Indicates switch position
I–8
DASIOP DIP SWITCHES
1 LSB
2
XFER SYNC
(The logical value of the dip switches=# of
3 80ns delay.)
o 4 MSB
n
5 LSB
6
7 DATA CLOCK
The logical value of the dip switches=#of
8 MSB 80ns delay)
A–1 ON = logical 0 OFF = logical 1
12–52–3 IOC
Illustration 12–67 shows switch settings for the AP resident IOC.
252
IOC SWITCH SETTINGS
1 110 BAUD
2 300 BAUD
3 600 BAUD
o 4 1200 BAUD
n 5 2400 BAUD
6 4800 BAUD
7 9600 BAUD ( FOR S140 OR MV7800
8 19200 BAUD (USED WITH WICAT)
J–8
1 Don’t Care
2 Don’t Care
3 Don’t Care
o 4 Don’t Care
n 5 Don’t Care
6 Don’t Care
7 Don’t Care
Indicates switch selected
8 Don’t Care
G–7
12–53 SRU Sabre 1230 Disk Drive I/O Board Switch Settings
Illustration 12–68 shows switch settings for the disk drive (Sabre 1230).
253
DISK DRIVE I/O BOARD SWITCH SETTINGS
1A 1 1D
Enables channel 1 & sends index & sector on A cable only.
1B 2 1D
2A 3 2D
Disables channel 2.
2B 4 2D
o
RDY p 5 POK Normal Ready status. (POK for use with Imprimis power supply only.)
T2 e 6 T1 Enables Extended Cylinder Address Bit 210, via Tag 1.
n
E 7 O SME–E mode.
XA 8 N Extended Cylinder Address.
AR 9 RT Absolute Reserve (dual channel only).
R 10 L Local power on. (Doesn’t cycle drive power when remote power cycled.)
A213
20 1
D 2
E
V 3
I o 4
C p Device Id = 0
E e 5
n 6
I
D 7
27 8 indicates switch selected
A224
254
Notes:
255
Index – Replacement Procedures

C
Computer
1/2 Mag Tape Controller, 264
16 MB Circuit Bd, 264
1600 Watt Power Supply, 265
32 MB Circuit Bd, 267
9 Track Mag Tape Controller, 268
Active SCSI Terminator, 269
Backplane Circuit Bd, 269
Cable: SCSI Harness, 270
Cable: SCSI Ribbon, 270
Cable: SCSI Ribbon (New), 270
CIPRICO Controller Bd, 270
Concept for Mounting ST1980N Dual Disks, 270
Concept for Mounting ST1980N Dual Disks –part 2, 271
CPU Circuit Bd, 272
DAT Drive (3.5 inch), 273
DAT Tape Drive (5.25 inch), 275
DC Power Cable, 276
Fan in Rack Drawer, 277
GAI Circuit Bd, 277
GAI Serial Cable, 278
GBM Circuit Bd (New Style), 279
GBM Circuit Bd (Old Style), 279
GFB Circuit Bd, 280
GIP Circuit Bd, 281
I/O Cable, SCSI, 282
LMO–2 3–D Renderer Bd, 282
LMO2 Bd (Mother & Daughter), 283
Motorola MVME166GE Bd (OC CPU), 283
Pioneer DD–U7001 Rewritable MOD, 284
Pioneer DE–UH7101 Rewritable MOD, 286
Power Indicator and Cable, 289
SCSI Tray Fan, 289
Seagate ST1980N Magnetic Disk Drive, 290
Seagate Wren V model 94181–15 Magnetic Disk Drive, 291
Second Ethernet Circuit Bd, 291, 292
Serial I/O Panel, 293
VME Ethernet 3207 Hawk Bd, 293
VME, SCSI Controller, 294
Wren V Disk Drive, 295
Console, 297
18 Button Rubber Keypad, 297
8 Button Rubber Keypad, IC, 297
8 Button Rubber Keypad, OC, 298
8 Ohm, 6 Watt Speaker, OC, 298
A/N Keyboard, 299
Autovoice Bd, OC, 299
Circuit Breaker (1 pole, 15 amp), 301
Console Power Supply, 303
256
Emergency Stop Button, OC, 303

Emergency Stop Label, 304
Encoder Assembly, 304
Encoder Knob, 305
GCP Bd, 305
Image Monitor, 307
Intercom Pot Assembly, OC, 307
IP Keypad Bd, 308
Microphone, OC, 308
Remote Bd, 309
Security Bd, 309
System Keypad Bd, 309
Touch Screen Assembly, 310
Trackball, 311
Video Relay Circuit Bd, 311
G
Gantry, 314
38V Filament Supply, 314
ADC Bd (Reduced Gain DAS), 314
ADC Bd (Slot 51, 52, 53 & 54), 315
Anode (Transformer Tank), 315
Anode Inverter (45435960), 317
Anode Inverter (46–297703P1), 317
Anode Transformer Tank Measurement, 318
Axial Brake, 319
Axial Control Bd, 319
Axial Motor, 320
Axial Motor Assembly, 322
Axial Motor Encoder, 322
Axial Motor Pulley, 323
Azimuth Circuit Bd, 323
Backplane, STC, 324
Backplane–Left, EDAS, 325
Backplane–Right, EDAS, 325
Base Harness, 325
Cable, AC Power, 325
Cable, Analog, 325
Cable, Anode AC Power, 326
Cable, Axial Drive, 326
Cable, Cathode AC Power, 326
Cable, DC Power, 326
Cable, Digital, EDAS, 327
Cable, Ribbon, EDAS, 327
Cal/Aux Bd, 327
Capacitor, Inverter, 328
Cathode (Transformer Tank), 328
Cathode Inverter (45435962), 329
Cathode Inverter (46–297703P2), 330
Cathode Transformer Tank Measurement Bd, 331
Collimator Assembly, 331
Collimator Bd (46–288856G1), 333
Collimator Bd (46–321276G1), 334
Collimator II Bd (46–321276G1), 334
Collimator Power Supply, 334
Communication Power Supply, 335
Counterbalancing Gas Spring, 336
257
CTVRC Control Bd, 339

CTVRC Power Module, 339
DAS Power Switch, 340
DC Power Supply (DAS), 15V, 340
DC Power Supply (DAS), 5V, 341
Detector Heater Power Supply, 342
Detector Heater Relay, 343
Diode Laser, Bottom (12V), 343
Diode Laser, Bottom (5V), 344
Diode Laser, LS (12V), 344
Diode Laser, LS (5V), 345
Diode Laser, RS (12V), 345
Diode Laser, RS (5V), 346
Drive Belt, 346
Drive Belt Idler Pulley, 348
F/C Interlock Switch, 349
Fan, OBC, 349
Fan, STC, 350
Filter Bd, 350
Filter Bd (Reduced Gain DAS), 351
Filter; Pwr L, OBC, 351
Filter; Pwr L, STC, 352
Flex Ct Assembly, 352
Front Cover Mic Bd, 353
Front Cover Microphone, 353
Fuse (30A, 700V), 354
Fuse (3A, 120V), 354
Fuse, Collimator, 355
Fuse, DAS (2A, 350V), 355
Fuse, DAS (3A, 250V), 355
Fuse, Detector Heater, 355
Fuse, Filament Power Assembly, 356
Fuse, Filament Power Supply, 357
Fuse, Tube Cooling, 357
G1 Front Cover Assembly, 358
G1 Left Side Cover Assembly, 358
G1 Rear Cover Assembly, 358
G1 Right Side Cover Assembly, 358
G3 Front Cover Assembly, 358
G3 Rear Cover Assembly, 358
Gantry Display Assembly, 359
Gantry Display Daughterboard, 360
Gantry Display Motherboard, 360
Gate Driver/Filter Bd, 360
Gear Reducer, 360
Grounding Strap, Base, 361
Handling and Removal of Slip Ring Brush Debris, 387
Heurikon Bd, OBC, 361
Heurikon Bd, STC, 362
HV Anode Cable, 362
HV Cathode Cable, 364
I/O Bd, 365
Indexer Assembly, 365
Intercom Circuit Bd, 366
Inverter Fuse, Anode (120VAC), 366
Inverter Fuse, Anode (550VDC), 367
Inverter Fuse, Anode (600V), 367
Inverter Fuse, Cathode (120VAC), 367
258
Inverter Fuse, Cathode (550VDC), 368

Inverter Fuse, Cathode (600V), 368
kV Circuit Bd (46–321064G1), 368
kV Circuit Bd (46–321198G1), 369
Lead Weight, 369
Left Side Cover Assembly, 369
mA Circuit Bd, 369
Micro Stepper Drive (Aperture), 370
OBC Assembly, 370
OBC Backplane, 370
OBC Thermistor, 371
OBC–STC Power Supply, OBC, 372
OBC–STC Power Supply, STC, 373
Power Brush Block Assembly, 373
Power Filter Assembly, 374
Processor Bd, EDAS, 374
PWA Laser Control, 375
PWA Rotating Buffer, 376
PWA Stationary Buffer, 377
PWA Stationary Terminator, 378
RCOM Bd, 378
Rear Cover Lamp, 379
Rear Cover Mic Bd, 379
Rear Microphone, 379
Ribbon Cable, OBC, 380
Right Side Cover Assembly, 380
Rotating Harness (Use with 12V Laser), 381
Rotating Harness (Use with 5V Laser), 381
RPSCOM Bd, 381
RPSCOM to Gantry Bulkhead, 75 Ohms, 381
SCA–LAN Bd, STC, 382
Scan Switch Assembly, 382
Scan Window, 382
SCOM Bd, 383
Side Lens Assembly, 384
Signal Brush Block, 384
Slip Ring Assembly, 385
SS Detector, 388
SS Detector Kit, 390
SS Detector Kit (Detector & DAT tape), 390
Stationary AC Harness, 391
Stationary Harness, 392
Stepper Motor Drive (Filter), 392
Switch, STC Assembly, 392
Terminal Strip, Base, 393
Terminator, STC Assembly, 393
Tilt Chain, 393
Tilt Motor, 393
Tilt Pot, 394
Timing Bd, EDAS (Slot 55), 395
Top Cover Assembly, 395
Top Cover Fan, 395
Top Cover Gas Spring, 396
Top Cover Thermostat Assembly, 396
Top Lens Assembly, 397
Tube Cooling Relay, 397
Tube Studs, 397
X–Ray Tube, 398
259
P
PDU, 407
32 kVA Xfmr, CR1–CR3, 407
32 kVA Xfmr, CR4–CR6, 407
32 kVA Xfmr, F10–F12, 407
32 kVA Xfmr, F13, 407
32 kVA Xfmr, F14–F16, 408
32 kVA Xfmr, F17–F19 (Top Bd), 408
32 kVA Xfmr, F20, F21 (Top Bd), 408
32 kVA Xfmr, F4–F6, 408
32 kVA Xfmr, F7–F9, 409
AC Inductor, 409
Allen Bradley Servo Amplifier, 410
Axial Drive Filter Bd, 410
Backup Contactor, 411
Blue Switch, 411
Capacitor, 411
Capacitor, electrolytic (6100 microF 350V), 412
Circuit Breaker (1 pole, 15 amp), CB16, 18, 20, 21 & 22, 412
Circuit Breaker (1 pole, 20 amp), CB19, 413
Circuit Breaker (3 pole, 25 amp), CB1, 6, 11, 413
Circuit Breaker (3 pole, 25 amp), CB1, 6, 11, 23, 414
Circuit Breaker Assembly (Allen Bradley), 414
Circuit Breaker Assembly (Westamp), 414
Circuit Breaker Assembly, F1–F3, 415
Circuit Breaker Assembly, F4–F6, 415
Contactor, 415
Cover, Relay Control PWB, Lexan, 416
DC Inductor, 416
DCRGS, 416
DCRGS Control Bd, 417
Display Assembly, 418
Fan Assembly, 418
Filter, 418
Filter PWB F1–F2, 419
Fuse, DCRGS, 419
Green Switch, 419
Guard Assembly, 419
Harness, Circuit Breaker Assembly, External, 420
Harness, Circuit Breaker Assembly, Internal, 420
Indicator, Elapsed Time, 420
Inductor, Servo Output, 420
Lamp Assembly (Green, 125V), DS1–DS6, 421
Lamp Panel Assembly, DS1–DS4, 421
Loopback Connector, 421
O/L Relay Element, 421
Output Current Transformer, 422
PWA Relay Control Bd, 422
Receptacle (15A, 125VAC), 423
Relay Contactor, Axial Drive, 423
Relay, Axial Drive Current Sensing, 423
REM Box Light, 424
Resistor, 424
Resistor, Ribwound (3 Ohm, 300W, 10%), 424
Resistor, Wirewound (25 Ohm, 50W, 1%), 425
260
SCR Bridge, 425

Servo Assembly, 426
Servo Assembly (10A), 426
Servo Assembly (3A), 426
Westamp Amplifier, 426
S
Slip Ring Brush Debris, Handling and Removal, 387
SRU, 427
24V Resistor Assembly, 427
5V Power Supply (150 amp), ST–CTC AP, 427
5V Power Supply, ST–CTC AP, 427
AP Fan, 428
BNC 50 Ohm Terminator, 428
BNC T–Connector, 428
Cable, 3/60, 428
Cable, 3/60 SCSI to Wren, 429
Cable, 60’ Coaxial BNC, 429
Cable, Backplane to PS, 429
Cable, DASIOP to Gantry, 429
Cable, PS to 098 Harness, 430
Fan Assembly for Scan Chassis, 430
Front Panel Maxi, 430
High Speed Disk Drive, 430
Maxi Bd Assembly with 3/60+ LAN, 431
Maxi–HIB, 431
Maxi–HIB Adapter Bd, 433
Maxi–HIB to HCHIOP Cable, 435
Power Cable–SRU Cabinet, 435
Power Distribution Cable, Scan Chassis, 435
Power Supply to Backplane, 435
Sabre Interconnect to 096 and 097 Harnesses, 436
Sabre Interconnect to 098 Harness, 436
Sabre to Xylogics Cable (26 pin), 436
Sabre to Xylogics Cable (60 pin), 436
SCA–LAN Bd, SBC, 437
Scan Chassis Assembly, 439
Scan Chassis Assembly, Complete, 440
Scan Chassis Backplane, 440
Scan Chassis Boxer Fan, 442
Scan Chassis Power Switch/Circuit Breaker, 443
Scan Chassis, Power Supply (+5, +/–12, +24V), 443
Scan Chassis, Power Supply (–5V), 444
ST 1480 Disk Drive, 446
ST–CT 4MB Main Memory, 447
ST–CT 512 KB Public Memory, 447
ST–CT BPC, 448
ST–CT Cache, 448
ST–CT Chassis with boards, 449
ST–CT Master, 449
ST–CT MMC, 449
ST–CT Slave, 450
ST–CT SMP MUX, 450
ST–CT to 3/60, 451
ST–CT/ST–CTC ACP, 451
ST–CT/ST–CTC ACU, 451
261
ST–CT/ST–CTC BP, 452

ST–CT/ST–CTC DASIOP, 452
ST–CT/ST–CTC HCHIOP, 453
ST–CT/ST–CTC IOC, 454
ST–CTC 4MB Main Memory, 456
ST–CTC BPCIM, 456
ST–CTC MSP, 457
ST–CTC S–Cache, 457
Wren IV Disk Drive, 458
Xylogics Controller, 458
T
Table, 462
1 1/4” dia. Clamp, 462
1” dia. Clamp, 462
1/2” dia. Clamp, 462
11/16” dia. Clamp, 462
5/16” dia. Clamp, 463
AC/DC Power Switch, 463
Actuator Cover, 464
Actuator Limit Switch, 464
Actuator Magnet Rod (2100671), 465
Actuator Magnet Rod (46–296561P11), 466
Actuator, Table Elevation (2103043), 466
Actuator, Table Elevation (46–296561P1), 468
Belt, Cradle Drive, 469
Belt, Elevation Encoder, 469
BNC, T–Connector (50 Ohm), 470
Bumper Disk, Upper Pin Actuator, 470
Bumper, Cradle, 470
Cable Support, ETC, 471
Cal Pin, 471
Cam Follower, Large, Carriage, 471
Cam Follower, Small, Carriage, 471
Carriage Assembly, 471
Clamp, Large U–shape, 472
Clamp, Small U–shape, 472
Connector, Tape Switch, Female, 472
Connector, Tape Switch, Male, 472
Cradle Assembly, 472
Cradle Drive Amp, 473
Cradle Drive Assembly, 473
Cradle Drive Cover, 474
Cradle Release Switch, 474
E–Ring, Lower Pin Actuator, 474
E–Ring, Table Gas Spring Pin, 475
E–Stop Button, 475
E–Stop Switch, 475
Electrical Outlet, 475
Elevation Encoder Assembly, 476
Elevation/Tilt Amp., 476
Encoder, Table Elevation, 477
ETC Bd, 478
ETC Chassis Assembly, 478
Fans, ETC, 479
262
Filler Cover Spring, 479

Fixed Dzus Fastener Kit, 479
Floating Dzus Fastener Kit, 479
Footswitch Assembly, 480
Front End Cover, 480
Fuse, Servo Amps, 480
Gas Spring, 480
Ground Strap, Long, 481
Ground Strap, Short, 481
Guide Wheel, Carriage, 482
Handle Extension, Cradle, 482
Harness, Power Assembly, 482
Heurikon Bd, ETC, 482
Hinge, Actuator Cover, 483
Home Latch Assembly, 483
Home Position Switch, 484
Intercom Speaker, 484
Interference Matrix Switch, 485
Jumper Plug, Tape Switch, 485
Jumper, Table Rear Cover Assembly, 486
Lamp Assembly, Table Power Supply, 486
Left Base Cover, 486
Left Control Panel, 486
Left Filler Cover, 487
Leg Tape Switch, 487
Locknut, Upper Pin Actuator (46–170012P67), 487
Locknut, Upper Pin Actuator (46–170012P81), 487
Longitudinal Encoder Assembly, 487
Longitudinal Limit Switch, 489
Lower Pin, Actuator, 490
Main Harness, 490
Motor, Cradle Drive, 490
Pin, Table Gas Spring, 491
Pivot Tube, Table Side Panel, 491
Pot Assembly, Longitudinal Encoder, 491
Power Assembly, 492
Power Harness, 492
Power Harness, Cradle Drive, 492
Quad Output Power Supply, 492
Rear Cover Assembly, 493
Relay, Elevation & Cradle Amps, 493
Relay, Tape Switches, 493
Right Base Cover, 493
Right Control Panel, 494
Right Filler Cover, 494
Roller Kit Actuator Cover, 494
SCA–LAN Bd, ETC, 494
Servo Amp Assembly, 495
Shoulder Screw, Encoder Cable, 495
Side Panel, LF, 496
Side Panel, LR, 496
Side Panel, RF, 496
Side Panel, RR, 497
Signal Harness, Cradle Drive, 497
Solenoid Assembly, 498
Spacer, Table Encoder Cable, 498
Spacer, Upper Pin Actuator, 498
Spring, Actuator Cover, 498
263
Spring, Home Latch Assembly, 498

Table Cover, Left Side, 498
Table Cover, Right Side, 499
Table Drive Power Supply, 499
Tape Switch, Table Side Cover, 500
Upper Pin, Actuator, 500
264
CHAPTER 13 – REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
13–1 Torque Wrench

Only use torque wrenches, such as those from kit number 46–268445G1, that are on a
Calibration schedule and approved by GEMS–AM Service. The kit 46–268445G1 wrenches
measure inch–pounds and foot–pounds. Use the Table 13–1 values to convert the English
measurements into the equivalent metric Kgcm and Newton–meter values.
TABLE 13–1
ENGLISH AND METRIC TORQUE WRENCH CONVERSION CHART
Conversion chart for Kgcm to Inch–pounds, foot–pounds and Newton–meters

Kgcm Inch–pounds Foot–pounds Newton–meters
1 0.87 N/A N/A
2 1.75 N/A N/A
3 2.6 N/A N/A
4 3.5 N/A N/A
5 4.4 N/A N/A
6 5.25 N/A N/A
7 6.1 N/A N/A
8 7.1 N/A N/A
9 7.9 N/A N/A
10 8.7 N/A 0.98
20 17.4 1.45 1.97
30 26.1 2.2 2.99
40 34.8 2.9 3.93
50 43.5 3.6 4.88
60 52.2 4.4 5.97
70 60.9 5 6.78
80 69.6 5.8 7.86
90 78.3 6.53 8.85
100 87.4 7.25 9.83
200 174.8 14.6 19.79
300 254.1 21.2 28.74
400 349.6 29.1 39.34
265
13–2 Metric Hardware Cross Reference

TABLE 13–2
AMERICAN STANDARD METRIC HEX/SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREWS TO TOOL CROSS REFERENCE
Socket Head Cap Hex Key Size Hex Head Cap Socket Wrench Size
and Tread Pitch Nominal and Thread Pitch Nominal
M1.6 x 0.35 1.5mm N/A N/A
M2 x 0.4 1.5mm N/A N/A
M2.5 x 0.45 2.0mm N/A N/A
M3 x 0.5 2.5mm N/A N/A
M4 x 0.7 3.0mm N/A N/A
M5 x 0.8 4.0mm M5 x 0.8 8.0mm
M6 x 1.0 5.0mm M6 x 1.0 10.0mm
M8 x 1.25 6.0mm M8 x 1.25 13.0mm
M10 x 1.5 8.0mm M10 x 1.5 16.0mm
M12 x 1.75 10.0mm M12 x 1.75 18.0mm
M14 x 2.0 12.0mm M14 x 2.0 21.0mm
M16 x 2.0 14.0mm M16 x 2.0 24.0mm
M20 x 2.5 17.0mm M20 x 2.5 30.0mm
M24 x 3.0 19.0mm M24 x 3.0 36.0mm
M30 x 3.5 22.0mm M30 x 3.5 46.0mm
M36 x 4.0 27.0mm M36 x 4.0 55.0mm
M42 x 4.5 32.0mm M42 x 4.5 65.0mm
M48 x 5.0 36.0mm M48 x 5.0 75.0mm
13–3 Computer
THE CIRCUIT BOARDS ARE VERY STATIC SENSITIVE!!
CAUTION Static sensitive components may be damaged if not handled in a static
free environment. Take appropriate precautions (e.g. wear properly
grounded wrist strap) when handling all boards.
266
13–3–1 46–282067P54
FRU 1
Computer
1/2 Mag Tape Controller
Shutdown the system software and power down the hardware:
1. Start at the applications level, and touch the |Utilities| softkey to display the Utilities Main
menu.
2. Touch |Shutdown| .
3. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord.
4. Locate and remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the bottom of the Sun Computer
front cover.
5. Remove Sun Computer front cover.
6. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray.
7. Remove four (4) screws to GAI Bus Cover
8. Remove the P1 connector from the GAI card.
9. Disconnect the following cables:
» GAI Serial Interface Cable
» Plasma Cable
Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or

CAUTION touching any of the board traces.
10. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computer’s Cable Tray.

11. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the
board.
12. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board
from the backplane.
13. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a static–free environment.
14. Remove the Controller Board from the packing material and set the jumpers to the
configuration shown in illustration 12–33.
15. Install the board into slot 8.
16. Connect the four I/O cables between the Controller Board and Tape Drive Unit.
17. Remove backplane jumpers.
18. Continue to set up the Tape Drive Unit.
13–3–2 46–282067P37
FRU 1
Computer
16 MB Circuit Bd
267
menu.
front cover.


board.
from the backplane.
11. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board
DIP switch and jumper settings.
» If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the
defective board.
» Make sure the front settings are positioned for board 0.
12. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the
backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of
the cardcage.
13. If installing 16MB in slot 5: Make sure the jumper setting on front panel is jumpered in
a 0 Board position.
14. If Board goes into slot 4 of the Sun Computer, make sure the front jumper selection of
16MB Board is jumpered to Board number 1 jumper position.
15. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis with two hex screws.
16. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover.
17. Turn on Sun Computer and console.
18. Reinstall computer front cover.
13–3–3 46–307090P1
FRU 1
Computer
1600 Watt Power Supply
1. Computer on and UNIX running:

a. Type sync <enter> at the root prompt
b. Type sync <enter> again
268
c. Type halt <enter>, and wait about 15 seconds for the > prompt.
3. Locate and remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from beneath the front end cover of the
Genesis computer.
4. Loosen the screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place, remove the panel, and set
aside.
5. Loosen the captive screws that hold the power supply cover in place, and remove the
cover.
269
Wait at least five minutes after turning off the system, to let the
CAUTION power supply completely discharge, before you disconnect the
power supply wires.
6. Disconnect the wires from the system power supply, including the ground strap on the
rear of the cabinet.
7. Carefully slide the power supply tray out through the front of the cabinet.
8. Remove the four screws attaching the power supply to the power supply tray.
9. Attach the replacement power supply to the power supply tray with four screws.
10. Carefully slide the power supply tray into position, through the front of the cabinet. Take
care not to trap the power supply wires behind the supply.
11. Reconnect the wires to the power supply, including the power supply ground strap on the
rear of the cabinet.
12. Plug the computer into the console, turn on the console, then turn on the computer.
13. Verify that the power supply voltages are within the tolerances listed in Table 13–3. If
not, replace the power supply.
TABLE 13–3
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGES
Voltage Tolerance Test Point

+5V 4.95V to 5.05V +5V & –5V Studs
+12V 11.76V to 12.24V TB2, +12V Analog
–5V 4.9V to 5.1V TB2, –5.2V
–12V –11.76V to –12.24V TB2, –12V
14. Reattach the Power Supply Cover.

15. Reattach the Serial I/O Panel and computer front cover.
13–3–4 46–282067P38
FRU 1
Computer
32 MB Circuit Bd
menu.
front cover.
270


board.
from the backplane.
defective board.
» Make sure the front settings are positioned for board 0.
backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the
cardcage.
16. Reattach computer front cover.
13–3–5 46–282067P54
FRU 1
Computer
9 Track Mag Tape Controller (Optional)
menu.
front cover.
6. Remove four (4) cables from the 9 Track Controller Board.

271
board.
from the backplane.
from the backplane.
13. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors
(push the top lever up and the bottom lever down).
14. Slide the board out of the chassis and store in a static–free environment.
DIP switch and jumper settings. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement
board to match those on the defective board.
cardcage.
18. Reconnect 4 cables to Controller Board. Ensure that the cables coming from the 9 Track
Tape Drive Unit are installed correctly. Cables A to A and B to B.
19. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray.
20. Turn on console and Sun Computer.
21. Reattach the Sun Computer front cover.
13–3–6 46–269601P1
FRU 1
Computer
Active SCSI Terminator
13–3–7 46–307090P24
FRU 1
Computer
Backplane Circuit Bd
menu.
Note: If you are not running applications, and the system is at UNIX level, login as genesis and
type haltSystem to take the system to the boot prompt.
3. Locate and remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the bottom of the computer front
cover.
4. Remove computer front cover.
5. Remove the four (4) screws from the computer cable tray.
6. Remove the computer cable tray.
272
7. Turn the computer power OFF.

8. Remove the hex screw at the top and bottom of the board you plan to replace.

9. Use the board ejectors to remove the board, and carefully slide it from the slot.
10. Compare jumper and DIP switch settings on the new board with the old one. Adjust
settings to match the old one if necessary.
11. Install the new board into the slot with the components facing to the right of the board. Take
care not to bend the EMC/EMI tabs when you seat the board.
12. Install the hex screws in the top and bottom of the board.
13. Turn the computer power ON. Make sure the computer boots with no problems. (If not,
re–check your work and troubleshoot problem.)
14. Using caution not to switch OFF the computer switch, replace the computer cable tray
and front cover.
13–3–8 46–307636G1
FRU 2
Computer
Cable: SCSI Harness
13–3–9 46–328012P1
FRU 2
Computer
Cable: SCSI Ribbon
13–3–10 2101566
FRU 2
Computer
Cable: SCSI Ribbon (New)
13–3–11 46–301975P1
FRU 1
Computer
CIPRICO Controller Bd
No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
13–3–12 46–269587P1
FRU 1
Computer
Concept For Mounting ST1980N Dual Disks
Replace a Disk Drive in the SCSI Tray:
273
1. Remove the SCSI tray from the cabinet.

2. Place the SCSI tray on its side and, while supporting the drive, unfasten the Phillips
screws that hold the drive and mounting bracket to the SCSI tray.
3. Partially withdraw the drive from the tray, then remove the three cables from the rear of
the drive.
4. Remove the drive from the tray.
5. Check the disk drive jumper configuration.
6. Install the replacement drive in the SCSI tray.
7. Attach the three cables to the rear of the drive.
8. Install the SCSI tray into the cabinet and attach it with the two screws.
9. Connect the SCSI tray power connector.
10. Install the Serial I/O Panel.
11. Connect all the cables to the Serial I/O Panel.
12. Connect the SCSI Interface cable.
13. Attach the cabinet front cover.
14. Plug in the system power cord and turn on the system power.
15. Reformat the disk and install the software. Return to ST1980N disk drive procedure.
13–3–13 46–269587P1
FRU 1
Computer
Concept For Mounting ST1980N Dual Disks (part 2)
Replace a Single Disk Drive In the SCSI Tray:
1. Remove the SCSI tray from the cabinet.

2. Place the SCSI tray on its side and, while supporting the drive, unfasten the Phillips
screws that hold the drive and mounting bracket to the SCSI tray.
the drive.
15. Reformat the disk and install the software. Return to ST1980N disk drive procedure.
274
13–3–14 46–282067P31
FRU 1
Computer
CPU Circuit Bd
menu.
front cover.

7. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computer’s Cable Tray and disconnect Sun Computer
Cable Tray.
8. Remove the ethernet cable.
board.
from the backplane.
11. Slide the board out of the chassis, and store in a static free environment.
If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the
defective board.
cardcage.
14. Take the ID Prom from the defective board and insert it into new board at location U1907.
Take care to match the pin 1 indicator (usually a small dot or indentation at one end of
the chip) with the indentation on the socket.
16. Reconnect the ethernet cable.
17. Ensure Diag/Normal Switch on front of CPU Board is in the normal position.
19. Turn on Sun Computer .
20. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer
21. Press |L1| and |A| keys at the same to display the prom monitor level, >.
22. Type |Q| and press <enter>.
23. Press <Spacebar> to return to prom monitor level.
275
24. Type b <enter>to boot UNIX.
Note: Boot to Unix level, but do not start applications at this time.
25. After about one minute the system prompts:

Do you want System to Autoboot?
26. Type no <enter>
27. Login as root; type/enter Genesis at the password prompt
28. Type Add OD <enter>, and answer the questions.
Handle the optical disk carefully. Improper handling renders the

CAUTION optical disk inoperable
29. Reinstall Front Cover.
13–3–15 46–306519P2
FRU 1
Computer
DAT Drive (3.5 inch)
menu.
2. Touch |Shutdown| to display the following message:
Really shut the scanner down ?
3. Select |Yes|, and wait 15 to 30 seconds until the system displays > prompt.
4. Turn off the console and computer power.
front cover.
7. Remove the two screws from the bottom of the SCSI Tray faceplate, and remove the
faceplate.
The SCSI tray contains the DAT drive.
Remove the SCSI Tray:
1. Remove all cables connected to Serial I/O Panel.

2. Loosen the screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place, and remove the panel. Rotate
the serial I/O panel down and out of the way with the cables still attached.
Prevent permanent damage to the static–sensitive boards. Attach

CAUTION the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist, and to a bare metal
grounding point on the computer chassis before you continue
3. Disconnect the SCSI Terminator, SCSI Interface Cable, and SCSI Tray Power Connector
from the underside of the SCSI Tray; loosen the two captive screws.
276
FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN

WARNING PERSONAL INJURY. THE SCSI TRAY IS HEAVY. ONCE YOU
LOOSEN THE SCREWS, THE TRAY IS NOT ATTACHED TO
THE COMPUTER IN ANY WAY. ALSO, THE TRAY DOES NOT
HAVE END STOPS. REMOVE THE TRAY SLOWLY, AND
CONTINUE TO READJUST YOUR GRIP, TO BALANCE THE
TRAY AND AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR SCSI TRAY
DAMAGE
4. Slowly pull the SCSI tray out of the computer.
Remove DAT Tape Drive:
1. Place the SCSI Tray on its side. Unfasten the screws that attach the DAT tape drive to
the SCSI tray. Keep the screws for later use.
2. Slide the tape drive forward a couple of inches, and remove the SCSI Cable and power
cables from the DAT Tape Drive.
3. Slide the tape drive out of the tray.
4. Set aside the SCSI Tray.
DAT Tape Drive Installation:
1. Assemble replacement DAT drive as shown in adapter kit instructions (packaged with
kit).
2. Set the switch settings on bottom center of drive:
» 1–7: ON
» 8: OFF
3. Check rear jumper settings.
» On rear of the drive, remove term power jumper bit 1 (disables termination resistors).
» Ignore other jumpers.
4. Slide the tape drive back into the SCSI tray.
5. Connect the SCSI ribbon cable to the DAT tape drive.
» The side of the ribbon cable marked “Note: This side up for use with P51 DAT tape”
faces up.
» Connect the power cable, marked “DAT”, to the tape drive power connector.
6. Place the SCSI Tray on its side. Secure the tape drive to the SCSI tray with the same 4
mounting screws.
7. Reinstall the SCSI tray into the Sun computer.
8. Connect SCSI Power Cable to SCSI Tray.
9. Reattach the Serial I/O Panel.
10. Reconnect SCSI Interface Cable and Terminator.
11. Tighten the 2 screws underneath the SCSI Tray.
12. Turn ON Sun Computer.
13. Once you restore power to the system, check the DAT drive LEDs to verify the new DAT
drive operates properly.
277
13–3–16 46–306519P1
FRU 1
Computer
DAT Tape Drive (5.25 inch)
menu.
3. Select |Yes|, and wait 15 to 30 seconds until the system displays > prompt.
4. Turn off the console and computer power.
front cover.
faceplate.
The SCSI tray contains the DAT drive.

Prevent permanent damage to the static–sensitive boards

CAUTION Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist, and to a bare metal
grounding point on the computer chassis before you continue.
from the underside of the SCSI Tray. Loosen the two captive screws.

WARNING PERSONAL INJURY. THE SCSI TRAY IS HEAVY. ONCE YOU
LOOSEN THE SCREWS, THE TRAY IS NOT ATTACHED TO
THE COMPUTER IN ANY WAY. ALSO, THE TRAY DOES NOT
HAVE END STOPS. REMOVE THE TRAY SLOWLY, AND
CONTINUE TO READJUST YOUR GRIP, TO BALANCE THE
TRAY AND AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR SCSI TRAY
DAMAGE

Remove DAT Tape Drive:
1. Place the SCSI Tray on its side. Unfasten the screws that attach the DAT tape drive to
the SCSI tray. Keep the screws for later use.
2. Slide the tape drive forward a couple of inches, and remove the SCSI Cable and power
cables from the DAT Tape Drive.
278
3. Slide the tape drive out of the tray.

4. Set aside the SCSI Tray.
Install DAT Tape Drive:
1. Assemble replacement DAT drive as shown in adapter kit instructions (packaged with
kit).
2. Set the switch settings on bottom center of drive:
» 1–7: ON
» 8: OFF
3. Check rear jumper settings.
» On rear of the drive, remove term power jumper bit 1 (disables termination resistors).
» Ignore other jumpers.
4. Slide the tape drive back into the SCSI tray.
5. Connect the SCSI ribbon cable to the DAT tape drive.
» The side of the ribbon cable marked “Note: This side up for use with P51 DAT tape”
faces up.
» Connect the power cable, marked “DAT”, to the tape drive power connector.
6. Place the SCSI Tray on its side. Fasten the tape drive to the SCSI tray with the same 4
mounting screws.
7. Reinstall the SCSI tray into the Sun computer.
8. Connect SCSI Power Cable to SCSI Tray.
9. Reattach the Serial I/O Panel.
10. Reconnect SCSI Interface Cable and Terminator.
11. Tighten the 2 screws underneath the SCSI Tray.
12. Turn ON Sun Computer.
13. Once you restore power to the system, check the DAT drive LEDs to verify the new DAT
drive operates properly.
13–3–17 46–307090P12
FRU 2
Computer
DC Power Cable
Generic Cable Replacement Procedure:
1. Follow all safety precautions.
2. Turn OFF power to the connected units.
3. Use good ESD procedures.
4. Use good service practices.
279
13–3–18 46–307090P23
FRU 1
Computer
Fan in Rack Drawer
1. Turn off the Sun computer and then unplug the Genesis computer from the Genesis
console. If computer is on and UNIX is running type SU root. Password is Genesis. You
will get a root prompt then type SYNC and press Return. Then type SYNC again and
press Return. Then type halt and press Return. In approximately 15 to 30 seconds Unix
will halt itself and you will notice the prom monitor level, i.e., >.
2. Remove the front cover from the Genesis computer. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners
at the bottom front end of the cover.
3. Remove the Terminator and SCSI Cable from SCSI Tray.
4. Loosen the four captive screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place and remove the I/O
Panel and set aside.
5. Disconnect the fan tray power connector.
6. Loosen the two screws that hold the fan tray in place and slide the tray out of the Sun
computer.
7. Remove the two screws that hold the defective fan. Remove the power connector from
the defective fan.
8. Remove defective fan.
9. Attach the replacement fan to the fan tray with the two (2) screws. Manufacturer’s label
should be facing upward.
10. Connect the fan power connector to the replacement fan and attach the fan to the fan
tray.
11. Reinstall the fan tray into the Sun computer, attach it with the two captive screws and
reconnect the Fan Tray Power Connector.
12. Attach the Serial I/O Panel.
13. Connect SCSI Interface Cable to SCSI tray and also Terminator.
14. Plug in Genesis computer to Console, turn on console, then computer, then verify fan
operation. Replace front cover.
13–3–19 46–282067P34
FRU 1
Computer
GAI Circuit Bd
menu.
front cover.
280
7. Remove four (4) screws to GAI Bus Cover, then remove the P1 connector from GAI
card.
8. Disconnect the following cables:
» GAI Serial Interface Cable
» Plasma Cable

board.
from the backplane.
11. Slide the board out of the chassis, and place in a static–free environment.
defective board.
cardcage.
15. Reconnect P1 GAI Bus Cable, Plasma Cable and GAI Serial Interface Cable.
16. Reattach GAI Bus Cable Cover.
13–3–20 46–307090P29
FRU 2
Computer
GAI Serial Cable

281
13–3–21 46–321280G1
FRU 1
Computer
GBM Circuit Bd (New Style)
menu.
front cover.
6. Disconnect Sun Computer Cable Tray.
7. Disconnect GAI Bus Cover.
8. Disconnect P2 Bus Cable from Frame Buffer.
9. Label and disconnect any video BNC connections on Frame Buffer Board.
from the backplane.
defective board.
cardcage.
13–3–22 46–307090P17
FRU 1
Computer
GBM Circuit Bd (Old Style)
menu.
front cover.
282

from the backplane.
defective board.
cardcage.
13–3–23 46–282067P35
FRU 1
Computer
GFB Circuit Bd
menu.
front cover.
10. Push the top ejection lever up, and the bottom ejection lever down, to unseat the board
from the backplane.
11. Slide the board out of the chassis, and store in a static–free environment.
283
defective board.
the cardcage.
16. Reconnect P2 Bus Cable to Frame Buffer Board.
17. Install GAI Bus Cover.
18. Reinstall Video BNC Cables to Frame Buffer Board.
13–3–24 46–282067P36
FRU 1
Computer
GIP Circuit Bd
menu.
front cover.
6. Remove four (4) screws attached to the Sun Computer’s Cable Tray.
8. Locate the slot of the defective board.
from the backplane.
10. Slide the board out of the chassis.
defective board.
the cardcage.
284
13–3–25 46–307090P29
FRU 2
Computer
I/O Cable, SCSI

13–3–26 46–515270
FRU 1
Computer
LMO–2 3–D Renderer Bd
menu.
front cover.
7. Remove the computer cable tray.
USE ESD PRECAUTIONS WHEN YOU HANDLE CIRCUIT BOARDS!!!

WARNING
from the backplane. Carefully slide it from the slot.
11. Compare jumper and DIP switch settings on the new board with the old one.
Adjust settings to match the old one, if necessary.
285
15. Take care not to switch OFF the computer power when you replace the computer cable
tray and front cover.
13–3–27 CG29–515270
FRU 1
Computer
LMO2 Bd (Mother & Daughter)
13–3–28 46–320144G1
FRU 1
Computer
Motorola MVME166GE Bd (OC CPU)
menu.
front cover.
USE ESD PRECAUTIONS WHEN YOU HANDLE CIRCUIT BOARDS!!!

WARNING
from the backplane. Carefully slide it from the slot.
» Adjust settings to match the old one if necessary.
14. Take care not to switch OFF the computer power when you replace the computer cable
tray and front cover.
286
13–3–29 46–307575P1
FRU 1
Computer
Pioneer DD–U7001Rewritable MOD
1. Computer “on” and UNIX running:

a. Type su <enter> to enter super user
b. Type the password, genesis <enter>, to display the root prompt.
c. Type sync <enter> at the root prompt
d. Type sync <enter> again
e. Type halt <enter>, and wait about 15 seconds for the > prompt.
–or–
2. Applications running:
a. Touch the |Utilities| softkey to display the Utilities Main menu.
b. Touch |Shutdown| to display the following message:
c. Select |Yes|, and wait until the system displays the > prompt.
Genesis computer.
5. Remove Genesis Computer front cover.
Remove the Tape Drive in the SCSI Tray (to access screws on optical drive):
1. Remove the SCSI tray from the cabinet and place it on its side.
2. While supporting the drive, remove the four Phillips screws that attach the drive to the
SCSl tray.
3. Partially withdraw the drive from the tray, then remove the cables from the rear of the
drive.
Remove Optical Disk Drive Controller Board (if replacing WORM OD with MOD):
1. Disconnect the cables from the Optical Disk Controller Board and loosen the three
screws.
2. Remove the Controller Board.
3. Remove and discard the metal plate and standoffs, located beneath the Optical Disk
Controller.
Remove the Optical Disk Drive (if replacing WORM OD with MOD):
Systems with WORM OD in computer:
1. Disconnect the cables from the Optical Disk Drive and loosen the four screws (two on
each side of the Optical Disk Drive).
2. Remove the Optical Disk.
287
3. Remove one screw from each side of the Front cover plate, located inside the lower half
of the opening, and remove the Front cover plate
Route New Ribbon Cable/Remove Old Ribbon Cable (If replacing WORM OD with
MOD):
1. Position new ribbon cable to match old ribbon cable route.

2. Remove old ribbon cable.
3. Install new ribbon cable.
Install MOD Drive:
1. Remove two SCSI Terminating Resistors from bottom of drive (look like PROMs).
2. Set the SCSI ID Switch Settings.
3. Set Drive Select Jumpers to OFF (lower positions) on rear of drive.
4. Position new MOD Drive between the old Optical Disk Drive brackets.
a. Push the drive through the brackets and through the opening in the front of the tray
(FROM THE INSIDE OUT) to center the threaded holes in the drive over the slotted
holes in the brackets.
b. About 1/8 inch of the drive should extend through the front of the tray, which gives
the best fit to the bezel.
c. Line up the lower two holes on each bracket with the holes on each side of the Drive.
5. Install screws and tighten.
6. Make one Power Harness connection to the MOD drive under the small cable at the back
of the drive.
You may have to disconnect one end of the small ribbon cable while you insert the
connector.
7. Make the second Power Harness connection next to the MOD drive SCSI connector.
8. Mount the connector ends of the SCSI Ribbon Cable to the input and output ports in the
bottom of the tray. Connect the ribbon cable to the MOD drive.
For all three of these connectors, note the location of pin #1 and the colored edge of the
cable.
Reinstall Tape Drive and Reassemble Computer:
1. Reconnect cable ribbon and power cable.

2. Reinstall screws and tighten.
3. Verify all peripheral connections to corresponding ribbon and power cables.
4. Reinstall SCSI tray.
5. Reassemble computer covers.
6. Power up computer.
7. Login as root on the OC:
<suiteID>_OC0@login: root <enter>
password: <default root password> <enter>
8. Load the HLFC tape into the tape drive.
9. Type addOD <enter>.
288
10. The addOD script runs, then the software automatically reboots.
11. Bring up Applications to complete the MOD.
13–3–30 46–307575P4
FRU 1
Computer
Pioneer DE–UH7101 Rewritable MOD
–or–
2. Applications running:
a. Touch the |Utilities| softkey to display the Utilities Main menu.
b. Touch |Shutdown| to display the following message:
c. Select |Yes|, and wait until the system displays the > prompt.
Genesis computer.
Remove the Tape Drive in the SCSI Tray (to access screws on optical drive):
1. Remove the SCSI tray from the cabinet, and place it on its side.
2. While supporting the drive, remove the four Phillips screws that attach the drive to the
SCSl tray.
3. Partially withdraw the drive from the tray, then remove the cables from the rear of the
drive.
Remove Optical Disk Drive Controller Board (if replacing WORM OD with MOD):
1. Disconnect the cables from the Optical Disk Controller board, and loosen the three
screws
2. Remove the Controller board.
3. Remove and discard the metal plate and standoffs, located beneath the Optical Disk
Controller.
Remove the Optical Disk Drive (if replacing WORM OD with MOD):
289
1. Disconnect the cables from the Optical Disk Drive and loosen the four screws (two on
each side of the Optical Disk Drive).
2. Remove the Optical Disk.
3. Remove one screw from each side of the Front cover plate, located inside the lower half
of the opening. and remove the Front cover plate
Route New Ribbon Cable/Remove Old Ribbon Cable (If replacing WORM OD with
MOD):
1. Position new ribbon cable to match old ribbon cable route.

2. Remove old ribbon cable.
3. Install new ribbon cable.
Install MOD Drive:
1. Remove two SCSI Terminating Resistors from bottom of drive (look like PROMs).
2. Set the SCSI ID Switch Settings.
3. Set Drive Select Jumpers to OFF (lower positions) on rear of drive.
4. Position new MOD Drive between the old Optical Disk Drive brackets.
a. Push the drive through the brackets and through the opening in the front of the tray
(FROM THE INSIDE OUT) to center the threaded holes in the drive over the slotted
holes in the brackets.
b. About 1/8 inch of the drive should extend through the front of the tray, which gives the
best fit to the bezel.
c. Line up the lower two holes on each bracket with the holes on each side of the Drive.
5. Install screws and tighten.
6. Make one Power Harness connection to the MOD drive under the small cable at the back
of the drive.
You may have to disconnect one end of the small ribbon cable while you insert the
connector.
7. Make the second Power Harness connection next to the MOD drive SCSI connector.
8. Mount the connector ends of the SCSI Ribbon Cable to the input and output ports in the
bottom of the tray. Connect the ribbon cable to the MOD drive.
For all three of these connectors, note the location of pin #1 and the colored edge of the
cable.
Reinstall Tape Drive and Reassemble Compute:r
1. Reconnect cable ribbon and power cable.

2. Reinstall screws and tighten.
3. Verify all peripheral connections to corresponding ribbon and power cables.
4. Reinstall SCSI tray.
5. Reassemble computer covers.
6. Power up computer.
290
7. Login as root on the OC:

<suiteID>_OC0@login: root <enter>
password: <default root password> <enter>
8. Load the HLFC tape into the tape drive.
9. Type addOD <enter>
10. The addOD script runs, then the software automatically reboots.
11. Bring up Applications to complete the MOD installation.
291
13–3–31 46–307090P31
FRU 1
Computer
Power Indicator and Cable

Genesis computer.
5. Remove the Serial I/O Panel and set aside.
6. Loosen the two (2) captive screws that hold the power supply cover in place.
7. Remove the cover.
8. Remove the two (2) wires of defective power indicator from the Sun computer power
supply terminal strip.
9. Remove the light from the power supply cover.
Note: This light is press fitted to the cover.
10. Install the new power indicator in the power supply cover.
11. Attach the two wires to the Sun computer power supply terminal strip.
12. Reassemble system
13–3–32 46–307681P1
FRU 1
Computer
SCSI Tray Fan

Genesis computer.
292

5. Remove the Terminator and SCSI Cable from SCSI Tray.
6. Loosen the four captive screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place.
7. Remove the Serial I/O Panel and set aside.
8. Disconnect the fan tray power connector.
9. Loosen the two screws that hold the fan tray in place, and slide the tray out of the
computer.
10. Use needle nose pliers to remove the leads from the fan’s (+) and (–) DC power
terminals.
11. Remove 4 screws/nuts that fasten the fan to the tray. Remove the defective fan.
12. Pay attention to the air flow arrow when you replace the fan in the tray. Orient the new
fan so its air flows in the same direction as the old fan.
13. Connect the blue power lead to the (+) terminal and the black lead to the (–) terminal on
the fan.
14. Reuse the hardware to attach the fan to the tray chassis.
15. Reassemble the system.
13–3–33 46–269587P1
FRU 1
Computer
Seagate ST1980N Magnetic Disc Drive
Avoid damage/failures to the LSD and/or the HSD. Do not
CAUTION move or bump the RP cabinets while the disc drives are
running. Take care not to bump the system when you replace
the front covers and close the cabinet doors. Do not move
the cabinet while it has power applied (and the drives are
spinning). The drives can absorb up to 75gs with power off,
but only 2gs when spinning
Replace a Disk Drive In the SCSI Tray:
1. Shutdown the system and access the SCSI tray.

2. Loosen the two screws, and remove the SCSI tray from the cabinet.
3. Place the SCSI tray on its side.
4. Support the drive while you unfasten the Phillips screws that attach the drive and
mounting bracket to the SCSI tray.
the drive.
293
17. Follow the LFC procedure in Chapter 10 to reformat the disk, and install the software.
Note: To install dual ST1980N disk drives, follow the Mounting Dual Disks.
13–3–34 46–301976P1
FRU 1
Computer
Seagate Wren V model 94181–15 Magnetic Disk Drive
Replace a Disk Drive in the SCSI Tray:
1. Shutdown the system and access the SCSI tray.

2. Loosen the two screws, and remove the SCSI tray from the cabinet.
3. Place the SCSI tray on its side.
4. Support the drive while you unfasten the Phillips screws that attach the drive and
mounting bracket to the SCSI tray.
the drive.
13–3–35 46–296604P1
FRU 1
Computer
Second Ethernet Circuit Bd
294
menu.
front cover.
6. Remove ethernet cable from ethernet board.

CAUTION touching any of the board traces
board.
from the backplane.
defective board.
» Make sure you position the front settings for board 0.
cardcage.
14. Reconnect Ethernet Cable to Board.
13–3–36 46–282067P53
FRU 1
Computer
Second Ethernet Circuit Bd (INTER–SUITE COMPUTER ONLY)
menu.
front cover.
295

CAUTION Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or

touching any of the board traces.
ethernet board.
from the backplane.
defective board.
cardcage.
13–3–37 46–307090P30
FRU 2
Computer
Serial I/0 Panel
13–3–38 46–296604P1
FRU 1
Computer
VME Ethernet 3207 Hawk Bd
menu.
front cover.
296


CAUTION touching any of the board traces
ethernet board.
from the backplane.
defective board.
cardcage.
13–3–39 46–301975P1
FRU 1
Computer
VME, SCSI Controller
menu.
front cover.
8. Remove the hex screw from the top and bottom of the board you plan to replace.
297
USE ESD PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING ALL CIRCUIT

BOARDS!!!
WARNING
9. Use the board ejectors to carefully remove the board, and slide it from the slot.
Adjust settings to match the old one if necessary.
11. Install the new board into the slot with the components facing to the right of the board.
Take care not to bend the EMC/EMI tabs when you seat the board.
13. Turn the computer power ON.
Make sure the computer boots with no problems. (If not, re–check your work and
troubleshoot problem.)
14. Take care not to switch OFF the computer, when you replace the computer cable tray
and front cover.
13–3–40 46–301976P1
FRU 1
Computer
Wren V Disk Drive
menu.
3. Select |Yes|, and wait until the system displays the > prompt.
front cover.
faceplate.


grounding point on the computer chassis before you continue.
298
from the underside of the SCSI Tray; loosen the two captive screws.

WARNING PERSONAL INJURY.
THE SCSI TRAY IS HEAVY. ONCE YOU LOOSEN THE
SCREWS, THE TRAY IS NOT ATTACHED TO THE COMPUTER
IN ANY WAY. ALSO, THE TRAY DOES NOT HAVE END
STOPS. REMOVE THE TRAY SLOWLY, AND CONTINUE TO
READJUST YOUR GRIP, TO BALANCE THE TRAY AND AVOID
PERSONAL INJURY OR SCSI TRAY DAMAGE

5. Remove two (2) screws from bottom front of the SCSI Tray.
Install Disk Drive:
1. Place the SCSI Tray on its side.

2. Remove power cable connector and the SCSI Interface Cable from the faulty WREN 5
Drive.
3. Remove four (4) screws that attach the drive to the SCSI Tray.
4. On new drive: Remove the three Termination Resistors, located next to the SCSI
Interface Cable.
5. Locate the Drive Select header, next to the 50 pin SCSI Cable Connector on the rear of
the disk drive.
Remove any jumpers installed on the header pins.
6. Connect Disk Drive Cables (i.e. power and SCSI).
Make sure you correctly orient the cable. Pin 1 for Pin 1.
7. Use the old hardware to install the Disk Drive. Fasten the Disk Drive to the SCSI tray
with the four screws.
8. Return the SCSI Tray to its original position.
9. Connect SCSI Tray Power Cable.
10. Connect the cables to the Serial I/0 Panel.
11. Connect the SCSI Interface Cable and Terminator to the SCSI Tray.
12. Fasten the 2 screws to the bottom of the SCSI Tray.
13. Power up console and computer.
14. Reattach Sun Computer Cover.
Take care not to shake the cabinet or turn off the computer power switch with the covers.
299
13–4 Console
13–4–1 46–287766P1
FRU 1
Console
18 Button Rubber Keypad
1. Turn off console power.
2. Remove the seven 10–32 x 3/8 screws fastening the bottom pan to the console.
3. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire should be long enough to allow the pan
to rest on the floor while still attached. If not, disconnect the ground wire from the bottom
pan.
4. To replace the IP Keypad:
» Remove J1 to J6 from the board.
» Remove ground wire from terminal J7.
» Remove 6 screws (item 25849) to remove board.
5. To replace the 18 Button (IP/View) Rubber Keypad:
» Remove IP Keypad Board.
» Remove 6 screws (item 05773) which fasten two aluminum spacers to the console
chassis.
» Remove spacers and rubber keypad.
6. Replace IP Keypad Board, or rubber keypad, by reversing the previous steps.
7. Reassemble Console.
13–4–2 46–287394P1
FRU 1
Console
8 Button Rubber Keypad, IC
pan.
4. To replace the System Keypad Board:
a. Remove cable and ground wire from the board.
b. Remove 4 screws (item 25849) to remove board.
5. To replace the 8 Button (Scan/Image) Rubber Keypad:
a. Remove System Keypad Board.
b. Remove 4 screws (item 05773) which fasten two aluminum spacers to the console
chassis.
c. Remove spacers and rubber keypad.
300
13–4–3 46–282921P1
FRU 1
Console
8 Button Rubber Keypad, OC

pan.
» Remove cable and ground wire from the board.
» Remove 4 screws (item 25849) to remove board.
» Remove System Keypad Board.
» Remove 4 screws (item 05773) which fasten two aluminum spacers to the console
chassis.
» Remove spacers and rubber keypad.
13–4–4 46–287429P1
FRU 1
Console
8 Ohm, 6 Watt Speaker, OC
The speaker resides behind the swing–out panel, which holds the plasma display,
GCP Board, and Autovoice Board.

2. Locate 5 tab clips which fasten the bezel to the console.
a. Insert a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward to remove the clip.
b. Do not try to remove the Bezel at this time.
3. Remove seven 10–32 x 3/8” screws fastening the bottom pan to the console.
pan.
5. Remove the bezel from the keyboard support structure.
a. Use a 7/64 allen wrench to remove five 6–32 by 1/2” socket head screws and
washers beneath the keyboard shelf.
b. Remove the bezel.
6. Remove the 10–32 screw from the black latch that fastens the plasma swing–out panel in
the closed position.
7. Grasp the left side of the plasma support structure. Swing the structure out toward you,
and all of the way to the right.
301
8. Locate the speaker behind the swing–out panel.

9. Remove the 2 screws which fasten the speaker mounting bracket
to the console chassis.
10. Remove the black and white wires from the speaker’s spade lug terminals.
11. Remove 4 screws and 4 nuts which fasten the speaker to its mounting bracket.
12. Replace the speaker and reassemble the console.
13–4–5 46–282885P1
FRU 1
Console
A/N Keyboard
pan.
4. Remove cables from the keyboard circuit board.
5. Unscrew ground wire from keyboard circuit board.
6. Remove the 8 screws which fasten the keyboard to the console chassis.
7. Remove defective keyboard.
8. Replace the keyboard.
Take care to align the new keyboard in the console cutout.

CAUTION Improper alignment may cause some keys to stick after you
press them.
13–4–6 46–264756G5
FRU 1
Console
Autovoice Bd, OC
grounding point on the console chassis before you continue.
Replace the Autovoice Board:

302

pan.
Autovoice Bd, OC –continued–

6. Remove the Emergency Stop button, to prevent damage when you open the plasma.
Note: Console Model 2118256: perform steps 9. and 10.

All other Models: proceed directly to step 11.
9. Loosen the four quick release fasteners, and remove the upper housing cover.
a. Set cover aside.
b. Inspect gasket material for visible tears.
c. Schedule replacement if necessary.
10. Loosen the four quick release fasteners, and remove the lower housing cover.
a. Set cover aside.
b. Leave the cable interface alone.
c. Cover the keyboard area to protect against scratching.
11. The Autovoice Board piggybacks to the GCP Board.
a. Disconnect the cables from the following Autovoice Board connectors:
» J3 l J6
» J4 l J8
» J5 l J14
b. Disconnect the black ribbon cable from J6 on the GCP Board.
12. Remove the Autovoice Board from the GCP Board standoffs (6 screws).
13. Replace the Autovoice Board.
303
13–4–7 46–271382P6
FRU 1
Console
Circuit Breaker (1 Pole, 15A)
Unplug the console, or shut off power from the PDU to the
CAUTION Console, before you start this procedure.

2. Remove pedestal front door.
3. Swing out the panel with the Security Board, to access the Console Power Module front
panel.
4. Turn the twist lock at the top of the power module panel. Swing front panel down (panel
is hinged at the bottom).
5. Remove defective Circuit Breaker:
a. Remove the wires from the defective circuit breaker.
b. Remove the screw that fastens the defective circuit breaker to the front panel of the
power module.
6. Replace the Circuit Breaker.
13–4–8 46–271382P15
FRU 1
Console
CAUTION Console, before you start this procedure

panel.
power module.
304
13–4–9 46–271382P3
FRU 1
Console

panel.
power module.
13–4–10 46–271382P26
FRU 1
Console

panel.
power module.
305
13–4–11 46–301520P1
FRU 1
Console
Console Power Supply
3. Cut the ty–wraps and disconnect cable assembly.
4. Remove the Security Board (6 screws).
Do not remove the cables from the board. Place it on the floor in front of pedestal, or let
it hang.
5. Disconnect all harnesses from the top of the power supply.
6. Remove 4 screws that fasten power supply to swing panel.
7. Replace power supply.
13–4–12 46–307619P1
FRU 1
Console
Emergency Stop Button, OC
pan.
8. Locate the Emergency Stop button.
9. Grasp the Emergency Stop button, and pull it off of the switch actuator bar.
10. To replace the label:
a. Peel old label off the button.
b. Remove the paper protector from the adhesive side of the new label and attach it to
the button.
11. Press the button back onto the switch actuator bar.
306
13–4–13 46–287759P1
FRU 1
Console
Emergency Stop Label
pan.
8. Locate the Emergency Stop button.
9. Grasp the Emergency Stop button, and pull it off of the switch actuator bar.
10. To replace the label:
a. Peel old label off the button.
b. Remove the paper protector from the adhesive side of the new label and attach it to
the button.
11. Press the button back onto the switch actuator bar.
12. Reassemble the console.
13–4–14 46–301046P1
FRU 1
Console
Encoder Assembly
pan.
4. Unplug cable to circuit board.
5. Loosen set screw that fastens encoder shaft to flywheel.
6. Remove 3 nuts which fasten the encoder to the encoder support plate.
7. Remove defective encoder.
307
8. To replace the encoder, press the flywheel against the encoder support plate with one
hand while holding the new encoder in the other hand.
Important: Hold down the flywheel while you insert the

CAUTION encoder shaft up through the support plate, and into the
flywheel. Otherwise, the compression spring and friction pin
may pop out of the flywheel.
9. Insert the shaft of the new encoder up through the encoder support plate, and into the
flywheel.
10. Leave a slight gap between the flywheel and support plate.
11. Tighten the set screw.
12. Spin the flywheel, and verify that it spins freely.
13. Reconnect cable.
14. Reassemble console.
13–4–15 46–282986P1
FRU 1
Console
Encoder Knob
1. Grasp defective knob and firmly pull upward to remove.
Note: Make sure the new Encoder Knob has a compression spring before you install it.
2. Press down firmly on new knob to slide it onto the encoder shaft.
13–4–16 46–264380G7
FRU 1
Console
GCP Bd

pan.
308

Note: Console Model 2118256: perform steps 8. and 9. All other Models: proceed directly to
step 10.
a. Set cover aside.
a. Set cover aside.
GCP Bd –continued–
10. Disconnect the cables from the following GCP Board connectors:
» J1 » J8
» J2 » J9
» J3 » J10
» J4 » J11
» J5 » J12
» J6 » J13
» J7 » J14
11. If Genesis console used as an OC:
a. Disconnect the following cables, and remove the autovoice PWA:
» J3 » J6
» J4 » J14
» J5
b. Remove the four screws that fasten the Autovoice board to the GCP Board.
12. Remove the four (4) standoffs and nuts that fasten the GCP Board to the metal plate.
13. Compare jumper settings and firmware revision of old board to new board.
14. Replace the GCP Board.
309
13–4–17 46–282884P1
FRU 1
Console
Image Monitor
3. Remove seven 10–32x 3/8 screws fastening the bottom pan to the console.
pan.
Image Monitor –continued–
8. Locate the special pull–out tool attached on the right support leg of the console.
» Grasp the monitor and pull it out of the console until the
slide rails fully extend.
THE MONITOR WEIGHS 70 LBS (32KG) USE TWO PEOPLE TO

REMOVE THE MONITOR. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY
WARNING CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE MONITOR, OR INJURY TO PERSONNEL.
9. Disconnect the cables from the left side of the monitor chassis.
10. Press the slide rail buttons and remove monitor.
11. Replace the monitor, and reconnect the cables.
12. Restore console power, and check the image monitor for proper operation.
13. If the Image Monitor display has vertical deformations:
a. Loosen the connector under the monitor.
b. Apply upward pressure, and slide the connector to the left or right to adjust the image
monitor’s vertical display.
13–4–18 46–317878G1
FRU 1
Console
Intercom Pot Assembly, OC
310

pan.
6. Hold the bezel with one hand while you disconnect the harness wires to the Pot
Assembly.
7. Install new pot assembly.
8. Reassemble console.
13–4–19 46–264508G1
FRU 1
Console
IP Keypad Bd
pan.
4. To replace the IP Keypad:
a. Remove J1 to J6 from the board.
b. Remove ground wire from terminal J7.
c. Remove 6 screws (item 25849) to remove board.
5. To replace the 18 Button (IP/View) Rubber Keypad:
a. Remove IP Keypad Board.
chassis.
6. Replace IP Keypad Board or rubber keypad by reversing the previous steps.
13–4–20 46–320682G1
FRU 2
Console
Microphone OC
311

pan.
6. Hold the bezel with one hand; disconnect the harness wires to the microphone.
7. Install new microphone assembly.
13–4–21 46–282884P3
FRU 1
Console
Remote Board
13–4–22 46–301195G2
FRU 1
Console
Security Bd
3. Locate security board.
4. Remove screw that fastens ty–wrap to Security Board.
5. Remove cable connectors from J20 and J21 on Security Board.
6. Remove defective Security Board (6 screws).
7. Replace Security Board.
13–4–23 46–264510G1
FRU 1
Console
System Keypad Bd
pan.
a. Remove cable and ground wire from the board.
312
b. Remove 4 screws (item 25849) to remove board.

a. Remove System Keypad Board.
chassis.
6. Replace IP Keypad Board, or rubber keypad.
13–4–24 2119588
FRU 1
Console
Touch Screen Assembly

pan.
6. Remove the Emergency Stop button, to prevent damage when you
open the plasma.
Note: Console Model 2118256: perform steps 9. and 10.

All other Models: proceed directly to step 11.
a. Set cover aside.
313
a. Set cover aside.

11. Remove J4 from the Touch Screen Assembly.
Touch Screen Assembly –continued–
12. Remove 2 screws that fasten the circuit board support plate to the Touch Screen
Assembly.
13. Move the support plate (with circuit boards) away from the
Touch Screen Assembly.
Note: Do not remove circuit boards from the support plate. Also do not remove cables from the
circuit boards on the support plate.
14. Remove J7 from the Touch Screen Assembly.

15. Press down on the pivot shaft with your thumb until the spring compresses. Continue to
press the pivot shaft downward until you can remove it.
16. Remove the defective Touch Screen and replace it.
13–4–25 46–282936P1
FRU 1
Console
Trackball
pan.
4. Remove the defective trackball:
a. Disconnect one cable.
b. Remove 4 screws.
5. Install new trackball.
6. Reassemble the console
13–4–26 46–288872G1
FRU 1
Console
Video Relay Circuit Bd
2. Remove the signal cable strain relief (4 screws).
3. Disconnect video cables J13, J14 or J15, from the BNC connectors atop the Console I/F
Panel.
4. Remove the video relay 2–wire harness from its mating connector.
314
5. Remove the video relay 2–wire harness from the ty–rap which fastens it to the top of the
Console I/F Panel.
6. Remove 4 screws (item 18329) which fasten the video relay to the top of the Console I/F
Panel.
7. Remove the video relay assembly.
8. Unsolder the yellow and orange wires from the two terminals of the defective relay.
9. Unsolder the rectifier from the same two terminals of the defective relay.
Note: Pay attention to the wiring configuration and rectifier stripe orientation, before you
remove the relay assembly from the system. When you resolder the rectifier and wires
to the relay, restore them to their original configuration.
10. Solder the old rectifier across the two terminals of the new video relay.
11. Solder the old 2–wire harness to the terminals of the new video relay.
Prevent video relay failures. When you resolder the existing

CAUTION rectifier and wire harness to the replacement relay, make sure you
maintain the original configuration.
12. Attach the new video relay assembly to the console panel.
315
Notes:
316
13–5 Gantry
13–5–1 46–296701P1
FRU 1
Gantry
38V Filament Supply
1. Move table to lowest elevation.
2. Turn off facility power to PDU.
Use tag and lockout procedures.
3. Remove gantry side covers.
4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry.
5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod.
6. Remove scan window.
7. Open Front Cover.
8. Rotate gantry until Filament Power assembly reaches the 3 o’clock position.
9. Engage gantry rotational lock.
10. Loosen four (4) captive screws on Filament Power assembly cover, and remove cover.
11. Measure the voltage across the filter capacitor, to verify the bleeder resistor has
dissipated energy to a safe level.
12. Unsolder Black and White wires from terminals one (1) and two (2) on the transformer.
13. Disconnect Red lead from fuse.
14. Remove the screw from the negative terminal to disconnect the Black lead from the filter
capacitor.
15. Remove and save four (4) bolts fastening Filament Power Supply to gantry and, remove
supply.
16. Install new supply.
17. Reassemble Gantry.
Note: Input leads: Black lead to transformer terminal one (1); White lead to transformer
terminal two (2).
13–5–2 46–183027P129
FRU 1
Gantry
ADC Bd (Reduced Gain DAS)
GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS:
» Wear Safety glasses at all times.

» Use approved lifting methods.
» Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol.
317
SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS:
» ANTISTATIC HANDLING
If the boards are not in the DAS, or in a conductive bag, you must wear a wrist strap
when you handle DAS Boards. Never place boards on non–conductive surfaces, such
as white bench tops, plastic covered books or non–conductive plastic bags.
» CLEANLINESS
Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards, and will
cause the DAS to fail the drift spec. All testers must use white cotton gloves, or the
board extractor, when inserting or removing boards from DAS. Finger prints on the board
will cause trouble when humidity is high.
13–5–3 46–183027P111
FRU 1
Gantry
ADC Bd (Slot 51, 52, 53, & 54)

» CLEANLINESS
13–5–4 45561210
FRU 1
Gantry
Anode (Transformer Tank)
1. Position table to lowest elevation.
2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedure.
3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers.
4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry.
5. Open top cover and engage prop rod.
6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window.
7. Open front cover.
8. Rotate gantry until the Anode H.V. Supply reaches the 9 o’clock position.
318
10. Loosen two (2) wing handled screws holding STC Chassis in place.
11. Rotate card cage 90 degrees to lock into position.
12. Use spanner wrench to remove high voltage cable connector from H.V. Transformer
Tank.
» Use rags or paper toweling to wipe excess oil from H.V. cable connector and tank well.
13. Ground the end of the HV cable to the Gantry frame to ensure no voltage.
14. Disengage gantry rotational lock and rotate gantry until the Anode H.V. Supply reaches
the 3 o’clock position.
15. Remove cables J1 and J2 from measurement PWB on HV Transformer Tank.
16. Remove four screws fastening cover to inverter assembly, and remove cover.
17. Measure voltage on two large capacitors, to verify 0 volts.
18. Disconnect J1 connector from side of inverter assembly.
19. Disconnect J6 connector from gate driver PWB.
20. Verify no voltage on the 550VDC cable.
21. Carefully disconnect four fiber optic cables from gate driver board.
22. Disconnect 550VDC cable from capacitor PWB.
23. Cut Ty–raps from side plate of inverter, and remove all cables from the inverter
assembly.
24. Remove two (2) inverter output leads from H.V. Transformer Tank locations P1 and P2.
25. Remove the four (4) 3/8 bolts from inverter baseplate which fasten inverter assembly to H.V.
Transformer Tank.
26. Remove inverter assembly from gantry.
27. Attach hoist to boom arm in gantry.
28. Attach hoist to lifting bracket on bottom of Anode H.V. Transformer Tank.
Remove slack from hoist chain.
29. Using tool remove four (4) bolts which fasten transformer tank to rotating base.
30. Use hoist to lower transformer tank to floor.
31. Install new transformer tank.
Note: When installing four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts torque to 25 ft–lbs. (3.462 m–kg).
32. Before you install the HV Cable Connector, add 20 cc of dielectric oil to the HV
Connector well in the HV Transformer Tank.
33. Use the spanner wrench to securely tighten high voltage cable connector.
a Wipe excess oil with rags or paper towels.
b After you complete the installation, rotate the gantry to verify cable clearance, and to
drain excess oil from H.V. cable strain relief.
c Again wipe excess oil with rags or paper towels.
319
13–5–5 45435960
FRU 1
Gantry
Anode Inverter
3. Remove, and set aside, both gantry side covers.
5. Open top cover, and engage prop rod.
6. Remove, and set aside, Gantry scan window.
8. Rotate Gantry until the anode inverter reaches the 3:00 o’clock position.
11. Measure voltage on the two large capacitors to verify 0 volts.
14. Carefully disconnect four fiber optic cables from gate driver PWB.
15. Disconnect 550 VDC cable from capacitor PWB.
16. Cut Ty–raps from side plate of inverter.
Remove all cables from inverter assembly.
17. Remove two(2) inverter output leads from H.V. Transformer Tank locations P1 and P2.
18. Remove four (4) 3/8 bolts from inverter baseplate, which fastens inverter assembly to H.V.
Transformer Tank.
20. Install new inverter assembly.
Note: When you install the four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts, use Loctite 242 and torque the
bolts to 25 ft–lbs (3.462 m–kg).
13–5–6 46–297703P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Anode Inverter
» Use tag and lockout procedure.
320

8. Rotate Gantry until the anode inverter reaches the 3:00 o’clock position.
Remove all cables from inverter assembly.
17. Remove two(2) inverter output leads from H.V. Transformer Tank locations P1 and P2.
18. Remove four (4) 3/8 bolts from inverter baseplate, which fastens inverter assembly to
H.V. Transformer Tank.
20. Install new inverter assembly.
Note: When you install the four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts, use Loctite 242 and torque the
bolts to 25 ft–lbs (3.462 m–kg).
13–5–7 45554264
FRU 1
Gantry
Anode Transformer Tank Measurement Bd (4554264 or 2100553)
Use tag and lock–out procedures.
5. Lift top cover, and engage prop rod.
6. Remove Scan window.
8. Rotate Measurement Board to 3:00 position.
9. Unplug connectors J1, J2, J5, and J6
10. Remove 6 screws and washers that fasten measurement board to High Voltage Supply.
11. Carefully pry measurement board off High Voltage Tank.
12. Replace Measurement Board.
321
Note: Carefully align connector pins from Interface Measurement Board to Round Interface
Board on High Voltage Supply.
13–5–8 46–297875P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Axial Brake
2. Turn off all three switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry.
5. Open rear cover.
6. Engage Manual Indexer Pin Lock to prevent gantry rotation.
7. Disconnect electrical connection to Axial Brake.
8. Remove, and keep, three set screws on aluminum hex nut, on end of brake shaft.
9. Remove hex nut and key.
10. Remove four bolts holding brake to torque plate.
11. Remove brake.
12. Mount replacement brake onto torque plate.
13. Restore power to energize the brake before you fasten the hex nut to the brake shaft and
aperture plate:
a Turn on ONLY the gantry 120VAC on the status control box, on the right side of
gantry.
b Once the brake energize, align the aperture plate with the hex nut on the brake shaft.
14. Insert key.
15. Adjust the hex nut until the dimension from the outer surface of the brake to the outer
surface of the hex nut equals 0.370 ± 0.010 inches.
16. Sparingly apply 242 Loctite to the three set screws, and torque them to 25–30 in–lbs.
(0.288 m–kg).
13–5–9 46–264806G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Axial Control Bd
3. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on the right side of the gantry.
4. Remove left Side Cover.
5. Loosen 2 screws that fasten the front cover to the STC.
6. Remove cover.
322
7. Loosen the two wingnuts on the STC Chassis, and rotate the STC Chassis 90 degrees,
then lock it into position.
Note: Wear grounded wrist strap when you remove the circuit boards.
8. Remove the BNC Connector from front of Axial Control PWB.

9. Use the extractors to remove the defective PWB.
10. Install new Axial Control PWB.
Note: Use push–to–release tab to rotate the card cage back into position.
13–5–10 46–296158P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Axial Motor
Use tag and lockout procedure.
7. Open front and rear covers.
8. Remove, and set aside, Axial Brake.
9. Remove plastic cover from access hole in Aluminum Encoder fixturing plate.
10. Rotate gantry until screw of coupling aligns with access hole in Aluminum Encoder
fixturing plate, and loosen the screw.
11. Remove four (4) bolts that fasten the fixturing plate to the motor, and remove the
Encoder fixture plate assembly.
12. Disconnect the Axial Motor Encoder electrical connections.
13. Loosen screw on motor shaft side of coupling, and remove coupling.
14. Loosen three screws of Idler Tensioning assembly
15. Loosen the Tensioning Bolt until the spring unloads.
16. Remove, and set aside, electrical box cover on motor.
a Remove, and keep, all 3 cable conductors.
b Cut Ty–raps to free cable from motor.
17. Rotate the gantry to position the sagittal laser bracket near the axial motor.
18. Remove, and keep, the bottom two motor bolts.
19. Attach the hoist to the gantry:
a Fasten the hoist strap around the motor, centered on the housing.
b Remove all slack from the hoist strap.
20. Remove remaining two bolts securing motor.
323
21. Swing motor around pivot sector, and out of Gantry, then lower it to the floor.
22. Loosen two 3/8 inch set screws on Axial Motor drive pulley. and remove the pulley from
the motor shaft.
Reassembly:
1. Fasten Pulley to new Motor Shaft:

a Position pulley 0.285 inches from pilot on Motor Mounting flange.
b Sparingly apply 242 Loctite to set screws.
c Torque set screws to 25 ft–lbs. (.024 m–kg).
2. Use the hoist to move the new motor into position.
a Sparingly apply 242 Loctite to the four mounting bolts
b Torque the mounting bolts to 25 ft–lbs. (.024 m–kg)
3. Reinstall power cables
Fasten the cable to the motor with large Ty–raps.
4. Install Brake Assembly.
5. Replace Encoder/Fixturing Plate assembly.
a Install coupling to motor shaft. Use 242 Loctite on screw.
b Loosen screw on Encoder side of coupling.
c Slide encoder shaft into coupling, and align plate mounting holes.
d Torque bolts to 25 ft–lbs. (.024 m–kg)
6. Position the drive belt on, and around, the gantry gear ring, the two idler pulleys, and the drive
pulley on the axial drive motor.
a Perform preliminary idler assembly adjustment to snug up the belt.
b Rotate the Gantry by hand through three (3) complete revolutions.
c Retension drive belt: Turn the idler pulley adjustment screw until the spring has a
compressed length of 0.285 inches.
7. Torque tensioning adjustment plate bolts to 25 ft–lbs. (.024 m–kg)
8. Adjust the C–pulse:
a Turn on facility power to the PDU.
b Turn on the 120V power switch on the status control box on the fight side of the
Gantry.
Note: Both the STC and DAS power switches must be on.
c Rotate the Gantry until the tube reaches the 12 o’clock position.
d Slightly loosen the 3 synclamps that hold the axial motor encoder in place.
Note: Do not loosen the synclamps too much or you will have trouble maintaining the
encoder position when the clamps are tightened.
e Place a torpedo level on the machined surface beneath the collimator, and level the
gantry.
f Rotate the Axial Motor Encoder until the C–Pulse Light on the Status Control box
remains constantly lit.
324
g Tighten the 3 synclamps to fasten the encoder in the current position.

h Turn off the facility power to the PDU.
i Restore gantry scan window and covers.
j Restore system power and verify system operation.
13–5–11 46–296320G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Axial Motor Assembly
13–5–12 46–296854P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Axial Motor Encoder
4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box, on right side of gantry.
6. Remove, and set aside, Gantry Scan Window.
8. Remove plastic cover from access hole in aluminum encoder fixturing plate.
9. Rotate gantry to align the coupling screw with the access hole in the aluminum encoder
fixturing plate
10. Loosen the coupling screw.
11. Loosen and remove the three (3) synclamps that fasten the encoder to the aluminum
fixturing plate.
12. Remove the Encoder from fixturing plate.
13. Disconnect the Encoder electrical connection.
14. Replace and assemble the Encoder.
b Turn on the 120V power switch on the status control box on the fight side of the
Gantry.
Note: Do NOT loosen synclamps too much, or you will have trouble maintaining the encoder
position when you tighten the synclamps.
325
gantry.
13–5–13 46–296157P1
FRU 2
Gantry
Axial Motor Pulley
13–5–14 46–186462G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Azimuth Circuit Bd
4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box, on right side of Gantry.
8. Open rear Cover.
9. Rotate gantry until the tube reaches the 12 o’clock position.
10. Remove the two screws that fasten the PWB cover to the right side of the upper front
main bearing frame.
11. Remove the PWB cover.
12. Remove the left side slip ring cover (as viewed from rear facing forward).
Note: Wear grounded wrist strap until you complete step 17.
13. Disconnect cable from J1 on circuit board.

14. From the rear of the gantry:
a Remove the two (2) screws that fasten the Board mounting bracket to the main
bearing frame.
b Remove the assembly from the gantry.
15. Remove the three (3) screws that fasten the PWB to the bracket, and remove the PWB.
16. Install the new PWB.
17. Adjust PWB– center flag in the optical detector slot on the PWB.
a Adjust flag depth to 0.1 inches 0.02 in. from the bottom of the slot in the optical
detector.
b Radially center the flag between the slot openings.
326
13–5–15 46–264802G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Backplane, STC
3. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box,
on the right side of the gantry.
» Use tag and lockout procedures.
7. Remove cover.
9. Remove the BNC Connector from front of Axial Control PWB.

10. Use the extractors to remove the PWB.
11. Use the extractors to remove the SCOM PWB.
12. Remove the CPU PWB:
a Loosen the two (2) captive screws in the front bezel.
b Use the extractors to remove the CPU PWB from the card cage.
c Store all circuit boards in static bags.
13. Remove J4 connector from the Backplane inside the card cage.
14. Press release tab and rotate card cage into its retracted position.
a Loosen 2 screws that fasten the rear cover to the STC.
b Remove cover.
15. Remove J5 and J6 BNC Connector from Backplane.
16. Remove three 96–pin connectors from Backplane.
17. Remove the Ground Strap between the backplane and chassis.
18. Remove the two screws from the bottom of the card cage, that fasten the harness
bracket to the chassis.
19. Use a short screwdriver to remove the eight (8) 6–32 screws that fasten the Backplane to
the card cage.
20. Remove the Backplane PWB from the STC assembly.
21. Remove the two (2) terminator assemblies from the old Backplane.
22. Transfer the two (2) terminator assemblies to the new Backplane.
23. Install the new backplane.
327
13–5–16 46–183027P112
FRU 1
Gantry
Backplane–Left, EDAS
13–5–17 46–183027P94
FRU 1
Gantry
Backplane–Right, EDAS
13–5–18 46–296564G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Base Harness

13–5–19 46–296948G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Cable, AC Power

13–5–20 46–183027P104
FRU 1
Gantry
Cable, Analog

328
13–5–21 46–296943G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Cable, Anode AC Power

13–5–22 46–296947G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Cable, Axial Drive

13–5–23 46–296942G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Cable, Cathode AC Power

13–5–24 46–296949G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Cable, DC Power

329
13–5–25 46–183027P103
FRU 1
Gantry
Cable, Digital, EDAS

13–5–26 46–266838G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Cable, Ribbon, EDAS

13–5–27 46–183027P89
FRU 1
Gantry
Cal/Aux Bd

» Follow and use approved lifting methods.
» CLEANLINESS
330
13–5–28 53214P40
FRU N
Gantry
Capacitor, Inverter
13–5–29 45561211
FRU 1
Gantry
Cathode (Transformer Tank)
8. Rotate gantry until the Cathode HV transformer tank reaches the 3 o’clock position.
10. Verify 550 VDC or 120 VAC is not present.
11. Use the spanner wrench to remove the high voltage cable connector from the high
voltage transformer tank.
a Ground the ends of the H.V. cable to the Gantry frame, to ensure no voltage exists at
the end of the cable.
b Use rags or paper towels to wipe excess oil from the High Voltage Cable Connector
and tank well.
12. Remove cables J1, J2 and J6 from the measurement PWB.
13. Remove four screws fastening the cover to the inverter assembly
Remove cover.
17. Carefully disconnect four fiber optic cables from gate driver board.
18. Verify 550 VDC or 120 VAC is not present.
19. Disconnect 550VDC cable from capacitor PWB.
21. Remove all cables from the inverter assembly
23. Remove the four (4) 3/8 bolts from the inverter baseplate, that fasten the inverter
assembly to the H.V. Transformer Tank.
24. Remove the inverter assembly from the gantry:
331
a Attach the hoist to the boom arm in the gantry.

b Attach the hoist lifting chain to the eyebolt on the transformer tank.
c Remove slack from the hoist chain.
25. Remove the four (4) bolts which fasten transformer tank to the rotating base.
26. Use the hoist to lower the transformer tank to the floor.
27. Install the new transformer tank.
Note: Install four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts, and torque to 25 ft–lbs (3.462 m–kg).
28. Before you install the HV Cable Connector, add 20 cc of dielectric oil to the HV
Connector well in the HV Transformer Tank.
a Use the spanner wrench to securely tighten the cable connector.
b Wipe excess oil with rags or paper towels.
c After you complete the installation, rotate the gantry to verify cable clearance, and to
drain excess oil from H.V. cable strain relief.
d Again wipe excess oil with rags or toweling.
13–5–30 45435962
FRU 1
Gantry
Cathode Inverter
8. Rotate Gantry until the cathode inverter reaches the 3:00 o’clock position.
16. Cut Ty–raps from the side plate of the inverter.
17. Remove all cables from the inverter assembly.
332
19. Remove the four (4) 3/8 bolts from the inverter baseplate that fastens the inverter assembly
to the H.V. Transformer Tank.
20. Remove defective inverter assembly from the gantry.
21. Install the new inverter assembly.
Note: Install four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts, use Loctite 242 and torque to 25 ft–lbs (3.462 m–kg).
13–5–31 46–297703P2
FRU 1
Gantry
Cathode Inverter
8. Rotate Gantry until the cathode inverter reaches the 3:00 o’clock position.
16. Cut Ty–raps from the side plate of the inverter.
17. Remove all cables from the inverter assembly.
19. Remove the four (4) 3/8 bolts from the inverter baseplate that fastens the inverter
assembly to the H.V. Transformer Tank.
20. Remove defective inverter assembly from the gantry.
21. Install the new inverter assembly.
Note: Install four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts, use Loctite 242 and torque to 25 ft–lbs (3.462 m–kg).
333
13–5–32 45554264 – 2100553

FRU 1
Gantry
Cathode Transformer Tank Measurement Bd
Use tag and lock–out procedures.
8. Rotate Measurement Board to the 3:00 position.
9. Unplug connectors J1, J2, J5, and J6
10. Remove 6 screws and washers that fasten the Measurement board to the High Voltage
Supply.
11. Carefully pry the Measurement board off the High Voltage Tank.
12. Replace Measurement Board.
Note: Carefully align the connector pins from Interface Measurement Board to the round
Interface Board on High Voltage Supply.
13–5–33 46–296300G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Collimator Assembly
The 46–296300G5 collimator replaces the G4 version in forward production.
» The system requires 1.6, 2.5 or ZE software to support the G5 collimator operation.
» The Calibration procedures remain the same, but the presence of the SmartBeam filter
increases the required number of scans per kV. The system automatically adjusts the
screens to show the correct number of scans.
TABLE 13–4
HSA COLLIMATOR HISTORY
Model Number Comments

46–296300G1 Original HiSpeed Advantage Collimator
46–296300G2 Aperture modified to reduce x–ray scatter; backwards compatible with G1
46–296300G3 EMC compatible; superfluous parts removed from collimator assembly;
backwards compatible with G1 and G2
46–296300G4 More durable Aluminum Carbon (AlC) SmartBeam filter replaces Teflon filter
in collimator; backwards compatible with G1, G2 and G3 collimators
46–296300G5 New filter drive mechanism, higher torque aperture stepping motor
334

Use tag and lock–out procedure.
3. Remove, and set aside, gantry side covers.
4. Turn off all three switches on status control box, on right side of Gantry.
5. Lift Top Cover, and engage prop rod.
8. Rotate Gantry until the Collimator reaches the 6 o’clock position.
9. Disconnect the electrical connections to the Collimator.
a Disconnect Connectors J2, J3, and J4 at OBC.
b Disconnect the J1 harness from left side of Collimator.
10. Remove, and keep, the two nuts from the adjustment bracket, located on the right side of
the collimator. Remove hardware.
11. Remove, and keep, the four (4) 1/4–20 bolts, washers, and lock washers that fasten the
collimator in place.
12. The Collimator weighs 42lbs (19kgs). Take care when you remove it.
13. Replace Collimator.
14. Collimator Characterization:
a Display the Applications menu.
b Touch |Utilities|.
c Touch |CT Tools|.
d Touch |Mechanical Characterization|.
e Touch |Collimator Data|.
f Compare the collimator characterization values on the plasma screen to the values
listed on the collimator characterization label.
g IF the values don’t match:
» Type/enter the values listed on the collimator characterization label
» Touch |Update Table|, and wait for the system to display a “successful
completion” message.
Align collimator:
1. Verify the table has been withdrawn from the tube and the detector field of view. Nothing
should obstruct the attenuation of the X–Ray beam to detector window.
2. Available functions for CBF and SAG alignment:
» Default CBF Scan (Also used for SAG calculation)
» List/Select DD Files
» Store DD Result File
3. Results display for CBF and SAG:
» Success of failure of scan performed.
» Collimator adjustment recommendations (if required).
» SAG measurement value.
335
4. Display the tube alignment screen, and select the following softkeys to perform a CBF
and SAG scan/calculation:
» Touch |CBF| and |SAG|
» Touch |CBF Scan| (Push scan enable when lit)
Note: The last ISO Air.DD filename on the CBF and SAG screen becomes the default isocal
during CBF and SAG calculation. The CBF and SAG screen also displays the average
of the small and large spot isocenter value. Select the Large Air ISO Air CAL.
5. Upon completion of the scan, the system calculates and displays the SAG value, and the
average centroid value for the CBF, along with any collimator movement
recommendations
6. If the Calculated CBF values fail to meet the 373.75 0.2 specification, adjust the
collimator by the amount displayed on the CRT:
a Wait 5 minutes between exposures.
b Mount the gauge and its nonmagnetic holding fixture to the special mounting bracket
on the collimator.
c Zero out the gauge.
d Loosen the four collimator mounting bolts, located in the four slotted holes on the
collimator.
e Adjust the 3/4 inch bolt (located at the end of the collimator) to move the collimator
right or left by the required amount. The CRT displays CBF adjustments in an up and
down direction format:
» UP= Move Collimator to the right, and
» DOWN = Move collimator to the left.
f Bolt down the collimator and torque the four lock bolts to 5 0.5 ft. lbs. (120 12 in.
lbs).
g Repeat the CBF scan and collimator adjustment until the calculated CBF values
meet the 373.75 0.2 specification
h Remove the gauge and holding fixture from the Gantry.
i Record the CBF and SAG values on the data sheet.
13–5–34 46–288856G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Collimator Bd
1. Remove, and set aside, the right gantry side covers.
2. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box.
3. Rotate the Gantry until the OBC reaches the 3 o’clock position.
4. Engage rotational lock.
5. Put on grounding wrist strap.
6. Loosen the 8 captive screws, and remove OBC Front Cover.
7. Rotate the ejectors, and remove the defective board from the card cage.
8. Place the board in a Static Bag.
336
9. Install the new board.

13–5–35 46–321276G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Collimator Bd
13–5–36 46–321276G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Collimator II Bd
13–5–37 46–251198P37
FRU 1
Gantry
Collimator Power Supply
2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures.
337

10. Loosen four (4) capture screws on Filament Power assembly cover.
11. Remove cover.
12. Unsolder Black and White leads from terminals one (1), and (2), on the Power Supply
Transformer.
13. Unsolder Red and Black leads from (+) and (–) power supply output terminals.
14. Remove and save four (4) screws mounting collimator power supply to gantry.
15. Install new supply.
Note: Input leads:
Black to transformer terminal one (1)

White to transformer terminal two (2)
Output leads:
Red to PWB terminal (+) OUT
Black to PWB terminal (–) OUT
16. Collimator P.S. output checks:
a Connect positive voltmeter lead to +OUT terminal on power supply.
b Connect negative voltmeter lead to –OUT terminal on power supply.
c Energize 24hr AC Pwr on Gantry.
d Turn voltage adjustment pot to adjust the output voltage to 39.5 .5 VDC.
e Remove power from Gantry (tag and lockout procedures).
13–5–38 46–296885P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Communication Power Supply
7. Open rear gantry cover.
Note: Pay attention to the power supply configuration before you remove the connectors and
leads from the assembly. Reassemble with the same configuration.
8. Remove 25 pin sub D connector from Intercom PWB.
338
9. Remove two AC leads from line filter. (Note location of each lead.)
10. Remove DC connector (J3) from assembly.
11. Remove four (4) screws that fasten the assembly to the gantry
12. Remove assembly from the gantry.
13. Remove three (3) connectors from power supply. (Note locations.)
14. Remove four (4) screws that fasten the power supply to the bracket.
15. Remove the defective supply.
16. Install new power supply.
17. Communication P.S. output check:
a Connect positive voltmeter lead to pin 1 of J3.
b Connect negative voltmeter lead to pin 2 of J3.
c Energize Gantry 24hr AC power.
d Turn the voltage adjustment pot to adjust the output voltage to read 12.0 0.25
VDC.
13–5–39 46–296209P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Counterbalancing Gas Spring
Note: Due to alignment and dimensional variations, you may have to remove the Gantry Front
cover in order to replace a Gantry Gas Spring. Although the front cover assembly
weighs less than 200 lbs, the task requires three people for a short period of time.

3. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box, on right side of gantry.
5. Engage Indexer Pin, and lock gantry
6. On the right side of the gantry:
a Remove the two (2) flat head screws that fasten the spacer block to the Base’s hard
stop.
b Leave the spacer sitting in position for the time being.
7. Tilt the gantry until the front stop on the pivot sector touches the loose spacer block left in
position on the Base, as described in step 6.
8. Stop tilting, and remove the spacer block.
System specifications require the gantry to tilt a minimum of

CAUTION 30.25 degrees. The gantry meets this requirement with the spacer
block in position. When you remove the spacer block, the gantry
can tilt forward more than 30.25 degrees. HOWEVER, when you
remove the spacer block, the gas springs should prevent the gantry
hardstops from meeting. DO NOT force the gantry hard stops to
meet, or you may damage and rupture the gas springs.
339
9. As you continue to tilt, remember to monitor Gas Spring Length and watch out for Front
Cover Interference:
a Gas Spring Length – Wiggle both gas springs as the two hard stops approach each
other. Stop when one of the gas springs feels unloaded reaches full extension.
» IMPORTANT: Monitor both gas springs to ensure they don’t extend past their
fully extended length.
b Front Cover interference – Due to dimensional variation in the Front Cover assembly,
the Front Cover and/or Front Cover hinge doors may come in contact with the Gantry
Base before you can tilt the Gantry far enough to exchange a gas spring. Monitor the
relationship between the front fiberglass covers and the Gantry Base (on both sides
of the Gantry) while you tilt the Gantry. If interference occurs, STOP TILTING.
10. If you do NOT encounter interference, proceed to step 13.
11. IF you encounter interference:
a Return gantry to an upright position (zero degrees of tilt)
b Follow the Remove Front Cover procedure on page 340.
12. Remove Front Cover:
a Return gantry to zero degrees of tilt.
b Lift top cover, and engage prop rod.
c Open front cover.
d Disconnect the electrical connection near the top hinge, on the left side of the gantry.
e Remove the Front Cover: (requires three people)
» Two people lift and hold the front cover.
» The third person removes the two hinge pins on the left side of the gantry.
f Place the front cover horizontally on a clean protected surface.
» Spread a blanket, or other protective covering on the floor.
» Take care not to scratch the surface of the cover.
g Disengage the top cover prop rod and gently lower the top cover down onto the
gantry.
» DO NOT ROTATE THE GANTRY WITH THE TOP COVER PROPPED OPEN. If
you leave the top cover propped open, it may fall rearward when you tilt the
Gantry.
h Repeat steps 7. to 9.
13. Remove the two (2) retaining clips from the ends of the gas spring that has reached full
extension – even if it you do not plan to replace it.
Note: Remove the retaining clips before you remove the gas spring.
14. Grasp the gas spring near the top end fitting, and firmly pull away from the gantry. Once
you free the top end fitting, continue pulling to free the bottom end fitting.
15. If you need to remove the second gas spring, continue to tilt the gantry until the second
gas spring reaches full extension.
a Remove the two (2) retaining clips from the ends of the gas spring.
b Grasp the gas spring near the top end fitting, and firmly pull the top and bottom ends
away from the gantry.
16. Clean and inspect the ball studs.
340
a Remove and replace worn or damaged ball studs.

b Use Loctite 242 on the replacement ball stud(s), and torque to 40 ft–lbs. ( 0.0384
m–kg)
17. Inspect the new gas spring(s), and tighten the end fittings, if necessary.
Note: If you removed both gas springs, replace the first gas spring on the side with the greatest
distance between ball studs. Then, tilt toward zero degrees until the second gas spring
fits onto the other two ball studs.
18. Tilt the gantry until the gas spring fits onto the two (2) ball studs.
a Install the gas spring in the rod down/tube up position.
b Firmly press the top and bottom end fitting around its ball stud.
c Replace the retaining clip on each end fitting, taking care to position the clip through
the opening in each end fitting.
19. Verify system meets the 30.25 tilt requirement with the new gas spring(s):
a Try to insert the spacer block between the base and pivot sector hardstops.
b Acceptable: If you CANNOT insert the spacer block between the two hardstops,
then the gas spring installation length is ACCEPTABLE.
c Unacceptable: If you CAN insert the spacer block, add a spacer.
» increase the gas spring length with a flat washer.
» Washer: P/N 1000904P489 – 0.328 ID/ 0.500 OD/ 0.062 Thk
» Remove one end fitting and install one flat washer, as a spacer.
» Apply Loctite 242 and tighten the end fitting.
» Adjust the tilt and install the gas spring.
» Again, use the spacer block to test tilt capability.
20. After you install the new gas spring(s):
a Return the gantry to the zero degree tilt position, as indicated by the tilt indicator
bracket, on the right side of the Gantry.
b Use the two (2) flat head screws to refasten the spacer block to the Base hard stop.
21. If you removed the Front Cover:
a Lift the Top Cover, and engage the prop rod
b Replace Front Cover, and reconnect the electrical connection
c Adjust/align Front Cover
d Lower Top Cover
22. Check Gantry tilt with new gas spring(s):
a Remember to CLOSE THE TOP COVER, if you propped it open to replace the Front
Cover.
b Tilt the gantry to +30 degrees and –30 degrees, as indicated by the display monitor
located on top of the Front Cover.
341
13–5–40 46–288858G1
FRU 1
Gantry
CTVRC Control Bd
13–5–41 45435961
FRU 1
Gantry
CTVRC Power Module
10. Loosen four (4) captive screws on Filament Power assembly cover.
11. Remove cover.
12. Measure voltage across filter capacitor to verify the bleeder resistor has dissipated
energy to a safe level.
13. Remove 550 Volt leads from CTVRC control board.
14. Remove 2 Feedback connectors (J3, J9) from Gate Driver/Filter Board.
15. Remove 120 Volt AC connector (J6) from Board.
16. Disconnect Stator Cable connector from X–Ray Tube (J10).
17. Remove hardware that fastens support bracket to back of CTVRC base.
18. Remove, and keep 4 bolts, that fasten CTVRC to Filament Power assembly.
19. Remove and replace CTVRC.
342
13–5–42 46–136343P12
FRU 1
Gantry
DAS Power Switch
4. Rotate gantry until the OBC reaches the 3 o’clock position.
6. Loosen four (4) captive screws on the DAS Power Supply cover.
8. Remove two (2) leads from DAS power supply switch.
9. Remove mounting hardware from switch.
10. Remove switch from base of DAS power supply assembly.
11. Install new switch.
13–5–43 46–251198P30
FRU 1
Gantry
DC Power Supply (DAS), 15V
8. Rotate Gantry until the OBC reaches the 3:00 position.
Note: Note Location of Leads connected to Power Supply.
11. Unsolder Leads from Power Supply.

12. Remove 4 standoffs that fasten the Power Supply to DAS the assembly.
13. Replace Power Supply.
14. DAS P.S. output check:
a Connect positive voltmeter lead to +OUT terminal.
b Connect negative voltmeter lead to –OUT terminal.
343

d Turn the voltage adjustment pot for a voltage output
between 15.0 and 15.25 VDC.
13–5–44 46–251198P26
FRU 1
Gantry
DC Power Supply (DAS), 5V

Note: Note Location of Leads connected to Power Supply.
11. Unsolder Leads from Power Supply.

12. Remove 4 standoffs that fasten the Power Supply to DAS the assembly.
a Remove 2 standoffs from Power Supply near Regulator Board.
b Remove 2 screws and 2 nuts that fasten the Power Supply to the bracket near the
transformer.
13. Replace Power Supply.
14. DAS 5V Power Supply Output Check:
a Attach voltmeter to the DC output terminals of the DAS 5V supply.
b Turn ON the Gantry AC power at the A1 panel, and service switch box.
c Turn the voltage adjustment pot on the power supply regulator PWB for a voltage
output between 5.00 and 5.25 VDC.
d Remove power from Gantry (tag and lockout procedures).
344
13–5–45 46–297104P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Detector Heater Power Supply
10. Loosen four (4) captive screws on Filament Power Assembly cover.
11. Remove cover.
12. Measure voltage across filter capacitor to verify the bleeder resistor has dissipated
energy to a safe level.
13. Unsolder Black and White leads from transformer terminals 1 and 3.
14. Remove two screws that fasten the Red and Black leads to the filter capacitor.
15. Remove, and save, the four (4) screws that fasten the Detector Heater Power Supply to
the gantry.
Note: Input leads:

Black to transformer terminal one (1);
White to transformer terminal three (3.)
Output leads:
Red to Filter Capacitor Terminal marked (+);
Black to remaining capacitor terminal.
17. Detector Heater P.S. output check:

a Connect positive voltmeter lead to the red lead on output filter capacitor.
b Connect negative voltmeter lead to the black lead on output filter capacitor.
d The voltage reading should be 23–32 VDC.
18. Remove power from Gantry (tag and lockout procedures).
345
13–5–46 46–188067P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Detector Heater Relay
8. Rotate Gantry until the OBC reaches the 3 o’clock position.
10. Remove connectors J1 through J5 from control assembly.
11. Remove 4 screws that fasten the control assembly to the back of the OBC.
12. From the bottom of the control assembly, locate the detector heater relay, (normally
open) and remove the four (4) leads attached to
positions 1 through 4.
13. Remove two (2) nuts that fasten the relay to the chassis.
14. Remove defective relay, and install new relay.
13–5–47 46–297301G3
FRU 1
Gantry
Diode Laser, Bottom (12V)
NEVER STARE INTO THE LASER ALIGNMENT LIGHT BEAM.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION COULD RESULT IN
WARNING INJURY TO THE EYES.
1. Position the table to lowest elevation.


8. Disconnect the electrical connection to the defective laser assembly.
9. Remove the three (3) bolts holding the laser assembly in place.
10. Remove defective assembly, and install the new laser assembly.
346
11. Reconnect electrical connections.

12. Align Laser light.
13–5–48 46–327058G3
FRU 1
Gantry
Diode Laser, Bottom (5V)

13–5–49 46–297301G2
FRU 1
Gantry
Diode Laser, LS (12V)
WARNING
INJURY TO THE EYES.

347

13–5–50 46–327058G2
FRU 1
Gantry
Diode Laser, LS (5V)

13–5–51 46–297301G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Diode Laser, RS (12V)
348
13–5–52 46–327058G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Diode Laser, RS (5V)
WARNING
INJURY TO THE EYES.

13–5–53 46–198495P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Drive Belt
1. Position Table to lowest elevation.
349
» Use tag and lock out procedure.

7. Open Rear and Front Covers.
8. Rotate Gantry until the tube reaches the 12 o’clock position.
9. Lock Gantry into the 12 o’clock position.
10. Remove, and set aside, the Anode Inverter Cover. (Right side of Gantry)
11. Remove, and set aside, the Axial Brake assembly.
12. Loosen three 3/8–16 bolts on Idler assembly, to relieve drive belt tension.
13. Remove old belt by cutting or reversing step #14.
14. Replace belt: Place the belt around the tube, followed by the CTVRC, the cathode tank
and inverter, both DAS. Work the belt over the Anode inverter and tank, and finally, over
the OBC.
15. Replace Anode Inverter Cover.
16. Position the Drive Belt on the gear ring. Then, fold the belt, and pull it through the
opening in frame for the axial motor shaft. Loop the gear belt over the brake shaft and
around drive pulley.
17. Position the drive belt on and around the gear ring, the idler pulleys,
and the drive pulley.
18. Adjust the idler assembly until the belt feels snug.
19. Rotate Gantry by hand through 3 complete revolutions.
20. Make the final tension adjustment on the drive belt: Turn the Idler Pulley Adjustment
screw until the spring has a compressed length of 0.90 inches.
21. Replace the Axial Brake assembly.
b Turn on the 120V power switch on the status control box on the right side of the
gantry.
gantry.
23. Unlock Gantry.
350
13–5–54 46–296058G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Drive Belt Idler Pulley
2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lock–out procedures.
8. Relieve tension on drive belt by loosening three 3/8 –16 bolts.
9. Loosen three 3/8–16 bolts on Idler assembly, to relieve drive belt tension.
10. Stationary Pulley Removal Sequence:
a Remove Shoulder Belt.
b Replace pulley and shoulder belt.
c Apply Loctite 242 to bolt threads and torque to 25 ft–lbs. (0.024 m–kg)
Note: G3 model gantries have an access hole in the frame. In the event the pulley mounting
bolt set screw breaks, use this hole to gain access to the set screw. Although restrictive,
you may find it easier to extract the broken bolt this way, than by using an EZ out tool.
Tensioning Pulley Removal Sequence:
1. Loosen five 3/8–16 bolts, and remove Tensioning assembly from Gantry.
2. Loosen the internal hex screw from the back side of the Tensioning assembly, and
remove the Pulley from the Tensioning assembly.
3. Attach new Pulley to Tensioning assembly.
4. Reattach Tensioning assembly to Gantry.
5. Check the position of the Drive Belt on and around the Gear ring, the idler pulleys, and
the drive pulley on the axial drive motor.
6. Adjust the idler assembly until the belt feels snug.
7. Rotate the Gantry by hand through 3 complete revolutions.
8. Make the final tension adjustment on the drive belt: Turn the Idler Pulley Adjustment
screw until the spring has a compressed length of 0.285 inches.
b Turn on the 120V power switch on the status control box on the right side of the
gantry.
351
gantry.
13–5–55 46–136334P23
FRU 1
Gantry
F/C Interlock Switch
8. Disconnect the two electrical connections from the front cover
interlock limit switch.
9. Loosen nut, and remove limit switch.
10. Install the new limit switch, and adjust the distance between the push roller and metal
support bracket to 0.94 inches.
11. Reconnect two (2) electrical connections:
» Black wire to N.O.
» Red wire to Comm.
13–5–56 46–220234P3
FRU 1
Gantry
Fan, OBC
352

10. Disconnect Power Cord from Fan.
11. Remove and keep, 4 screws that fasten Fan and Grill in place.
12. Transfer grill to new fan, if necessary, and install new Fan.
13–5–57 46–220234P3
FRU 1
Gantry
Fan, STC
2. Remove, and set aside, Left Side Cover.
3. Loosen 2 wing nuts that fasten the card cage in place.
4. Swing the card cage 90 degrees, to the fully open position.
5. Unplug power cable from fan.
6. Remove 4 screws that fasten fan to card cage.
7. Remove fan and grill from card cage.
8. Install the new fan with old grill.
Note: Use push–to–release tab to rotate card cage back into place.
13–5–58 46–183027P120
FRU 1
Gantry
Filter Bd

ANTISTATIC HANDLING
If the boards are not in the DAS, or in a conductive bag, you must wear a wrist strap when
you handle DAS Boards. Never place boards on non–conductive surfaces, such as white
bench tops, plastic covered books or non–conductive plastic bags.
CLEANLINESS
353
cause the DAS to fail the drift spec. All testers must use white cotton gloves, or the board
extractor, when inserting or removing boards from DAS. Finger prints on the board will cause
trouble when humidity is high.
13–5–59 46–183027P128
FRU 1
Gantry
Filter Bd (Reduced Gain DAS)
Wear Safety glasses at all times.
Use approved lifting methods.
Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol.
ANTISTATIC HANDLING
CLEANLINESS
13–5–60 46–297335P2
FRU 1
Gantry
Filter, Pwr L, OBC
3. Remove, and set aside, scan window.
4. Lift Top Cover, and engage prop rod.
5. Turn off Axial Drive Switch.
6. Remove Front Cover.
8. Locate the Line Filter, attached to the OBC assembly, between the X– Ray Tube and
OBC Assemblies.
Note: Pay attention to the wire locations on the Line Filter.
354
9. Verify the wires attached to the line filter have no voltage.

10. Disconnect 4 leads from Line Filter.
11. Remove, and keep, 2 screws that fasten the Line Filter to OBC assembly.
CAUTION Do not connect any leads to Ground Terminal on Line Filter.
12. Replace Line Filter.

13–5–61 46–297335P2
FRU 1
Gantry
Filter, Pwr L, STC
4. Remove cover.
Note: Pay attention to the wire locations on the Line Filter on the right side of the STC Chassis.
6. Remove leads from line filter.

7. Remove two (2) 8–32 screws that fasten the line filter to STC Chassis.
8. Remove the defective filter.
9. Install new filter.
Note: Use push–to–release tab to rotate card cage back into position
13–5–62 46–241601G2
FRU 1
Gantry
Flex CT Assembly
4. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box, on right side of Gantry.
355

8. Rotate Gantry until tube reaches the 9:00 position, and lock into position.

grounding point on the chassis before you continue.
9. Remove DAS and detector covers from Gantry (4 pcs).

10. Locate the defective flex circuits.
Note: Pay attention to the connector locations for each flex circuit.
11. Take care when you remove the flex circuit from the detector:
a Pull the flex circuit connector from the pin header on back of the detector.
b Remove the other end of the flex circuit connector from the DAS circuit card, and
slide it out of the flex guide.
12. Replace defective flex circuit.
13–5–63 46–288938G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Front Cover Mic Bd
13–5–64 46–297488P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Front Cover Microphone
8. Remove defective microphone:
a Locate the Front microphone interface PWB, inside the front cover, just below the
laser window:
b Loosen the retaining screws, and remove the red and black leads from the terminal
block.
c Remove (2) nuts from the two microphone mounting studs
d Remove the microphone by pulling the device straight out from the front side of the
front cover.
356
9. Install new microphone:

a Thread the red and black leads through the bottom mounting hole in the front cover.
b Position the red and black leads in the slotted cutout in the bottom mounting hole.
c Insert the two studs on the microphone into the two mounting holes in the front cover.
d Thread the red and black leads through the center hole on the microphone interface
PWB.
e Position the PWB over the two mounting studs on the inside of the cover, and install
the two mounting nuts.
f Connect the red lead to position 1 and the black lead to position 2 on the terminal
block.
13–5–65 46–170021P79
FRU 1
Gantry
Fuse (30A, 700V)
13–5–66 46–170021P52
FRU 1
Gantry
Fuse (3A, 120V)
10. Loosen four (4) captive screws on the Filament Power Assembly cover.
11. Remove cover.
12. Locate fuses on inside surface of filament power assembly.
13. Remove cap from fuse holder, and remove defective fuse.
14. Replace Fuse.
357
13–5–67 46–170021P52
FRU 1
Gantry
Fuse, Collimator
13–5–68 46–170021P30
FRU 1
Gantry
Fuse, DAS (2A, 350V)
9. Locate defective Fuse, and remove cap from fuseholder.
10. Replace Fuse.
13–5–69 46–170021P52
FRU 1
Gantry
Fuse, DAS (3A, 250V)
9. Locate defective Fuse, and remove cap from fuseholder.
10. Replace Fuse.
13–5–70 46–170021P52 46–170021P74

FRU 1
Gantry
Fuse, Detector Heater
358
11. Remove cover.
14. Replace Fuse.
13–5–71 46–170021P15, 46–170021P52

FRU 1
Gantry
Filament Power Assembly Fuse
11. Remove cover.
14. Replace Fuse.
359
13–5–72 46–170021P15
FRU 1
Gantry
Fuse, Filament Power Supply

11. Remove cover.
14. Replace Fuse.
13–5–73 46–170021P74
FRU 1
Gantry
Fuse, Tube Cooling
3. Remove, and set, aside both gantry side covers.
10. Remove the defective fuse from the fuse holder, located at the top of the control
assembly.
11. Replace fuse.
360
13–5–74 46–296868G1
FRU 2
Gantry
G1 Front Cover Assembly
13–5–75 46–296938G1
FRU 2
Gantry
G1 Left Side Cover Assembly
13–5–76 46–296898G1
FRU 2
Gantry
G1 Rear Cover Assembly
13–5–77 46–296937G1
FRU 2
Gantry
G1 Right Side Cover Assembly
13–5–78 46–327207G1
FRU 2
Gantry
G3 Front Cover Assembly
13–5–79 46–327212G1
FRU 2
Gantry
G3 Rear Cover Assembly
361
13–5–80 46–296341G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Gantry Display Assembly
13–5–80–1 Remove Gantry Display:

1. Remove the four 1/4x20 machine screws attached to the gantry module.
2. Disconnect the display cable.
3. Remove the gantry display from the support arms.
4. Remove the two nylon 8/32 x .500 machine screws attache to the cover plate, and
remove cover plate.
5. Remove the four 1/4x20 x 3.25 machine screws attached to the support arms and
standoffs, and remove the support arms and standoffs.
6. Remove the two cable clamps from the left support arm.
7. Remove two bearings, on the pin, from each support arm.
13–5–80–2 Installation:
1. Install two bearings on each pin, and install one pin on each support arm.
2. Attach two cable clamps to the left support arm.
3. Fasten the support arms and the standoffs to the Gantry with four 1/4x20 x 3.25 machine
screws.
4. Fasten the cover plate to the support arms with two nylon 8/32 x .500 machine screws.
5. Route, and connect, the display cable.
6. Check the display for firm seating, and attach the gantry display to the support arms.
7. Attach the Gantry module to the display assembly with four 1/4x20 x .75 machine
screws.
362
13–5–81 46–264958G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Gantry Display Daughterboard
13–5–82 46–264896G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Gantry Display Motherboard
13–5–83 45435967
FRU 3
Gantry
Gate Driver/Filter Bd
13–5–84 46–278120P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Gear Reducer
4. Turn off all three switches on the status control box, on right side of Gantry.
8. Install shipping brackets to prevent the gantry from tilting.
a Gantry must be at 0 degrees tilt to install brackets.
b Install three (3) bolts in each bracket.
9. Remove, and set aside, tilt motor.
10. Remove one (1) tilt chain adjusting bolt and washer.
11. Remove two (2) tilt chain locking bolts from the adjusting block.
12. Place the chain on the ground, and remove the chain from the drive pulley.
13. Remove, and keep, four (4) bolts that fasten the gear reducer to the gantry base.
14. Remove the Pot assembly set screw, on the output end of the gear box.
15. Slide the Pot assembly off the output shaft of the Gear Reducer Box.
16. Remove the Gearbox from the Gantry.
17. Remove the two set screws that fasten the drive pulley to the output shaft of the gear
reducer, and remove the drive pulley.
18. Fasten the old drive pulley to the output shaft of the new Gear Reducer.
a Position the gears toward the pulley.
b Apply 242 Loctite to the two set screws, and torque into place.
19. Position the new gear reducer on the gantry base:
363
a Place the chain around the drive pulley and the two (2) idler pulleys.
b Apply Loctite 242 to the two (2) bolts.
c Loosely attach the tilt chain adjustment block to the pivot sector with the two bolts.
20. Replace the tilt chain adjusting bolt and washer.Tighten chain tension to 5 1 lbs.
21. Tighten tilt chain locking bolts to 25 ft–lbs.
22. Replace Tilt Motor.
23. Loosely install set screw on output end of new gear reducer.
24. Slide Pot Assembly on output shaft of Gear box.
25. Position pot shaft into the end of the gear reducer output shaft.
26. Apply Loctite 242 to the set screw, and torque into place.
27. Remove, and set aside, Gantry shipping brackets.
28. Position Gantry to 0 degrees, to adjust potentiometer. Align Gantry with the tilt indicator
on the right side of Gantry Base.
13–5–85 46–297428P1
FRU 2
Gantry
Grounding Strap, Base

13–5–86 46–296377P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Heurikon Bd, OBC
1. Remove and set aside gantry side covers.
2. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box.
3. Rotate the Gantry until the OBC reaches 3 o’clock position.
6. Loosen 2 captive screws, and remove the OBC Front Cover.
7. Remove the ribbon cable from the serial port on front panel.
8. Remove board from slot A7 by loosening 2 retaining screws and rotating ejectors.
9. Place Board in Static Bag.
10. Install new board.
364
13–5–87 46–296377P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Heurikon Bd, STC
3. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box, on right side of the gantry.
4. Open Gantry Left Side Cover.
6. Remove cover.
8. Remove, and set aside, Scom Circuit Board.

9. Unscrew the top and bottom fasteners, then remove the board.
Note: Use push–to–release tab to rotate card cage back into position.
13–5–88 46–195120G16
FRU 1
Gantry
HV Anode Cable
10. On left side of the Gantry:
a Loosen the two wingnuts on the STC Chassis
b Rotate the STC Chassis 90 degrees, then lock it into position, to gain access to
Anode HV Transformer Tank
11. Place a rag around the Anode HV Cable connecter opening on the transformer tank.
12. Use the spanner wrench to loosen the Anode HV cable connector.
a Remove the cable from the HV transformer tank.
b Ground the end of the cable to the Gantry Frame to verify no voltage.
365
13. Wipe excess oil from HV cable connector, and out of the HV transformer tank connector
well, before you rotate the Gantry.
14. Rotate the Gantry until the tube reaches the 3:00 position.
15. Engage rotational lock
16. Use the spanner wrench to remove the Anode HV Cable connector from X–Ray tube HV
connector well.
17. Unscrew two cable clamps to remove Anode HV Cable from rotating base.
18. Cut all remaining ty–raps, and remove the cable from the Gantry.
19. Add 20 ml (0.7 oz.) of dielectric oil to the anode HV connector well of the X–Ray Tube.
20. Place a rag around the tube connector well, to absorb excess oil when you insert the
Anode cable.
21. Insert the Anode HV Cable connector into the Anode HV well of the X–Ray tube.
22. Tighten the nut with the spanner wrench.
23. Wipe excess oil from the tube.
24. Unlock, and rotate the Gantry, until the tube reaches the 12 o’clock position.
25. Lock Gantry in place.
26. Add 20 ml (0.7 oz) of dielectric oil to the well of the HV Anode transformer tank.
27. Place a rag around transformer tank connector well, to absorb excess oil when you insert
the Anode cable.
28. Insert the Anode HV cable connector into Anode HV transformer well.
30. Use the old screws and cable clamps to attach the new Anode cable to the rotating base.
31. Wipe excess oil from the transformer.
32. Use ty–raps to dress the cables, so a minimum loop exists on each end.
33. Tighten ty–raps on rotating base.
34. Wrap a rag or paper towel around both ends of the Anode HV cable and tape them into
place.
35. Unlock the Gantry.
36. Rotate the STC into its original position, and tighten down the two wing nuts to secure it
into place.
37. Rotate Gantry by hand through two complete revolutions. Check to make sure the Anode
cable does not catch on any stationary components during each revolution.
38. Remove the rags, and wipe up any excess dielectric oil from the HV Anode Cable ends.
39. Restore power to the Gantry.
40. Rotate the Gantry at a speed of 1 Revolution per second, for several revolutions.
41. Stop the gantry and shut down power.
43. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box, on the right side of Gantry.
44. Check the tube and transformer tank wells for oil leaks.
366
13–5–89 46–195120G16
FRU 1
Gantry
HV Cathode Cable
10. Place a rag around the Cathode HV Cable connecter opening on the transformer tank.
11. Use the spanner wrench to loosen the Cathode HV cable connector.
a Remove the cable from the HV transformer tank.
b Ground the end of the cable to the Gantry Frame to verify no voltage.
12. Wipe excess oil from HV cable connector, and out of the HV transformer tank connector
well, before you rotate the Gantry.
13. Rotate the Gantry until the tube reaches the 3:00 position.
14. Engage rotational lock
15. Use the spanner wrench to remove the Cathode HV Cable connector from X–Ray tube
HV connector well.
16. Unscrew the two cable clamps to remove Cathode HV Cable from the rotating base.
17. Cut all remaining ty–raps, and remove the cable from the Gantry.
18. Install new ty–raps (Qty 2) using existing screws.
Note: Note Leave ty–raps loose around cable until final adjustment.
19. Add 20 ml (0.7 oz.) of dielectric oil to the Cathode HV connector well of the X–Ray Tube.
20. Place a rag around the tube connector well, to absorb excess oil when you insert the
Cathode cable.
21. Insert the Cathode HV Cable connector into the Cathode HV well of the X–Ray tube.
23. Wipe excess oil from the tube.
24. Unlock, and rotate the Gantry, until the tube reaches the 12 o’clock position.
25. Lock Gantry in place.
26. Add 20 ml (0.7 oz) of dielectric oil to the well of the HV
Cathode transformer tank.
27. Place a rag around transformer tank connector well, to absorb excess oil when you insert
the Cathode cable.
28. Insert the Cathode HV cable connector into Cathode HV transformer well.
367

30. Use the old screws and cable clamps to attach the new Cathode cable to the rotating
base.
31. Wipe excess oil from the transformer.
32. Use ty–raps to dress the cables, so a minimum loop exists on each end.
33. Tighten ty–raps on rotating base.
34. Wrap a rag or paper towel around both ends of the Cathode HV cable and tape them into
place.
35. Unlock the Gantry.
36. Rotate Gantry by hand through two complete revolutions. Check to make sure the
Cathode cable does not catch on any stationary components during each revolution.
37. Remove the rags, and wipe up any excess dielectric oil from the HV Cathode Cable
ends.
38. Restore power to the Gantry.
39. Rotate the Gantry at a speed of 1 Revolution per second, for several revolutions.
40. Stop the gantry and shut down power.
42. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box, on the right side of Gantry.
43. Check the tube and transformer tank wells for oil leaks.
13–5–90 46–288512G1
FRU 1
Gantry
I/O Bd
6. Loosen the 8 captive screws, and remove the OBC Front Cover.
13–5–91 46–296516G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Indexer Assembly
368
13–5–92 46–288766G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Intercom Circuit Bd
7. Open rear gantry cover.
8. Remove 25 pin sub D connector from Intercom PWB.
Note: Pay attention to the configuration before you remove the connectors and leads from the
assembly. Reassemble with the same configuration.
9. Remove two AC leads from line filter.

10. Remove DC connector (J3) from Assembly.
11. Remove four (4) screws that fasten the assembly to the gantry.
12. Remove the intercom assembly from gantry
Note: Wear grounded wrist strap before starting the following procedures.
13. Remove the four (4) nuts that fasten the Intercom PWB cover to the bracket.
14. Remove the cover with the PWB from the assembly.
15. Remove four (4) screws that fasten the PWB to its cover, and remove PWB.
16. Install the new Intercom PWB.
13–5–93 54358P25
FRU 1
Gantry
Inverter Fuse (120VAC), Anode
2. Open Gantry
3. Rotate the Gantry until the Inverter reaches the 3 o’clock position
4. Unscrew the fuseholder cover.
5. Replace the Fuse and fuseholder cover.
369
13–5–94 54367P50
FRU 1
Gantry
Inverter Fuse (550VDC), Anode

2. Open Gantry
4. Loosen 4 screws, and remove the Inverter Cover
5. Verify Capacitor Voltage on C5 and C6 equals 0 VDC.
6. Remove 2 screws, 2 lockwashers and 2 flat washers that fasten the fuse to the brass
standoffs.
7. Replace the Fuse.
13–5–95 54358P18
FRU 1
Gantry
Inverter Fuse (600V), Anode

2. Open Gantry
13–5–96 54358P25
FRU 1
Gantry
Inverter Fuse (120VAC), Cathode
2. Open Gantry
370
13–5–97 54367P50
FRU 1
Gantry
Inverter Fuse (550VDC), Cathode
2. Open Gantry
4. Loosen 4 screws, and remove the Inverter Cover
5. Verify Capacitor Voltage on C5 and C6 equals 0 VDC.
6. Remove 2 screws, 2 lockwashers and 2 flat washers that fasten the fuse to the brass
standoffs.
7. Replace the Fuse.
13–5–98 54358P18
FRU 1
Gantry
Inverter Fuse (600V), Cathode
2. Open Gantry
13–5–99 46–321064G1
FRU 1
Gantry
kV Circuit Bd
371
13–5–100 46–321198G1
FRU 1
Gantry
kV Circuit Bd
13–5–101 46–196464P1
FRU 2
Gantry
Lead Weight
Use the Gantry Static Balance Procedure when you add or replace lead weights.
13–5–102 46–327202G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Left Side Cover Assembly
13–5–103 46–288886G1
FRU 1
Gantry
mA Circuit Bd
372
13–5–104 46–296263P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Micro Stepper Drive (Aperture)

9. Engage indexer pin lock to lock the Gantry in position.
10. Remove the 8 pin electrical connectors from the top and the bottom of the Aperture Micro
Stepper drive.
» Pull firmly in the Z–direction to remove the connectors.
11. Unfasten four 6–32 hex nuts, and remove the Micro Stepper Drive.
12. Replace the Micro Stepper Drive.
13–5–105 46–296080G1
FRU 2
Gantry
OBC Assembly
13–5–106 46–264660G1
FRU 1
Gantry
OBC Backplane
373
11. Rotate the ejectors and remove the Circuit Boards from slots A1 through A6.
12. Place Boards in Static Bag.
13. Remove, and keep, ribbon cable from the front of the CPU Board.
14. Loosen the 2 screws on the front plate of the CPU Board assembly. Remove the CPU
Board from slot A8, and place it in a static bag.
15. Remove ribbon cable, J9, from the OBC backplane, inside the Card Cage.
16. Rotate Gantry until the OBC reaches the 6:00 position. Disconnect 5 connectors, J1
through J5, attached to Control assembly.
17. Remove the J9 connector, that supplies AC Power to the OBC.
18. Remove the ty–raps that fasten the cables to control assembly brackets.
19. Remove 4 screws that fasten the control assembly bracket to the OBC and Casting.
20. Remove the control assembly and bracket from the Gantry.
21. Remove, and keep, 2 screws that fasten the Collimator Connector Bulk Head to the OBC
assembly.
22. Remove 8 Fiber Optic Link Connectors from OBC Backplane.
23. Remove DC Power Connector, J6, from OBC Backplane.
24. Remove 2 coaxial cables, J4 and J5, from OBC Backplane.
25. Remove Ground Strap between OBC Backplane and Chassis.
26. Remove 6 (six) 96 Position Connectors from J3 on slots A1 through A6 on OBC
Backplane.
27. Remove, and keep, 2 screws that fasten the Harness Ground Bracket to the OBC
Chassis.
28. Disconnect DAS DC Power Connector J
29. Remove Filament Power Connector J17 from OBC Backplane.
30. Use a short screw driver to remove 8 screws that fasten the OBC Backplane to the Card
Cage.
31. Remove Backplane.
32. Replace Backplane.
Note: Install Backplane and replace all 8 screws but do not tighten. Install Circuit Boards in A1
and A6 to align Backplane to Card Cage, then securely tighten 8 mounting screws.
CAUTION Carefully check connector locations before you install the

connectors.
13–5–107 46–297603G1
FRU 1
Gantry
OBC Thermistor
374
9. Loosen 4 captive screws on DAS PS Assembly, and remove cover.
10. Remove, and set aside, the Power Cord from the Fan.
11. Remove, and keep, 2 screws that fasten the cables to the fan housing.
12. Remove, and keep, 6 screws that fasten the fan housing to the OBC Chassis. Three
Screws are located in the base of the DAS PS Assembly. The remaining 3 screws are
located on the opposite side of the Card Cage.
13. Remove, and set aside, the Fan Housing.
14. Detach J8 Connector from OBC Chassis.
15. Unscrew Thermistor from OBC Chassis.
16. Replace Thermistor.
Take care to route the thermistor leads so the fan housing

CAUTION does not pinch leads.
13–5–108 46–296317P1
FRU 1
Gantry
OBC–STC Power Supply, OBC
8. Rotate gantry until the OBC reaches the 2 o’clock position.
10. Remove two (2) nuts that fasten the Z Bracket, near the center of the power supply, and
remove the bracket.
11. Verify no voltage exists on the leads connected to the power supplies.
12. Remove all leads from each end of the power supply.
13. Remove two (2) screws that fasten the power supply to the OBC.
375
14. Remove the defective supply.

a Make sure voltage selection jumper, located near AC input terminals, is in the 115
VAC Position.
b Take care to correctly reconnect the leads to the power supply.
13–5–109 46–296317P1
FRU 1
Gantry
OBC–STC Power Supply, STC
4. Remove cover.
6. Remove seven leads from DC output (bottom) of Power Supply.
7. Remove the small connector with the single black lead (J1) from the DC output area of
Power Supply (bottom).
8. Remove two (2) AC input leads from the Power Supply.
9. Remove two (2) nuts that fasten the power supply Z bracket.
10. Remove the bracket.
11. Remove two (2) screws that fasten the Power Supply to the front flange on the card
cage.
12. Remove the defective Power Supply.
13. Replace the Power Supply.
Note: Take care to correctly replace the power supply lead connections. Use push–to–release
tab to rotate card cage back into position.
13–5–110 46–297837G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Power Brush Block Assembly
4. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box, on right side of Gantry.
7. Open rear cover.
376
8. Remove the slip ring covers.
CAUTION Read the Handling and Removal of Slip Ring Brush Debris
Information on page 394 before you start this procedure.
9. The Gantry contains three (3) brush blocks: two for signal and one for power.
» Remove the stationary buffer board to access and remove either of the signal brush
blocks. Refer to the corresponding procedures for a detailed explanation.
» Remove the grounding strap from at the power brush block bracket before you
remove the power brush block.
» If you plan to replace the power brush block, remove the grounding strap from the
power brush block and the power brush block bracket.
10. Remove Brush Block:
a Remove two (2) of the four (4) bolts, one on the top of the block and one on the
bottom.
b With one hand, hold the brush block against the brackets, and remove the remaining
screws with the other hand.
c Remove brush block from the brackets.
11. Install Brush Block:
a Hold the Brush Block in position, and align the brush tips with the slip ring tracks.
b Compress the brush tip springs against the slip ring tracks, and hold the brush block
against the brackets.
c Install all four (4) screws, but do not tighten.
d Adjust the brush blocks to center the top and bottom of the brush tips.
e Tighten all four (4) screws to 22 ±3in–lbs. (0.254 ±0.035 m–kg)
12. Manually rotate Gantry while you check that the brush tips are centered between the
track barriers.
13–5–111 S/A Pwr Brush Asm 2238140–2, High 2257517, Low 2257520 Replacement
DANGER USE AND FOLLOW TAG AND LOCK OUT PROCEDURES.

7. Open rear cover.
377
Avoid Inhalation
CAUTION Read The Handling and Removal of Slip Ring Brush Debris before
you start this procedure.
a Remove the stationary buffer board or stationary terminator to access and remove
either of the signal brush blocks. Refer to the corresponding procedures for a
detailed explanation.
b Remove the grounding strap at the power brush block bracket before you remove the
power brush block
bottom.
11. Remove brush block from the brackets. (Skip step 12 if replacing entire assembly)
12. Remove and install replacement modules:
a Place brush block on a hard surface with the tips in the up position. There are five
high power modules and three low power modules.
b To remove a module, push the tab on the module out of the locking position. While
pushing the tab out of the locking slot, pull the module up. Only pull the module out 2
mm, or just enough to keep the tab from snapping back into the slot. Repeat this
procedure on the other side of the module.
378
c With the tabs on each side of the module out of the locking slot, pull the module
straight out of the brush block housing.
d Align the replacement module in slots and push into brush block housing until the
module tabs snap into the locking holes.
d Adjust the brush blocks up against the set screws on the bracket to center the top
and bottom of the brush tips on the ring.
e Tighten all four (4) screws to 22
track barriers.
379
13–5–112 46–183027P95
FRU 1
Gantry
Power Filter Assembly
13–5–113 46–183027P91
FRU 1
Gantry
Processor Bd, EDAS
Wear Safety glasses at all times.
Use approved lifting methods.
Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol.
ANTISTATIC HANDLING
CLEANLINESS
13–5–114 46–288308G1
FRU 1
Gantry
PWA Laser Control
4. Turn off all three switches on status control box, on right side of Gantry.
8. Rotate the OBC to the Gantry 3 o’clock position, and engage the gantry rotational lock.
9. Remove connectors J1 through J5 from the control assembly.
10. Remove 4 screws that fasten the control assembly to the back side of the OBC.
380
11. From the bottom of the control assembly:

a Locate the laser control PWB.
b Remove the 4 screws that fasten the PWB to the Control assembly.
12. Remove the J1 connector from the laser control PWB.
13. Remove defective laser control PWB.
14. Install new laser control PWB.
13–5–115 46–321058G1 46–264698G1 2253794

FRU 1
Gantry
PWA Rotating Buffer
Note: Three (3) types of buffer and terminator PWBs exist. Check the part numbers of the PWBs on
your system before ordering replacement parts.
Read the Handling and Removal of Slip Ring Brush Debris

CAUTION Information on page 394 before you start this procedure.

7. Open rear cover.
8. Wear grounded wrist strap.
9. Locate the rotating buffer PWB on the inside surface of the slip ring.
» The Buffer PWB has two coax cables connected to it.
10. Disconnect the two (2) coax cables connected to J1 and J2 on the Buffer PWB.
11. Remove the seven (7) 4–40 screws, and one (1) 1/4–20 ground screw, that fasten the
Buffer PWB to the slip ring.
12. Remove the Buffer PWB from Gantry.
13. Install the new Rotating Buffer PWB.
381
13–5–116 46–321054G1 46–264702G1 2238323

FRU 1
Gantry
PWA Rotating Terminator Board


7. Open rear cover.
9. Locate the rotating terminator PWB on the inside surface of the slip ring. The Terminator
PWB has no cables attached to it.
10. Remove the seven (7) 4–40 screws, and one (1) 1/4–20 ground screw, that fasten the
terminator PWB to the slip ring.
11. Remove the terminator PWB from Gantry.
12. Install the new rotating terminator PWB.
13–5–117 46–321056G1 46–264696G1 2253794

FRU 1
Gantry
PWA Stationary Buffer


382

7. Open rear cover.
8. Remove slip ring covers.
10. Disconnect three cables at connectors J1, J2 and J3.
11. Remove eight (8) 4–40 screws that fasten the Stationary Buffer PWB to the brush block
assembly.
12. Remove the Stationary Buffer PWB from the Gantry.
13. Install the new Stationary Buffer PWB.
13–5–118 46–321052G1 46–264700G1 2238323

FRU 1
Gantry
PWA Stationary Terminator


7. Open rear cover.
8. Remove slip ring covers.
10. Remove seven (7) 4–40 screws that fasten the terminator PWB to the brush block
assembly.
11. Remove the defective terminator PWB from Gantry.
12. Replace terminator PWB.
383
13–5–119 46–297474G1
FRU 1
Gantry
RCOM Bd
» Use tag and lock out procedures.
3. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box.
4. Rotate the OBC to the Gantry 3 o’clock position.
8. Rotate the ejectors to remove the defective board from its slot.
9. Place board in Static Bag.
10. Install new board.
13–5–120 46–229342P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Rear Cover Lamp
» Use tag and lock out procedures.
3. Turn off all 3 switches on the status Control box, on right side of Gantry.
4. Lift Top Cove,r and engage prop rod.
6. Open Rear Cover.
7. Locate the lamp, in the upper center portion of the rear cover.
8. Disconnect 2 wires leading to the Lamp.
9. Remove, and keep, the Retaining Ring from the inside of the Cover.
10. Replace the Lamp and the retaining ring.
13–5–121 46–288938G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Rear Cover Mic Bd
384
13–5–122 46–297488P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Rear Microphone
7. Open rear cover.
8. Locate Rear Microphone Interface PWB on the inside of the rear cover near the top of
the cone:
a Loosen the retaining screws, and remove the red and black leads from the terminal
block.
b Remove two (2) nuts from studs.
c Remove the microphone by pulling the device straight out from the outside of the
rear cover.
9. Install the new microphone:
a Thread the red and black leads through the bottom mounting hole in the rear cover,
and position them in the slotted cutout.
b Insert the two studs on the microphone into the two mounting holes in the rear cover.
c Thread the red and black leads through center hole on the microphone interface
PWB.
d Position the PWB over the two mounting studs on the inside of the cover, and fasten
it into place with the two mounting nuts.
e Connect the red lead to position 1 and the black lead to position 2 on the terminal
block.
13–5–123 46–297445P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Ribbon Cable, OBC
3. Turn off all three switches on status control box.
7. Loosen 8 screws, and remove the OBC Front Cover .
8. Remove Circuit Board from slot 6 on the OBC.
385
9. Place Board in Static Bag.

10. Use the ejectors to remove the Ribbon Cable connectors from the front of CPU card and
OBC Backplane.
11. Open the Ribbon Cable Clamp, located next to the CPU Card.
12. Replace the Ribbon Cable.
13–5–124 46–327201G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Right Side Cover Assembly
13–5–125 46–297291G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Rotating Harness (Use with 12V Laser)
13–5–126 2100664
FRU 2
Gantry
Rotating Harness (Use with 5V Laser)
13–5–127 46–321246G1
FRU 1
Gantry
RPSCOM Bd
6. Remove cover.

9. Install new SCOM board assembly.
386
13–5–128 46–327086G1
FRU 2
Gantry
RPSCOM to Gantry Bulkhead, 75 Ohms
Generic Cable Replacement Procedure

13–5–129 46–264832P1
FRU 1
Gantry
SCA–LAN Bd, STC
13–5–130 46–296993G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Scan Switch Assembly
2. Remove right side cover.
3. Disconnect main harness connectors, J1 and J2, from the back side of the scan switch
assembly.
4. Locate the lower screw of the scan switch assembly mounting flange, behind the bracket
containing the revolution counter and service switch connector.
a Carefully set the revolution counter assembly aside.
b Leave the revolution counter leads connected for later reassembly.
c Remove the upper screw from the scan switch assembly
d Remove the defective assembly from the gantry.
5. Install the new scan switch assembly.
Note: Before you turn on power, switch all the scan switch assembly switches to the OFF
Position.
387
13–5–131 2101967
FRU 1
Gantry
Scan Window
13–5–131–1 Remove Scan Window:

1. Grab the window at the top and pull firmly downward.
2. Continue to pull until the top of the scan window makes contact with the bottom portion of
the scan window. See Illustration 13–1.
3. Hold the top and bottom portions of the scan window together, grasp both sides of the
scan window, move them together and lightly pull upward, until you can free the window
from between the front and rear covers.
See Illustration 13–2
Opening in Gantry Covers
Scan Window
ILLUSTRATION 13–1 ILLUSTRATION 13–2

SCAN WINDOW IN POSITION REMOVE SCAN WINDOW
13–5–131–2 Install Scan Window:

1. Close the front and rear covers.
2. Deform the scan window, as shown in Illustration 13–3, and nest the scan window at the
bottom of the opening between the front and rear covers, (Illustration 13–4) with the
rivets in the 6 o’clock position.
3. After you complete the initial seating of scan window, let the window slowly unfold, and
work both sides of the window into position, starting at the bottom and finishing at the
top.
4. Make sure you position the window with the rivets at the 12 o’clock position, and the
mylar window slit at either the 3 or 9 o’clock position.
Scan Window Prior

To Installation ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
Front Cover Rear Cover
Position of Rivets at
6 O’clock Position
ILLUSTRATION 13–4
ILLUSTRATION 13–3 SCAN WINDOW NESTED BETWEEN
INSTALL SCAN WINDOW FRONT AND REAR COVERS
388
13–5–132 46–297475G1
FRU 1
Gantry
SCOM Bd
4. Remove cover.

7. Install the new SCOM board assembly.
13–5–133 46–296869G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Side Lens Assembly
13–5–134 46–297839G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Signal Brush Block

7. Open rear cover.
389
bottom.
d Adjust the brush blocks to center the top and bottom of the brush tips.
e Tighten all four (4) screws to 22 ±3in–lbs. (0.254 ±0.035 m–kg)
track barriers.
13–5–135 S/A Signal Brush Block 2238141–2 or Signal Brush Module 2254362
Avoid Inhallation
CAUTION Read the Handling and Removal of Slip Ring Brush Debris
Information on page 394 before you start this procedure.

DANGER USE AND FOLLOW TAG AND LOCK OUT PROCEDURES.

7. Open rear cover.
390

bottom.
11. Remove and install replacement modules:
a Place the signal brush block on a hard surface with the tips down and remove the
two screws that attach the module to the brush block body.
b Insert the replacement module and tighten the screws.

d Adjust the brush blocks up against the set screws on the bracket to center the top
and bottom of the brush tips on the ring.
e Tighten all four (4) screws to 22
track barriers.
13–5–136 46–297840G1 46–296001G1 2239006

FRU 1
Gantry
Slip Ring Assembly
Note: This procedure requires 2 people to replace the slip ring. You will need the help of a third
person for approximately 5 minutes.


391

7. Open Rear cover.
a Locate left hinge arm inside the rear cover, and disconnect the two (2) electrical
connections leading to the top and rear covers.
b Disconnect the two (2) wires leading to the rear cover lamp.
c Disconnect the harness leading to the rear cover microphone.
8. Remove the top cover: (Requires 2 people)
a Engage the prop rod.
b Remove the retaining clip from the end of the top cover gas spring.
c Grasp the gas spring, and firmly pull outward.
d Let the gas spring swing down and hang from the rear cover support.
e Attach the retaining clip to the gas spring for safe keeping.
f Remove the rear cover portion of the middle hinge that holds the top cover in place.
g Move the top cover to the right, remove it from the rear cover, and set aside.
9. Remove the Rear Cover: (Requires 3 people)
a Grab the bottom of the cover on each side near the swing doors.
b Lift on the Rear Cover Assembly, while the third person guides the pivot pins out of
the pivot arm on each side of the cover.
c Place the Rear Cover on top of a blanket to prevent scratching. Lean the Cover
against the wall, or if space permits, lay the cover horizontally on a blanket on the
floor.
10. Remove the two (2) Slip Ring Covers.

11. Remove the two BNC Connectors, J1 and J2, from Rotating Buffer Board.
12. Remove the Rotating Buffer Board and the Rotating Terminator Board:
a Remove seven (7) 4–40 socket head cap screws and one (1) 1/4 –20 screw from
each board.
b Remove the boards from the slip ring, and place them in anti–static bags.
13. Remove two (2) Lexan terminal covers that cover the electrical junctions between the
gantry and the slip ring.
a Remove the two (2) 1/4 –20 screws that fasten each cover in place.
b Remove both covers, and set aside, for reuse.
14. Disconnect all cable connections on the inside of the Slip Ring, including the two (2)
Ground Strap connections.
15. Remove the Stationary Terminator Board:
392
a Remove the seven (7) 4–40 socket head cap screws.

b Remove the board and place it in an anti–static bag.
16. Remove the Stationary Buffer Board:
a Disconnect (3) BNC connectors, J1,J2 and J3.
b Remove the eight (8) 4–40 socket head cap screws.
c Remove the board and place it in an anti–static bag.
17. Remove, and set aside, the one power and two signal Brush Blocks.
a Disconnect the Power Brush electrical connections
b Disconnect the grounding strap.
c Four bolts fasten each Brush Block in place. Detailed Brush Block instructions begin
on page 376.
18. Remove six (6) Brush Block Brackets:
a Remove the shoulder screw and socket head cap screw from each bracket.
b Remove each bracket, and set aside for reuse.
19. Open the front cover and remove two (2) access panels.
Note: A cutout on the Slip Ring, and a pilot on the bearing flange, hold the Slip Ring in place,
as long as you apply pressure against the back face of the Slip Ring.
20. Remove six bolts from the Slip Ring: (Requires 2 people)
a Rotate the gantry to position one bolt in each of the two (2) access holes.
b Remove the bolts from the gantry access holes, and set aside for reuse.
c Second person: Push against the back face of the Slip Ring. to hold it in place while
your partner removes the bolts
d Rotate the Gantry, by hand, until another set of bolts appear in the access holes.
e Remove the bolts, set aside, and repeat the procedure to remove the a total of 8
bolts.
21. Remove the Slip Ring assembly:
a Stand on either side of the Slip Ring assembly.
b Grasp the Slip Ring with both hands.
c Pull the Slip Ring off the bearing flange.
Note: The epoxy Slip Ring is fragile, so handle it with extreme care. DO NOT STAND THE
SLIP RING ON END; LAY IT FLAT.
22. Replace the Slip Ring:

a Hold the Slip Ring next to Bearing flange.
b Rotate the bearing, and/or Slip Ring, to align the black line on the inside of Slip Ring
with the small hole on the bearing flange pilot.
23. Fasten Slip Ring to Bearing Flange: (Requires 2 people)
a Second person: Press the Slip Ring flush against the Bearing Flange while your
partner replaces the bolts.
b Apply a small amount of 242–Loctite to each of 8 Slip Ring bolts.
c Replace the first 2 bolts, and tighten to 5 ft.–lbs.
393
d Rotate the gantry, by hand, to reposition the access holes, and replace the next set
of bolts.
e Repeat the procedure to replace a total of 8 bolts.
24. Recheck the torque of all eight (8) bolts: 5 ft–lbs. ( 0.0048 m–kg)
Note: Use three people to replace the Rear Cover.
13–5–137 Handling and Removal of Slip Ring Brush Debris

The ETC slip ring brushes, made of Polymet AG material, contain silver and a trace of
cadmium. The S/A slip ring brushes are made of Carbon and Carbon Silver. Refer to the
corresponding MSDS for a description of these materials.
Note: All exposure surveys, conducted during service procedures and system operation,
reported levels of silver and cadmium well below the occupational exposure limits for
these materials.
Take care to avoid contact, inhalation and ingestion of slip ring debris whenever you work
with slip ring components. Take the following steps when you handle slip ring material:
1. Wear Neoprene or nitrile gloves, to limit irritation and ingestion of metallic dust.
» Do NOT remove gloves near an exposed slip ring. The powder inside the gloves can
contaminate the ring.
» Gloves: Large (Qty 100) 46–194427P347
» Gloves: XL (Qty 100) 46–194427P348
2. Use a HEPA (High Efficiency Particulate Air) vacuum cleaner to remove residual brush
debris.
» HEPA vacuum Cleaner: 46–297933P1
» HEPA filter: 46–297948P1
3. Use the HEPA vacuum cleaner to remove all existing brush debris from the brush blocks,
brackets and slip ring covers before you service the slip ring brush assemblies.
4. Use the HEPA vacuum cleaner to remove all existing brush debris from the gantry base
and floor after you reassemble the slip ring covers.
5. Wash your hands thoroughly after you service any slip ring components.
13–5–138 46–241600G806
FRU 2
Gantry
SS Detector
2. Open all gantry covers.
ALWAYS TURN OFF THE GANTRY SCAN DRIVE BEFORE YOU

WARNING PERFORM A PROCEDURE ON THE GANTRY, WITH THE
GANTRY COVERS OPEN. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING
CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE.
394
3. Turn off the Scan Drive power switch.

4. Rotate the gantry until the tube reaches 45 degrees.
5. Lock the gantry in the 45 degree position.
MAKE SURE YOU ENGAGE THE LOCKING PIN BEFORE YOU

WARNING REMOVE THE DETECTOR. FAILURE TO LOCK THE GANTRY
COULD RESULT IN INJURY, SHOULD THE GANTRY
SUDDENLY MOVE AND STRIKE YOU.
6. Remove the DAS covers.

7. Disconnect the 3 Heater Controller Cables between the detector and the detector heater.
8. Install the hoist.
a Connect the hook on the hoist to the hole drilled into the main detector plate, in the
center of the detector.
b Take up any slack on the hoist chain.
9. Remove the Detector:
Note: Remember to label the cables before you disconnect them, so you can restore them to
their original configuration.
a Carefully label and disconnect all 47 flex cables from the Detector and DAS.
b Remove 2 detector mounting nuts from each detector mount, and set aside for
reuse.
c Carefully swing the detector off its mounts, and out into the gantry. Take care not
damage or lose any of the mounting hardware.
d Carefully lower the detector onto a skid.
e Take care not to set the detector on any of its cables.
f If necessary, change any damaged mounting hardware.
10. Install the new detector:
a Install the hoist.
b Connect the hook on the hoist to the hole drilled into the main detector plate, in the
c Take up any slack on the hoist chain.
d Make sure all the mounting hardware is present and in place.
e Swing the detector into position.
f Replace the washer and nuts, but do not tighten the mounting bolts .
g Mechanically align the detector to the base plate. Check and adjust 3.5 inches
across the full arc of the detector.
11. Check detector isolation:
a Connect one lead of a DVM to the Frame of the detector, and one lead to the gantry
rotating base.
b Maker sure you measure infinite resistance.
c If you measure any resistance, check to make sure each mounting bolt has a fiber
washer.
12. Tighten the mounting nuts:
395
a Torque each of the inside detector mounting nuts to 25 ft–lbs.

b Hold the lower mounting nut, to prevent it turning, while you tighten the outside nut to
25 ft–lbs.
c If you don’t have a torque wrench, tighten the nuts “finger tight,” then tighten 1/2 half
a flat with a wrench.
Do not over tighten the mounting nuts. Because the detector

CAUTION no longer has shocks, excess force can twist and damage it.

Perform the following checks after you complete the detector installation:
» Alignments: Start on page 95

» Q–Cal: Starts on page 145
» Crosstalk Calibration: Starts on page 146
» DAS integration
» Alpha Vector Cal: Starts on page 146
» N number check: Starts on page 147
» Image Series: Refer to 2142707–100 for Scan Rx information
13–5–139 46–241600G6
FRU 2
Gantry
SS Detector Kit
13–5–140 46–313423G1
FRU 2
Gantry
SS Detector Kit (Detector and DAT tape)
2. Open all gantry covers.
ALWAYS TURN OFF THE GANTRY SCAN DRIVE, BEFORE YOU

WARNING PERFORM A PROCEDURE ON THE GANTRY, WITH THE
GANTRY COVERS OPEN. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING
CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE.
3. Turn off the Scan Drive power switch.

4. Rotate the gantry until the tube reaches 45 degrees.
5. Lock the gantry in the 45 degree position.
396

6. Remove the DAS covers.

7. Disconnect the 3 Heater Controller Cables between the detector and the detector heater.
8. Install the hoist.
a Connect the hook on the hoist to the hole drilled into the main detector plate, in the
b Take up any slack on the hoist chain.
9. Remove the Detector:
Note: Remember to label the cables before you disconnect them, so you can restore them to
their original configuration.
a Carefully label and disconnect all 47 flex cables from the Detector and DAS.
b Remove 2 detector mounting nuts from each detector mount, and set aside for
reuse.
c Carefully swing the detector off its mounts, and out into the gantry. Take care not
damage or lose any of the mounting hardware.
d Carefully lower the detector onto a skid.
e Take care not to set the detector on any of its cables.
f If necessary, change any damaged mounting hardware.
10. Install the new detector:
a Install the hoist.
b Connect the hook on the hoist to the hole drilled into the main detector plate, in the
c Take up any slack on the hoist chain.
d Make sure all the mounting hardware is present and in place.
e Swing the detector into position.
f Replace the washer and nuts, but do not tighten the mounting bolts .
g Mechanically align the detector to the base plate. Check and adjust 3.5 inches
across the full arc of the detector.
11. Check detector isolation:
a Connect one lead of a DVM to the Frame of the detector, and one lead to the gantry
rotating base.
b Maker sure you measure infinite resistance.
c If you measure any resistance, check to make sure each mounting bolt has a fiber
washer.
12. Tighten the mounting nuts:
a Torque each of the inside detector mounting nuts to 25 ft–lbs.
b Hold the lower mounting nut, to prevent it turning, while you tighten the outside nut to
25 ft–lbs.
397
c If you don’t have a torque wrench, tighten the nuts “finger tight,” then tighten 1/2 half
a flat with a wrench.
Do not over tighten the mounting nuts. Because the detector

CAUTION no longer has shocks, excess force can twist and damage it.
13–5–141 46–297092G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Stationary AC Harness

13–5–142 46–296748G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Stationary Harness

13–5–143 46–296664P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Stepper Motor Drive (Filter)
5. Open top cover and engage prop rod.
9. Engage the indexer pin lock to lock the Gantry into position.
398
10. Remove the aperture Micro Stepper Drive to access to the Bow–Tie Filter. Refer to the
Micro Stepper Drive Procedure for details.
11. Locate the cut away in the Micro Stepper Drive mounting plate:
a Disconnect the two (2) 6 pin electrical connectors from the front of the Stepper Motor
Drive.
b Unfasten four 8–32 bolts, and remove the Stepper Motor Drive.
12. Replace Stepper Motor Drive
13–5–144 46–136343P12
FRU 1
Gantry
Switch, STC Assembly
4. Remove cover.
6. Remove two leads from the back of the toggle switch, on the right side of the STC
Chassis.
7. Remove the retaining nut from the front of the toggle switch.
8. Remove the defective switch from the chassis.
9. Install the new switch.
13–5–145 46–221880P24
FRU 2
Gantry
Terminal Strip, Base
13–5–146 46–287264P1
FRU 2
Gantry
Terminator, STC Assembly
399
13–5–147 46–296145P1
FRU 2
Gantry
Tilt Chain
13–5–148 46–296363P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Tilt Motor
8. Remove, and set aside, the center and right inside Base Covers, and the table footswitch
cover.
9. Disconnect the Tilt Motor Power harness from the table connection point.
10. Cut the Ty–raps, and remove the harness.
11. Remove the three bolts that fasten the motor to the gear reducer.
Note: One of the four mounting holes is not used.
12. Slide the defective Motor off the gearbox.

13. Replace the Motor:
a Reconnect the harness to table
b Ty–rap the harness to the base.
14. Install the key into the motor shaft.
15. Align key with keyway in Gearbox.
Completely insert the Key into the motor shaft. No overhang

CAUTION allowed.
16. Apply a light coat of Loctite 242 to the three bolts, and use them to attach the Motor to
the Gear Box.
400
13–5–149 46–297036G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Tilt Potentiometer
2. Remove, and set aside, the right gantry side cover.
3. Tilt the gantry to the upright, 0 degree, position.
5. Remove power to the Tilt Potentiometer:
a Remove the left table base cover.
b Turn off all 3 service switches in the rear end of the table.
6. Remove the defective tilt pot:
a Unfasten the four screws, and remove the guard bracket from the pot.
b Disconnect the power leads from the tilt pot.
c Loosen the set screw that ties the tilt pot to the Gear Reducer Output.
d Loosen and/or remove the synclamps, as needed, to remove the pot.
7. Replace the pot:
a Reconnect the power leads.
b Place the pot on the end of the Gear Reducer Output shaft.
c Apply Loctite–242 to the set screw.
d Replace the set screw, and tighten into place.
8. Turn on the rear table “24 hour power” switch, to apply 10 volts across the pot.
a Connect a DVM across the pot.
b Rotate the tilt pot until the meter displays 5.0 DCV.
9. Tighten the three synclamps to fasten the tilt pot into place.
10. Replace the Tilt Pot guard.
11. Turn on all 3 service switches in the rear end of the table.
12. Reassemble the Table and Gantry.
13–5–150 46–183027P90
FRU 1
Gantry
Timing Bd, EDAS (Slot 55)

401
ANTISTATIC HANDLING
CLEANLINESS
13–5–151 46–296936G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Top Cover Assembly
13–5–152 46–220247P2
FRU 1
Gantry
Top Cover Fan
5. Remove, and set aside, gantry scan window.
6. Open Rear Cover.
7. Locate the defective fan(s).
8. Disconnect the power from the defective fan.
9. Loosen, and/or remove, the three (3) screws and washers that fasten the fan into place.
10. Remove the fan from the top cover.
11. Remove the fan guard from defective fan.
12. Attach the fan guard to the new fan.
13. Install new fan in the top cover.
14. Reconnect the electrical connection.
13–5–153 46–297738P1
FRU 2
Gantry
Top Cover Gas Spring
402

5. Remove, and keep, the retaining clip from the each end of the
top cover gas spring.
6. Grasp the defective gas spring, and firmly pull outward.
7. Install the replacement gas spring, and clip into place.
13–5–154 46–297797G1
FRU 1
Gantry
Top Cover Thermostat Assembly
5. Remove, and set aside, gantry scan window.
6. Open Rear Cover.
7. Locate thermostat assembly, on the left side of the gantry top cover.
8. Disconnect two (2) electrical connections, one from each side of the thermostat
assembly.
9. Unfasten four (4) screws, and remove the defective thermostat assembly.
10. Replace the thermostat assembly.
11. Reconnect the two electrical connections.
13–5–155 46–296870G1
FRU 2
Gantry
Top Lens Assembly
13–5–156 46–297396P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Tube Cooling Relay
403

10. Remove connectors J1 through J5 from the control assembly.
11. Remove 4 screws that fasten the control assembly to the back of the OBC.
12. From the bottom of the control assembly:
a Locate the (normally closed) tube cooling relay
b Remove the four (4) leads attached to positions 1 through 4.
c Remove two (2) nuts that fasten the relay to the chassis.
d Remove the defective relay.
13. Install the new relay.
13–5–157 46–297460P1
FRU 1
Gantry
Tube Studs
Tube Stud Replacement Procedure:
Note: The Tube Replacement procedure begins on page 404.
1. Remove the Tube. Follow all the Safety Instructions listed in the Tube Removal
procedure.
2. Use double 3/8–16 nuts and a 9/16 wrench, or an adjustable wrench, to remove the
damaged stud(s)
3. Apply Loctite 271 to one end of the replacement stud.
4. Fasten the end with the Loctite into the rotating base casting.
5. Use double 3/8–16 nuts and a 9/16 wrench, or an adjustable wrench, to adjust the stud
to a height of 1.90 0.04 inches from the surface of the rotating base casting.
6. Replace the Tube.
7. Follow all the Safety Instructions listed in the Tube Installation procedures.
13–5–158 46–309500G1
FRU 1
Gantry
X–Ray Tube
13–5–158–1 Tube Failure Codes:

Use the following Tube Failure Codes when you report a tube change:
» AI Image Artifact
» BG Broken Glass
404
» CA Casing Arcing
» CB Casing Bubbles/Particles Seen
» CL Casing Oil Leak
» GS Grid Short
» OC Other–Cathode Related
» OE Tube Loss Due to Failure Elsewhere
» OF Open Filament
» OG Arcing
» OH Other–Housing Related
» OL Generator Overload
» OR Other–Rotor Related
» PF Overheat/Pump Failure
» PT Pulled Tube (No Failure)
» RF Frozen Rotor
» RN Noisy Rotor
» SD Shipping Damage/Error
» SS Stator Open/Stator Short
» XL Low X–Ray Output
13–5–158–2 Remove Old Tube:

3. Turn off the AXIAL DRIVE ENABLE and 550 VDC ENABLE switches on the status
control box on the right side of the Gantry.
4. Rotate the Gantry until the failed tube unit reaches the 3 o’clock position.
6. Remove the retainer bolt, raise the gantry crane to its uppermost position, and insert the
locking pin.
7. Turn off the Gantry Power.
8. Disconnect the system stator cable from the 4 pin mate–n–lok connector on the front of
the tube unit.
9. Disconnect the 12 pin tube I.D. system cable, from the top of the tube unit.
10. Disconnect the 4 pin mate–n–lok pump and fan power system cable
11. Disconnect the ground strap from the top of the tube unit.
12. Remove the anode and the cathode cable:
a Loosen each cable’s locking ring with the spanner wrench.
b Pull each cable terminal out of its receptacle.
405
c Ground the end of the cables to the Gantry frame.

d Wipe up any oil that drips from the cable terminal.
e Use paper towels to soak up any oil in the wells.
13. Attach the hoist to the crane and tube.
Remove the mounting bars in the following (lower/upper)

CAUTION order, to lessen the risk of injury to your hand.
14. Unfasten two 3/8–16 hex nuts, and remove the lower mounting bar.
15. Unfasten two 3/8–16 hex nuts, and remove the upper mounting bar.
16. Lower the defective tube unit to the floor, and rest the tube unit on its fans.
13–5–158–3 Install New Tube:

1. Allow the tube unit to warm to room temperature before you install it.
2. Inspect the port, and make sure the tube contains the the fixed moly filter.
» One end of the moly filter has 2 dots on it.
» If you don’t see the dots, DO NOT USE THE TUBE.
3. Turn off facility power to the PDU. Use tag and lock out procedures.
4. Use the hoist to lift the new tube unit:
a Position the four 1” tube support bracket mounting holes over the four threaded studs
on the gantry tube support plate.
b Position the 3 tube support bracket alignment pins into the alignment holes on the
Gantry Tube Support Plate.
Note: To ease installation, fasten the top mounting bar to the rotating structure first. Then
attach the bottom mounting bar.
c Fasten the lower and upper and mounting bars to the rotating structure with the
3/8–16 hex nuts, and torque to 301 ft.–lbs.
5. Attach the system stator cable to the 4 pin, mate–n–lok connector to the front of the tube
unit, near the oil pump.
6. Attach the tube I.D. cable to the 12 pin, mate–n–lok connector on top of the tube.
7. Attach the tube pump and fan power cable to the 4 pin mate–n–lok connector.
8. Fasten the grounding strap to the 1/4–20 ground stud on top of the tube unit.
9. Remove the plastic cap plug from each cable receptacle on the tube unit. Take care not
to lose the rubber quad ring.
10. Lightly wet the new rubber quad ring with transformer oil (917).
11. Return the quad ring to its slot at the top of the receptacle retaining ring.
12. Pour transformer oil (917) into the receptacle to a depth of 0.375”.
13. Align the cable terminal orienting key with the notch in the receptacle.
14. Slowly insert the cable, to engage the connector pins and seat the cable in the well.
a Fasten the cable locking ring.
b Rotate the cable strain relief for a clean cable dress.
406
c Use the spanner wrench to tighten the locking ring.

d Use a torque wrench to tighten the locking ring to 111 ft.–lb.
Do not over tighten the locking ring. Over tightening can deform the
CAUTION cable plug sealing surfaces, break the oil seal between receptacle and
housing, twist the receptacle, and disrupt internal wiring.
e Back off on the cable locking ring without disturbing the cable plug.
f Re–tighten the locking ring, and torque to 71ft lbs.
Note: Use the spanner wrench with a torque wrench when you tighten the high–voltage cables
on the tube unit.
IF YOU GET OIL ON YOUR HANDS, WASH THEM NOW!

WARNING
15. Carefully wipe up all excess oil.

16. Disconnect hoist from tube and crane.
a Return the crane to the normal storage position.
b Make sure you install, and tighten, the crane storage retaining bolt.
17. Check for oil leaks:
a Wrap rags or paper towels around the cable horns, and tape them into place.
b Manually rotate the tube to the 6 o’clock position.
c Return the tube to the 3 o’clock position
d Remove the toweling and wipe up all excess oil.
e Wipe off the cable horns, locking ring, and strain relief with a rag dampened with
alcohol.
f Repeat with a dry rag.
g Wrap the cable strain relief and locking ring with a single layer of absorbent paper
tissue.
» You can use two inch wide strips cut from a paper napkin.
» Wrap the bottom edge of the paper around the top end of the cable horn, and
tape it into place.
» Extend the top edge of the paper over the top of the locking ring, and tape it to
the plastic cable strain relief.
h Remove paper after leak check.
18. Turn on gantry power, and wait at least 10 minutes to warm up the filament.
19. Shutdown, and restart the software after every tube change, so the system can
interrogate the configuration file that contains tube I.D. resistor.
13–5–158–4 Shutdown the system:
Note: Type the boldface characters, and press the <enter> key.
“Type/enter” also means type the boldface characters, and press the <enter> key
407
1. Shutdown the system to the PROM monitor level (>).

<suiteID>_OCOsd <enter>
2. Start up the system from PROM monitor level:

> b <enter>
3. Boot Unix, but type/enter “N” not to start applications.
13–5–158–5 Run Changetube:

Changetube prepares the system to store tube usage statistics, for trend analysis and tube
warranty purposes.
1. Press |L1| b
2. Shutdown applications
sd –i <enter>
3. Type su <enter>
4. Type/enter the password:
<root password>
5. Type changeTube <enter>

6. Refer to the list on page 404, and type/enter the failure code for the defective tube.
<failcode>
7. Refer to the menu on the screen; type/enter the number which corresponds to your tube
type
8. Refer to the Housing S/N; type/enter the Insert S/N
<serial number>
9. Press |Cntrl| d to exit back to genesis.

10. Bring up applications
Type st (Should be in /w directory)
13–5–158–6 ALIGNMENTS:
1. Plane of Rotation (POR): Starts on page 95
2. X–Ray Beam on Window (BOW): Starts on page 98
3. Isocenter: Starts on page 105
4. Center Body Filter (CBF) and SAG: Starts on page 113
13–5–158–7 GENERATOR CALIBRATIONS:

1. kV Meter Verification: Starts on page 61
2. mA Meter Verification: Starts on page 63
3. Calibration of HV Tank Feedback Resistors: Starts on page 66
4. Install NEW TUBE program: Starts on page 68
5. Auto mA Calibration: Starts on page 68
6. KV Rise and Fall Times: Starts on page 69
7. Verify Internal Scan Timer: Starts on page 71
408
8. Heat Soak and Seasoning Tool: Starts on page 409
Note: When you run Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning, monitor for high voltage over currents,
shoot throughs, and spits. If these errors occur during the seasoning steps, touch the
|Resume| softkey, then press the (Start Scan) button to continue scanning. If the errors
continue, repeat the process up to four times before pulling the tube.
Use only on a MX_165_CT_I
The HiSpeed Advantage Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning tool only supports the
MX_165_CT_I tube. This tool acquires all scans with the Large Focal Spot.
Run the Heat Soak and Seasoning tool on every new MX_165_CT_I tube. You may run the
Season tool on any tube that causes scan aborts or image streaks.
1. Touch |Utility|.
2. Touch |CT Tools|.
3. NEW TUBE: Touch |Heat Soak and Seasoning|.
» Use the following protocols
MX_165_CT_I
kV mA # of ISD Scan Pre Static/Rotate
Scan Group Scans (sec.) Time Group (4.0sec.)
(sec.) Delay
Warm Up 80 100 15 2 2 2 R
Heat Input 80 300 24 2 3 2 R
Anode Soak 1 80 300 25 5 3 3 R
Anode Soak 2 80 300 9 1 1 2 R
Casing Soak 1 80 300 45 12 2 60 R
Casing Soak 2 80 300 45 12 2 0 R
Casing Soak 3 80 300 10 7 1 7 R
Seasoning 1 90 50 5 5 0.1 5 R
Seasoning 2 100 50 5 5 0.1 5 R
Seasoning 3 110 50 5 5 0.1 5 R
Seasoning 4 120 50 5 5 0.1 5 R
Seasoning 5 130 50 5 5 0.1 5 R
Seasoning 6 135 50 5 5 0.1 5 R
Seasoning 7 140 50 10 5 0.1 5 R
Seasoning 8 145 50 10 5 0.1 5 R
Seasoning 9 150 50 15 5 0.1 5 R
Note: When you run Tube Heat Soak and/or Seasoning, monitor for high voltage over currents,
shoot throughs, and spits. If these errors occur during the seasoning steps, touch
|Resume|, and press (Start Scan) to continue scanning. If the errors continue, repeat
the process up to four times before pulling the tube.
4. Press (Start Scan).

5. When the Tools complete, touch |Cancel|.
When you successfully complete the high voltage stability test:
409
1. Torque the locking ring at the tube end of each H.V. cable to 7 1 ft. lbs. or 84 12 in.
lbs.
2. Tape more rags or paper towels around the tube locking rings to absorb excess oil.
3. Remove the rags or paper towels after several revolutions of the gantry.
13–5–158–8 Exposure Time Accuracy:

Begin at the top level plasma, and execute the following sequence of softkeys:
1. Touch |Utilities|.
2. Touch |1|, |2|, |3|.
3. Touch |CT Tools|.
4. Touch |Generator Charact|.
5. Touch |Monitor Enable|, to display scan times in the message log.
6. Touch |Cancel|.
13–5–158–9 Scout Scan Time

Take scout scans with the following distances. (Total of six scans.)
1. Distance in mm: 20, 25, 30, 40, 150, 300, 480

2. Use 120kV and 40mA
3. Record the scan time, displayed in the message log, on the HHS data sheet.
13–5–158–10 Axial and Helical Scan Time

Use normal applications (Scan Rx) to acquire Axial Scans with the following parameters:

2. Use the following scan time and FOV:
Selected Time FOV

0.6 sec small FOV
0.6 sec large FOV
1.0 sec large FOV
2.0 sec large FOV
3.0 sec large FOV
4.0 sec large FOV
Use normal applications (Scan Rx) to acquire Helical Scans with the following parameters:

2. Use 10mm Scan Thickness
3. Use the following scan time and location:
Selected Time Scan Location

15.0 sec S70–170
28.0 sec S135–I135
30.0 sec S145–I145
410
Note: When you complete the scan time tests, display the |Generator Charact| menu, and toggle
the |Monitor Enable| OFF. Otherwise, the message log fills with kV, mA and scan times.
13–5–158–11 CALS:
1. Q–Cal: Starts on page 145
2. Crosstalk Calibration: Starts on page 146
3. Calibration Procedure, Standard Cals: Starts on page 147
4. N# Check: Starts on page 147
5. QA Noise Test: Refer to the QA section in the 2142707–100 Technical Reference
manual
6. Thermal Test: Starts below.
Note: Run the thermal test only if you suspect cold tube/hot tube image problems.
13–5–158–12 Thermal Test:

The thermal test requires a cold X–Ray tube. Allow the tube to cool a minimum of 60
minutes before you start this procedure. Replace the tube if the mean values vary more than
4 counts.
1. Scan the water portion of the QA phantom with the following parameters:
» small FOV »1 slice at 1mm thickness
» 120 kV »20 slices at 10mm thickness
» 200 mA »1 slice at 1mm thickness
» 4.0 sec (from a cold tube)
2. Check images for thermal bands, and artifacts that vary with temperature.
3. Use a 14cm x 14cm ROI box, centered at 0.0, 0.0cm.
4. Compare the ROI mean values of the two 1mm slice images. The ROI mean values
should fall within 4 counts of each other.
5. Compare the ROI mean values of the twenty 10mm slice images. The ROI mean values
should fall within 4 counts of each other.
411
Notes:
412
13–6 PDU
13–6–1 46–170026P14
FRU 1
PDU
32 kVA Xfmr, CR1–CR3
2. Disconnect wires from C4, C5 and C6.
3. Remove, and keep, 3 screws from the bar.
4. Remove screw next to the defective Varistor.
5. Replace Varistor.
6. Reassemble PDU, and restore facility power
13–6–2 46–170026P17
FRU 1
PDU
32 kVA Xfmr, CR4–CR6
2. Remove screws, nuts and washers, and disconnect wires.
3. Leave the wires attached to the bar, and remove the bar
4. Remove screws that fasten the defective varistor to the fuse panel.
5. Replace Varistor.
13–6–3 46–296221P15
FRU 1
PDU
32 kVA Xfmr, F10–F12
2. Locate the defective fuse, and remove its bolt and washer.
DO NOT TRY TO PRY FUSE OUT.

WARNING
3. Replace Fuse.
13–6–4 46–170021P85
FRU 1
PDU
32 kVA Xfmr, F13
2. Locate the defective fuse, and remove its bolt and washer.
413
DO NOT TRY TO PRY FUSE OUT.

WARNING
3. Replace Fuse.
13–6–5 46–313346P1
FRU 1
PDU
2. Locate, and pry out, the defective fuse.
3. Replace Fuse.
13–6–6 46–170021P44
FRU 1
PDU
32 kVA Xfmr, F17–F19 (Top Bd)
2. Use the fuse puller to remove the defective fuse from its fuseholder.
3. Replace Fuse.
13–6–7 46–170021P96
FRU 1
PDU
32 kVA Xfmr, F20, F21 (Top Bd)
2. Use the fuse puller to remove the defective fuse from its fuseholder.
3. Replace Fuse.
13–6–8 46–170021P86
FRU 1
PDU
2. Locate, and pry out, the defective fuse.
3. Replace Fuse.
414
13–6–9 46–170021P84
FRU 1
PDU
2. Locate, and pry out, one end of the defective fuse with a screwdriver or fusepuller.
3. Replace Fuse.
13–6–10 45433453
FRU 1
PDU
AC Inductor
2. Safety Check: Verify no voltage exists at the 3 Phase Input Terminals to the PDU
Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel.
a. Locate the terminal strip on the DCRGS assembly
b. Check for voltage between:
» T1 and T2
» T1 and ground
» T2 and ground
c. If you measure ANY voltage, do not proceed until you remove all power to the PDU.
3. Remove 3 leads from Backup Contactor Terminals:
» T1
» T2
» T3
4. Remove 3 wires from SCR Bridge Terminals:
» TS1–L1
» TS1–L2
» TS1–L3
5. Unplug connector J2 from DCRGS Regulator Control Board.
6. Unplug Connector J7B from SCR Bridge Gate Driving Board.
7. Loosen 4 screws and washers that fasten the defective AC Inductor to the DCRGS main
panel.
8. Replace the AC Inductor.
415
13–6–11 46–297910P1
FRU 1
PDU
2. Remove the following connectors from the axial interface PWB:
» J1
» J2
» J3
3. Remove the four (4) nuts that fasten the axial interface PWB cover to the Servo
assembly.
4. Remove the Servo assembly cover.
5. Remove four (4) position option connectors from the Logic Control PWB.
6. Remove three (3) screws that fasten the Logic Control PWB cover to the Servo panel.
7. Loosen three (3) screws that fasten the Logic Control PWB cover to the Servo amplifier.
8. Lift and remove the Logic Control PWB cover.
9. Remove the following connectors from the left side of the Logic Control PWB:
» TB1
» TB2
10. Remove, and keep, the seven (7) leads from the terminal strip on the right side of the
Servo amplifier.
11. Locate the ground stud in the lower right corner of the Servo amplifier.
a. Remove the nut attaching the ground lead to the ground stud
b. Remove the ground lead from the stud.
12. Remove, and keep, the three (3) nuts that fasten the Servo amplifier to the Servo panel.
13. Remove the defective Servo amplifier.
14. Replace the Servo amplifier.
13–6–12 46–288748G1
FRU 1
PDU
Axial Drive Filter Bd
2. Remove, and set aside, the J1 cable.
3. Remove, and keep, 4 screws from the standoff.
Note: Spacers will fall out when you remove the screws.
4. Replace the defective Axial Drive Filter Board.

416
13–6–13 54261P92
FRU 1
PDU
Backup Contactor
» T1 and T2
» T1 and ground
» T2 and ground
3. Remove 3 wires from Backup Contactor Input Terminals:
» L1
» L2
» L3
4. Remove 3 wires from Backup Contactor Output Terminals:
» T1
» T2
» T3
5. Remove, and keep, 3 screws and washers that fasten the Backup Contactor to the
DCRGS Main Panel.
6. Remove and replace the defective Backup Contactor.
13–6–14 46–229598P3
FRU 2
PDU
Blue Switch
13–6–15 53214P33
FRU 1
PDU
Capacitor
a. Locate the terminal strip on the DCRGS assembly.
» T1 and T2
417
» T1 and ground
» T2 and ground
3. Remove the 4 screws and washers on the right side of the DCRGS Panel, that fasten the
swing–out panel in place. Swing out the Main Panel.
4. Safety Step: Verify no voltage exists on Capacitors C1and C2.
5. Remove the leads from the terminals of the defective Capacitor.
6. Loosen the Capacitor Bracket.
7. Replace Capacitor.
Note: Ensure correct polarity of capacitor.
13–6–16 46–296409P1
FRU 1
PDU
Capacitor, electrolytic (6100 microF, 350V)
WARNING REMOVE POWER, AND WAIT 45 SECONDS, TO ALLOW THE

CAPACITOR TO PARTIALLY DISCHARGE. WEAR SAFETY
GLASSES WHEN YOU FINISH DISCHARGING THE
CAPACITOR.
2. Remove, and keep, 2 screws that fasten the cover in place.
3. Remove, and set aside, the cover.
4. Wear your Safety Glasses while you short the capacitor terminals with a screwdriver, to
completely discharge the capacitor.
5. Remove 2 wires from the capacitor terminals.
6. Loosen the screw in the mounting clamp.
7. Remove, and replace, the defective capacitor.
13–6–17 46–221905P2
FRU 1
PDU
Circuit Breaker (1 Pole, 15A), CB16, 18, 20, 21, 22
2. Remove, and keep, the four (4) screws that fasten the cover in place.
3. Lift off the cover, and set it aside.
4. Remove the wires from the defective Circuit Breaker.
5. Lift up the wire terminal end of the breaker, and remove the defective breaker.
418

13–6–18 46–221905P3
FRU 1
PDU
Circuit Breaker (1 Pole, 20A), CB19
13–6–19 46–221905P21
FRU 1
PDU
13–6–20 46–221905P32
FRU 1
PDU
Circuit Breaker (3 Pole, 25A), CB1, 6, 11
419
13–6–21 46–221905P32
FRU 1
PDU
Circuit Breaker (3 Pole, 25A), CB1, 6, 11, 23
(Allen Bradley Modification)
13–6–22 46–221905P35
FRU 1
PDU
13–6–23 46–327109G1
FRU 2
PDU
Circuit Breaker Assembly (Allen Bradley)
13–6–24 46–296206G1
FRU 2
PDU
Circuit Breaker Assembly (Westamp)
420
13–6–25 46–170021P29
FRU 1
PDU
Circuit Breaker Assembly, F1–F3
4. Gently pry defective fuse out of holder.
5. Replace fuse.
13–6–26 46–297069P1
FRU 1
PDU
Circuit Breaker Assembly, F4–F6
4. Gently pry defective fuse out of holder.
5. Replace fuse.
13–6–27 46–296138P1
FRU 1
PDU
Contactor
2. Remove 4 sets of hardware, and set aside the cover.
3. Loosen the retaining screws, and remove the wires from the following terminals:
» 1
» 3
» 5
» 13
» 14
» A1
» A2
4. Loosen the following terminal screws:
» 2
» 4
» 6
421
5. Remove, and set aside, Contactor mounting hardware.

6. Replace defective Contactor.
13–6–28 46–297456P1
FRU 2
PDU
Cover, Relay Control PWB, Lexan
13–6–29 45433455
FRU 1
PDU
DC Inductor
» T1 and T2
» T1 and ground
» T2 and ground
3. Remove the following wires from the DCRGS assembly:
» TS1–3
» TS2–3
4. Remove the following wires from the from SCR Bridge:
» TS2–plus
» TS2–minus
5. Unplug connector J3 from the DCRGS Regulator Control Board.
6. Remove 4 screws and washers that fasten the defective DC Inductor to the DCRGS
Main Panel.
7. Replace the DC Inductor.
13–6–30 45433770
FRU 1
PDU
DCRGS
grounding point on the PDU before you continue.
422
» T1 and T2
» T1 and ground
» T2 and ground
3. Disconnect Wires:
» Three wires from Back up Contactor on DCRGS ASM
» Three wires from F1, F2 and F3
» Two wires to Back up Contactor coil (A2 & A1)
» Two wires to auxiliary contact of Back up Contactor (13 & 14)
» Disconnect three input wires from 480 Volt (VAC) fuses on DCRGS ASM
» Disconnect 550 Volt Output Wire from TS1–1.
» Disconnect 550 Volt Return Wire from TS2–1.
» Disconnect 550 Volt Cable Shield from DCRGS ASM Ground Stud
» Disconnect 120 Volt (AC) Terminal from SCR Bridge (Gate Firing Bd.)
» DCRGS STC Interface Cable from DCRGS Regulator Control Bd. (J4).
4. Loosen 8 screws that fasten the DCRGS assembly to the PDU Cabinet.
5. Replace the DCRGS.
6. Set the 50/60 Hz jumper at J10 of the Enerpro SCR Bridge (Gate Firing Board) to the
proper position.
13–6–31 45433754
FRU 1
PDU
DCRGS Control Bd
» T1 and T2
» T1 and ground
» T2 and ground

grounding point on the PDU before you continue.
423
3. Remove the 480 Volt Safety Cover from DCRGS Regulator Control Board.
4. Unplug the following connectors from the DCRGS Regulator Control Board:
» J1
» J2
» J3
» J4
» J5
» J6
» J7
5. Remove the 4 screws and washers that fasten the DCRGS Control Board to the SCR
Bridge.
6. Remove and replace the defective DCRGS Control Board.
13–6–32 46–296407G1
FRU 2
PDU
Display Assembly
13–6–33 46–297803P1
FRU 1
PDU
Fan Assembly
2. Detach power connector from Fan Assembly.
3. Hold the Fan assembly with one hand. Remove the 4 screws that fasten the Fan
assembly to the top of the PDU
4. Use a 7/64 hex driver, and a screwdriver to remove the four nuts and screws that fasten
the defective fan to the grill.
5. Replace fan.
13–6–34 46–203134P5
FRU 2
PDU
Filter
424
13–6–35 46–170021P14
FRU 1
PDU
Filter PWB F1–F2
2. Remove 4 sets of hardware that fasten Circuit Breaker Cover in place.
3. Remove cover, and set aside.
4. Gently pry defective fuse from holder.
5. Replace fuse.
13–6–36 54367P40
FRU 1
PDU
Fuse, DCRGS
c. T1 and T2
» T1 and ground
» T2 and ground
d. If you measure ANY voltage, do not proceed until you remove all power to the PDU.
3. Locate, and replace defective fuse.
13–6–37 46–229598P1
FRU 2
PDU
Green Switch
13–6–38 46–297479G1
FRU 2
PDU
Guard Assembly
425
13–6–39 46–297039G1
FRU 2
PDU
Harness, Circuit Breaker Assembly, External

13–6–40 46–297041G1
FRU 2
PDU
Harness, Circuit Breaker Assembly, Internal

13–6–41 46–296127P1
FRU 1
PDU
Indicator, Elapsed Time
2. Remove the screw the top and bottom of the Indicator panel.
3. Detach the Harness from the back of Panel.
4. Remove the Indicator assembly panel from the PDU.
5. Disconnect the wires from the back of Indicator.
6. Remove, and keep, 3 sets of screws and nuts, that fasten the Indicator assembly to the
panel.
7. Remove the defective Indicator from the panel.
8. Replace the Indicator.
13–6–42 46–327154P1
FRU 1
PDU
Inductor, Servo Output
2. Remove, and keep, 4 screws.
426
3. Remove hardware from the terminals, and push aside wire end.
4. Replace Inductor.
13–6–43 46–229342P2
FRU 1
PDU
Lamp Assembly (Green, 125V), DS1–DS6
2. Locate, and remove the Spade Terminals from the Lamp assembly.
3. Pry the retaining ring off the back of the Lamp.
13–6–44 46–229342P2
FRU 1
PDU
Lamp Panel Assembly, DS1–DS4
2. Locate, and disconnect the wires the from back of the defective Lamp.
3. Discard the ring and defective lamp.
4. Replace the lamp.
13–6–45 46–297594G1
FRU 2
PDU
Loopback Connector
13–6–46 46–222200P1
FRU 1
PDU
O/L Relay Element
2. Remove (2) screws which fasten the heater element to the K1 relay.
3. Remove the defective heater element.
4. Fasten the new heater element to K1 with the screws you removed from the defective
heater element.
5. Press the K1 reset button to enable the relay.
427
13–6–47 45433456
FRU 1
PDU
Output Current Transformer
» T1 and T2
» T1 and ground
» T2 and ground
3. Unplug connector J7 from the DCRGS Control Board.
4. Remove the wire from DCRGS TS1–2.
5. Remove the wire from the defective Output Current Transformer (T1).
6. Loosen 2 sets of screws and washers that fasten the defective Transformer (T1) to the
DCRGS Main Panel.
7. Replace Transformer.
13–6–48 46–264888G1
FRU 1
PDU
PWA Relay Control Bd
Note: PRECONDITION: Check the Label and follow safety instructions.
2. Wait at least 1 minute for the capacitors to discharge.
3. Remove 4 sets of hardware that fasten the Front Cover in place.
4. Remove, and set aside, Front Cover and hardware.
5. Detach all connectors.
6. Remove, and set aside, Loopback Connector.
7. Unplug all cables.
8. Remove 4 spacers and 7 screws that fasten the defective Relay Control Board to the
Relay Control panel.
9. Replace Relay Control board
428
13–6–49 46–278446P1
FRU 1
PDU
Receptacle (15A, 125VAC)
Remove old receptacle:
2. Unplug J1 and J2 from the rear of the AP.
3. Remove the four corner screws that fasten the rear plate to the AP.
4. Remove the rear plate, and pull out the receptacle assembly.
5. Disconnect the hot, neutral and ground wires from the receptacle.
6. Remove the 3 screws that fasten the defective receptacle to the plate.
7. Remove the defective receptacle.
Install new receptacle:
1. Insert new receptacle into the plate

2. Reconnect the hot, neutral and ground wires to the receptacle.
3. Fasten the Receptacle to the plate.
4. Fasten the plate to the back of the AP.
5. Reconnect cables to J1 and J2.
13–6–50 46–186852P2
FRU 1
PDU
Relay Contactor, Axial Drive
2. Locate the Axial Drive Relay contactor:
a. Remove leads from the 6 contact terminals.
b. Remove 2 leads from the relay coil.
c. Remove 2 leads from the auxiliary contact.
3. Remove, and keep, the screws that fasten the base of the contactor in place.
4. Remove, and keep, 2 screws that fasten the auxiliary contact to the main contactor body.
5. Replace the defective Relay.
13–6–51 46–327087P1
FRU 2
PDU
Relay, Axial Drive Current Sensing
429
13–6–52 46–194361P17
FRU 2
PDU
REM Box Light
13–6–53 53396P01
FRU 1
PDU
Resistor
» T1 and T2
» T1 and ground
c. T2 and ground
d. If you measure ANY voltage, do not proceed until you remove all power to the PDU.
3. Remove the 4 screws and washers on the right side of the DCRGS Panel, that fasten the
swing–out panel in place. Swing out the Main Panel.
4. Safety Step: Verify no voltage exists on Capacitors C1and C2.
5. Remove the leads from the ends of the defective resistors.
6. Remove, and replace, the defective resistor.
13–6–54 46–296415P2
FRU 1
PDU
Resistor, Ribwound (3 Ohm, 300W, 10%)
2. Remove the screws, nuts and washers that fasten the wires to the defective resistor’s
terminals.
3. Remove the nut from the long resistor mounting bolt, that fastens the mounting bracket
to the right edge of the resistor.
4. Remove the bolt from the resistor bracket.
Note: Pay attention to the location of the centering and insulating washers. Restore them to
the same configuration when you replace the resistor.
5. Remove the defective resistor:

a. Slide the resistor, centering washers and insulating washers to one side to remove
them.
b. Note the placement of the washers.
430
6. Replace Resistor.
13–6–55 46–221454P77
FRU 1
PDU
Resistor, Wirewound (25 Ohm, 50W, 1%)
2. Locate the defective resistor:
a. Unsolder the 2 leads from the defective resistor.
b. Remove, and keep, the 2 screws that fasten the resistor in place.
3. Replace Resistor.
13–6–56 45433454
FRU 1
PDU
SCR Bridge
» T1 and T2
» T1 and ground
» T2 and ground
3. Remove wires from the following terminals:
» TS1–L1
» TS1–L2
» TS1–L3
» TS2–plus
» TS2–minus
4. Locate the SCR Bridge Gate Firing Board, and disconnect J4.
5. Remove the12 sets of screws and washers that fasten the SCR Bridge to the DCRGS
Main Panel.
6. Remove, and replace, the defective SCR Bridge.
431
13–6–57 46–297574G1
FRU 2
PDU
Servo Assembly
13–6–58 46–170021P74
FRU 1
PDU
Servo Assembly (10A)
2. Twist the fuseholder cap one–quarter turn, and pull.
3. Remove the cap and fuse from the fuseholder.
4. Pull the defective fuse out of the cap.
5. Insert new fuse into cap, and replace in fuseholder.
13–6–59 46–170021P94
FRU 1
PDU
Servo Assembly (3A)
2. Twist the fuseholder cap one–quarter turn, and pull.
3. Remove the cap and fuse from the fuseholder.
4. Pull the defective fuse out of the cap.
5. Insert new fuse into cap, and replace in fuseholder.
13–6–60 46–296136P1
FRU 1
PDU
Westamp Amplifier
2. Disconnect, and set aside, the J1 Cable.
3. Disconnect the wires from TB–401, and move to one side.
4. Remove 3 screws from each mounting bracket at the top of the amplifier.
5. Loosen the 2 screws on amplifier’s left side mounting bracket.
6. Remove the 2 screws from the right side mounting bracket.
7. Remove, and replace, the defective Amplifier.
432
13–7 SRU
13–7–1 46–313053G1
FRU 2
SRU
24V Resistor Assembly
13–7–2 46–241971P26
FRU 2
SRU
5V Power Supply (150A), STCT AP
1. Unplug the AP, to remove chassis power.
Note: Label, or memorize the location of the wires on the input and output terminals before you
remove the defective supply. Restore the wires to their original configuration on the
replacement power supply.
2. Remove all the wires from the input and output terminals of the defective power supply.
3. Remove the screws that fasten the power supply to the AP.
4. Slide the power supply out of the AP.
5. Slide the new power supply into place, and fasten it to the AP.
6. Fasten the AC input and DC output leads to the corresponding terminals.
7. Plug the AP power cord into its receptacle, to restore power to the AP.
8. Verify the presence of +5VDC 5% on the AP backplane bus bars.
9. Reassemble the SRU.
13–7–3 46–241971P72
FRU 2
SRU
5V Power Supply, STCT–C AP
2. Remove all the wires from the input and output terminals of the defective power supply.
3. Remove the screws that fasten the power supply to the AP.
4. Slide the power supply out of the AP.
5. Slide the new power supply into place, and fasten it to the AP.
6. Fasten the AC input and DC output leads to the corresponding terminals.
7. Plug the AP power cord into its receptacle, to restore power to the AP.
8. Verify the presence of +5VDC 5% on the AP backplane bus bars.
433
13–7–4 46–241971P68
FRU 2
SRU
AP Fan
2. Locate the fan assembly, on the top of the AP:
a. From the rear of the AP, remove 4 of the 6 screws that fasten the fan to the face plate.
b. Return to the front of the AP, and remove the 2 remaining screws.
3. Remove the 2 screws that fasten the fan assembly face plate into place, then slide the
face plate off the top of the AP.
4. Remove the power and ground connections from the defective fan.
5. Remove the 4 screws that fasten the defective fan to the plate.
6. Replace the fan.
7. Restore power to the AP, and check the fan operation.
13–7–5 46–296817P1
FRU 2
SRU
BNC 50–Ohm Terminator
13–7–6 46–296816P2
FRU 1
SRU
BNC T–Connector

13–7–7 46–297711G1
FRU 2
SRU
Cable, 3/60

434
13–7–8 46–296451G3
FRU 2
SRU
Cable, 3/60 SCSI to Wren

13–7–9 46–296454G5
FRU 2
SRU
Cable, 60’ Coaxial BNC

13–7–10 46–296862G1
FRU 2
SRU
Cable, Backplane to PS

13–7–11 46–237686G2
FRU 2
SRU
Cable, DASIOP to Gantry

435
13–7–12 46–297096G1
FRU 2
SRU
Cable, PS to 098 Harness

13–7–13 46–313027G1
FRU 2
SRU
Fan Assembly for Scan Chassis
13–7–14 46–296532P1
FRU 2
SRU
Front Panel Maxi
13–7–15 46–313030G1
FRU 1
SRU
High Speed Disk Drive
13–7–15–1 Remove Scan Chassis Power:

1. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC:
a. Start at the applications level, and touch the |Utilities| softkey to display the Utilities
Main menu.
b. Touch |Shutdown| .
2. Unplug the Scan Chassis power cable.

grounding point on the scan chassis before you continue.
13–7–15–2 Remove high speed disk drive:

1. Remove the 2 screws that fasten the tray to the scan chassis.
2. Remove the cable cover.
3. Remove the cable strain relief.
4. Disconnect all cables from the HSD.
436
5. Pull out the tray assembly.

6. Remove the 4 screws that fasten the defective HSD to the tray.
7. Remove the defective HSD from the tray Install new high speed disk drive:
8. Fasten the new HSD to the tray with 4 screws.
9. Check the high speed disk jumper settings on the new HSD.
10. Slide the tray back in the scan chassis.
11. Reconnect all cables.
12. Reattach the cable strain relief.
13. Reattach the cable cover.
14. Fasten the tray assembly to the scan chassis with 2 screws.
15. Reassemble the SRU and restore power.
16. Run the HiSpeed Advantage High Speed Disk (HSD) Preparation and Media Defect
Management software.
17. Run Reconfig on the OC and select Regen Database. This will build the 450 scanfiles
on the HSD.
18. Run Reconfig on the SBC. This will run ctzload which is linked to ZuesCALS.
ZuesCALS runs sconfig which will run the script CopyFile ToHSD. CopyFileToHSD puts
the two golden scanfiles on to the HSD.
19. If formatting is required, run diskutil* from usr/g/bin.
13–7–16 46–296528G1
FRU 2
SRU
Maxi Bd Assembly with 3/60+ LAN
13–7–17 46–264834P1
FRU 1
SRU
Maxi–HIB

Main menu.

437
13–7–17–2 Remove Maxi–HIB Board:

1. Disconnect the following cables from the SBC/Maxi–HIB Assembly:
» SCSI Cable 46–296451G3
» Serial Port A Cable 46–297711G1
» Serial Port B Cable 46–297123G1
» Ethernet Cable 46–296454G2
» AP Parallel Cable 46–297673G4
» Abort Line Cable 46–297565G1
2. Remove the 8 retaining screws that fasten the 3/60 Maxi Board assembly to the Scan
Chassis.
3. Slowly pull the 3/60 Maxi Board assembly out of the scan chassis.
4. Set the board assembly on top of an anti–static bag, on a flat table.
5. Remove the LAN card:
a. Remove 3 nylon screws (46–208922P23) and washers (46–230523P4) from the top
of the LAN card.
b. Lift up on the P1 connector to disconnect the LAN card from the maxi–HIB assembly.
c. Pull the LAN card away from the face plate.
6. Disassemble the maxi–HIB:
a. Remove the 3 sets of nylon screws and washers from the maxi–HIB.
b. Remove the 4 AMP screws from the front face plate.
c. Remove 1 screw from the solder side of each board holder on the maxi–HIB. This
leaves the right and left holder/extractors attached to the front face plate assembly.
d. Remove the thumb releases. Do not lose the bushings.
e. Lay the board assembly flat on the table.
f. Locate the P4 bus on the center edge of the maxi–HIB board.
g. Lift up on the P4 bus to remove the maxi–HIB from the 3/60 board and face plate.
7. Place the maxi–HIB in an anti–static bag.
13–7–17–3 Install Board:

1. Still wearing the anti–static wrist strap, remove the new maxi–HIB from the shipping box,
and place it on an anti–static bag on top of a flat surface.
2. Check Maxi–HIB jumper settings. (See Illustration 13–5, on page 439
3. Carefully connect the maxi–HIB to the P4 adapter on the 3/60 SBC, while you slide the
board into the front face plate.
4. Install the 4 AMP screws, through the face plate, to the maxi–HIB connectors.
5. Install the 2 screws in the center of the front face plate, to the center board holders on
the maxi–HIB.
6. Fasten the left and right board holders onto the maxi–HIB.
7. Position the LAN card over the maxi–HIB, and fasten it into place with 3 sets of nylon
screws and washers.
8. Slide the 3/60 maxi assembly back into the scan chassis.
a. Apply enough pressure to firmly seat the assembly in the backplane.
b. Fasten the eight (8) front panel screws to the assembly.
438
9. Reconnect the following cables to the SBC/Maxi–HIB Assembly:

10. Restore power to the Scan Chassis, and reassemble the SRU.
13–7–18 Maxi–HIB Board Jumper Settings

ILLUSTRATION 13–5
MAXI–HIB BOARD
VME Reset
P7 P6 Switch LEDs
É
ÉÉAP XRAY DS1 – VME FIFO ACTIVE
DS2 – VME SRAM ACTIVE
DS3 – VME BUSMASTER ACTIVE
É
DS4 – XRAY ABORT ON
Maxi–Hib VME SYSTEM RESET
1 ÉÉ SBX
É
ÉÉ
VME Bus GRANT IN/OUT
J6 AP XFER MODE
VME Bus REQ.
ÉÉ
P4
VME SRAM ADDR.
É
ÉÉ
VME BUS SYS. CONTROLLER
1 1
VME INTER. ACK. ADDR.
É VME FIFO ADDR. J3 J4
ÉÉ J2
1 1
J1 1
J5
É
1
J7
P3 P2 P1
13–7–19 46–264890G1
FRU 1
SRU
Maxi–HIB Adapter Bd
13–7–19–1 Remove Board:

439
Main menu.

3. Disconnect the cables to the SBC/Maxi–HIB Assembly.

4. Unscrew the 8 retaining screws that fasten the 3/60 Maxi Board assembly to the Scan
Chassis.
5. Slowly pull board assembly out of the scan chassis.
6. Lay the board assembly on top of the anti–static bag, on a flat table.
of the LAN card.
8. Disassemble the maxi–HIB:
a. Remove the 3 sets of nylon screws and washers from the maxi–HIB.
b. Remove the 4 AMP screws from the front face plate.
c. Remove 1 screw from the solder side of each board holder on the maxi–HIB. This
leaves the right and left holder/extractors attached to the front face plate assembly.
d. Remove the thumb releases. Do not lose the bushings.
e. Lay the board assembly flat on the table.
f. Locate the P4 bus on the center edge of the maxi–HIB board.
g. Lift up on the P4 bus to remove the maxi–HIB from the 3/60 board and face plate.
9. Place the maxi–HIB in an anti–static bag.

1. Still wearing the anti–static wrist strap, remove the new maxi–HIB adapter board from the
shipping box, and place it on an anti–static bag on top of a flat surface.
2. Check jumper settings on the maxi–HIB.
3. Carefully connect the maxi–HIB to the P4 adapter on the 3/60 SBC while sliding the
board in the front face plate.
4. Install the 4 AMP screws through the face plate to the maxi–HIB connectors.
5. Install the 2 screws in the center of the front face plate to the center board holders on the
maxi–HIB.
6. Install the left and right board holders onto the maxi–HIB using the 1 screw used in
disassembly.
7. Install the LAN card onto the maxi–HIB. Secure with 3 nylon screws and washers.
440
8. Slide the 3/60 maxi assembly back into the scan chassis. Apply enough pressure to
ensure the assembly is properly seated in the backplane. Tighten eight (8) assembly
front panel screws.
9. Reconnect the cables previously removed.
13–7–20 46–297673G4
FRU 2
SRU
Maxi–HIB to HCHIOP Cable

13–7–21 46–278722G1
FRU 1
SRU
Power Cable–SRU Cabinet

13–7–22 46–296841G1
FRU 2
SRU
Power Distribution Cable, Scan Chassis

13–7–23 46–296840G1
FRU 2
SRU
Power Supply to Backplane
441

13–7–24 46–297098G1
FRU 2
SRU
Sabre Interconnect to 096 and 097 Harnesses

13–7–25 46–297097G1
FRU 2
SRU
Sabre Interconnect to 098 Harness

13–7–26 46–297043G2
FRU 2
SRU
Sabre to Xylogics Cable (26 pin)

13–7–27 46–297043G1
FRU 2
SRU
Sabre to Xylogics Cable (60 pin)

442
13–7–28 46–264832P1
FRU 1
SRU
SCA–LAN Bd, SBC
Remove Scan Chassis Power:

Main menu.


1. Disconnect the following cables from the SBC/maxi–HIB assembly:
Chassis.
of the LAN card.
d. Pull the BNC connector through the front face plate.

1. Still wearing the anti–static wrist strap, remove the LAN card from the shipping box, and
place it on an anti–static bag on top of a flat surface.
2. Position the LAN card over the maxi–HIB, and slide the BNC connector through the front
face plate.
3. Connect P1 on the LAN to P5 on the maxi–HIB.
4. Press down on the LAN P5 connector until the card clicks into place.
443
5. Fasten the LAN card to the maxi–HIB with 3 sets of nylon screws and washers.
6. Slide the 3/60 maxi assembly back into the scan chassis.
a. Apply enough pressure to firmly seat the assembly in the backplane.
b. Fasten the eight (8) front panel screws to the assembly.
7. Reconnect the following cables to the SBC/Maxi–HIB Assembly:
13–7–29 SBC Jumper Settings

Illustration 13–6 shows jumper and settings for the SBC.
444
ILLUSTRATION 13–6
SBC JUMPER LOCATIONS AND SETTINGS
Keyboard
Diagnostic LEDs
J800
Memory Jumpers
Norm/Diag switch
Ethernet/Thin Ethernet Jumper

Ethernet High Resolution Jumper
Serial Port B
Serial Port A
Memory SIPP Modules

SCSI
Mono SUN 3/60 SBC
J800
MEMORY, ETHERNET, AND RESOLUTION JUMPERS
SUN 3/60 SBC

24MB – Jumper here for 24MB memory size
EXTXUR – Jumper in/out for Ethernet/Thin Ethernet respectively
HIGHRES – Jumper here for high resolution
13–7–30 46–296799G1
FRU 2
SRU
Scan Chassis Assembly
445
13–7–31 46–297244G1
FRU 2
SRU
Scan Chassis Assembly, Complete
13–7–32 46–264830G1
FRU 1
SRU
Scan Chassis Backplane

a. Start at the applications level, and touch the |Utilities| softkey to display the Utilities Main
menu.

13–7–32–2 Remove Backplane:

1. Disconnect the following cables from the SBC/Maxi–HIB Assembly:
Chassis.
5. Remove the screws from the top and bottom of the xylogics controller board.
6. Press the thumb release buttons, and slide out the board as far as cables allow.
7. Disconnect the cables from the high speed disk.
8. Slide the xylogics controller board the rest of the way out of the chassis, and set it aside.
13–7–32–3 At the back of the scan chassis:

9. Disconnect the J4 and J5 power cables from the scan chassis.
10. Remove the nut and washer that fasten the +5V and ground power supply cables to J12
and J13.
446
11. Carefully remove the 10 screws that fasten the backplane to the scan chassis.
13–7–32–4 Install Backplane:

1. Check backplane jumper settings on the new scan chassis backplane.
» Refer to the Illustrations on page 447 and page 13–8.
2. Position the backplane over the alignment pegs.
3. Fasten the backplane into place with 10 screws.
4. Reconnect cables: white to J12 (+5V), black to J13 (ground).
5. Reconnect J4 and J5 power cables.
6. Slide the board assemblies back into the scan chassis. Remember to reconnect the HSD
cables before you seat the xylogics controller board in the backplane.
7. Reconnect the cables to the maxi–HIB, and restore power to the system.
13–7–33 Scan Chassis Backplane Jumpers
Illustration 13–7 shows the slot assignments for the SRU board scan chassis, and the
location of the backplane jumpers. Illustration 13–8 contains the jumper configuration and
description.
ILLUSTRATION 13–7
SCAN CHASSIS BACKPLANE
VME Backplane SLOT ASSIGNMENTS

(front view)
A1 – SUN 3/60 SBC
A2 – MAXI–HIB
A3 – SPARE SLOT
A4 – XYLOGICS 754 DISK CONTROLLER
SLOT A1 A2 A3 A4
Note: Shaded connectors indicate occupancy by the assigned board.
J7
J8
J9
J10
J11
SRU VME BACKPLANE

(rear view)
447
Illustration 13–8 shows the configuration of the bus grant and IACK jumpers for empty slot A3
of the scan chassis. On the backplane, insert the backplane jumpers to bypass BG0 to BG3
(Bus Grant 3) and IACK (Interrupt Acknowledge) for slot A3.
ILLUSTRATION 13–8
SCAN CHASSIS BACKPLANE JUMPER DESCRIPTIONS
J7
BG0 IN
BG0 OUT
J8
BG1 IN
BG1 OUT
J9
BG2 IN
BG2 OUT
J10
BG3 IN
BG3 OUT
J11
VME BACKPLANE SLOT A3 IACK BYPASS JUMPER
IACK IN
Jumper here to bypass IACK for slot A3
IACK OUT
13–7–34 46–229909P1
FRU 1
SRU
Scan Chassis Boxer Fan
13–7–34–1 Remove Fan:

2. Remove the screw that fastens the tray assembly to the scan chassis.
3. Remove power cables from the fans.
4. Slide the tray assembly out of the scan chassis.
5. Remove 4 screws that fasten each defective fan to the tray.
6. Replace defective fan(s).
448
13–7–34–2 Replace Fan:

1. Use 4 screws to fasten each new fan(s) to the tray.
2. Slide the tray assembly back into scan chassis.
3. Attach power cables to fans.
4. Tighten the screw that fastens the tray assembly to scan chassis.
13–7–35 46–221328P13
FRU 1
SRU
Scan Chassis Power Switch/Circuit Breaker
13–7–36 46–296183P1
FRU 1
SRU
Scan Chassis, Power Supply (+5, ±12, +24V)

Main menu.

13–7–36–2 Remove power supply:

1. From the back of the scan chassis:
a. Remove the +5V cable assembly (46–296840G1).
b. Remove cable 46–297096G1
c. Remove 12V cables.
2. From the front of the scan chassis:
a. Loosen, and remove, the top 2 screws from the metal plate.
b. Remove the metal plate.
3. Remove the incoming line power from the AC input terminals.
4. Slide the tray assembly out of the scan chassis, and lay it on a flat surface.
5. Remove the 4 screws that fasten the power supply to the tray.
13–7–36–3 Install new power supply:

1. Use 4 screws to fasten the new power supply to the tray.
449
2. Slide the tray assembly into the scan chassis.

3. Reattach 46–296840G1, 46–297096G1, and 12V cables.
4. Reconnect the incoming line power to the AC terminals.
5. Restore power to the Scan Chassis.
6. Verify power supply voltage.
» Refer to Illustration 13–9, on page 450.
7. Replace the metal plate, and reassemble the SRU.
13–7–37 Scan Chassis Power Supply Jumpers and Settings

ILLUSTRATION 13–9
SRU +5V, +24V, +12V, –12V POWER SUPPLY
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
AC(L)
AC line voltage Factory set current lim- Auxiliary output voltage +5V output voltage
select jumper iting adjustment POT gain adjustment POT gain adjustment POT
(shown in the (Do Not Tamper) (+24 12V)
112VAC position)
13–7–38 46–296186P1
FRU 1
SRU
Scan Chassis, Power Supply (–5V)

Main menu.

450
13–7–38–2 Remove power supply:

a. Remove 4 screws that fasten the fan plate to the scan chassis.
b. Shift the fan plate to access the –5V power supply.
c. Remove all connections to the input and output terminals of the defective supply.
d. Remove the cable strain relief.
e. Remove the cable to the system disk drive.
2. From the front of the scan chassis:
a. Remove the 2 screws that fasten the tray assembly to the scan chassis.
b. Slide the tray assembly out of the chassis, and set it on a flat surface.
3. Remove the 4 screws that fasten the defective power supply to the tray.
13–7–38–3 Install new power supply:

1. Use the 4 screws to fasten the new power supply to the tray.
2. Slide the tray assembly back into the scan chassis.
a. Attach the input and output wires to the corresponding terminals.
b. Connect the cable to the system disk drive.
c. Reattach the cable strain relief.
5. Restore power to the Scan Chassis.
6. Verify –5V power supply voltage. Refer to Illustration 13–10, on page 452.
13–7–39 Scan Chassis Power Supply Jumpers and Settings

Illustration 13–10 shows jumper and settings for the SRU Scan Chassis power supply.
451
SRU –5V POWER SUPPLY
AC(L) GND –5V output voltage

gain adjustment POT
13–7–40 46–297857G1
FRU 1
SRU
ST 1480 Disk Drive

Main menu.

13–7–40–2 Remove disk drive:

1. Disconnect ribbon cable strain relief.
2. Remove 2 screws that fasten the tray assembly to the scan chassis.
3. Slide the assembly halfway out of the chassis.
4. Disconnect the ground, power and ribbon cables from the drive.
5. Remove 4 screws that fasten the drive to the tray.
6. Remove defective drive.
13–7–40–3 Install new disk drive:

1. Check 1480 disk jumper settings on the new system disk drive.
2. Fasten the new disk drive to the tray with 4 screws.
4. Reconnect the ribbon, power, and ground cables.
452
5. Reattach the ribbon cable strain relief.

13–7–41 46–237328P67
FRU 2
SRU
STCT 4MB Main Memory
1. Unplug the AP power cable.

2. Remove, and keep, 3 screws from the front cover of the AP
3. Remove the AP cover, and set aside.
4. Lift up on the top and bottom thumb release tabs, and slide the defective board out of the
AP chassis.
5. Immediately place the defective board in an anti–static bag.
6. Insert new board.
7. Replace the AP cover, and fasten into place with 3 screws.
8. Restore power to the AP, and reassemble the SRU.
13–7–42 46–237328P69
FRU 2
SRU
STCT 512 KB Public Memory

AP chassis.
453
13–7–43 46–241971P12
FRU 2
SRU
STCT BPC

AP chassis.
13–7–44 46–241971P10
FRU 2
SRU
STCT Cache

AP chassis.
454
13–7–45 46–241971P21
FRU 1
SRU
STCT Chassis with boards
13–7–46 46–237328P54
FRU 2
SRU
STCT Master

AP chassis.
13–7–47 46–241971P14
FRU 2
SRU
STCT MMC

AP chassis.
455
13–7–48 46–237328P53
FRU 2
SRU
STCT Slave

AP chassis.
13–7–49 46–241971P11
FRU 2
SRU
STCT SMP MUX

AP chassis.
456
13–7–50 46–297123G1
FRU 2
SRU
STCT to 3/60

13–7–51 46–237328P57
FRU 2
SRU
STCT/STCT–C ACP

AP chassis.
13–7–52 46–237328P58
FRU 2
SRU
STCT/STCT–C ACU

AP chassis.
457

13–7–53 46–237328P62
FRU 2
SRU
STCT/STCT–C BP

AP chassis.
13–7–54 46–278330P11
FRU 2
SRU
STCT/STCT–C DASIOP

AP chassis.
6. Check DASIOP jumper settings on the new board. Refer to Illustration 13–11, on page
460.
458
13–7–55 46–278330P9
FRU 2
SRU
STCT/STCT–C HCHIOP

AP chassis.
6. Check HCHIOP jumper settings on the new board. Refer to Illustration 13–11, on page
460.
13–7–56 AP Switch Settings

Illustration 13–11 shows switch settings for the AP resident HCHIOP and DASIOP.
459
HCHIOP AND DASIOP SWITCH SETTINGS
HCHIOP DIP SWITCHES

1 Configure as CHIOP (Low speed MM I/F)
2 Configure parity errors as fatal
3 (Engineering use)
o 4 Set host interface odd parity
n
5 Lock track buffer on
6 Enable non–interlock mode
7 Pause on sequence error
8 Pass CPR to IOP Indicates switch position
I–8
DASIOP DIP SWITCHES
1 LSB
2
XFER SYNC
(The logical value of the dip switches=# of
3 80 ns delay.)
o 4 MSB
n
5 LSB
6
7 DATA CLOCK
The logical value of the dip switches=#of
MSB 80 ns delay)
8
A–1 ON = logical 0 OFF = logical 1
13–7–57 46–237328P55
FRU 2
SRU
STCT/STCT–C IOC

460
AP chassis.
6. Check IOC jumper settings on the new board. Refer to Illustration 13–12, on page 461.
13–7–58 SRU Disk Drive I/O Board Switch Settings

Illustration 13–12 shows switch settings for the AP resident IOC board.
IOC SWITCH SETTINGS
1 110 BAUD
2 300 BAUD
3 600 BAUD
o 4 1200 BAUD
n 2400 BAUD
5
6 4800 BAUD
7 9600 BAUD (FOR S140 OR MV7800)
8 19200 BAUD (USED WITH WICAT)
J–8
1 Don’t Care
2 Don’t Care
3 Don’t Care
4 Don’t Care
o
n 5 Don’t Care
6 Don’t Care
7 Don’t Care
Indicates switch selected
8 Don’t Care
G–7
461
13–7–59 46–278330P4
FRU 1
SRU
STCT–C 4MB Main Memory

AP chassis.
13–7–60 46–278330P7
FRU 1
SRU
STCT–C BPCIM

AP chassis.
462
13–7–61 46–278330P2
FRU 1
SRU
STCT–C MSP

AP chassis.
13–7–62 46–278330P6
FRU 1
SRU
STCT–C S–Cache

AP chassis.
463
13–7–63 46–266700P3
FRU 2
SRU
Wren IV Disk Drive

menu.

13–7–63–2 Remove disk drive:

1. Disconnect ribbon cable strain relief.
2. Remove 2 screws that fasten the tray assembly to the scan chassis.
3. Slide the assembly halfway out of the chassis.
4. Disconnect the ground, power and ribbon cables from the drive.
5. Remove 4 screws that fasten the drive to the tray.
6. Remove defective drive.
13–7–63–3 Install new disk drive:

1. Check the jumper settings on the new system disk drive.
2. Fasten the new disk drive to the tray with 4 screws.
4. Reconnect the ribbon, power, and ground cables.
5. Reattach the ribbon cable strain relief.
13–7–64 46–297694G1
FRU 1
SRU
Xylogics Controller
Remove Scan Chassis Power:

menu.
464


1. Locate the Xylogics Controller board in the Scan Chassis
2. Remove the screws from the top and bottom of the xylogics controller board.
3. Press the thumb release buttons, and slide out the board as far as cables allow.
4. Disconnect the cables from the high speed disk.
5. Slide the xylogics controller board the rest of the way out of the chassis, and set it on the
anti–static bag, on a flat surface.
6. Remove screws that fasten the plastic cover in place.
7. Remove the 3 screws that fasten the xylogics controller to the frame kit.
8. Disconnect the cables from the defective xylogics board.
9. Replace the xylogics controller board.
13–7–64–2 Replace Board:

1. Check the jumper settings on the new xylogics controller board. Refer to Illustration
13–13, on page 466.
2. Reattach cables to the new xylogics controller board.
3. Reattach the plastic cover.
4. Slide the xylogics controller part way into the scan chassis.
5. Reconnect the HSD cables.
6. Seat the xylogics controller board in the backplane.
7. Insert, and tighten, the screws at the top and bottom of the plate.
13–7–65 SRU Disk Controller Board

Illustration 13–13 shows jumper settings for the disk controller (Xylogics 754).
465
DISK CONTROLLER SWITCH AND JUMPER SETTINGS
Jumper Block JA
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4
· Selects base address of EE40
Jumper Blocks JB, JC & JD

Bus Request Bus Grant/Out Bus Grant/In level
1 5 1 5 1 5 0
2 6 2 6 2 6 1
3 7 3 7 3 7 2
4 8 4 8 4 8 3
JB JC JD
· Selects Bus Request level 3

· Selects NO Parallel Arbitration
Jumper Block JE
2 4
1 3
· Selects unrestricted use of Maintenance Mode

· Selects to execute 754 self–test on power–up
13–7–66 SRU Disk Drive I/O Board Switch Settings

Illustration 13–14 shows switch settings for the disk drive (Sabre 1230).
466
DISK DRIVE I/O BOARD SWITCH SETTINGS
1A 1 1D
Enables channel 1 & sends index & sector on A cable only.
1B 2 1D
2A 3 2D
Disables channel 2.
2B 4 2D
o
RDY p 5 POK Normal Ready status. (POK for use with Imprimis power supply only.)
T2 e 6 T1 Enables Extended Cylinder Address Bit 210, via Tag 1.
n
E 7 O SME–E mode.
XA 8 N Extended Cylinder Address.
AR 9 RT Absolute Reserve (dual channel only).
R 10 L Local power on. (Doesn’t cycle drive power when remote power cycled.)
A213
20 1
D 2
E
V 3
I o 4
C p Device Id = 0
E e 5
n 6
I
D 7
27 8 indicates switch selected
A224
467
13–8 Table
13–8–1 46–208718P15
FRU 2
Table
1 1/4” dia. Clamp
Note: Use the TA713D20 clamp to fasten the large, main harness bundle to the right side of the
base frame.
1. Pay attention to the orientation of the clamp before you remove it.
2. Remove the screw from the clamp to release the cable.
3. Restore the clamp to its original orientation, then fasten in place with the screw.
13–8–2 46–208718P12
FRU 2
Table
1” dia. Clamp
Note: The TA713D16 clamp is the second clamp fastening the main harness to the backside of
the ETC PWA chassis.
13–8–3 46–208718P5
FRU 2
Table
1/2” dia. Clamp
Note: Use multiple TA713D8 clamps to fasten harness branches to both z–channels.
13–8–4 46–208718P8
FRU 2
Table
11/16” dia. Clamp
Note: Use the TA713D11 clamp to fasten the harness branch next to, and under, the right
control panel.
468
13–8–5 46–208718P9
FRU 2
Table
3/4” dia. Clamp
Note: Use multiple TA713D12 clamps to fasten harness branches to the base frame, front leg,
ETC PWA chassis, and the underside of the right z–channel.
13–8–6 46–208718P2
FRU 2
Table
5/16” dia. Clamp
Note: Use multiple TA713D5 clamps to fasten harness branches to the base frame, front leg,
and both z–channels.
13–8–7 46–208718P11
FRU 2
Table
7/8” dia. Clamp
Note: Use the TA713D14 clamp to fasten the small, main harness bundle to the floor of the
base frame.
13–8–8 46–297093P1
FRU 1
Table
AC/DC Power Switch
1. Raise the table to maximum height.
2. Turn off the Table breaker in the PDU, to remove power from the entire table.
3. Remove the left Base Covers.
4. Locate the Power Assembly:
a. Remove the screws from the outlet cover.
b. Move the cover aside, to gain access to the power switches.
c. Loosen the nut that fastens the defective power switch to the plate.
469
d. Remove the switch from the plate
Note: Pay attention to the location of the wires on the defective switch, before you remove
them. Restore the wires to their original configuration on the replacement switch.
5. Loosen the screw terminals, and remove the wires from the defective switch.
6. Transfer the wires to the same location on the replacement switch.
7. Reassemble the Table, and replace the covers.
8. Turn on the Table breaker in the PDU to restore power.
13–8–9 46–296592P1
FRU 2
Table
Actuator Cover
2. Remove the Base Covers, the right Table Side Covers and right Side Panels.
3. Locate the Actuator cover:
a. Remove both of the clips that fasten the spring pin to the actuator cover.
b. Slide out the pin, to release the spring.
c. Remove the two screws that fasten the cover hinge to the U–bracket.
d. Remove the Actuator cover from the table.
4. When you install the actuator cover:
a. Center the cover in the rear leg opening.
b. Tighten the hinge screws
c. Seat the spring in the notch on the spring pin.
13–8–10 46–296561P10
FRU 1
Table
Actuator Limit Switch
3. Remove the Base Covers.
4. Remove the Actuator Cover, if you plan to replace or adjust the Upper Limit Switch.
(Refer to section 13–8–9, on page 470)
5. Remove the wires from the switch.
6. To remove the Upper Limit Switch:
a. Loosen the screw that fastens the switch in place.
b. Slide the switch up, along the actuator until free.
c. Remove the wires from the terminals
7. To remove the Lower Limit Switch:
a. Remove the screw and two washers from the switch.
470
b. The nut plate is trapped, but may slide down the actuator.
c. Remove the wires from the terminals
8. To install either limit switch:
a. Slide the switch into place on the actuator.
b. Connect the wires to the W and C terminals.
c. Do not tighten the screw until you adjust the switch position.
9. To adjust the Upper Limit Switch:
a. Locate the calibration plate, on the right side of the base frame.
b. Loosen the two Cal plate screws.
c. Move the plate to its horizontal position, and tighten the screws.
d. Restore power, and elevate the table until the distance between the bottom of the Cal
plate, at the UPPER LIMIT SWITCH position, and the center mark on the upper, rear
leg pivot pin equals 36.63 0.03.
e. Remove power, and attach a continuity device to the W and C terminals.
f. Loosen the clamping screw on the upper limit switch.
g. Slide the switch upward until at least 1 of the magnet tubes appears below the
switch.
h. Slowly slide the switch downward until the switch opens, then tighten the screw.
10. To adjust the Lower Limit Switch:
a. Locate the calibration bar, on the right, rear corner of the base frame.
b. Remove the Cal bar from its storage position.
c. Reposition the bar in the storage hole, to make it parallel to the rear surface of the
base frame, then tighten the screw.
d. Restore power, and elevate the table until the distance between the bottom outer
edge of the Cal bar and the center mark on the upper, rear leg pivot pin equals 14.51
0.03.
e. Remove power, and attach a continuity device to the W and C terminals.
f. Loosen the clamping screw on the switch, and slide the switch downward as far as
possible.
g. Slowly slide the switch upward, until the switch opens, then tighten the screw.
11. Return the calibration plate and bar to their storage positions.
13–8–11 2100671
FRU 1
Table
Actuator Magnet Rod
3. Remove the Base Covers, the right Side Panels and the Actuator Cover. Refer to
Actuator Cover section 13–8–9, on page 470.
471
4. Loosen and remove the two nuts that fasten the Magnet Rod to its plate at the upper end
of the actuator.
5. Slide the Magnet Rod out of the actuator.
6. Replace the Magnet Rod, and adjust the Upper and Lower Actuator switches.
Note: Because magnet strengths vary, follow the procedure that starts on page 470, to adjust
both Actuator Limit Switches.

13–8–12 46–296561P11
FRU 1
Table
Actuator Magnet Rod
3. Remove the Base Covers, the right Side Panels and the Actuator Cover. Refer to
Actuator Cover section 13–8–9, on page 470.
4. Loosen and remove the two nuts that fasten the Magnet Rod to its plate at the upper end
of the actuator.
5. Slide the Magnet Rod out of the actuator.
6. Replace the Magnet Rod, and adjust the Upper and Lower Actuator switches.
Note: Because magnet strengths vary, follow the procedure that starts on page 470, to adjust
both Actuator Limit Switches.

13–8–13 2103043
FRU 1
Table
Actuator, Table Elevation
PREVENT INJURY TO YOURSELF OR OTHERS. IF THE GAS
SPRINGS CANNOT SUPPORT THE WEIGHT OF THE TABLE, THE
WARNING
TABLE COULD FALL. PLACE A SUPPORT BAR BETWEEN THE
Z–CHANNEL AND THE FLOOR, OR ENLIST THE AID OF A SECOND
PERSON TO MONITOR THE TABLE.

2. Important: Remove all objects from the cradle.
4. Remove the Base Covers, the right Side Panels and the Actuator Cover.
5. Remove the Actuator Cover U–bracket.
» Follow the Actuator Cover removal procedure, on page 470.
472
6. Disconnect the motor wires and ground strap.

7. Cut the ty–wraps, and remove the clamp that fastens the limit switch wires to the
Actuator.
8. The gas springs keep the Actuator under tension, even when you raise the table to
maximum height. To remove tension from the Actuator:
» Raise the table past its upper height limit with a power supply, or by manually turning
the hex drive on the end of the motor.
» Raise the table to fully extend the gas springs, while the lower gas spring remains at
the back of the slot in the lower mounting block.
9. Loosen and remove the locknut from the upper Actuator mounting pin. If you cannot
easily remove the upper Actuator mounting pin, return to the previous step, and raise the
table to remove the gas spring tension.
Note: Important: Loosen both actuator mounting pins before you remove either one.
10. Pay attention to the positions of the two bumper washers and spacer when you remove
them.
11. Retract the Actuator with the power supply, or the hex drive, but do not let the Actuator
fall when the rod end clears the upper mounting block.
CAUTION Do not over shorten the Actuator.
12. Remove, and keep, the E–ring from the lower mounting pin.
13. Slide the pin out.
14. Lift and remove the Actuator from the table.
15. When you install the Actuator:
a. Coat the lower pin with a thin layer of Molykote grease.
b. Take care to install the E–ring correctly.
c. Place one bumper washer on either side of the rod end of the Upper Mounting Pin.
» On the right side, the bumper washer fits over the shoulder on the hex–side of
the pin.
» On the left side, the spacer fits inside the bumper washer, and spaces the rod
end away from the mounting clevis.
d. Torque the locknut to 40 ft–lbs.
16. Connect the motor wires to the corresponding terminals.
17. Connect the wires to the corresponding W and C terminals of each switch.
18. Ty–wrap the limit switch harness in place.
19. Adjust the Upper and Lower Actuator Limit Switches. The Actuator adjustment procedure
begins on page 471.
20. Reassemble the Actuator Cover. Refer to Actuator Cover section 13–8–9, on page 470.
473
13–8–14 46–296561P1
FRU 1
Table
Actuator, Table Elevation
PREVENT INJURY TO YOURSELF OR OTHERS. IF THE GAS
SPRINGS CANNOT SUPPORT THE WEIGHT OF THE TABLE, THE
WARNING
TABLE COULD FALL. PLACE A SUPPORT BAR BETWEEN THE
Z–CHANNEL AND THE FLOOR, OR ENLIST THE AID OF A SECOND
PERSON TO MONITOR THE TABLE.

4. Remove the Base Covers, the right Side Panels and the Actuator Cover.
5. Remove the Actuator Cover U–bracket.
» Follow the Actuator Cover removal procedure, on page 470.
6. Disconnect the motor wires and ground strap.
7. Cut the ty–wraps, and remove the clamp that fastens the limit switch wires to the
Actuator.
10. Pay attention to the positions of the two bumper washers and spacer when you remove
them.
11. Retract the Actuator with the power supply, or the hex drive, but do not let the Actuator
fall when the rod end clears the upper mounting block.
CAUTION Do not over shorten the Actuator.
12. Remove, and keep, the E–ring from the lower mounting pin.
13. Slide the pin out.
14. Lift and remove the Actuator from the table.
15. When you install the Actuator:
a. Coat the lower pin with a thin layer of Molykote grease.
c. Place one bumper washer on either side of the rod end of the Upper Mounting Pin.
474
» On the right side, the bumper washer fits over the shoulder on the hex–side of
the pin.
» On the left side, the spacer fits inside the bumper washer, and spaces the rod
end away from the mounting clevis.
d. Torque the locknut to 40 ft–lbs.
16. Connect the motor wires to the corresponding terminals.
17. Connect the wires to the corresponding W and C terminals of each switch.
18. Ty–wrap the limit switch harness in place.
19. Adjust the Upper and Lower Actuator Limit Switches. The Actuator adjustment procedure
begins on page 471.
20. Reassemble the Actuator Cover. Refer to Actuator Cover section 13–8–9, on page 470.
22. If necessary, turn on the Table breaker in the PDU to restore power.
13–8–15 46–221532P18
FRU 2
Table
Belt, Cradle Drive
3. Remove the Cradle Drive Assembly, and set it on a work surface. Cradle Drive Assembly
procedure begins on page 479.
4. Remove the belt from the pulleys:
a. Loosen the four screws that fasten the motor in place.
b. Slide the motor toward the drive roller, to remove tension from the belt.
c. Remove the belt.
5. After you install the new belt:
a. Slide the motor away from the drive roller, until the belt deflects 0.050/0.060 inches
with 4–6 oz applied at its mid–span.
b. Tighten the four screws, to fasten the motor with tension on the belt.
6. Replace the Cradle Drive Assembly.
13–8–16 46–170047P7
FRU 1
Table
Belt, Elevation Encoder
3. Remove the Base Covers and left Side Panels.
4. Remove the elevation encoder belt from the sprockets:
475
a. Loosen the two screws that fasten the Elevation Encoder Assembly to the base.
b. Slide the encoder assembly toward the large sprocket, to remove tension from the
encoder belt.
c. Remove the belt.
5. After you install the new belt:
a. Align the the splice on the belt with the mark on the large sprocket.
b. Slide the Elevation Encoder Assembly away from the large sprocket, until the belt
deflects 0.250 inches with 32–35 oz. applied at its mid–span.
c. Tighten both screws, to fasten the encoder assembly in place, with tension on the
belt.
6. Loosen the coupler screw, and adjust the Encoder Table Elevation C–pulse.
» Encoder Table Elevation procedure begins on page 483.
» The C–Pulse adjustment procedure begins on page 483.
7. Loosen, and adjust, the switch cam. Table Interference Matrix Switch procedure begins
on page 491.
9. If necessary, turn on the Table breaker in the PDU to restore power.
13–8–17 46–297332P1
FRU 2
Table
BNC, T–Connector (50 Ohm)
1. Locate the T–connector on the SCA–LAN PWB, on the table ETC PWB.
2. Rotate the knurled ring to remove, and install, the BNC T–Connector.
3. Use the plastic support to position the right–angle BNC connectors.
13–8–18 46–297350P1
FRU 2
Table
Bumper Disk, Upper Pin Actuator
The front leg attachment point for the Actuator contains two Bumper Disks. Refer to the Table
Elevation Actuator procedure, on page 472.
13–8–19 46–221597P2
FRU 2
Table
Bumper, Cradle
476
13–8–20 46–297253P1
FRU 2
Table
Cable Support, ETC
The ETC PWA contains the Cable Support, which positions the BNC–T connector. Refer to
the SCA–LAN Bd ETC procedure, on page 500.
13–8–21 46–297576P1
FRU 2
Table
Cal Pin
Use the Cal Pin to lock the cradle/carriage into position, at specific locations.
» Remove the right Table Side Covers, and Cradle Drive Cover, to access the Cal pin.
» Store the Cal pin in the bottom of the right z–channel, beneath the Cradle Drive Cover.
The following procedures use the Cal pin:
» Home Switch: start on page 490

» Home Latch Assembly: starts on page 489
» Longitudinal Encoder Assembly: starts on page 493
» Longitudinal Limit Switch: starts on page 495
» Longitudinal Encoder Pot Assembly: starts on page 497
13–8–22 46–208580P18
FRU 2
Table
Cam Follower, Large, Carriage
13–8–23 46–208580P19
FRU 2
Table
Cam Follower, Small, Carriage
13–8–24 46–296232G1
FRU 2
Table
Carriage Assembly
477
13–8–25 46–297338P1
FRU 2
Table
Clamp, Large U–shape
Note: The TA06306SZ20CR clamp is the first clamp fastening the main harness to the
backside of the ETC PWA chassis.
1. Remove two screws from the clamp to release the cable.

2. Position the clamp, then fasten in place with the screws.
13–8–26 46–297648P1
FRU 2
Table
Clamp, Small U–shape
Note: The TA06101SZ12CR clamp fastens the upper main harness branch to the side of the
right z–channel.
1. Remove two screws from the clamp to release the cable.

2. Position the clamp, then fasten in place with the screws.
13–8–27 46–297722P1
FRU 2
Table
Connector, Tape Switch, Female
13–8–28 46–297721P1
FRU 2
Table
Connector, Tape Switch, Male
13–8–29 46–297420G1
FRU 1
Table
Cradle Assembly
2. Drive the Cradle/carriage to the latched, home position, before you try to remove the
assembly. An unlatched Cradle/carriage assembly could quickly move toward the gantry,
and damage the longitudinal encoder assembly.
3. Remove, and keep, the six plug buttons that cover the cradle bolt holes.
4. Loosen, and remove, the six screws, located beneath the plug buttons.
5. Lift the Cradle upward, to remove the assembly from the table.
478
6. To install the Cradle:

a. Position the rear end of the Cradle over the carriage.
b. Align the holes in the cradle to the threads in the carriage.
c. Start, but do not tighten, all six screws.
d. Look through the gantry bore at the end of table.
e. Laterally position the Cradle on the drive rollers, until the same gap exists between
the sloped sides of the Cradle and the guide rollers.
f. Tighten the six screws to 13 ft–lbs.
g. Replace the plug buttons.
7. Make sure the cradle/carriage does not rest against the latch.
13–8–30 46–264370G1
FRU 1
Table
Cradle Drive Amp
4. Loosen the captive screws, or remove the four screws, that fasten the servo amp cover
in place.
5. Remove the servo amp cover, and set aside.
6. Locate the Cradle Drive Amplifier, toward the outside of the table:
a. Detach all of the wire connectors.
b. Remove the seven screws that fasten the Amp to its mounting bracket.
7. Remove, and replace, the defective Cradle Drive Amplifier.
13–8–31 46–296235G1
FRU 2
Table
Cradle Drive Assembly

3. Remove the right Table Side Covers.
4. Latch the carriage, and remove the Cradle Assembly. Cradle Assembly procedure begins
on page 478.
5. Loosen the two captive screws, and remove the Cradle Drive Cover.
a. Disconnect the ground strap from the Z–Channel
b. Unplug the J21 wire connector from the left side.
c. Unplug the J18 wire connectors from the right side.
479
Note: An unlatched Cradle/carriage assembly could quickly move toward the gantry, and
damage the longitudinal encoder assembly.
6. Move the carriage toward the gantry:

a. Hold the carriage in place with one hand.
b. Manually unlatch the carriage with the other hand.
c. Slowly move the carriage toward the gantry, until it meets the bumper stop.
7. Remove the Cradle Drive Assembly:
a. Tilt the front roller of the Cradle Drive downward.
b. Lift the entire assembly up, then backward, and then down.
c. Gently remove the assembly from the bottom of the table.
Note: Take care not to disturb the Longitudinal Encoder cable.
8. After you reassemble the Cradle Drive:

a. Center the Cradle between the guide rollers
b. Torque the six screws to 13 ft–lbs.
» Cradle Assembly procedure begins on page 478.
» Reassemble the Table, and replace the covers.
13–8–32 46–296594P1
FRU 2
Table
Cradle Drive Cover
2. Loosen the two captive screws at the rear of the cover.
3. Slide the cover forward, until it clears the two mounting pins.
13–8–33 46–288226G1
FRU 2
Table
Cradle Release Switch
13–8–34 46–220277P11
FRU 2
Table
E–Ring, Lower Pin Actuator
This E–Ring fastens the lower Actuator mounting pin, at the clevis block, in the base frame.
Refer to the Table Elevation Actuator procedure, on page 472.
480
13–8–35 46–220277P15
FRU 2
Table
E–Ring, Table Gas Spring Pin
This E–Ring is used to fasten both Gas Spring mounting pins. Refer to the Table Gas Spring
procedure, on page 486.
13–8–36 46–297432P1
FRU 2
Table
E–Stop Button
13–8–37 46–288410G1
FRU 2
Table
E–Stop Switch
13–8–38 46–278446P1
FRU 2
Table
Electrical Outlet
4. Locate the Power Assembly:
a. Remove the screws from the outlet cover.
b. Pull out the cover to access the wire connections.
Note: Pay attention to the location of the wires on the defective outlet, before you remove
them. Restore the wires to their original configuration on the replacement outlet.
5. Loosen the screw terminals, and remove the wires from the hot, neutral and ground
terminals.
» White wire to silver screw
» Black wire to brass screw
» Green & yellow wire to green (ground) screw
6. Remove, and replace, the defective outlet.
7. Transfer the wires to the same locations on the replacement outlet.
481
13–8–39 46–296633G1
FRU 2
Table
Elevation Encoder Assembly
3. Remove the Base Covers, and the left Side Panels.
4. Locate the table harness at the rear of the ETC mounting panel:
a. Disconnect the J15 Encoder cable from the table harness.
b. Cut the ty–wraps, to free the cable.
5. Loosen, and remove, the two screws that fasten the Elevation Encoder Assembly to the
table base.
6. Slide the Assembly toward the large sprocket, to relieve belt tension.
7. Remove the belt from the encoder assembly.
8. Remove the defective Encoder Assembly from the table.
Elevation Encoder Assembly –continued–
9. Install the replacement Elevation Encoder Assembly:
a. Replace the belt
b. Slide the Elevation Encoder Assembly away from the large sprocket, until the belt
deflects 0.250” with 32–35 oz. applied at its mid–span.
c. Tighten both screws, to fasten the encoder assembly in place, with tension on the
belt.
10. Adjust the encoder C–Pulse position.
» Encoder Table Elevation (C–pulse) procedure begins on page 483.
» The C–Pulse adjustment procedure begins on page 483.
11. Adjust the Table Interference Matrix Switch. Interference Matrix Switch procedure begins
on page 491.
12. Characterize the elevation axis. The Mechanical Characterization procedure begins on
page 46.
13–8–40 46–288170G1
FRU 1
Table
Elevation/Tilt Amp.
in place.
482
6. Locate the Elevation/Tilt Amplifier, toward the inside of the table.

a. Detach all of the wire connectors.
b. Remove the seven screws that fasten the Amp to its mounting bracket.
7. Remove, and replace, the defective Elevation/Tilt Amplifier.
13–8–41 46–296854P1
FRU 1
Table
Encoder, Table Elevation
3. Remove the Base Covers, and the left Side Panels.
4. Locate the table harness at the rear of the ETC mounting panel:
a. Disconnect the J15 Encoder cable from the table harness.
b. Cut the ty–wraps, to free the cable.
5. Locate the Elevation Encoder Assembly:
a. Loosen the screw on the encoder–side of the flexible coupling. (if the encoder
assembly has a flexible coupling)
b. Loosen the two set screws that fasten the thumb wheel to the encoder shaft. (if the
encoder assembly has a thumb wheel)
6. Remove the encoder assembly:
a. Locate the three servo clamps that fasten the encoder to the mounting block.
b. Turn each servo clamp 1/2 turn ccw.
c. Pull the encoder away from the block.
d. Slide the thumb wheel and the spacer off the shaft.
e. Remove the encoder from the table.
7. Install the replacement encoder assembly:
a. Place the spacer on the Encoder shaft.
b. Insert the shaft through the block and thumb wheel.
c. Firmly seat the encoder in the block.
d. Let the Encoder cable hang down ( 45 degrees) while you tighten the three servo
clamps.
e. Press the thumbwheel against the spacer, and the Encoder, while you tighten the two
set screws in the thumbwheel.
8. C–Pulse Adjustment:
a. Locate the Calibration plate, on the right side of the base frame.
b. Loosen the two screws on the Cal plate, move the plate to its horizontal position,
then tighten the screws.
c. Turn on the Table breaker in the PDU to restore power.
483
d. Restore table power, and elevate the table until the distance between the bottom of
the Cal plate, at the C–pulse position, and the center mark on the upper, rear leg
pivot pin equals 30.44 .01 inches.
e. Turn the thumbwheel, to rotate the encoder shaft, and light the C–Pulse LED on the
ETC PWB.
f. Tighten the flexible coupler screw to clamps the Encoder shaft in the C–Pulse
position.
g. Verify the C–Pulse LED remains lit.
h. Return the Cal plate to its storage position.
13–8–42 46–264368G1
FRU 1
Table
ETC Bd
3. Turn off the Table breaker in the PDU, to remove power from the entire table, or turn off
the breaker switch at the rear of the table.

grounding point on the table before you continue.
4. Locate the Table ETC board in the bottom of the table.

a. Remove, and keep, 12 screws that fasten the ETC board to the standoffs.
b. Detach all connectors from the ETC board.
c. Detach ETC Board from the CPU Board.
5. Replace ETC Board:
a. Connect ETC Board to CPU Board.
b. Fasten to the standoffs with 12 screws.
c. Attach all connectors.
6. Reassemble the Table
7. Restore power to the table, and replace the covers.
13–8–43 46–296788G1
FRU 2
Table
ETC Chassis Assembly
484
13–8–44 46–229455P1
FRU 1
Table
Fan, ETC
4. Unplug the Fan connector.
5. Pay attention to the position of the Fan connector (lower left corner) and the direction of
air flow (toward the CPU PWA).
6. Remove three screws that fasten the Fan to the power assembly bracket.
7. Remove the two screws that fasten the guard to the defective Fan.
8. When you install the replacement Fan, position it with the connector in the lower left
corner and the air flow indicator pointing toward the CPU PWA.
13–8–45 46–297664P1
FRU 2
Table
Filler Cover Spring
13–8–46 46–297896G1
FRU 2
Table
Fixed Dzus Fastener Kit
Use the Fixed Dzus Fasteners to fasten the table base covers to the table frame.
» Each cover has four Dzus Fasteners.

» The kit includes the short stud, a fixed receptacle, two retainers and two flat–head rivets.
13–8–47 46–297895G1
FRU 2
Table
Floating Dzus Fastener Kit
Use the Floating Dzus Fasteners to fasten the table side covers to the table frame.
» Each cover has two Dzus Fasteners.

» The kit includes the long stud, a floating receptacle with two shouldered spacers, one
retainer and two flat–head rivets.
485
13–8–48 46–296129G1
FRU 2
Table
Footswitch Assembly
13–8–49 46–296821P1
FRU 2
Table
Front End Cover
13–8–50 46–170021P15
FRU 1
Table
Fuse, Servo Amps
in place.
6. Remove the plastic Fuse cover, if present.
7. Remove the defective fuse from its holder.
8. Install the new fuse.
13–8–51 46–296891P1
FRU 1
Table
Gas Spring
4. Remove the Base Covers, the right Side Panels.
486
7. Remove the E–Rings from the top and bottom Gas Spring mounting pins.
8. Remove the pins from their mounting blocks.
9. Remove both Gas Springs.
DO NOT THROW DEFECTIVE GAS SPRINGS IN THE TRASH!

COMPACTING A PRESSURIZED GAS SPRING MAY CAUSE IT TO
WARNING EXPLODE. RETURN BOTH GAS SPRINGS TO:
GEMS Recycling Center

Ace Warehouse
Attn: Paul Neumiller
2200 E. College Ave.
BLDG. 11
Cudahy, WI, 53110
10. When you install the replacement Gas Springs:

a. Position the Gas Spring pressure chambers UP, or closest to the front table leg.
13–8–52 46–297155G2
FRU 2
Table
Ground Strap, Long
Fasten this Ground Strap between the table base frame and the
Power Assembly ground bar.
13–8–53 46–297155G1
FRU 2
Table
Ground Strap, Short
Use this Ground Strap in ten locations, between:
» The Cradle Drive and the left z–channel

» Both z–channels and the front leg
» The front leg and the base frame
» The rear leg and the base frame
» Each Side Panel and the corresponding z–channel
» The Actuator and the base frame
487
13–8–54 46–218193P1
FRU 2
Table
Guide Wheel, Carriage
13–8–55 46–297448P1
FRU 2
Table
Handle Extension, Cradle
13–8–56 46–297088G1
FRU 2
Table
Harness, Power Assembly

13–8–57 46–296377P1
FRU 1
Table
Heurikon Bd, ETC

grounding point on the table before you continue.
4. Locate the ETC chassis assembly:

a. Loosen the captive screw that fastens the ETC chassis to the
center of the table base.
b. Pivot the chassis panel until the Heurikon PWA reaches the
horizontal position.
c. Loosen, and remove, the screw that fastens the Heurikon PWA to the ETC chassis.
d. Disconnect the Heurikon PWA from the ETC PWA.
e. Slide the defective Heurikon PWA out of the card guide.
488
5. Install the replacement Heurikon PWA.

13–8–58 46–297678P1
FRU 2
Table
Hinge, Actuator Cover
13–8–59 46–296233G1
FRU 1
Table
Home Latch Assembly
3. Remove the right Table Side Covers, and Cradle Drive Cover, to access the Cal pin.
4. Install, and tighten, the Cal pin in the home position, to hold the carriage in place.
5. Remove the Cradle Assembly and the right side Rail Cover. Cradle Assembly procedure
begins on page 478.
6. Disconnect the harness at the terminal strip.
7. Remove the four screws that fasten the Latch Assembly to the z–channel.
8. Remove the defective Latch assembly.
9. Install the replacement Latch Assembly, but do not tighten the four screws.
10. Adjust the position of the entire Latch Assembly in its slots:
a. Adjust the Latch assembly until the distance between the carriage latch block, and
the forward edge of the latch bar opening, equals 0.050 0.005 inches.
b. Maintain this distance while you tighten the four screws.
c. Adjust the set screw in the latch clevis block, until the outer edge of the latch bar
overlaps the outer edge of the carriage latch block by 0.050 0.00 inches.
d. Maintain this distance while you tighten the jam nut.
11. Make sure the solenoid plunger bottoms out:
a. Adjust the position of the solenoid bracket, until the clearance between the outer
edge of the latch bar and the outer edge of the carriage latch block equals 0.050
0.005 inches.
b. Maintain this distance while you tighten the two screws.
12. Adjust the position of the spring bracket, until the spring has 0.125 inches preload, when
the latch bar rests against the set screw. Maintain this distance while you tighten the two
screws.
13. Install the Cradle. Cradle Assembly procedure begins on page 478.
14. Return the Cal pin to its storage position.
489
13–8–60 46–136334P23
FRU 1
Table
Home Position Switch
4. Install, and tighten, the Cal pin about one–half inch from the home position, to hold the
carriage in place.
5. Disconnect the wires from the Home Position switch terminals.

6. Remove the nut that fastens the switch in place.
7. Remove the defective switch from its bracket.
8. Install the replacement switch. Make sure you connect the wires to the COM and N.O.
terminals.
9. Adjust the position of the switch in the bracket:
a. Loosen the the two nuts that fasten the bracket in place
b. Move the bracket until the switch actuates when the carriage reaches 0.50 0.03
inches from the Home Position
13–8–61 46–297687P1
FRU 1
Table
Intercom Speaker
3. Remove the right Side Panels.
4. Remove the two nuts that fasten the speaker cover to the speaker.
5. Remove the two nuts that fasten the Speaker and grill in place.
6. Remove the defective speaker, and install the replacement speaker.
490
13–8–62 46–136334P57
FRU 1
Table
Interference Matrix Switch

4. Remove the Servo Amp Assembly. The Servo Amp replacement procedure begins on
page 501.
5. Remove the two screws that fasten the interference switches to the bracket.
6. Detach the wires from the terminals of the defective switch.

7. Remove the defective switch and install the replacement switch.
8. Fasten the switches to the bracket, but not not tighten the screws.
9. Adjust the switch–to–cam clearance:
a. Position the switches until the roller lever comes in contact with the switch housing.
b. Adjust the switch position until a 0.035/0.045 inch gap exists between the roller and
the outside cam surface.
c. Maintain this distance while you tighten the two screws.
11. Adjust the actuation point:
a. Locate the Cal plate, on the right side of the base frame
b. Loosen the two Cal plate screws, move the plate to the horizontal position, then
tighten the Cal plate screws.
c. Elevate the table until the distance between the bottom of the Cal plate, at the INT.
MTX SWITCH S2 position, and the center mark on the upper, rear leg pivot pin
equals 29.14 0.03 inches.
12. Adjust the cam:
a. Loosen the cam clamping screw.
b. Rotate the cam until switch S2 (closest to center of the table) rides on the outside
surface of the cam.
c. Turn the cam CW (seen from the left side of the table) until S2 actuates.
d. Tighten the cam clamping screw, and verify the setting.
13–8–63 46–297805G1
FRU 2
Table
Jumper Plug, Tape Switch
Use the Jumper Plug to simulate the presence of a Side Cover Tape Switch, when you
remove the corresponding cover from the table.
491
» Refer to the Table Side Covers procedures.

» The Table Side Cover descriptions begin on page 502
13–8–64 46–297431G1
FRU 2
Table
Jumper, Table Rear Cover Assembly

13–8–65 46–221914P3
FRU 2
Table
Lamp Assembly, Table Power Supply
13–8–66 46–327096G2
FRU 2
Table
Left Base Cover
2. Turn each of four captive Dzus fasteners one–quarter turn CCW, to release the cover.
3. Turn each of four captive Dzus fasteners one–quarter turn CW, to fasten the cover. The
screwdriver slot in the fastener appears horizontal when you successfully engage the
fastener.
13–8–67 46–296909G1
FRU 1
Table
Left Control Panel
3. Remove the Table Side Covers.
4. Disconnect the ribbon cable(s) and J1 connector, from the control panel.
5. Remove the four sets of screws, washers, and spacers, and the two fishpaper spacers,
that fasten the control panel to the table.
6. After you install the replacement Control Panel and tighten the hardware, make sure the
panel floats freely.
492
13–8–68 46–296827P1
FRU 2
Table
Left Filler Cover
13–8–69 46–297698P1
FRU 1
Table
Leg Tape Switch
3. Remove the right Side Panels.
4. Disconnect the Tape Switch from the harness.
5. Remove the Tape Switch, and the adhesive, from the rear leg.
6. Thoroughly clean the mounting surface with alcohol.
7. Remove the protective strip from the adhesive and press the switch firmly in place.
8. Replace the Side Panels.
10. Test the Tape Switch for proper operation.
13–8–70 46–170012P67
FRU 2
Table
Locknut, Upper Pin Actuator
Use this Locknut to fasten the upper Actuator mounting pin. The Table Elevation Actuator
procedures begin on page 472.
13–8–71 46–170012P81
FRU 2
Table
Locknut, Upper Pin Actuator
Use this Locknut to fasten the upper Actuator mounting pin. The Table Elevation Actuator
13–8–72 46–296234G1
FRU 1
Table
Longitudinal Encoder Assembly
493
4. Remove the Cradle Assembly and the right side Rail Cover. Cradle Assembly procedure
begins on page 478.
5. Remove the two locknuts that fasten the Longitudinal Encoder Assembly Cover in place.
6. Remove the two screws that fasten the Front End Cover in place.
7. Grasp the carriage with one hand, while you manually unlatch the carriage with the other
hand.
8. Slowly move the carriage assembly toward the gantry, until it rests against the bumper
stop.
Note: If you let go of the Cradle/carriage assembly before it rests against the bumper stop, you
could damage the longitudinal encoder assembly.
9. Loosen the clamp that fastens the pot sprocket to the pot shaft.
10. Detach the stranded steel cable from the carriage:
a. Firmly hold the eyelet on the encoder cable
b. Removing the shoulder screw and spacer from the carriage.
Note: Maintain at least 2 pounds of tension on the cable. If you release tension, and allow the
cable spool to unwind, you will damage the encoder assembly.
11. Remove one turn of cable preload:

a. Slowly pull the cable by the eyelet, until it reaches the first hex spacer on the encoder
assembly.
b. Fasten the eyelet to the hex spacer with a ty–rap, to maintain the initial three turns of
preload on the spool.
12. Locate the right z–channel:
a. Unplug the encoder J16 connector from the table harness.
b. Unplug the pot connection at J17.
13. Remove the two screws that fasten the Encoder Assembly to the table.
14. Remove the defective Longitudinal Encoder Assembly.
15. When you install the replacement Encoder Assembly:
a. Make sure the cable maintains the initial three turns of preload on the spool.
» Factory replacement assemblies arrive with the initial three turns of preload
applied, and the eyelet anchored to the hex spacer.
b. Do not tighten the pot sprocket clamp at this time.
c. Connect J16 and J17.
d. Fasten the cable to the carriage with the shoulder screw and spacer.
e. Slowly move the carriage to the home position, then install, and tighten, the Cal pin,
to fasten the carriage in place.
Note: You will damage the pot if you turn it past the zero VDC position.
17. Adjust the pot:

a. Attach a DVM to terminals #2 and #1 (GND) of the pot.
494
b. Turn the pot shaft with a small screwdriver, until the DVM displays 0.80 0.01 VDC.
c. Maintain the voltage display, while you tighten the pot clamp.
d. Do not remove the DVM at this time.
18. Adjust the C–Pulse:
a. Loosen the clamp that fastens the cable spool to the encoder shaft.
b. Turn the encoder thumbwheel to light the C–pulse LED on the ETC PWA.
c. Tighten the clamp, and verify the C–pulse LED remains lit.
19. Check for increase in pot voltage:
a. Hold the carriage assembly in position with one hand, while you remove the Cal pin
with the other hand.
b. Continue to hold on to the carriage assembly, while you manually release the Home
position latch.
c. Watch the DVM display, while you slowly move the carriage toward the gantry.
d. The pot voltage should increase as the carriage moves toward the gantry.
Note: You will damage the pot if you turn it past the zero VDC position.
20. Characterize the longitudinal axis. The Mechanical Characterization procedure begins on
page 46.
21. Store the Cal pin, reassemble the Table, and replace the covers.
13–8–73 46–136334P23
FRU 1
Table
Longitudinal Limit Switch
3. Remove the Cradle Drive Cover.
4. Disconnect the wires from the limit switch terminals

5. Remove the nut that fastens the switch in place.
6. Remove the defective switch from its bracket.
7. Install the replacement switch. Make sure you connect the wires to the COM and N.O.
terminals.
8. Adjust the position of the switch in the bracket with the two nuts, so that it actuates when
the cradle/carriage is at its maximum travel position, as determined by the Cal pin.
9. Return the Cal pin to its storage position. Refit the Side Cover and Cradle Drive Cover.
12. Adjust the position of the switch in the bracket:
a. Loosen the the two nuts that fasten the bracket in place
495
b. Move the Cradle/carriage assembly to the maximum travel position, and fasten into
position with the Cal pin.
c. Move the bracket until the switch actuates with the carriage in the maximum travel
position.
13–8–74 46–278310P1
FRU 2
Table
Lower Pin, Actuator
Use this Pin to fasten the lower end of the Actuator. The Table Elevation Actuator procedures
begin on page 472.
13–8–75 46–296991G1
FRU 2
Table
Main Harness

13–8–76 46–278575P1
FRU 2
Table
Motor, Cradle Drive
3. Follow the procedure to remove the Cradle Drive Assembly, and set it on a work surface.
» Cradle Drive Assembly procedure begins on page 479.
4. Disconnect the motor wires from the terminal strips.
5. Remove the four sets of screws and washers that fasten the motor to the cradle drive
frame.
6. Loosen the two set screws that fasten the pulley to the motor shaft, and slide the pulley
off the shaft.
7. Remove the defective motor.
8. After you install the replacement motor:
a. Align the motor pulley with the drive roller pulley
b. Position one of the pulley set screws over the shaft flat.
496
c. Adjust the position of the motor until the belt deflects 0.050/0.060 inches when you
apply 4–6 oz of pressure to the mid–span of the belt,
d. Maintain belt tension, while you tighten four screws, to fasten the motor in place.
13–8–77 46–297436P1
FRU 2
Table
Pin, Table Gas Spring
Use the Gas Spring Pins to fasten the ends of the Gas Springs. Refer to the Table Gas
Spring procedure, on page 486.
13–8–78 46–297552P1
FRU 2
Table
Pivot Tube, Table Side Panel
The table uses eight Pivot Tubes, one at each Side Panel pivot point. The Table Side Cover
descriptions begin on page 502
13–8–79 46–297036G2
FRU 1
Table
Pot Assembly, Longitudinal Encoder
2. Remove the Cradle Drive Cover.
3. Install the Cal pin at the home position, then remove the Cradle Assembly. Cradle
Assembly procedure begins on page 478.
5. Remove the two locknuts that fasten the Longitudinal Encoder Assembly Cover in place.
6. Remove the two screws that fasten the Front End Cover in place.
7. Remove the pot assembly:
a. Loosen the clamp that fastens the pot sprocket to the pot shaft.
b. Disconnect the Pot Assembly from the table harness, at J17.
c. Loosen the two servo clamps.
d. Slide the defective Pot Assembly downward, and off the sprocket.
e. Take care not to lose the plastic spacer on the pot shaft.
8. After you install the replacement Pot Assembly:
a. Make sure the sprocket comes in contact with the plastic spacer.
b. Attach a DVM to terminals #2 and #1 (GND) of the pot.
c. Turn the pot shaft with a small screwdriver, until the DVM displays 0.80 0.01 VDC.
d. Maintain the voltage display, while you tighten the pot clamp.
497

13–8–80 46–296791G1
FRU 2
Table
Power Assembly
13–8–81 46–296433G1
FRU 2
Table
Power Harness

13–8–82 46–297117G1
FRU 2
Table
Power Harness, Cradle Drive

13–8–83 46–296317P1
FRU 1
Table
Quad Output Power Supply
Note: Pay attention to the location of the wires on the defective supply, before you remove
them. Restore the wires to their original configuration on the replacement supply.
3. Remove the Table Drive Power Supply:

a. Locate the Quad Output PS. (lower power supply)
498
b. Disconnect the power input and out wires from the terminals
c. Locate, and remove the 2 screws that fasten the Quad Output PS to the right side of
the Power Assembly main bracket.
d. Slide the defective power supply out of the assembly.
4. Install the replacement Quad Output PS.
13–8–84 46–297430G1
FRU 2
Table
Rear Cover Assembly
13–8–85 46–170053P11
FRU 2
Table
Relay, Elevation & Cradle Amps
in place.
6. Slide the wire retainer to the side, and pull the defective relay from its socket.
7. Install the replacement relay.
13–8–86 46–170053P13
FRU 2
Table
Relay, Tape Switches
13–8–87 46–327096G1
FRU 2
Table
Right Base Cover
2. Turn each of four captive Dzus fasteners one–quarter turn CCW,
to release the cover.
499
3. Turn each of four captive Dzus fasteners one–quarter turn CW,

to fasten the cover.
» The screwdriver slot in the fastener appears horizontal when you successfully engage
the fastener.
13–8–88 46–296909G2
FRU 1
Table
Right Control Panel
4. Disconnect the ribbon cable(s) and J1 connector, from the control panel
5. Remove the four sets of screws, washers, and spacers, and the two fishpaper spacers,
that fasten the control panel to the table.
6. After you install the replacement Control Panel and tighten the hardware, make sure the
panel floats freely.
13–8–89 46–296827P2
FRU 1
Table
Right Filler Cover
13–8–90 46–297894G1
FRU 2
Table
Roller Kit, Actuator Cover
The Roller attaches to the rear leg of the table, and moves the Actuator Cover. The kit
contains the roller assembly, its mount, and two roll pins.
13–8–91 46–264832P1
FRU 1
Table
SCA–LAN Bd, ETC

grounding point on the table, before you continue.
500
4. Locate the ETC chassis assembly:
a. Loosen the captive screw that fastens the ETC chassis to the center of the table
base.
b. Pivot the chassis panel until the Heurikon PWA reaches the horizontal position.
c. Disconnect the BNC–T connector from the SCA–LAN Board.
d. Loosen, and remove, the 3 screws that fasten the SCA–LAN Board to the ETC
Board.
e. Lift the defective SCA–LAN board straight, and away, from the ETC Board, to unplug
its connector.
5. Install the replacement SCA–LAN Board.
13–8–92 46–297059G1
FRU 2
Table
Servo Amp Assembly
in place.
6. Detach all the connectors from both servo amps.
7. Loosen the four screws that fasten the servo amp bracket to the base frame.
8. Slide the entire assembly out, and up, to remove it from the table.
9. When you install the replacement Servo Amp Assembly, take care to reconnect all the
connectors in their original configuration.
13–8–93 46–170024P4
FRU 2
Table
Shoulder Screw, Encoder Cable
Use the Shoulder Screw to attach the eyelet of the Longitudinal Encoder Assembly cable to
the carriage. Table Longitudinal Encoder Assembly procedure starts on page 493
501
13–8–94 46–296584P1
FRU 2
Table
Side Panel, LF
2. Remove the Table Base Covers and Table Side Covers.
Note: Pay attention to the orientation of the ground strap terminal, before you remove it. Orient
the terminal in the same direction when you replace it.
3. Remove the ground strap connection from the z–channel

4. Each panel has two flat–head screws that fasten the Pivot Tube to its bracket. Remove, and
keep, the flat head screws
5. When you install the Side Panel, make sure the pivot points move without interference.
If the pivot points cannot move freely:
a. Loosen the two screws that fasten the upper mounting bracket in place.
b. Slide the bracket in its slots, until the side panel pivot points move freely.
13–8–95 46–296578P1
FRU 2
Table
Side Panel, LR

13–8–96 46–296583P1
FRU 2
Table
Side Panel, RF
502

13–8–97 46–296577P1
FRU 2
Table
Side Panel, RR

13–8–98 46–297118G1
FRU 2
Table
Signal Harness, Cradle Drive

503
13–8–99 46–296972G1
FRU 2
Table
Solenoid Assembly
13–8–100 46–296946P1
FRU 2
Table
Spacer, Table Encoder Cable
Use this Spacer to keep the eyelet of the Longitudinal Encoder Assembly cable away from
the carriage. The Longitudinal Encoder Assembly procedure starts on page 493.
13–8–101 46–296771P1
FRU 2
Table
Spacer, Upper Pin Actuator
Use this Spacer to keep the upper Actuator mounting joint away from the left side of the
clevis, in the front leg. The Table Elevation Actuator procedures begin on page 472.
13–8–102 46–170490P20
FRU 2
Table
Spring, Actuator Cover
Use this Spring to hold the Actuator Cover against the Roller. The Actuator Cover procedure
begins on page 470.
13–8–103 46–170490P54
FRU 2
Table
Spring, Home Latch Assembly
Use this Spring to keep the Home Latch bar engaged in the carriage latch block. The Home
Latch Assembly procedure starts on page 489.
13–8–104 46–327097G2
FRU 2
Table
Table Cover, Left Side
2. Turn each of two Dzus fasteners one–quarter turn CCW, and remove, to release the
cover.
3. Tip the bottom of the cover outward slightly, then lift the cover upward to clear the four
pins in the z–channel.
504
4. If you plan to use any of the table drives:

a. Remove the Tape Switch Jumper Plug from its storage position,
b. Plug the Tape Switch Jumper into the harness connector.
5. When you install the Side Cover:
a. Return the jumper plug to its storage position.
b. The screwdriver slot in the fastener aligns with the Side Cover when you successfully
engage the fastener.
6. Test the Side Cover Tape Switch operation.
13–8–105 46–327097G1
FRU 2
Table
Table Cover, Right Side
2. Turn each of two Dzus fasteners one–quarter turn CCW, and remove, to release the
cover.
3. Tip the bottom of the cover outward slightly, then lift the cover upward to clear the four
pins in the z–channel.
4. If you plan to use any of the table drives:
a. Remove the Tape Switch Jumper Plug from its storage position,
b. Plug the Tape Switch Jumper into the harness connector.
5. When you install the Side Cover:
a. Return the jumper plug to its storage position.
b. The screwdriver slot in the fastener aligns with the Side Cover when you successfully
engage the fastener.
6. Test the Side Cover Tape Switch operation.
13–8–106 46–296316P1
FRU 1
Table
Table Drive Power Supply
4. Remove the power supply hold down bracket.
5. Remove the screws attaching the outlet cover and move the cover aside to gain access
to the power supplies.
6. The Table Drive PS is the upper power supply. Disconnect the wires from both ends of
the power supply.
7. Remove the upper two attaching screws from the right side of the Power Assembly main
bracket attaching the Table Drive PS, and slide the power supply out.
505
8. To install the Table Drive PS, reverse above steps, making sure to connect the wires
correctly.
9. Refit the Base Covers.
13–8–107 46–297698P2
FRU 1
Table
Tape Switch, Table Side Cover
4. Remove the two shoulder screws that fasten the connector to the bracket in the Side
Cover.
5. Remove the terminals from the connector.
6. Cut the ty–raps that fasten the Tape Switch wire to the four brackets.
7. Remove the Tape Switch:
a. Peel the adhesive away from the cover.
b. Pull the wires through the holes in the cover.
c. Remove all the adhesive from the cover.
d. Thoroughly clean the mounting surface with alcohol.
8. When you install the replacement Tape Switch:
a. Orient the shorter wires toward the connector bracket, when you route the wires
through the holes in the cover.
b. Remove the protective strip from the adhesive.
c. Press the switch firmly into place.
d. Replace the side cover.
10. Test the Tape Switch operation.
13–8–108 46–296770P1
FRU 2
Table
Upper Pin, Actuator
Use this Pin to fasten the upper end of the Actuator in place. The Table Elevation Actuator
506
Notes:
507
CHAPTER A1 – APPENDIX: INSTALLATION
The (non HSA RP) HiSpeed Advantage has two major

CAUTION configurations that effect system component installation and
interconnection. Make sure you follow the installation procedure
that corresponds to your system configuration.
The two major differences:
» Baseplates for table and gantry –or– no baseplates.

» Original Power Distribution Unit (PDU) –or– Global Power Distribution Unit (GPDU)
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Section A1–1, on page 509, describes how to position and install the
ATTENTION table and gantry with leveling feet, instead of the steel baseplates.
Section A1–5, on page 522, describes how to the position and install
ATTENTION the table and gantry with steel baseplates.
Section A1–6, on page 528, describes the Power Distribution Unit.

ATTENTION Physical installation of the PDU and GPDU remains the same, but the
two units have different internal and external cable and wire connections.
System interconnection sections, A1–12 and A1–14, describe the PDU
and GPDU wiring and cable termination variations.
Section A1–7, on page 529, describes the Computer installation.

Section A1–7–2, on page 530, describes the Console.
Section A1–8, on page 532, describes the Scan Recon Unit instal-
lation.
Section A1–9, on page 533, describes the 9Track Magtape Unit
installation.
Section A1–10, on page 534, describes the Phantom Holder
installation.
Section A1–11, on page 537, contains the Ground Map for both
configurations.
Section A1–12, on page 541, describes how to install and terminate
ATTENTION Global PDU system wiring and cables. (GPDU, 2113764, has no REM box)
Section A1–14, on page 565, describes how to install and terminate

ATTENTION PDU system wiring and cables. (PDU with REM box)
508
Note: Before you install the system components, make sure the site meets the requirements
described in Preinstallation manuals: 2126732 (systems with gantry/table leveling feet
and/or GPDU 2113764), or 46–18301 (systems with steel baseplates, original PDU and
REM box.)
A1–1 Install Gantry and Table without steel baseplates
A1–1–1 Overview
The following procedure instructs you to position, level and anchor the gantry and table in
baseplate–free HSA CT systems. Instead of baseplates, adjustable leveling pads support
the gantry and table. The gantry has four leveling pads, and the table has five leveling pads.
Use a room–layout template to determine the position of the gantry and table. Position the
gantry first, then position the table relative to the gantry, with three alignment bars. Finally,
level and anchor the system.
Baseplate–free systems no longer use the template to locate and drill the anchor holes. Use
the system to determine hole location, and drill them with the gantry and table in place.
Illustrations A–1 and A–2 depict this procedure. Sections A1–2 and A1–3 list items
required to install an HSA system per this procedure. Please read, and follow, this procedure.
A1–1–2 Floor And Room Preparation

Support areas of the main table and gantry must rest on solid concrete, or other basic
flooring, not on resilient tile or carpeting. Resilient tile or carpet may slowly yield over a
period of time, and disturb the table/gantry alignment.
No part of the floor surface within the table, gantry, or the two interface areas between table
and gantry, should rise above the table/gantry support areas.
The floor structure must withstand both the occupied weight of table and gantry, as well as
the individual contact area loading of these components.
The method and placement of anchors, or through bolts, must not reduce the structural
strength of the floor.
Note: If you have to remove gantry covers to maneuver the gantry into the scan room, refer to
section A1–5–4.
A1–1–3 Pre–Installation Template

Use the two–piece room–layout paper template, P/N 2106475, to plan the site. The template
shows the location of the gantry and table, along with the required operating and service
clearances. Although the template shows the locations of the anchor holes (both primary and
redundant) for floor structure considerations, just use it to locate the first hole. Do NOT use
the template to locate and drill the rest of the anchor holes.
A1–2 Installation Tool Kit

Installation personnel: Use installation tool kit, P/N 2110953, which contains the following
special tools (See Illustrations A–1 on page 515 and A–2 on page 516):
» Guide Pin Bolt, P/N 2106495: use to position the gantry over its first anchor hole.
» Long Alignment Bar #3 (in two pieces), P/N 2106369: use to position the table, relative
to the gantry.
509
» Two Short Alignment Bars, #1 & #2 P/N 2106368: use to position the table relative, to
the gantry.
» Adjuster Tool, P/N 2107863: use to turn the adjusters when you level the system.
» Drill Bushing, P/N 2106205: use to center, and guide, the bit when you drill the anchor
holes.
» Vacuum Attachment (funnel), P/N 2110944: use to vacuum debris out of the anchor
holes.
» Spanner Wrench, P/N 2110003: if necessary, use to turn the adjusters after anchor
placement.
A1–3 Required Common Tools and Supplies

» Masking tape
» 4 foot level
» 9” torpedo level
» 1/
2” drive socket wrench
» 1/
2” drive 3” long extension
» 1/
2” drive 6” long extension
» 9/
16” socket
» 3/
4” deep well socket
» 1
1 /8” socket
» 11/2” socket
» 1/ ” drive torque wrench: 0–100 N–m (0–100 ft–lbs)
2
» Extension cord
» Shop Vacuum Cleaner
» Hammer drill
» 1/
2” or 13mm masonry bit, 8” long, minimum
» Hammer
» Large straight blade screwdriver
» 1/
8” Allen wrench
A1–4 Detailed Procedure
A1–4–1 Establish the Room Layout:

1. Make sure all operating and service clearances shown on the templates are available.
Note the locations of the anchor holes with regard to any structural elements of the floor.
2. Clean the area, remove carpet/tile flooring as shown on the templates, and remove any
old baseplates. The mounting surface must be free of material which may interfere with
the positioning and leveling of the system.
3. Lay out the two paper templates. Spread out the Gantry template first, and align it with
any existing cable trough, if necessary. Tape the template to the floor. Now, spread the
table template over top, align the scan and table centerlines, and tape it to the floor.
A1–4–2 Drill the First Gantry Anchor Hole:

1. The next step fixes the front left corner of the gantry. If you cannot use this anchor hole,
due to interference from reinforcement rods in the concrete or other interference, move
the Gantry (and templates) to another location.
510
2. Drill the left front gantry anchor hole, at location #1. See illustration A–3.
a. Drill one 13mm (1/2”) diameter, 110 mm (4 3/8”) deep, hole at the location shown on
the gantry template.
b. Important: drill the anchor holes perpendicular to the floor. Assign one person to
monitor the perpendicular position of the drill, while the second person drills the hole.
c. Stop the drill periodically to clear debris from the hole, to prevent binding.
3. Vacuum all debris from the hole:
a. Place the funnel tip inside the hole.
b. Place the vacuum hose in the funnel.
4. When you finish drilling, vacuum the debris from the surrounding area.
A1–4–3 Position the Gantry:

1. Remove all the transportation packaging, except dollies, from the gantry.
2. Locate, and remove, the adjuster shipping bolt from the left front corner of the gantry
base. Replace the shipping bolt with the guide pin bolt, that also threads into the leveling
pad.
3. Wheel the Gantry into position, as shown on the template:
a. Position the guide pin over the anchor hole.
b. Position the leveling pads against the base, as shown in Illustration A–6, before you
lower the gantry into place.
c. Use the dollies to evenly lower the gantry, until the guide pin extends into the hole.
Stop when the leveling pads reach approximately 3 mm above the floor.
d. If necessary, use the guide pin and hole as a pivot point, and carefully rotate the
gantry into position over the template.
Position the Gantry –continued–
4. Remove, and discard, the paper templates.
5. Lower the gantry to the floor, and remove the dollies.
6. Remove the guide pin bolt from the left front adjuster.
7. Remove the other three adjuster shipping bolts.
A1–4–4 Level the Gantry:

1. Before leveling operations begin, check the accuracy of the levels. Place the level on a
flat surface. Take note of the bubble’s specific location within the glass cylinder. Now
rotate the level end for end (maintaining the same mounting surface on the level) and
place it in the same position. If the bubble comes to rest in the same location within the
glass cylinder, the level is acceptable for use. If not, the level is unacceptable for use and
must be adjusted (if possible) or replaced.
2. Loosen all the adjuster lock rings, see illustration A–1. To loosen, place the screwdriver at
an angle in the slot of the lock ring and strike the screwdriver with the hammer in the
direction to loosen the lock ring.
3. Systematically rotate through the “A,” “B” and “C” locations to level the gantry. (See
Illustration A–3).
4. Level the gantry until all three readings show the bubble centered between the lines on
the glass cylinder.
511
Note: Each of the four adjusters must carry a portion of the gantry weight. ANY unloaded or
floating adjusters could allow the gantry to rock, or permit the base frame to twist when
you tighten the anchors. Because the leveling pads currently rest against the bottom of
the base, the gantry resides at its lowest possible height, and all leveling raises the
gantry. If you positioned the gantry in a “valley” on the floor, you may have to initially
raise the gantry, so you can raise the table, which may not be in the “valley”, during its
leveling procedure.
» Use a 9” torpedo level to level Gantry location “A.” Use a 4’ level to level the Gantry at
locations “B” and “C.” Each location has two machined extensions welded to the base.
The 4’ level bridges these two extensions. See illustration A–3.
» Remember to wipe the leveling surfaces clean prior to leveling. Make sure the level sits
flat on the machined portion of the extensions, and does not ride up onto the neighboring
fillets or welds.
» Use the adjusters to level the gantry. Use the adjuster tool, 11/8” socket and the 1/2” drive
socket wrench to turn each adjuster. Use the mark on top of the adjuster as an aid in
incrementing the adjuster’s rotation.
» Use adjusters #1 and #2 to level location “A.” See illustration A–3.
» Use adjusters #3 and #4 to level location “B.”
» Use adjuster pairs #1 & #2 and #3 & #4, on each side of the gantry, to level location “C.”
Adjust each set a maximum of 1 turn, at a time.
A1–4–5 Position the Table:

1. Remove all the transportation packaging, except dollies, from the table.
2. Wheel the table into approximate position, relative to the gantry. Before you lower the
table into place, make sure the leveling pads rest against the base (see Illustration A–6).
Lower the table until the leveling pads reach approximately 3 mm above the floor.
3. Remove the table left, and right, upper side covers, and the four side panels. Disconnect
the ground straps at the z–channel. Also, remove the table base cover center support
bar.
4. Assemble two halves of long alignment bar, #3, by inserting the pin and rotating the handle.
Note that the halves are matched sets, and the serial number on each half of the bar must
be the same. Make sure the joint is tight after the handle has been rotated. If the joint is loose,
tighten the tip of the expanding pin to expand it to a larger diameter.
The short alignment bars, #1 and #2, are identical and interchangeable.
5. Adjust the position of the table, as needed, until the three alignment bars fit into the 3/4”
alignment holes in the gantry base, and the 1/2” alignment holes in the table base, as
shown in Illustration A–2. Install the short alignment bars first. Pivot the far end of the
table until the long alignment bar fits. Firmly seat all the bars on their mating surfaces.
6. Once the alignment bars are in place, lower the table to the floor, and remove the
transportation dollies. Temporarily remove alignment bar #1 so you can remove the front
dolly. Replace the alignment bar after you remove the dolly.
7. Remove the five adjuster shipping bolts, and loosen the lock rings.
CAUTION Take extreme care to prevent damage to the ETC and CPU PWAs.
512
A1–4–6 Level the Table:

1. Systematically rotate through the “D,” “E” and “F” locations to level the table to the
gantry. (See Illustration A–3).
2. Level the table until all three readings show the bubble centered between the lines on the
glass cylinder.
Note: Level the table at locations #7, #8 and #9. Loosen, and unload, the adjusters at locations
#5 and #6d. Because the leveling pads currently rest against the bottom of the base, all
leveling raises the table.
» Use the 4’ level at all the table leveling locations. Place the level on the machined
surfaces of the alignment bars. Clean the machined surfaces, and do not rest the level
on the radiused surface on alignment bar #3.
» Use the adjusters and adjuster tool the same way you used them on the gantry.
» Make initial measurements at the three locations, and map out the adjustments
necessary to make these three locations level.
» Use adjuster #9 to level location “D.” See illustration A–3.
» Use adjuster #8 to level location “E.”
» Use adjuster #7 to level location “F.”
A1–4–7 Tighten the Lock Rings:

1. Recheck the “A” through “F” leveling locations. Use location “G” to verify table levelness.
Make sure adjusters at location #1 through #4 carry some load.
2. At table locations #5 and #6, screw each adjuster to tighten it against its leveling pad.
Without unloading any of the other table adjusters, tighten location #5 and #6 adjusters a
little more than hand tight.
3. Tighten the lock rings at locations #1 through #7, with the hammer and screwdriver.
A1–4–8 Drill the Remaining Anchor Holes:

1. Remove the gantry scan window, and prop open the top cover.
2. Open both front and rear gantry covers.
3. Use the 13mm (1/2”) bit to drill the remaining six anchor holes, at locations #2 through #7,
with the system in place. Place the drill bushing inside each adjuster to keep the hole
vertical, and centered within the adjuster. Important: Place the drill bushing inside the
adjuster of the location #5, #6 and #7 table anchor holes, to allow the maximum amount
of horizontal alignment capacity to center the cradle on isocenter during system testing.
Note: Use a piece of tape to mark the drill bit 195 mm (711/16”) from the tip, to indicate hole
depth.
4. Drill each hole until the mark on the drill bit reaches the top of the drill bushing.
5. Stop the drill, and clear each hole several times, to prevent binding.
Note: Vacuum all debris from the inside of each hole. Place the funnel tip inside the hole, and
the vacuum hose in the funnel. Vacuum the debris from the surrounding area when you
finish drilling.
TAKE CARE NOT TO INJURE YOURSELF ON THE GANTRY COVER

BRACKETS.
WARNING
513
Care must also be taken when drilling at location #7 to avoid hitting

CAUTION the actuator motor lead. Remove lead if necessary. Also, place a
piece of cardboard over the ETC and CPU PWA’s to prevent damage
and dust contamination.
Note: No anchor holes are drilled at locations #8 and #9. These locations provide compressive
support for the table, but are not anchored.
A1–4–9 Use the Redundant Anchor Hole Locations:

If you cannot use an anchor hole within an adjuster, due to interference from reinforcement
bars in the concrete, or other interference, use the redundant anchor location, shown in
Illustration A–4. Follow the same procedure, outlined above, but mark the drill with tape at
170 mm (611/16”).
Note: The minimum gantry anchoring requirement is four anchors, one in each corner. The
minimum table anchoring requirement is three anchors, one each at locations #5, #6 and
#7.
A1–4–10 Install the Anchors:

6. Use only (P/N 2106573) Hilti Kwik–Bolt II, 1/2” diameter by 8” long anchors.
7. Remove the three alignment bars, and re–pack the install kit.
8. Before you install the anchors, add the 1/4” thick washer under the regular anchor
washer, and position the nut, as shown in Illustration A–5.
9. Place an anchor in each hole and hammer the anchor downward until the anchor is fully
inserted as shown in Illustration A–5.
10. Tighten all the anchors at locations #1 through #7 and torque to 75 6 N–m (55 5
ft–lbs).
11. Re–install any table part you removed during the installation, including covers, ground
straps, and the center support bar. Close all Gantry covers, and re–install the scan
window.
12. Remove gantry shipping bolts and brackets per Illustration A–10.
514
ILLUSTRATION A–1
LEVELING PAD AND ANCHORING DETAIL, TYPICAL
515
ILLUSTRATION A–2
INSTALLATION AND LEVELING OF TABLE AND GANTRY
516
ILLUSTRATION A–3
GANTRY AND TABLE LEVEL LOCATIONS
517
ILLUSTRATION A–4
GANTRY AND TABLE ANCHOR LOCATIONS
518
ILLUSTRATION A–5
ANCHOR BOLT, TYPICAL
519
ILLUSTRATION A–6
LEVELING PAD STARTING POSITION
A1–4–11 Assemble and Install Gantry Display
Note: Refer to display installation drawing, 46–297720, for reference. Every system comes
with this drawing.
1. Install two bearings, item 6, on pin, item 2, and install on the support arm, item 4, as
shown on the drawing. Complete this assembly procedure on both support arms.
2. Attach two cable clamps, item 12, to the left support arm, as shown on the drawing.
3. Mount the support arms, item 4, and the standoffs, item 3, to the gantry with 4 1/4 x 20 x
3.25 machine screws, item 9, as shown on the drawing.
4. Mount the cover plate, item 10, to the support arms, item 4, with two nylon 8/32 x .500
machine screws, item 11, as shown on the drawing.
5. Route, and connect, the display cable, as shown on the drawing. Attach, and firmly seat,
the gantry display to the support arms.
6. Attach the Gantry module, item 5, to the display assembly, with four 1/4/x20 x .75
machine screws, item 8 as shown on drawing. This completes the gantry display
installation.
A1–4–12 Install Gantry Mounted Table Controls
Note: New gantries, shipped with systems, have a left and right control panel that mounts to
the gantry.
Mounting instructions:
1. Remove side covers.
2. Locate right side control assembly.
3. Position control assembly on the right side of the gantry cover, over the round cutout.
Refer to illustration A–7.
520
4. Locate, and install, (4) sets of M6 x 25 screws and M6 lock washers, from the back of the
gantry cover, into the control assembly.
5. Connect cable 2118210, to J1, on the back of the control assembly.
6. Locate the left side control assembly.
7. Follow steps 3. and 4. to install the assembly on the left side of the gantry.
8. Connect the 2 cable ends of 2118210, to J1 and J2, on the back of the control assembly.
Note: J1 and J2 positions are interchangeable.
ILLUSTRATION A–7
GANTRY MOUNTED CONTROLS INSTALLATION
A1–4–13 Install Table Footswitch

1. Refer to Illustration A–8. Install Table Footswitch Assembly:
2. Install the braided grounds from the gantry, under the two plates that attach to the table,
NOT to the ground bus on the footswitch assembly.
3. Install Table Footswitch mounting hardware.
521
ILLUSTRATION A–8
TABLE FOOTSWITCH ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
Two plates attach to the table, Table

46–297427P1. Install the braided
grounds from the gantry under these
plates, NOT to the ground bus on
the footswitch assembly.
Install Table Footswitch

assembly mounting
hardware:
10–32 Black Oxide screws
s/c 61221 (2)
29 1416” 116”
(757.2 mm to 760.4 mm)
Table Footswitch assembly
Gantry
A1–5 Install Gantry and Table with steel baseplates
A1–5–1 Introduction
This section describes how to use steel baseplates to position, level, and mount the HiSpeed
Advantage gantry and table.
A1–5–2 Gantry Installation
A1–5–2–1 Floor And Room Preparation

Support areas of the main table, and Gantry must rest on solid concrete or other basic
flooring, not on resilient tile or carpeting which may slowly yield over a period of time and
disturb alignment of table to Gantry.
No part of the floor surface within the table, Gantry or the two interface areas between table
and Gantry should be higher than the support areas for the table and Gantry.
Floor structure must be capable of withstanding both the occupied weight of table and Gantry
as well as the individual contact area loading of these components
Method and placement of anchoring, or through bolts, must not reduce structural strength of
floor.
Steel Floor Plates are included in the Pre–installation Kit, catalog number B7996B or p/n
46–297480G1. They provide a pre–leveled surface to facilitate installation and alignment of
the Gantry, and main table.
Note: Steel Floor Plates should be installed before equipment delivery. Refer to the
Preinstallation Manual 18301 for Floor Plate Installation.
522
A1–5–3 Floor And Room Preparation

Support areas of the main table and gantry must rest on solid concrete, or other basic
flooring, not on resilient tile or carpeting. Resilient tile or carpet may slowly yield over a
period of time, and disturb the table/gantry alignment.
No part of the floor surface within the table, gantry, or the two interface areas between table
and gantry, should rise above the table/gantry support areas.
The floor structure must withstand both the occupied weight of table and gantry, as well as
the individual contact area loading of these components.
The method and placement of anchors, or through bolts, must not reduce the structural
strength of the floor.
Note: If you have to remove gantry covers to maneuver the gantry into the scan room, refer to
section A1–5–4.
ILLUSTRATION A–9
GANTRY BASE
DOLLY
MOUNTING
HOLES
GANTRY
MOUNTING
HOLES R1188A
1. Raise the Gantry with the dollies.

2. Wet a cloth with solvent, and clean off the underside of both mounting pads.
a. Wipe off the top of the floor mounting plates.
b. Spray the top of the plates with WD–40, or apply a light coat of oil.
3. Position the Gantry over its mounting holes.
4. Lower the dollies until the Gantry rests on its base.
5. Recheck the mounting hole alignment. (Once you remove the dollies, it is difficult to shift
the Gantry.)
6. Unbolt the two side rails between the dollies.
a. Swing down, and lock, the third caster on each dolly.
b. Unbolt the center brace, which grips the Gantry rocking chair structure.
523
c. Unbolt the adapter from the Gantry base plate.

d. Tip the dolly back on its third caster, and remove.
e. Return dollies.
7. Temporarily install the four (4) –10 Hex head cap screws you removed from the dollies,
into the Gantry base plate. Use the cap screws as jack screws, to level the Gantry.
8. Install four sets of –10 x 1– Hex head screws and lock washers in the mounting
holes of the Gantry base plate.
9. Torque the screws to 40 ft–lbs (5.53 m. kg.).
10. Remove the two (2) shipping brackets between the Gantry base plate and pivot structure
(Refer to illustration A–10).
11. Check for a perpendicular plane of scan:
a. The Gantry ships in the “zero” tilt position.
b. Check the alignment of the 0 degree tilt characterization plate, and the tilt indicator
bracket.
c. Adjust gantry tilt (if necessary) to align the 0 degree mark with the indicator.
ILLUSTRATION A–10
SHIPPING BRACKETS
Shipping Brackets
Note: Use a torpedo level to make sure both sides of the gantry base are level. Check
front–to–back and side–to–side, on both sides of the gantry.
12. If necessary, shim the base until both sides are level.
A1–5–4 Gantry Stripdown for Restricted Access

Remove the Gantry cover to move through a 39 inch door:
524
1. Remove gantry shipping dollies, if fitted.

2. Lift top cover, and support with bracket.
3. Open front cover:
a. Release front cover top right strut.
b. Remove front right side lock bolt
c. Carefully open front cover.
4. Disconnect the front display cables.
THE COVER WEIGHS ABOUT 150 LBS. TO PREVENT INJURY AND

DAMAGE, USE THREE PEOPLE TO SAFELY REMOVE AND
WARNING REPLACE THE COVER.
5. Loosen the set screw on the upper and lower hinge pin. (See illustration A–11).
6. Remove the top and bottom hinge pins,(lightly tap from the bottom). (Refer to Illustration
A–11).
7. Remove the front cover.
525
ILLUSTRATION A–11
GANTRY FRONT SHROUD HINGE
Detail A
Gantry Front Shroud Hinge
Hinge Pin
Set Screw
Detail A
A1–5–5 GANTRY REAR SHROUD REMOVAL

1. Remove the gantry top cover, to open the rear cover:
a. Disconnect the power cable from the top cover.
b. Unscrew the center top cover hinge from the rear shroud.
c. Slide the top cover to the left to remove the cover.
2. Remove the four mounting bolts, to unbolt the rear shroud from the gantry base. Push
the rear shroud back.
3. Remove the retaining rings from the hinge pins on the upper right and left sides of the
shroud. (See Illustration A–12).
COVER WEIGHT IS APPROXIMATELY 120 LBS. IT REQUIRES A

MINIMUM OF 3 PEOPLE TO HANDLE COVER SAFELY AND
WARNING WITHOUT DAMAGE
4. Lift the rear shroud up, to remove it from the gantry.
526
ILLUSTRATION A–12
GANTRY SHROUD RETAINING RINGS
Hinge Pin
Retaining Ring
A1–5–6 Install Main Table and Raceway
Note: This procedure assumes you moved the main table, mounted on its dollies, into the scan
room.
1. Follow the preinstallation guide instructions to level the table pads.

2. Position the table, and lower it, until it rests on the floor plates.
3. Remove the two lifting dollies.
4. Return dollies.
Note: The table will be level if the table mounting pads are level.
5. Install table mounting hardware in four (4) places.

» 1 ea –13 x 4– Hex head cap screw 46–208561P143
» 1 ea flat washer S/C 17195 (46–220205P5)
» 1 ea spring washer S/C 17208 (46–220181P10)
The pre–installation kit, 46–297480G1, contains this hardware.
6. Position the table perpendicular to the gantry, as shown in illustration A–13.
7. Tighten mounting bolts to 20 ft/lbs.
527
ILLUSTRATION A–13
INITIAL TABLE AND GANTRY ALIGNMENT
Brace across front of gantry
Gantry
Table
29 1416” 116” End of base of table

(757.2 mm to 760.4 mm)
Note: Illustration A–13 shows approximate positions. Finalize table and gantry alignment
during the system test.
8. Install the Table/Gantry raceway, as shown in Illustration A–14.

ILLUSTRATION A–14
TABLE/GANTRY RACEWAY INSTALLATION
Table
Install T/G raceway mounting

hardware: 10–32 black oxide
screws s/c 61221 (2)
29 1416” 116”
(757.2 mm to 760.4 mm)
Table/Gantry Raceway
Gantry
A1–6 PDU Installation
A1–6–1 Position Power Distribution Unit

1. Position the PDU:
a. Use the dollies to move the PDU into position.
528
THE PDU UNIT IS VERY HEAVY. TAKE CARE WHILE

MANEUVERING THE UNIT. THE PDU TENDS TO BE TOP HEAVY
WARNING WHEN TILTED FROM FRONT TO REAR.
b. Remove the dollies, and securely anchor unit to wall and floor. The PDU has 6
anchor points, 2 at the top rear, and 4 at the bottom of the unit.
Note: For Global Power Distribution Unit, 2113764, route Input power wiring through the
flexible metal conduit assembly, located in the base of the GPDU. The access panel has
a pilot hole to help you make the correct size hole during installation.
Note: The Global Power Distribution Unit, 2113764, has a flexible metal conduit attached to
one of the access panels in the base of the GPDU. Move this panel to any of the side,
bottom, or rear locations, depending on site needs.
c. Establish cable access, and remove the corresponding panels.

d. Return dollies.
A1–6–2 Position And Mount REM Box
Note: The GPDU, 2113764, does not have a REM box.
Position and mount the REM box:
1. Establish the conduit access to the REM mounting box.

2. Size the hole in the box to the conduit used.
3. Fasten the box in position and, attach the cable.
A1–7 Install Computer
A1–7–1 Position Computer

Illustration A–15 shows the OC and IC computer cabinet.
1. Roll the computer into position in the area of the OC or IC.

2. Remove any packing materials from the cabinet, and inspect the unit for damage.
3. Check the seating of all circuit boards and cables.
529
ILLUSTRATION A–15
OC AND IC COMPUTER CABINET
M301394
A1–7–2 Position Console

1. Move the OC or IC console (Illustration A–16) into position, to ensure correct access to
console, and in the case of the operator console, good visibility of the patient on the
table.
2. For free–standing consoles:
a. Attach support feet to both pedestals, as shown in Illustration A–17.
b. To raise Genesis platform console height 4 inches, install console on risers, Illustration
A–18.
530
ILLUSTRATION A–16
OC AND IC CONSOLE
SUPPORT
PEDESTAL
BASE DECAL
ILLUSTRATION A–17
CONSOLE SUPPORT FEET
PLUG BUTTON
SCREW
SUPPORT LEG
LEVELING SCREW
SUPPORT LEG
SCREW
PLUG BUTTON
LEVELING SCREW
M287997A
ILLUSTRATION A–18
CONSOLE RISERS
531
PCN 189081 provides the optional mounting

of the legs to the high rise kit.
A1–8 Position the SRU

Illustration A–19 shows the scan recon unit. Position the SRU to allow access to the rear of
the unit.
532
ILLUSTRATION A–19
SCAN RECON UNIT
SBC 0
Maxi Hib
HIGH SPEED
DRIVE (SABRE)
Disc Controller
SEAGATE
DRIVE 1480
ST–CTC
AP
R2998
A1–9 Position the Nine Track MTU

Illustration A–20 shows the nine track magnetic tape unit.
a. Position the 9 Track Tape Drive near the computer.

b. The unit requires a minimum overhead clearance of 2 and one–half feet to load and
unload tapes.
A1–9–1 Board Setup and Installation

1. Remove the access panel and metal insert from slot 8 of the SUN Computer.
533
2. Set the Dip Switches on the Tape Drive I/O Bd, to the configuration shown in detail “A” of
Illustration A–20.
3. Insert the Tape Drive I/O board into slot 8 of the SUN Chassis.
4. Remove the SUN Computer rear access panel, and set the jumpers on slot 8 to the
configuration shown in detail “B”.
ILLUSTRATION A–20
NINE TRACK MTU
ON
BACKPLANE
SW1 J800
OFF JUMPERING

J801

J802

ON

SW2 P1 J803
OFF
DETAIL A

J804

SLOT 8
AS VIEWED FROM THE BACKPLANE
DETAIL B
R2996
A1–10 Mount And Level Phantom Holder to the Cradle

1. Check, and clean, the two guide holes in the cradle or, for Metal–free cradle, Check, and
clean, the guide slot in the cradle end.
2. Place cradle in the un–extended position.
3. Use the two guide holes to mount the phantom holder to the cradle or, for Metal–free
cradle, Insert the tab on the phantom holder, into the slot on the end of the cradle, to
mount the phantom holder to the cradle.
4. Clamp the holder in position with the draw catch, located at the bottom of the holder.
5. Verify the holder mounts solidly against the end of the cradle.
6. Use a mechanic’s level to verify the front surface of the phantom mounting block is
vertical +1, –0.
7. If the angle exceeds 91:
a. Check for washers behind the mounting block.
534
b. If you find any washers, remove them, and recheck the angle.
c. If you can’t find any washers, check the phantom holder for interference between the
holder and the cradle.
8. For angles less than 90: Add washers to the rear of the phantom mounting block, and
the phantom holder or, for Metal–free cradle, Use the adjustment on the back of the
phantom holder to increase the angle of the mounting block.
9. Remove, and reinstall, the phantom holder.
10. Verify that the angle remains within the specified range.
Note: The specified tolerance on the vertical angle is only valid when the cradle is
un–extended, and the holder has no phantoms mounted to it. These two external factors
can effect cradle deflection, and may result in an out–of–tolerance condition on the
phantom holder angle.
Recommended: Quickly recheck the phantom holder angle whenever you mount the
phantom holder to the cradle.
Note: The phantom holder may not meet specifications when you mount phantom to the holder.
Because each phantom is different, you may have to shim it, to keep it vertical during
phantom scans and calibration.
535
ILLUSTRATION A–21
PHANTOM HOLDER INSTALLATION
SHIM BETWEEN THIS

SURFACE WHEN
REQUIRED
0
90 +1, –0
Angle Adjust Knob

Available on Metal–free PHANTOM REF.
Cradle and
Phantom Holder
Only
PHANTOM MTG.
BLOCK
ct2714
PHANTOM MTG.
BLOCK ANGLE
ADJUST
DRAW CATCH
R2714A
536
A1–11 System Ground Connections

Refer to Illustration A–22 for Vx Preferred Systems with Global PDU and Illustration A–23 for
HSA Systems with original PDU with REM Box for the following dicussion.
At this point, you MUST physically inspect the System Ground wire run between A1 and
VAULT Ground. The wire used must be at minimum, #1/0 gauge stranded copper. Be
certain that power is OFF at A1, then disconnect the incoming Ground wire (located at the
top of the isolated ground block) in A1. Ask the electrician to show you the Ground VAULT
connection, and disconnect the wire from that point. Use a Beckman 3030 or equivalent, to
measure the resistance between the open wire and the VAULT ground bar. Use the High
ohm range. If there is ANY continuity, the wire is tied to conduit, or other buss bar, in an
intermediate panel or panels. This causes excessive ground currents, and can NOT be
tolerated. The CT system ground MUST be totally isolated between A1 and the VAULT
ground. If you have any questions, contact your District CT engineer for assistance.
Arrange for electrical code inspection.
537
A1–11–1 HiSpeed Advantage Vx Preferred Ground Map

ILLUSTRATION A–22
VX PREFERRED WITH GPDU SYSTEM GROUND
TO POWER VAULT GROUND
A1
POWER GANTRY
DISCONNECT (CT2)
ROTATING
ASSEMBLY
TABLE/GANTRY FRAME
G JUNCTION
#1/0 RACEWAY TILT
MECH
POWER #1/0 #2 Part of Gantry
Â ÂÂ
DISTRIBUTION T FRAME
UNIT
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
(PM)
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
2 Ground Braids (Part of Gantry)
TABLE
(CT1)
#2
#2
SCU
(CC2)+(CC1)
RP Configuration MODEM
SRU
(CC2) (OPTION)
VxPreferred
Configuration TO SCU
#10
TO PM
Primary Computer
(CC1)
Vx Preferred
Configuration LINE PRINTER
(LP)
#10 (OPTION)
#2
TO OC1
TO CONSOLE
(OC1)
VCR
(OPTION)
OPERATOR’S
TO CONSOLE
CONSOLE
(OC1)
SLAVE MONITOR
(OC1) (SM)
(OPTION)
#10 TO CONSOLE
TO PM (OC1)
NOTES: VIDEO PRINTER
SHIELD / SIGNAL GROUNDS ARE NOT SHOWN.

(OPTION)
= GROUND WIRE IN SUPPLIED CABLE. TO CONSOLE
(OC1)
DISK UNITS ARE LOCATED IN CC1 AND SCU.
CT1083A4
538
A1–11–2 HiSpeed Advantage Ground Map

ILLUSTRATION A–23
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM GROUND MAP
TO POWER VAULT OR
380 V PANEL GROUND
ISOLATION
TRANSFORMER
(IT1)
GANTRY
(OPTION) (CT2)
ROTATING
ASSEMBLY
#2 FRAME
TABLE/GANTRY
G JUNCTION
#1/0 RACEWAY TILT
MECH
POWER #2 #2
DISTRIBUTION T FRAME
UNIT
(PM)
#2
#2
TABLE
(CT1)
COMP CAB INDEPENDENT

(CI1) #2 CONSOLE
(IC1) #8
#2 #2
TO PM
(OPTION)
COMP CAB OPERATOR’S

(CC1) CONSOLE
#8
(OC1) TO PM
#2
SRU LASER CAMERA

(CC2) (MFC) TO PM
#8 (OPTION)
#8
MAGNETIC TAPE
#8 (MT)
TO CONSOLE
(OPTION) (OC)
#8 POWER TO IC
GND
#8 POWER LINE PRINTER
TO OC #8 (LP)
GND
TO CONSOLE
(OPTION) (OC)
VCR
NOTES: #8
SHIELD/SIGNAL GROUNDS ARE NOT SHOWN. TO CONSOLE
(OPTION) (OC)
= GND WIRE IN SUPPLIED CABLE.
SLAVE MONITOR
= CONTRACTOR–SUPPLIED WALL BOX. #8 (SM)
TO CONSOLE
(OPTION) (OC)
DISK UNITS ARE LOCATED IN CC1 AND SRU.
CT1083A4
539
Notes:
540
A1–12 HSA with Global PDU – Power, Ground, Interconnect Cable

Installation
The individual component layout, and site construction (conduit, floor duct, wall duct, or a
raised computer floor) help determine the system cabling sequence.
As much Contractor supplied wiring should be completed, as possible, before you start to
cable the system. Install system ground cables along with the system cables. If the site
uses raceway, position the equipment and finish the cabling, before you cut and fit covers at
individual equipment locations.
The system furnished cables ship with the system.
A1–12–1 Cable Identification

All system cables (except ground wires) use the system component designators listed below.
Each end of a system cable has a label, and color, near the connector, that indicates the
component, and jack identifier of the component.
Identifier Subcomponent
CC1 GENESIS Computer
CC2 Scan Reconstruction Unit (SRU)
contains AP Chassis
CT2 Gantry
CT1 Patient Table
PM Power Distribution Unit
MC Multiformat Camera (Lasercam)
OC Operator Console
WL X–Ray ON Warning Light
DS Scan Room Door Interlock Switch
MT Magnetic Tape
A1–12–2 Cable Color Identifiers

To help with the cable installation, the ends of the cables have a red, orange, blue, green or
brown mark. Table A–1 lists the colors and corresponding subcomponents.
TABLE A–1
CABLE COLOR CODE
Subcomponent Color
Gantry Blue
Table Yellow
PDU Red
Console Green
SCU Orange
Computer Brown
A1–12–3 OC Console and Computer Power and Ground

Connections
Illustration A–24 shows the power interconnections from OC to PM, and from OC to CC1.
541
ILLUSTRATION A–24
OC AND COMPUTER, POWER AND GROUND
GND
GND
OC/IC POWER COMPUTER POWER

46-296669G1
22
CONSOLE COMPUTER
(REAR VIEW) (REAR VIEW)
R2985
A1–12–4 OC Computer Power Connections

Illustration A–25 shows the cable interconnections to the console I/O panel.
542
ILLUSTRATION A–25
COMPUTER POWER CONNECTIONS
CT3229A
SEE DETAIL A
Brown RED
(CB6–1) (CB6-2)
22
LOAD
LINE
GRN
(GND BUS)
LOAD
LINE
GRN/YEL
WHT
DETAIL A CT3242A
A1–12–5 OC Power Connections

Illustration A–26 shows the internal console Power Module cable interconnections.
543
ILLUSTRATION A–26
CONSOLE POWER CONNECTIONS
CT3229A
SEE DETAIL A
7
6
5
4
3
12
2
Console Power 1
TS1 1,2,3,4,W4
INDICATES CABLE NUMBER DETAIL A
A1–12–6 OC Console I/O Panel and Cable Connections

Illustrations A–28 and A–27 show the console I/O panel cable connections.
544
ILLUSTRATION A–27
CONSOLE I/O PANEL
PANEL A10
R2986
ILLUSTRATION A–28
CONSOLE I/O PANEL
CONSOLE
CONSOLE ON–OFF SWITCH
SWING PANEL (S1)
(A11)
CONSOLE IMAGE MONITOR

POWER DISTRIBUTION REMOTE BOARD
MODULE (A11A1)
(A12)
(FRONT)
CONSOLE
MONITOR EXTRACTION TOOL
POWER SUPPLY
(BACK OF SWING PANEL)
(A11A3)
MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER

(A13CB1) SECURITY BOARD
(A11A2)
AUXILIARY
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
(A13CB2=CB5) VIDEO RELAY
(A10A1) J13 J14 J15
5 J13
J12
CONSOLE
I/F MODULE 4
(A10)
J10
J1 J3 2
J4 J8 J9
8
3 6
INDICATES CABLE NUMBER R2987
545
A1–12–7 OC Computer Panel and Cable Connections

Illustrations A–29 and A–30 show the cable interconnections to the computer panel. The
SCU cabinet, CC2, contains the GENESIS computer chassis, CCI.
ILLUSTRATION A–29
GENESIS COMPUTER PANEL
CC1–A2
J11
J8
J1
2 J2
SECURITY LOCK
3 J1
MUX PORT
INDICATES INTERCONNECT R2988

CABLE NUMBER
ILLUSTRATION A–30
GENESIS COMPUTER BOARD CONNECTIONS
546
GENESIS FRAME BUFFER

MVME167 CPU
MOTOROLA
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
HAWK ETHERNET (OPTION)
1/2 INCH 9 TRACK TAPE CONTROLLER (OPTION)
GENESIS APPLICATIONS INTERFACE
GENESIS INTERPOLATOR PROCESSOR
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
BULK MEMORY
SERIAL PORT A
6
SERIAL PORT B
PLASMA
4
ETHERNET
GAI SERIAL
46–307082G1
MONITOR VIDEO
5
SCSI
INDICATES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
INTERCONNECT
CABLE NUMBERS R2989
A1–12–8 SCU Cable Connections

Illustration A–31 shows the cable interconnections to the SCU rear panel.
547
ILLUSTRATION A–31
SCU CHASSIS REAR INTERCONNECTIONS
Indicates cable
number
A2J7
J7
J8
J6
R2962
Illustration A–32 shows the cable interconnections to the SRU board chassis.
548
ILLUSTRATION A–32
SRU BOARD CONNECTIONS
Control LAN
1
Exposure Interlock
9
Image LAN
19
SRU Boot Link

8
Indicates cable ct 2964

CABLE
number TUNNEL
A1–12–9 Gantry Cable Connections

Illustrations A–33 and A–34 show the cable interconnections to the gantry.
549
ILLUSTRATION A–33
GANTRY CABLE CONNECTIONS DETAIL A
A1 A5 panel
Detail A
A1 TS 1
Detail B
Gantry
Indicates Cable Number
CONSOLE–GANTRY–SIGNAL
8 CT2 A1A5 J1
D LAN
CT2 A1A5 J3
1
J1 J3
PDU–GANTRY
SIGNAL J5
14
J2
EXP INTERLOCK
J4 9 CT2 A1A5 J4
J6
7 A1A5 Panel
DAS DATA
CT2 A1A5 J6
Detail A
Install TS1 terminal strip connections, as shown in Illustration A–34.
550
ILLUSTRATION A–34
GANTRY CABLE CONNECTIONS DETAIL B
Indicates cable number
Detail B
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16
15
550V DC from PM 120V AC from PM
Axial Motor Power from PM
A1 TS 1
A1–12–10 Table and A7 Panel Connections

Illustration A–35 shows the cable interconnections to the table.
551
ILLUSTRATION A–35
TABLE CONNECTIONS A2A7 PANEL
A2A7 PANEL
(DETAIL A)
HiSpeed Advantage Table
13 TILT CONTROL TILT MOTOR

DETAIL A
J2
J1 TABLE
J3 POWER
J5 10
FTSW FTSW
J6 J8 J7
18
TABLE SYNC–GANTRY DISPLAY–TABLE CONTROLS, DLAN
A2A7 Panel
A1–12–11 PM Connections for Global PDU

Illustration A–36 shows the PM area designators.
552
ILLUSTRATION A–36
PM AREA DESIGNATORS
PDU
DCRGS
Control Bd
Detail A
A2 Panel
A6 Panel
Servo Amplifier Assy.
Detail B
A1 Panel
Fuses
A5 Panel
Power Distribution Power Input
Detail D
A3 Panel
A4 Panel
I/O Detail C
DCRGS= Direct Current ReGulated Supply.

Illustration A–37 shows the PM A2 panel connections.
553
ILLUSTRATION A–37
PM A2 PANEL
DCRGS
TS1–1 (red)
DCRGS Control Board
550V DC
GND
TS2–1 (Black)
A2 Panel
550VDC POWER
17
Indicates Cable Number Detail A
Illustration A–38 shows the PM Servo Amp connections.
554
ILLUSTRATION A–38
PM A1 SERVO AMP ASSY CONNECTIONS
TS3–3 (Black)
TS1–3 (White)
90V DC at 1 sec scan speed
TS2–3 (Red)
A1 Panel
Axial Motor Power

15
Indicates Cable Number Detail B

Illustration A–39 shows the PM power input connections.
555
ILLUSTRATION A–39
PM I/O A4 CONNECTIONS, GPDU
PDU–GANTRY–SIGNAL
14
Future
Option J1 J2
SRU Power
J6
11
Table Power J3
10
J5 J4 Gantry
120VAC
OC Power
16
12
DETAIL C A4 Panel
Illustration A–40 shows the PM power input connections.
556
ILLUSTRATION A–40
PM POWER INPUT CONNECTIONS, GPDU
A3 F1 A3 F2 A3 F3
TS1
Vault Ground
from A1
Disconnect
L1
NEUT
L3
L2
SPARE
A3 J2 A3J6
Door Interlock 1/0 Ground to Table Junction Raceway
Room Warning Switch
Light Note: All power and ground cables
should exit the rear of the
PDU
DETAIL D
557
Notes:
558
A1–13 System Cable Check Lists for HSA Z.x Configurations w/Global PDU
This section lists the system cables you have to install. The list contains all system cables, and
cables for the three most common options. Use the tables as a checkoff for each component,
when you cable it.
Keep signal and control cables away from power cables and power wiring. If the site uses a
cable raceway, place the signal and power cables separate sections of the raceway.
Some components have room for excess cable length storage. If the site does not have a
raised computer floor, you may have to provide a separate means of excess cable storage.
All contractor wiring should be complete to the point of equipment placement.
Check all connections; make sure they are securely fastened. Use suitable tools and
judgment. Include all visible connections, especially ground connections.
Check for reasonable cable routing, remember to leave service loops for equipment
maintenance, etc. Make the cable installation look as neat as possible.
A1–13–1 Contractor/Customer Supplied Wiring

Ring out all wires before connecting.
TABLE A–2
CONTRACTOR/CUSTOMER SUPPLIED WIRING FOR B7998RB, HSA SYSTEM WITH GPDU
RUN CONNECTION AWG CONNECTION CHECKED

REF.# OR # AND
WALL BOX INSTALLED
CONNECTION CONNECTION Date & Initial
TO
1 Power Source * A A1 L1
* B A1 L2
* C A1 L3
* NEUTRAL A1 NEU
#1/0 GND A1 GND
2 A1 #1 A PM A3 TB1 L1
#1 B PM A3 TB1 L2
#1 C PM A3 TB1 L3
#1/0 GND PM A3 Power

Input GROUND
LUG
3 SEO #14 Power A1 Motor Starter

(2) Circuit
#14 Power A1 Motor Starter

(2) Circuit
#14 Ground A1 Ground

(2)
10 WL #14 Warning Light Low PM A3 J2 1,2,3,4
(2) Voltage Control
Circuit (see
Illustration A–41)
559
11 DS (Scan Room #14 Scan Room Door PM A3 J6 1,2

Door Interlock) (2) Interlock Switch
(see Illustration
A–42)
* Note: Wire Sized according to Direction, 2126732, Preinstallation for Systems with
GPDU, Power Requirements Section, Recommended Power Distribution System
ILLUSTRATION A–41
TYPICAL CUSTOMER SUPPLIED SCAN ROOM WARNING LIGHT AND CONNECTION TO GPDU
A3J2 FUSE
A3K3 Hi Line
1 24 V Secondary
Neutral
Lo
Hi
Lo
4 Room Warning
Lamp
Facility Supplied
ILLUSTRATION A–42
TYPICAL CUSTOMER SUPPLIED SCAN ROOM DOOR INTERLOCK AND CONNECTION TO GPDU
A3 J6 1,2
To Relay N.O. Switch

Control Circuit
Board
J3 46,50
Customer Supplied
A1–13–2 System Cables for System Catalog B7998RB (GPDU 2113764–34)

Vx Preferred Z.x Configuration with Global PDU
560
TABLE A–3
SYSTEM CABLES FOR B7998RB, HSA SYSTEM WITH GPDU
Cable # P/N From Installed To Installed

1 2118150 CC2 A3 A1 DLAN CT2 A1A5J3
2 46–297746G3 CC1 A2 J2 Security Lock OC A10 J10

or
46–278687G24
or
46–278687G30
3 46–297746G6 CC1 A2 J1 Mux Port OC A10 J1
or
46–278687G25
or
46–278687G31
4 46–297747G3 Label CC1 A1A9 OC A10 J12

or CC1 GAIBOARD–PLASMA
46–296675G7
or
46–296675G9
5 46–297748G3 Label CC1 A1A10 OC A10 J13
or CC1 FRAMEBUFFER–MON VIDEO
46–296674G9
or
46–296674G7
6 46–297746G9 Label CC1 A1A1 OC A10 J3

or CC1 CPUBD–SERIALA Imaging Computer
Boot Link
46–278687G26
or
46–278687G32
7 46–237686G2 CC2 A2 J7 CT2 A1 A5 J3
DAS DATA
8 2118149 OC A10 J4 Console–Gantry Signal CT2 A1A5 J1

OC A10 J8
OC A10 J9
9 2118148 CC2 AIA2 Abort (Exposure Interlock) CT2 A1 A5 J4
10 2118141 CT1 A2A7 J10 Table/PM AC Power PM A4 J3
11 2131526 CC2 Computer Cabinet Power PM A4 J6
12 2131525 OC A12 P1 Operator Console Power PM A4 J5
13 2118220 CT1 A2 A7 J2 Tilt Control Connection part of Gantry
14 2118146 CT2 A1A5 J2 PDU–Gantry Signal PM A4 J2
15 46–327155G1 CT2 A1 TS1: 9, 10, 11 Axial Motor Power PM A1 TS1:3, TS2:3, TS3:3
16 2119603 CT2 A1 TS1:1, 2, 3 Gantry 24 Hour Power PM A4 J4
17 46–297080G1 CT2 A1 TS1:5, 6, 8 550VDC Power PM A2 TS1:1, TS2:1, GND
18 2115811 CT1 A2 A7 J5, J1 Table Sync, Gantry Display,

Gantry Table Controls, DLAN ETC–STC
19 46–296454G2 CC1 Transceiver CC2 A1A1 Ethernet BNC

Image LAN
20 46–297711G1 CC1 A1A1 Serial “A” CC2 A1A1 Serial A

SRU Boot Link
21 46–296861G1 CC1 A1 Ethernet XCVR

Image LAN Computer to Transceiver
22 46–296670G2 CC1 Power P1 OC1 A12 CB6

CC1 Power
A1–13–3 System Grounds
Note: To minimize electrical noise on the system grounds, make all ground cable connections
between subsystems according to the following table and illustrations.
561
TABLE A–4
SYSTEM GROUNDS FOR B7998RB, HSA SYSTEM WITH GPDU
AWG# CONNECTION P.M. CHECKED

AND
Connection To Connection To INSTALLED
1/0 BUILDING VAULT A1 DISCONNECT
GROUND GROUND
#1/0 A1 DISCONNECT PM A3 GROUND LUG
GROUND Refer to Illustration A–40
Refer to Illustration A–40
#2 CT1 GROUND BUS CT1 RACEWAY
(PART OF TABLE) GROUND BUS
POSITION #8
#2 CT2 BASE GROUND CT1 RACEWAY
STUD GROUND BUS
(PART OF GANTRY) POSITION #9
#2 OC GROUND STUD CT1 RACEWAY
GROUND BUS
POSITION #10
#1/0 PM A3 GROUND BUS CT1 RACEWAY
TAB GROUND BUS
Refer to Illustration A–40 POSITION #11
#2 CC2 CT1 RACEWAY

GROUND BUS
POSITION #12
GROUND CT1 BASE FRAME CT2 BASE FRAME
BRAID
GROUND CT1 BASE FRAME CT2 BASE FRAME
BRAID
#2 CC1 Ground Stud OC1 Ground Stud
ILLUSTRATION A–43
CT1 (TABLE) RACEWAY GROUND BUS
Gantry Side
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Table Side
562
ILLUSTRATION A–44
HISPEED ADVANTAGE VX PREFERRED INTERCONNECT WITH GPDU
CPU SRU/RECON UNIT CONSOLE TABLE GANTRY GPDU
(CABINET CC1) (CABINET CC2) (OC1) (CT1) (CT2) (PM)
(BROWN) (ORANGE) (GREEN) (YELLOW) (BLUE) (RED)
A2J8 SRU BOOT LINK A1A1 A1A2A1 A2TS1:1

20 SERIAL A DLAN CONTROL LAN 550VDC POWER
1 A1A5J3 A1 TS1 17 A2TS2:1
5,6,8 A2 GROUND
A1A1 21
ETHERNET IMAGE LAN A1A1 A1TS1 16 120VAC POWER A4 J4
19 A1A2
ETHERNET ABORT EXPOSURE INTERLOCK A1A5J4 1,2,3
9
A1 TS1 AXIAL MOTOR POWER A1TS1:3
9,10,11
15 A1TS2:3
XCVR CC2 A2J7 7
DAS DATA A1A5J9 A1TS3:3
A1A5 J2 PDU–GANTRY–SIGNAL A4 J2
CONSOLE–GANTRY SIGNAL 14
A10 J4 8 A1A5 J1
A10 J9
A2J2 SECURITY LOCK A10 J10 A2A7 J2 TILT CONTROL PART OF GANTRY
2 13 INPUT POWER
A10 J8 FROM A1
A2A7 J5 TABLE SYNC–DISPLAY–CONTROL PART OF GANTRY FACILITY
A2J1 MUX PORT A10 J1 DISCONNECT
3 18
A2A7 J1 DLAN CT2 A3TS1 A
A3TS1 B
A1A9 PLASMA VIDEO A10 J12 A2A7 J3 TILT MOTOR PART OF GANTRY A3TS1 C
4
PLASMA
VIDEO
OC1 A3 GROUND
A1A10 MONITOR VIDEO

5 A10 J13 CT1
MONITOR
VIDEO A2A7 J10 TABLE POWER A4 J3
IMAGING COMPUTER BOOT LINK 10
A1A1 6 A10 J3
SERIAL A
LINE FILTER COMPUTER CC1 POWER OC CB6

22 CONSOLE POWER
A12 TS1 12 A4 J6
1,2,3,4,W4
G PM
J1 SRU POWER A4 J5
11
TABLE
JUNCTION G
RACEWAY
CC1 CC2
CT1 CT2 A3
OC1 GROUND TAB
G G G G GROUND BUS
G G
POSITION
8 101211 9
HISPEED ADVANTAGE VX PREFERRED with GPDU

INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
563
Notes:
564
A1–14 HSA w/Original PDU & REM Box – Pwr, Gnd, Cable Installation
The individual component layout, and site construction (conduit, floor duct, wall duct, or a raised
computer floor) help determine the system cabling sequence.
As much Contractor supplied wiring should be completed, as possible, before you start to cable the
system. Install system ground cables along with the system cables. If the site uses raceway,
position the equipment and finish the cabling, before you cut and fit covers at individual equipment
locations.
The system furnished cables ship with the system.
A1–14–1 Cable Identification

All system cables (except ground wires) use the system component designators listed below. Each
end of a system cable has a label, and color, near the connector, that indicates the component, and
jack identifier of the component.
Identifier Subcomponent
CC1 GENESIS Computer
CC2 Scan Reconstruction Unit (SRU)
CT2 Gantry
CT1 Patient Table
IC Independent Console
PM Power Distribution Unit
MC Multiformat Camera (Lasercam)
OC Operator Console
WL X–Ray ON Warning Light
REM Remote Control Panel
MT Magnetic Tape
A1–14–2 Cable Color Identifiers

To help with the cable installation, the ends of the cables have a red, orange, blue, green or brown
mark. Table A–5 lists the colors and corresponding subcomponents.
TABLE A–5
CABLE COLOR CODE
Subcomponent Color
Gantry Blue
Table Yellow
PDU Red
Console Green
SRU Orange
Computer Brown
A1–14–3 OC/IC Console and Computer Power and Ground Connections

Illustration A–45 shows the power and ground interconnections between the OC, or IC, and the
computer.
565
ILLUSTRATION A–45
OC/IC POWER & GROUNDING
GND
GND
OC/IC POWER COMPUTER POWER

46–296669G1
22
CONSOLE COMPUTER
(REAR VIEW) (REAR VIEW)
R2985
A1–14–4 OC/IC Computer Power Connections

Illustration A–46 shows the cable interconnections to the console I/O panel.
566
ILLUSTRATION A–46
COMPUTER POWER CONNECTIONS
CT3229A
SEE DETAIL A
Brown RED
(CB6–1) (CB6–2)
22
LOAD
LINE
GRN
(GND BUS)
LOAD
LINE
GRN/YEL
WHT
DETAIL A CT3242A
A1–14–5 OC/IC Console I/O Panel and Cable Connections

Illustrations A–47 and A–48 show the cable connections to the console I/O panel.
567
ILLUSTRATION A–47
CONSOLE I/O PANEL CONNECTIONS
PANEL A10
R2986
568
ILLUSTRATION A–48
I/O PANEL
CONSOLE
CONSOLE ON–OFF SWITCH
SWING PANEL (S1)
(A11)
1
CONSOLE IMAGE MONITOR
POWER DISTRIBUTION REMOTE BOARD
MODULE (A11A1)
(A12)
(FRONT)
CONSOLE
MONITOR EXTRACTION TOOL
POWER SUPPLY
(A11A3)
MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER

(A13CB1) SECURITY BOARD
(A11A2)
AUXILIARY
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
(A13CB2=CB5) VIDEO RELAY
(A10A1)
J13
6 J12
CONSOLE 5
I/F MODULE J13 J14 J15
(A10)
J1 J3 J4 J8 J9 J10
46–296986G1 46–297089G1 46–297264G1
4 7 10 16 23 3
A1–14–6 OC/IC Computer Panel and Cable Connections

Illustrations A–49 and A–50 show the cable interconnections to the computer panel.
569
ILLUSTRATION A–49
COMPUTER PANEL
CC1–A2 J8
8 46–29711G1
J5
46–296980G1
(OPTIONAL)
J11
J8
46–307082G1
J1
3 J2
4 J1
ILLUSTRATION A–50
COMPUTER BOARD CONNECTIONS
3/260 CPU
GENESIS FRAME BUFFER
32 MB Expansion Memory
SCSI CONTROLLER
EMPTY
EMPTY
1/2 INCH 9 TRACK TAPE CONTROLLER (IF USED)
GENESIS APPLICATIONS INTERFACE
GENESIS INTERPOLATOR PROCESSOR
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
BULK MEMORY
SERIAL PORT A
SERIAL PORT B
ETHERNET
46–296861G1
31
KEY BOARD
PLASMA
5
MONITOR VIDEO
SERIAL 6
46–307082G1
VIDEO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
INDICATES R298
CABLE NUMBERS
9
570
A1–14–7 SRU Cable Connections

Illustration A–51 shows the cable interconnections to the SRU rear panel.
ILLUSTRATION A–51
SRU PANEL CONNECTIONS
Indicates cable
number
9
J7
J7 46–237686G2
J8
J6
R2962
Illustration A–52 shows the cable interconnections to the SRU board chassis.
571
ILLUSTRATION A–52
SRU BOARD CONNECTIONS
46–296454G5
46–297565G1
11
46–296454G2
46–297711G1
8
Indicates cable ct2964

CABLE
number TUNNEL
A1–14–8 Gantry Cable Connections

Illustrations A–53 and A–54 show the cable interconnections to the gantry.
572
ILLUSTRATION A–53
GANTRY CABLE CONNECTIONS
A1 A5 panel
Detail A
A1 TS 1
Detail B
Gantry
J1 J3 J5
J8
24 17 23 10
46–297545G1 46–296988G1 46–297264G1 46–296986G1
J6 J7
J2 J4 J9
18 25 1 9
46–296989G1 46–297564G1 46–296454G5 46–237686G2
A1A5 Panel
TERMINATOR INSTALLED
Detail A
Refer to Illustration A–54. Install the TS1 terminal strip cover assembly (46–297772G1) with four
8–32 x .25 lg Black Oxide Finish screws (46–208560P129).
573
ILLUSTRATION A–54
GANTRY CABLE CONNECTIONS (DETAIL)
Detail B
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
46–297080G1
46–297082G1
21
19
46–297081G1
Servo Amp Power 550V DC 20
from PDU from PDU
110V AC from PDU
A1 TS 1
A1–14–9 Table and A7 Panel Connections

Illustration A–55 shows the cable interconnections to the table.
574
ILLUSTRATION A–55
TABLE CONNECTIONS
A2A7 PANEL
(DETAIL A)
HiSpeed Advantage Table
DETAIL A
46–296748G1 46–296748G1 46–296564G1 46–296987G1
J1 J3 J7 J9 15 J11
FROM GANTRY FROM GANTRY FROM GANTRY FROM TILT MOTOR
46–296748G1 46–296748G1 46–296539G1 46–296539G1 46–296985G1
J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 12
FROM GANTRY FROM GANTRY TO FOOT SWITCHES
A2A7 Panel
A1–14–10 PDU Connections

Illustration A–56 shows the PDU area designators.
575
ILLUSTRATION A–56
PDU AREA DESIGNATORS
PDU
A1 Panel
DCRGS
Control Bd
A2 Panel
(Detail A)
Relay Control Panel

Note: A4 panel is
behind A3 panel
Servo Amp
A4 Panel
(Detail D)
A3 Panel
(Details B and C)
Fuse Panel
A5 Panel
(Detail E)
DCRGS= Direct Current Rotational Gantry Supply.
Illustration A–57 shows the PDU A2 panel connections.
576
ILLUSTRATION A–57
PDU A2 PANEL
DCRGS
Detail A
TS1–1 (red)
DCRGS Control Board
550V DC
GND
J4
TS2–1 (Black)
A2 Panel
46–297080G1 46–297545G1
21 24
Illustration A–58 shows the PDU A3 panel connections.
577
ILLUSTRATION A–58
PDU A3 PANEL
46–296985G1
OC Power 12
TS 6
C
L3
B K3
L2
A CB1 TS 5
L1
CB16
BLUE or WHT
TS5–26
GRN/YEL CB18 K2
TS5–27 TS5–28
TS5–29 CB19
L3
CB20 12
13
CB21
IC1 POWER 14
CB6 CB22
15
CB23 K1
TS5–30
19
IC2 POWER
20
CB11 21
22
SRU POWER
(RED) TS5–31
B K4
L2
L3
K8
(BLK)
A L1 CB14 46–297081G1
BLUE or WHT TS5–32
20
GRN/YEL TS5–33
A3 PANEL
Note: To prevent the cables from disconnecting when you open the A3 panel, make sure the cables
have enough strain relief. Clamp the cables to the A3 panel with the clamps provided.
Illustration A–59 shows the PDU relay control board connections.
578
ILLUSTRATION A–59
PDU RELAY CONTROL BOARD
A3 A3 J10 46–296985G1
J11 12
To external power source

J12 1
2
To Room Warning LIght
J13
46–297654G1 26
J14
46–297089G1 16
J15
46–296987G1 15
J16
46–297564G1 25
J17
46–298988G1 17
J18
46–297565G1 11
J19
Note: Leave sufficient cable strain relief, to prevent the cables from disconnecting when you open the
A3 panel.
Illustration A–60 shows the PDU servo amp connections.
579
ILLUSTRATION A–60
PDU SERVO AMPLIFIER
46–296989G1 18 J402
TS3–3 (Black)
TS1–3 (White)
90V DC at 1 sec scan speed
TS2–3 (Red)
A4 PANEL
46–297082G1 19
Illustration A–61 shows the PDU fuse panel connections.
580
ILLUSTRATION A–61
PDU FUSE PANEL
A5 PANEL
Compression
Stud
PT 6
PT 5 TS1
PT 4
Phase A Vault Ground or

earth ground
Phase B
Phase C
1/0 ground from Table/Gantry
Note: All power and ground cables should exit the rear of the PDU
Note: Direction 46–018307 describes the isolation transformer installation.
A1–14–11 Lasercam Connections

Illustration A–62 shows the Lasercam I/O panel connections.
581
ILLUSTRATION A–62
LASER CAM I/O PANEL AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
(VIDEO – IN)
CONNECTOR
PANEL
RS232
(VIDEO – OUT)
(OPTIONAL)
RS232/RS422
SWITCH (EXT CLOCK)
(SET TO RS422) (OPTIONAL)
RS422
DIGITAL CABLE
RS422
CONNECT KEYPAD
CABLE
POWER TO MMU R2990

(OPTIONAL)
Illustration A–63 shows the Lasercam MMU I/O panel connections.
CAUTION
Do NOT connect the Comm Out cable to the Digital Out connector, or the
Digital Out cable to the Comm Out connector.
582
ILLUSTRATION A–63
MMU I/O PANEL AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
COMM REMOTE
OUT CONTROL
1 2 3 4 5 6
RS422
RS232
1 2 3 OUT 1 2 3 OUT 4 5 6 OUT
COMPOSITE PIXEL DIGITAL

VIDEO CLOCK INSTALL A FERRITE CORE DATA
ON THE PIXEL CLOCK CABLE
FRONT
R2991
A1–14–12 Nine Track I/O Panel Connections

Illustration NO TAG shows the nine track MTU cable connections.
583
Notes:
584
A1–15 System Cable Checklists
A1–15–1 System Cable Check Lists for HSA Z.x Configurations without
Global PDU
This section lists the system cables you have to install. The list contains all system cables, and cables for
the three most common options. Use the tables as a checkoff for each component, when you cable it.
Keep signal and control cables away from power cables and power wiring. If the site uses a cable
raceway, place the signal and power cables separate sections of the raceway.
Some components have room for excess cable length storage. If the site does not have a raised
computer floor, you may have to provide a separate means of excess cable storage.
All ground wires and other contractor wiring should be complete to the point of equipment placement.
Check all connections; make sure they are securely fastened. Use suitable tools and judgment.
Include all visible connections, especially ground connections.
Check for reasonable cable routing, remember to leave service loops for equipment maintenance, etc.
Make the cable installation look as neat as possible.
A1–15–2 Contractor Wire

TABLE A–6
CONTRACTOR INSTALLED WIRING FOR HSA SYSTEM WITHOUT GPDU
RUN CONNECTION CONNECTION P.M. CHECKED

REF. OR AWG AND
# WALL BOX # CONNECTION TO CONNECTION
INSTALLED
Date & Initial
14 A1 #1 A PM A5PT–4
#1 B A5PT–5
#1 A5PT–6
C
#1/0 GND PDU CHASSIS
5 W2 PM
(SRU) #10 C K8:1L1 (ORG)
#10 B K8:3L2 (RED)
#10 NEUT A3TS5–32(BLU)
#10 GND A3TS5–33 (GRN)
7 W1 PM
(OC) #10 C K3:5L3 (BLK)
#10 B K3:3L2 (RED)
#10 K3:1L1 (ORG)
#10 A A3TS5–26 (WHT)
#10 NEUT A3TS5–27 (GRN)
GND
56 W3 PM (OPTION)
(IC) #10 A CB6
#10 B CB7
#10 CB8
#10 C A3TS5
#10 NEUT A3TS5
GND
48 W4 #12 C PM CB21 (OPTION)

(MC) #12 NEUT A3TS5–24
#12 GND A3TS5–25
585
RUN CONNECTION CONNECTION P.M. CHECKED

REF. OR AWG AND
# WALL BOX # CONNECTION TO CONNECTION
INSTALLED
16 WL PM ReLay Bd
#12 WL–0A(Blk) J12–2
A3 TS 5
#12 Neutral(Wht) A3 TS 5
#12 Ground(gnd)
16 WL (If an external pow-
er source is not avail- #12 PM A3 TS6 PM Relay bd.
able to drive the WL, J12–1
this is an alternate
method of using the #12 WL –0A (Blk) PM Relay Bd.
PDU to power the WL. J12–2
If you use this method #12 Neutral(wht) PM A3 TS5
do not exceed 60 watts. #12 Gnd(Green) PM A3 TS5
See Appendix A for a
block Diagram.)
This wiring chart is for HiSpeed HiLight/9800
the Rem Box wiring for
HiSpeed Advantage 18 Rem TS–1 PM A3 J14–8 PM TS7–5
KIts and is only a cross 18 2 15 13
reference between 18 3 7 4
HiLight Advantage and 18 4 9 6
HiSpeed Advantage 18 8 13 11
18 9 12 9
18 11 11 8
18 12 14 12
18 13 10 1
Jumper 3–4
A1–15–3 System Cables for 15 Foot Cable Option

TABLE A–7
SYSTEM CABLES (15 FOOT OPTION) FOR HSA SYSTEM WITHOUT GPDU
Cable # P/N FROM Installed TO Installed

Installed
1 46–296454G5 CC2 A1A2A1 DLAN CT2 A1A5J6
2 46–296454G2 XCVR CC2 A1A1 CPU BD ETHERNET
3 46–297746G1 OR CC1 A2 J2 OC A10 J10

46–3133266G5 OR
46–313266G9
4 46–297746G4 OR CC1 A2 J1 OC A10 J1

46–313266G19 OR
46–313266G23
5 46–297747G1 or Label CC1 A1A9 OC A10 J12

46–296675G14 CC1 GAIBOARD–PLASMA

46–296674G14 CC1 FRAMEBUFFER–MON VIDEO
7 46–297746G7 OR Label CC1 A1A1 OC A10 J3

46–313266G33 OR CC1 CPUBD–SERIALA
46–313266G37
8 46–297711G1 CC1 A2 J8 CC2 A1 A1 SERIAL A
9 46–237686G2 CC2 J7 CT2 A1A5 J9
10 46–296986G1 OC A10 J4 CT2 A1A5 J8
586
11 46–297565G1 CC2 AIA2 ABORT PM A3A3 J19
12 46–296985G1 CT1 A2A7 J10 PM A3TS5: 12,13,19,20,21,22

A3 K2–L3
A3 CB18
A3 CB20
RELAY CONTROL BD:
J10–2, J11–1
13 46–278722G1 OUTLET W2 CC2 POWER
14 46–296669G1 OC A12 TS1 OUTLET W1
15 46–296987G1 CT1 A2A7 J9 PM A3A3 J16
16 46–297089G1 OC A10 J8 PM A3A3 J15
17 46–296988G1 CT2 A1A5 J3 PM A3A3 J18
18 46–296989G1 CT2 A1A5 J2 PM A4A1 J402
19 46–297082G1 CT2 A1 TS1: 9, 10, 11 PM A4 TS1:3, TS2:3, TS3:3
20 46–297081G1 CT2 A1 TS1:1, 2, 3 PM A3 K4–5

TS5: 14, 15
21 46–297080G1 CT2 A1 TS1:5, 6, 8 PM A2 TS1:1, TS2:1, GND
22 46–296670G4 OC CB6–2 RED, CB6–1 BROWN, CC1 POWER

GREEN to GROUND
23 46–297264G1 CT2 A1A5 J5 OC A10 J9
24 46–297545G1 CT2 A1A5 J1 PM A2A1A3 J4
25 46–297564G1 CT2 A1A5 J4 PM A3A3 J17
26 46–297654G1 Remote Box PM Relay Control Bd. A3J14
31 46–296861G1 XCVR CC1 A1A1

CC1 CPUBD ETHERNET
A1–15–4 System Cables For 40 foot Cable Option

TABLE A–8

Installed
3 46–297746G2 CC1 A2 J2 OC A10 J10
4 46–297746G5 CC1 A2 J1 OC A10 J1
5 46–297747G2 Label CC1 A1A9 OC A10 J12

CC1 GAIBOARD–PLASMA
6 46–297748G2 Label CC1 A1A10 OC A10 J13

CC1 FRAMEBUFFER–MON VIDEO
7 46–297746G8 Label CC1 A1A1 OC A10 J3

CC1 CPUBD–SERIALA
9 46–237686G2 CC2 J7 CT2 A1A5 J9
10 46–296986G1 OC A10 J4 CT2 A1A5 J8
12 46–296985G1 CT1 A2A7 J10 PM A3TS5: 12,13,19,20,21,22

A3 K2–L3
A3 CB18
A3 CB20
RELAY CONTROL BD:
J10–2, J11–1
14 46–296669G1 OC A12 TS1 OUTLET W1
15 46–296987G1 CT1 A2A7 J9 PM A3A3 J16
16 46–297089G1 OC A10 J8 PM A3A3 J15
587
17 46–296988G1 CT2 A1A5 J3 PM A3A3 J18
18 46–296989G1 CT2 A1A5 J2 PM A4A1 J402
20 46–297081G1 CT2 A1 TS1:1, 2, 3 PM A3 K4–5

TS5: 14, 15

GREEN to GROUND
23 46–297264G1 CT2 A1A5 J5 OC A10 J9
24 46–297545G1 CT2 A1A5 J1 PM A2A1A3 J4
25 46–297564G1 CT2 A1A5 J4 PM A3A3 J17
31 46–296861G1 XCVR CC1 A1A1

CC1 CPUBD ETHERNET
A1–15–5 System Cables for 80 Foot Cable Option

TABLE A–9

Installed
3 46–297746G3 or CC1 A2 J2 OC A10 J10

46–278687G24 or
46–278687G30
4 46–297746G6 or CC1 A2 J1 OC A10 J1

46–278687G25 or
46–278687G31

46–296675G7 or CC1 GAIBOARD–PLASMA
46–296675G9

46–296674G9 or CC1 FRAMEBUFFER–MON VIDEO
46–296674G7

46–278687G26 or CC1 CPUBD–SERIALA
46–278687G32
9 46–237686G2 CC2 J7 CT2 A1A5 J9
10 46–296986G1 OC A10 J4 CT2 A1A5 J8
12 46–296985G1 CT1 A2A7 J10 PM A3TS5: 12,13,19,20,21,22

A3 K2–L3
A3 CB18
A3 CB20
RELAY CONTROL BD:
J10–2, J11–1
14 46–296669G1 OC A12 TS1 OUTLET W1
15 46–296987G1 CT1 A2A7 J9 PM A3A3 J16
16 46–297089G1 OC A10 J8 PM A3A3 J15
17 46–296988G1 CT2 A1A5 J3 PM A3A3 J18
18 46–296989G1 CT2 A1A5 J2 PM A4A1 J402
20 46–297081G1 CT2 A1 TS1:1, 2, 3 PM A3 K4–5

TS5: 14, 15
588

GREEN to GROUND
23 46–297264G1 CT2 A1A5 J5 OC A10 J9
24 46–297545G1 CT2 A1A5 J1 PM A2A1A3 J4
25 46–297564G1 CT2 A1A5 J4 PM A3A3 J17
31 46–296861G1 XCVR CC1 A1A1

CC1 CPUBD ETHERNET
A1–15–6 HiSpeed Advantage System Cables

The cable block diagram does not list the following cables:
TABLE A–10
INTERNAL SYSTEM CABLES FOR HSA SYSTEM WITHOUT GPDU
Cable # P/N TO Installed FROM Installed

Installed
46–296564G1 CT1 A2A7–J7 CT2 INTERNAL X
CABLE
N/A CT1 A2A7–J11 CT2 INTERNAL X
CABLE
N/A 46–296748G1 CT1 A2A7 –J3,J4 CT2 INTERNAL X
CABLE
N/A 46–296748G1 CT1 A2A7–J1 CT2 INTERNAL X
CABLE
N/A 46–296748G1 CT1 A2A7–J2 CT2 INTERNAL X
CABLE
N/A 46–296539G1 CT1 A2A7–J6 Raceway Foot Switch X
N/A 46–296539G1 CT1 A2A7–J8 Raceway Foot Switch X
A1–15–7 System Grounds

TABLE A–11
SYSTEM GROUNDS FOR HSA SYSTEM WITHOUT GPDU
CHECKED
AWG CONNECTION P.M. AND
# INSTALLED
Connection To Connection To
#1/0 EARTH GROUND PDU
#2 CC2 CT1 RACEWAY
#2 CC1 OC
#2 OC CT1 RACEWAY
#2 CT2 CT1 RACEWAY
#2 CT1 CT1 RACEWAY
#1/0 PM CT1 RACEWAY
#2 IC PM (Option)
#8 OC MT (Option)
589
#2 IC IC Computer (Option)
#8 LASERCAM OC (Option)
GND Braid CT1 CT2
GND Braid CT1 CT2
A1–15–8 Option Cables

TABLE A–12
9 TRACK MAGTAPE OPTION INTERCONNECT

Installed
35 46–297005G2 CC1 TAPE CONTROL. BD “B” 9–TRACK TAPE “B”
36 46–296966G2 CC1 TAPE CONTROL. BD “B” 9–TRACK TAPE “B”
37 46–297005G1 CC1 TAPE CONTROL. BD “A” 9–TRACK TAPE “A”
38 46–296966G1 CC1 TAPE CONTROL. BD “A” 9–TRACK TAPE “A”
39 POWER CORD OC1 J6 9–TRACK POWER
TABLE A–13
LASERCAM OPTION INTERCONNECT

Installed
40 46–296980G1 CABLE (41) CC1 A2J5
*41 for cable MMU KYPD 422 A,B,C 46–296980G1 (CC1)
*42 P/N’s refer MMU PIX CLK A,B,C CC1 CAMERA CLK
*43 to service MMU COMPOSITE VID A,B,C CC1 CAMERA VIDEO
*44 directions LASERCAM VIDEO IN MMU COMP VID OUT
*45 18030 and LASERCAM EXT CLK MMU PIX CLK OUT
*46 18031 LASERCAM KYPD MMU KYPD OUT
47 POWER CORD LASERCAM PWR OUT MMU PWR IN
48 POWER CORD WALL OUTLET W4 LASERCAM PWR IN
TABLE A–14
LASERCAM OPTION W/O MMU OPTION INTERCONNECT

Installed
40 46–296980G1 78805340888 (41) CC1A2J5
*41 for P/N’s LASERCAM KYPD 46–296980G1
*42 see service LASERCAM EXT CLK CC1 CAMERA CLK
*43 dirs. 18030 LASERCAM VIDEO CC1 CAMERA VID
*48 and 18031 WALL OUTLET W4 LASERCAM PWR IN
TABLE A–15
INDEPENDENT CONSOLE OPTION INTERCONNECT

Installed
49 46–296861G1 IC XCVR IC CC1 CPU ETHERNET
50 46–278687G14 IC1 A10J3 IC CC1 CPU SERIAL A
51 46–296674G3 IC1 A10J13 IC CC1 GFB MON VID
52 46–296675G3 IC1 A10J12 IC CC1 GAI PLASMA
53 46–278687G12 IC1 A10J10 IC CC1 A2J2
54 46–278687G13 IC1 A10J1 IC CC1 A2J1
55 46–296454G4 IC2, OC1 OR SBC0 IC XCVR
56 46–296669G1 WALL OUTLET W3 IC POWER IN
57 46–313061G2 RED CB6–2 BLACK CB6–1 IC POWER OUT
GRN–GND
* P/Ns differ with respect to length (see service manuals 18030 and 18031).
590
ILLUSTRATION A–64
HISPEED ADVANTAGE WITHOUT GPDU OPTION INTERCONNECT
LASERCAM
(MC) SEE NOTE
POWER MODULE B MMU
(PM) KYPAD
W4 48 VIDEO 44 COMP 41
TS5 POWER A, B OR C
VIDEO OUT
IN
EXT PIXEL CLOCK PIXEL
45 42
CLOCK OUT
SEE NOTE C
KEYPAD COMP.
KEYPAD 46 43
OUT VIDEO
A,B OR C
POWER 47 POWER
OUT IN
TS3
GND
IC CPU CABINET CONSOLE W3

(IC CC1) (IC 1)
LINE
FILTER 57 CB6
56
A2 J1 54 J1
SEE NOTE J2 53 J10

A
TS1
CARD RACK A10
50 OHM
55
TERMINATOR PLASMA 52 J12
FRAME BUFFER
MONITOR
XCVR VIDEO 51 J13
CPU BD
49 ETHERNET
SERIAL PORT A 50 J3
GND
FRAME
NOTE A: Ethernet communication line, (46–296454G4), from XCVR, can be routed to CC2 SBC
XCVR:0C1 or IC2 for equivalent functionality. Do not exceed 300 ft of communication cable
(46–296454G4), or 2 terminators, on any one Ethernet communication network. This interconnect
diagram illustrates an intrasuite Ethernet communication network, for intersuite network hookup
refer to service direction 19019
591
Notes:
592
ILLUSTRATION A–65
HISPEED ADVANTAGE WITHOUT GPDU SYSTEM INTERCONNECT
CPU SRU/RECON CONSOLE TABLE GANTRY PDU
CABINET CC1 UNIT CC2 (OC1) CT1 CT2 PM
(BROWN) (ORANGE) (GREEN) (YELLOW) (BLUE) (RED)
CC1
SERIAL BOOT LINK A1A1 LAN 46–296454G5
A2J8 8 SERIAL A A1A2A1
1 A1A5
46–297711G1 DLAN J6 A1TS1 550VDC POWER A2 TS1–1,
A1A1 21
A1A1 LAN PART OF A1A5 5,6,8 46–297080G1 TS2–1
Ethernet 31 2 A2A7J1
46–296748G1
Ethernet J7 A1TS1 120VAC POWER A3–K4–5
46–296861G1 46–296454G2 CT1 LAN PART OF 1,2,3 46–297081G1
20
TS5–14,15
A2A7J2 A1A7A1
XCVR 46–296748G1 A3A1P2 AXIAL MOTOR POWER A4–TS1–3
A1TS1
CC2 A2–J7 9
DAS DATA 46–237686G2
A1A5 9,10,11 46–297082G1
19 TS2–3
J9 TS3–3
SCAN CONTROL/AUTOVOICE 46–296986G1 A1A5 A1A5 SERVO CONTROL A4A1–J402
A10 10 18
SECURITY LOCK J2 46–296989G1
A2J2 3 A10–J10 J4 INTERCOM 46–297264G1
J8 CT2
A10 23 A1A5 A1A5 X–RAY EXP
17 A3A3–J18
J9 J5 J3 46–296988G1
MUX PORT
A2J1 4 A10–J1 TILT LIMIT SWITCH A1 S1 A1A5 50V MODE
A2A7–J7 24 A2A1A3J4
46–298564G1 2,3,4 J1 46–297545G1
A1A9 PLASMA VIDEO
5 A10–J12
CT1 TILT MOTOR POWER A1 A1A5 POWER STATUS 25 A3A3J17
Plasma A2A7–J11 TILT MOTOR J4 46–297564G1
46–298363G1
A1A10 VIDEO OC1 TABLE EMERGENCY STOP
Monitor 6 A10–J13 A2A7–J9 15 A3A3–J16
Video 46–296987G1
TABLE POWER A3CB18
A1A1 IMAGING COMPUTER BOOT LINK A2A7–J10 12 CB20, J10,
7 A10–J3 46–296985G1
Serial A J11,K2,TS5
A10J8
CONSOLE EMERGENCY STOP 46–297089G1 A3A3 J15
16
CPU POWER
Line Filter 22 OC–CB6
A12 CONSOLE POWER 46–296669G1 A3–K3,TS5
TS1 14
EXPOSURE INTERLOCK 46–297565G1 A3A3

A1A2 11
ABORT J19
SRU POWER 46–278722G1 A3–K8

J1 13
CC1 TS5
TABLE SYNC
CC2 A2A7J3
46–298748G1
A1A7A1A3J3 PM
46–297654G1
GANTRY DISPLAY A1A1J1 Remote
A2A7J4
46–298748G1 Box A3A3J14
CT1 26
OC1 A2A7J8
G A2A7J6
CT2 REM
G G
G G G
G
.
Raceway
HISPEED ADVANTAGE INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
593
Notes:
594
A1–16 Option Keys

TABLE A–16
OPTION KEYS
Key Part#/CAT# Effectivity Function Test Output Restrictions
DentaScan Option 46–218316G1 HLA Enables DentaScan OP_CT_DENT Site Specific
B7992D Z.x Series
1.x Series
2.x Series
FSPGR Option 2102281 1.x Series Enables Smart Options, OP_CT_SMART Site Specific
B7999KJ RP FAST Option is OP_MR_SPGR
Prerequisite
Helical Option 46–328315G1 Z.x Series=30 sec Enables Cine and OP_CT_HELI Site Specific
B7996C 1.x Series=60 sec Helical Options OP_MR_CINE
B7998RH
HSA VX to HSA 46–297878G1 Z.x Series Enables 1000mm OP_CT_LITE Site Specific
B7998JR scout, 48kW, 1sec ISD,
60 sec Helicals with
Helical Key.
Power Option for RP 46–297878G1 1.x Series Enables 1000mm OP_CT_LITE Site Specific
B7998KJ 2.x Series scout, 48kW, 1sec ISD,
100kv.
RP Fast Cycle Option 46–297878G2 1.x Series Enables Faster OP_CT_FAST Site Specific
B7998RF 2.x Series Reconstruction Time.
Prerequisite for Smart
Key
A1–16–1 Install Option Keys
Note: Option keys contain a static–sensitive chip. Treat them as you would any electronic chip or circuit
board, and avoid exposing keys to magnetic fields.
To install an option key:
1. Open the OC pedestal panel, and locate the key slots.

2. To bring applications down display the Utilities menu and, press |Shutdown| .
3. Insert option keys in any position, in any row, except the top one, which is reserved for security
keys. Use caution when inserting keys, to avoid bending the pins in the key.
4. To bring applications back up, type “st” at the Genesis level prompt. Then press Enter.
A1–16–2 Verify Installed Options

Bring up applications and check the screens to see which features are enabled:
» If the system has no Smart Tools key, it won’t have a SmartPrep button on the home screen.
» If the system has no Cine/Helical key, the software permits Cine or Helical scans of up to 40
seconds. With the key, the limit increases to 60 seconds.
» If the system has no Power key, the software permits only 700mm scouts (not 1000mm), 2 Sec.
ISDs (not 1 second), and 32 kW (not 48 kW). Also, the 100 kV button is not visible.
» If the system has no DentaScan key, then the DentaScan button on the Image Analysis screen
appears as an unavailable dashed box.
595
Notes:
596
CHAPTER B1 – APPENDIX: TORQUE
B1–1 Recommended Torque Wrench Practices

1. Never use a torque wrench to loosen a tightened fastener.
Permanent damage of the internal mechanism can occur due to excessive strain.
2. Always approach the specified torque slowly. This is not a speed wrench.
a.) Hand location is important. Position one hand at the axis of rotation and one hand on
the tool handle. This give the user stability and accurate torque repeatability.
b.) Always approach the desired torque evenly and slowly. If the desired torque is 66
N–m on 4 bolts, then tighten each bolt 50 to 70% of desired value. Then set the wrench
to the required torque and tighten slowly until the wrench “Just Clicks”.
3. Always release the tension on the torque wrench to prevent “spring set” on adjustable or
“clicker” type torque wrenches. This will ensure correct torque settings throughout the
range of the tool.
4. Always allow the tool to reach room temperature.
– Spring tension is the basis of “Clicker” type torque wrenches.
– A spring’s tension changes with temperature.
5. Calibrate the tool on a regular schedule.
Follow established local calibration processes.
6. Do not drop or shock the tool.
Internal damage can occur. Calibration should be performed to ensure accuracy.
7. Do not attempt to straighten a bent “Beam” or non adjustable wrench. Replace it.
8. Never use a “Universal Joint” with a torque wrench.
The angle of the universal joint can change the torque value by more than 50%.
9. Always use the torque wrench with a 90 degree angle whenever possible.
a.) Illustration 3 illustrates the effects not being perpendicular.
b.) The 25 degree tilt is the physical limit of a Bondhus Ball End Hex key.
c.) Use the specified torque value for the HV tank mounting fasteners. Do not attempt to
calculate the sin angle correction.
There is less than 2% error for up to 10 degrees of tilt from the desired angle.
d.) Minimize the angle as much as possible.
10. Always clean fastener threads to reduce friction.
Fasteners should thread easily using finger pressure.
a.) Replace fasteners or clean threads using a tap or die, compressed air, brass brush.
b.) Never use a tap to clean thread inserts. It will damage them requiring replacement.
11. Never lubricate a fastener unless specifically instructed.
Loctite is considered in the design. It must be used when specified.
12. Replace Nylon nuts if they are finger loose.
13. ALL FASTENERS HAVE A TORQUE REQUIREMENT. DEFAULT TABLES SHOULD BE
USED ONLY IF THE SERVICE DOCUMENTATION DOES NOT SPECIFY A TORQUE
VALUE.
B1–2 General Torque Cross Reference

Table 1 and Table 2 are provided as default references only. Use the appropriate
replacement procedure to verify the correct torque requirement for each specific fastener.
597
Note: The Illustrated Parts List contains Engineering drawings that should also be used as a
reference. These drawings call out specific instructions as notations, where needed.
Use Table 1 and Table 2 only as a last resort. If the Service

ATTENTION documentation does not contain specific torque values, the default
values can then be assumed to apply.
All Fasteners use either “flat and lock washers” or loctite. These items
must be used as specified.
TABLE 1
DEFAULT TORQUE VALUES AS SPECIFIED BY GEMS CT FOR LIGHTSPEED PLUS AND FORWARD
Fastener Size Tool Size Tool Size Torque Torque Torque

Hex Key Socket in N–m in LBF–ft in LBF–in
M3 2.5 mm 5.5 mm 1 – 8.9
M4 3 mm 7 mm 2.3 1.7 20.4
M6 5 mm 10 mm 7.9 5.8 70
M8 6 mm 13 mm 19 14 168
M10 8 mm 16 mm 38.4 28.3 –
M12 10 mm 18 mm 66.4 48.9 –
M16 14 mm 24 mm 160 117.8 –
TABLE 2
DEFAULT TORQUE VALUES AS SPECIFIED BY GEMS CT FOR LIGHTSPEED QXI AND PREVIOUS
FASTENER SIZE TORQUE TORQUE TOOL SIZE TOOL SIZE

IN STEEL IN ALUMINUM HEX KEY SOCKET
3/8 – 16 25 +/– 2 LBF–FT 20 +/– 2 LBF–FT 5/16 9/16
33.9 +/– 2.7 N–M 27.1 +/– 2.7 N–M
1/4 – 20 8 +/– 1 LBF– FT 5 +/– 0.5 LBF–FT 3/16 7/16
10.85 +/– 1.36 N–M 6.8 +/– 0.7 N–M
8– 32 20 +/– 2 LBF–IN 15 +/– 2 LBF–IN 9/64 5/16
2.26 +/– 0.23 N–M 1.7 +/– 0.23 N–M
Many service operations on this CT scanner require a torque wrench. The use of a torque
wrench may appear complicated because there are several standards and metrics. Using
conversion factors and the conversion chart below can simplify that task.
First, only use a calibrated torque wrench. Use a torque wrench that is on a Calibration
schedule and is approved by GEMS–AM Service. The kit that can be used that is on a
regular Calibration schedule is kit number 46–268445G1. This torque wrench kit has
wrenches that measure inch pounds and foot pounds.
Second, make any necessary conversions for the torque wrench you are using.The units of
measure are typically marked on most torque wrenches. To make conversions to Kgcm and
Newton meters, use the following conversion table, or calculate using conversion factors.
598
TABLE 3
TORQUE CONVERSION CROSS REFERENCE
Kilogram Centimeter Inch lbs Foot lbs Newton Meters

(Kgcm)) (in–lbs (Ft–lbs) (Nm)
1 0.868 – –
2 1.74 – –
3 2.6 – –
4 3.5 – –
5 4.3 – –
6 5.2 – –
7 6.1 – –
8 6.9 – –
9 7.8 – –
10 8.7 – 0.98
20 17.4 1.4 1.96
30 26.0 2.2 2.94
40 34.7 2.9 3.92
50 43.4 3.6 4.90
60 52.0 4.3 5.88
70 60.8 5 6.86
80 69.4 5.8 7.85
90 78.1 6.5 8.83
100 86.6 7.2 9.81
200 173.6 14.5 19.61
300 260.4 21.7 29.42
400 347.2 28.9 39.23
TORQUE CONVERSION FACTORS
» To convert Kgcm to foot–lbs, multiply Kgcm by 0.07233

» To convert Kgcm to inch–lbs, multiply Kgcm by 0.8679
» To convert Kgcm to N–m, multiply Kgcm by 0.0981
» To convert N–m to inch–lbs, multiply N–m by 8.8508
» To convert N–m to foot–lbs, multiply N–m by 0.73756
» To convert foot–lbs to N–m, multiply lbf–ft by 1.3558
» To convert inch–lbs to N–m, multiply lbf–in by 0.11298
B1–3 Torque Formula

T = R x F x sin (angle)
Where: T = Torque in N–m

R = Distance from axis of rotation
F = Force Applied
Sin(90) = 1
599
From this formula we can see that it is necessary to apply the force at a 90 degree angle to
the axis of rotation to achieve accurate fastener torque. This same principle can be applied
when using accessories with the torque wrench. See Illustration 1 and Illustration 2.
Note: The length of a standard square drive extension has no effect on torque since it is along
the axis of rotation. See Illustration 3.
ILLUSTRATION 2
FORMULA TO ADJUST FOR STRAIGHT LINE ACCESSORY
ILLUSTRATION 3
FORMULA FOR 90 DEGREE ACCESSORY USAGE
600
ILLUSTRATION 4
FORMULA WHEN NOT AT 90 DEGREE TO AXIS OF ROTATION
B1–4 Torque Wrench Accuracy

It needs to be clearly understood that "torque" is an indirect measure of tension or "preload
force”. The components of a bolted joint can be defined as:
» Preload force (Fp), bolt stretch.

» Tension force (Ft), resistance of bolted materials.
» Clamping force (Fc), difference of preload and tension forces.
» Shear force (Fs), sideways or sliding force of bolted materials.
Therefore, Fc = Fp – Ft
With shear force, a properly designed and tightened joint, the friction between the bolted
materials absorbs the stress and the bolt itself feels little to no load.
There are other factors that need to be considered as well. Fastener material has a large
effect on torque versus preload force. Lubricants can also significantly change the effects of
torque versus preload force. Anti–seize compounds can reduce the needed torque up to
20%.
In short, torque measurement is an economical method of achieving a properly tensioned

joint. Other methods are available, but training needs and tool expense increase.
CT Engineering has taken into account the variability of using torque wrenches. The
design standard applied is a safety factor of 8 on all fasteners, after the "G Force"
load is calculated for each component. This is to ensure clamping force is maintained
without exceeding the strength of the fastener.
Various studies have been performed on the effectiveness of torque wrench accuracy. The
following conclusions have been made.
601
TABLE 4
TORQUE METHOD ACCURACY
PRELOAD MEASURING METHOD ACTUAL PRELOAD FORCE ERROR

“Feeling” > 35%
Torque Wrench +/– 25%
Angle Torquing +/– 15%
Indicating Washer +/– 10%
Fastener Elongation +/– 5%
Strain Gauge +/– 1%
As demonstrated in Table 4, not using a torque wrench is the worst case event.
The “Feeling” method also changes with the tool. A 1/4” drive “feels” different than a 1/2”
drive.
602
GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371
P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A.
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)
GE Medical Systems – Europe: Telex 698626

283, rue de la Miniére, B.P.34, 78533 Buc Cedex,
France

Technical Publications: 2000, 2001 and 2002 by General Electric Company, Inc

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Technical Publications: 2000, 2001 and 2002 by General Electric Company, Inc

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Technical

HSA – Z Series, VX Preferred

Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999

THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN

ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA

IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE

IMPORTANT X-RAY PROTECTION

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

CHAPTER 2 – CT DIAGNOSTICS AND TOOLS MENU DESCRIPTIONS . . . . 3

CHAPTER 3 – CT DIAGNOSTICS AND TOOLS PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . 9

CHAPTER 4 – TABLE/GANTRY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

4–7 Intercom Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

CHAPTER 5 – HV SUBSYSTEM MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

CHAPTER 6 – PDU MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

CHAPTER 7 – HOST COMPUTER/CONSOLE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

7–5 Serial Port Loopback Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

CHAPTER 8 – DAS MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

CHAPTER 9 – SYSTEM ALIGNMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

CHAPTER 10 – ZE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM COLD AND

10–13–3 Login as genesis on OC: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

10–31–1 Change the Internet Addresses (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

CHAPTER 11 – IMAGE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

CHAPTER 12 – SWITCHES, LEDS, AND JUMPER SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

12–8 46–321064G1 KV Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

12–19–3 Stationary Terminator Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

12–33 LM02 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

CHAPTER 13 – REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

13–3–12 46–269587P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

13–4–24 2119588 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

13–5–50 46–327058G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

13–5–101 46–196464P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

13–5–151 46–296936G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

13–6–33 46–297803P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

13–7–19–1 Remove Board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

13–7–54 46–278330P11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

13–8–35 46–220277P15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

13–8–88 46–296909G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

CHAPTER A1 – APPENDIX: INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

A1–6–1 Position Power Distribution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

CHAPTER B1 – APPENDIX: TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

This Page Left Intentionally Blank

CHAPTER 1 – CUSTOMER OPERATING AND SERVICE MATERIALS

1–2 Customer Catalogs Containing General Class Materials

1–3 Customer Documentation (General Class)

» 46–018300 Operator’s Manual (standard system, VX and kit)

» VX Preferred Operators Manual Addendum (VX Preferred)

1–4 Customer Software (Class B)

» 2145215 HLFC Tape (standard system, VX and kit)

CHAPTER 2 – CT DIAGNOSTICS AND TOOLS MENU DESCRIPTIONS

2–1 Menu Function Descriptions

2–2 Top Level Menu

Image date – time Diag

2–3 Utilities Main Menu

» Installation and Calibration (to set up and align the system)

MESSAGES UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING

Diags and Diags CT

System Shell Service Shutdown

2–4 Diagnostics Menu

» Reset AP – resets the AP (Array Processor).